DEALER TECHNICAL MANUAL

FOR SEA TEL SERIES 12 KU-BAND

BROADBAND-AT-SEA ANTENNA SYSTEMS

Copyright Notice
Copyright © 2013 Sea Tel Inc All Rights Reserved. The information contained in this document is proprietary to Sea Tel,
Inc.. This document may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without prior written consent of Sea Tel, Inc. The
information in this document is subject to change without notice. Sea Tel Inc, is also doing business as Cobham SATCOM –
Maritime.
This document has been registered with the U.S. Copyright Office.

Sea Tel, Inc. Sea Tel Europe

4030 Nelson Avenue Unit 1, Orion Industrial Centre
Concord, CA 94520 Wide Lane, Swaythling
Tel: (925) 798-7979 Southampton, UK S0 18 2HJ
Fax: (925) 798-7986 Tel: 44 (0)23 80 671155
Web: http://www.cobham.com/seatel Fax: 44 (0)23 80 671166
Web: http://www.cobham.com/seatel
Sea Tel Inc is also doing business as Cobham SATCOM - Maritime
November 21, 2013 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
 These commodities, technology or software were exported from the United
States in accordance with the Export Administration Regulations. Diversion
contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.

Sea Tel Marine Stabilized Antenna systems are manufactured in the United
States of America.

Sea Tel is an ISO 9001:2008 registered company.

Certificate Number 13690 issued March 14, 2011.

R&TTE This Sea Tel Marine Stabilized Antenna Pedestal with Media Xchange Point below decks unit
complies with the requirements of directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the
Council of 9 March 1999 on Radio equipment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment.
CE A copy of the R&TTE Declaration of Conformity for this equipment is contained in this
manual.

This Sea Tel Ku Band antenna will meet the spectral density, stabilization accuracy and, when properly
connected to the modem, the automatic cessation of transmission requirements of the 2009 version of FCC 47
C.F.R. § 25.222. Please refer to the declaration included in this manual.

Revision History

REV ECO# Date Description By

A N/A November, 21, 2013 Original Release. MDN

ii Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
 Cobham SATCOM
Marine Systems, Sea Tel Products
4030 Nelson Ave., Concord
California, 94520 USA

Tel: +1 (925) 798-7979

Fax:+1 (925) 288-1420

R&TTE Declaration of Conformity

Sea Tel Inc. declares under our sole responsibility that the products identified below are in
compliance with the requirements of:
DIRECTIVE 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on Radio
equipment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity.

Product Names: 3612 Ku Band 8/16 Watt Tx/Rx Maritime Satellite Earth Station
4009 MK3 Ku Band 16 Watt Tx/Rx Maritime Satellite Earth Station
5012 Ku Band 8/16 Watt Tx/Rx Maritime Satellite Earth Station
6012 Ku Band 8/16 Watt Tx/Rx Maritime Satellite Earth Station
These products have been assessed to Conformity Procedures, Annex IV, of the above Directive by
application of the following standards:
EMC:
EMC standard for Radio Equipment (Maritime) ETSI EN 301 843-1 V1.4.1 (2004-06)
EMC standard for Radio Equipment (Common) ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.4.1 (2002-08)
EMC standard for Radio Equipment (General) ETSI EN 300 339 (1998-03)
Marine Navigational and Radio Communication
Equipment and Systems – General Requirements: IEC EN 60945:2002
Satellite Earth Stations and System (SES):
Harmonized EN for Very Small Aperture
Terminals (VSAT): ETSI EN 301 428-1 V1.3.1 (2006-02)
Harmonized EN for satellite Earth Stations
on board Vessels (ESVs) ETSI EN 302 340 V1.1.1 (2006-04)
Safety:
Safety of Information Technology Equipment: IEC EN 60950-1:2001 (1st Edition)

Certificates of Assessment were completed and are on file at NEMKO USA Inc, San Diego, CA and
BACL Labs, Santa Clara, CA.

Peter Blaney, Chief Engineer Date: 03-04-2013

Sea Tel, Inc., doing business as Cobham SATCOM Doc Number 138634 Revision B
 Sea Tel Inc.
4030 Nelson Ave., Concord
California, 94520, USA
T: +1 (925) 798-7979
F: +1 (925) 798-7986

FCC Declaration of Conformity

1. Sea Tel, Inc. designs, develops, manufactures and services marine stabilized antenna systems for
satellite communication at sea. These products are in turn used by our customers as part of their Ku-
band Earth Station on Vessels (ESV) networks.
2. FCC regulation 47 C.F.R. § 25.222 defines the provisions for blanket licensing of ESV antennas
operating in the Ku Band. This declaration covers the requirements for meeting § 25.222 (a)(1) by
the demonstrations outlined in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (b)(1)(iii). The requirements for meeting §
25.222 (a)(3)-(a)(7) are left to the applicant. The paragraph numbers in this declaration refer to the
2009 version of FCC 47 C.F.R. § 25.222.
3. Sea Tel hereby declares that the antennas listed below will meet the off-axis EIRP spectral density
requirements of § 25.222 (a)(1)(i) with an N value of 1, when the following Input Power spectral
density limitations are met:
*0.6 Meter Ku Band, Models 2406 and USAT-24 are limited to -21.6 dBW/4kHz
*0.75 Meter Ku Band, Models 3011 and USAT-30 are limited to -21.6 dBW/4kHz
0.9 Meter Ku Band, Model 3612 is limited to -20.3 dBW/4kHz
1.0 Meter Ku Band, Models 4003/4006/4009/4010 are limited to -16.3 dBW/4kHz
1.0 Meter Ku Band Model 4012 is limited to -16.6 dBW/4kHz
1.2 Meter Ku Band, Models 4996/5009/5010/5012 are limited to -14.0 dBW/4kHz
1.5 Meter Ku Band, Models 6006/6009/6012 are limited to -14.0 dBW/4kHz
2.4 Meter Ku Band, Models 9797 and 9711QOR are limited to -14.0 dBW/4kHz
4. Sea Tel hereby declares that the antennas referenced in paragraph 3 above, will maintain a
stabilization pointing accuracy of better than 0.2 degrees under specified ship motion conditions,
thus meeting the requirements of § 25.222 (a)(1)(ii)(A). Those antennas marked with * will
maintain a stabilization pointing accuracy of better than 0.3 degrees. The Input Power spectral
density limits for these antenna have been adjusted to meet the requirements of§ 25.222 (a)(1)(ii)(B).
5. Sea Tel hereby declares that the antennas referenced in paragraph 3 above, will automatically cease
transmission within 100 milliseconds if the pointing error should exceed 0.5 degrees and will not
resume transmission until the error drops below 0.2 degrees, thus meeting the requirements of §
25.222 (a)(1)(iii).
6. Sea Tel maintains all relevant test data, which is available upon request, to verify these declarations.

Peter Blaney, Chief Engineer

Sea Tel, Inc
Concord, CA

Document Number 130445 Revision J

24-Jan-2013
Table of Contents Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

1. SERIES 12 KU-BAND SYSTEM CONFIGURATION(S)........................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1. SYSTEM CABLES ....................................................................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2. OTHER INPUTS TO THE SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.3. SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A SERIES 12 KU-BAND SYSTEM .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.4. DUAL ANTENNA CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.5. DUAL ANTENNA ARBITRATOR ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.6. OPEN ANTENNA-MODEM INTERFACE PROTOCOL (OPENAMIP™) SPECIFICATION:........................................................................... 1-3
1.6.1. Overview: .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.6.2. Interface requirements: .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-4
TM
1.6.3. Utilized OpenAMIP Commands: ....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
2. SITE SURVEY .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1. SITE SELECTION ABOARD THE SHIP ................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.2. ANTENNA SHADOWING (BLOCKAGE) AND RF INTERFERENCE .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3. MOUNTING FOUNDATION .................................................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3.1. Mounting on Deck or Deckhouse.......................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2. ADE Mounting Considerations ............................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.3. Sizing of the support pedestal ................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.4. MOUNTING HEIGHT.............................................................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.5. MAST CONFIGURATIONS ...................................................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.5.1. Vertical Masts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.2. Raked Masts ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.3. Girder Masts ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.4. Truss Mast ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.6. SAFE ACCESS TO THE ADE ................................................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.7. BELOW DECKS EQUIPMENT LOCATION ...........................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.8. CABLES ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.8.1. ADE/BDE Coaxial Cables ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.8.2. Antenna Power Cable ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.8.3. Air Conditioner Power Cable .................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.8.4. MXP Power Cable/Outlet ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.8.5. Gyro Compass Cable ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.9. GROUNDING ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-7
3. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1. UNPACKING AND INSPECTION ..........................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.2. ASSEMBLY NOTES AND WARNINGS .................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.3. INSTALLING THE ADE..........................................................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.3.1. Prepare the 40”, 50”, 60”, 66” or 76” Radome Assembly ......................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.2. Installing the 50, 60 or 66” Radome Assembly ............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3.3. Install 76” Radome to mounting deck................................................................................................................................ 3-6
3.3.1. Preparing and Installing the Single Piece 81” Radome Assembly ..................................................................... 3-7
3.4. GROUNDING THE PEDESTAL ...............................................................................................................................................................................3-8
3.5. REMOVING THE SHIPPING/STOW RESTRAINTS PRIOR TO POWER-UP .................................................................................................. 3-8
3.5.1. Removing the AZ Shipping/Stow Restraint ..................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.5.2. Removing the EL Shipping/Stow Restraint ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.5.3. Removing the CL Shipping/Stow Restraint ................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.6. INSTALLING THE BELOW DECKS EQUIPMENT. ............................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.6.1. General Cautions & Warnings............................................................................................................................................... 3-12

v Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Table of Contents

3.6.2. Cable Terminations in the 81 inch Radome ................................................................................................................. 3-12

3.6.3. Preparing BDE Location ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.6.4. System Configuration................................................................................................................................................................ 3-13
3.6.5. Installing the Below Deck Equipment ............................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.7. CONNECTING THE BELOW DECKS EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.7.1. Connecting the BDE AC Power Cables ........................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.7.2. Connecting the ADE IF Coaxes........................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.7.3. Other BDE connections ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-16
3.8. FINAL CHECKS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................3-16
3.8.1. Visual/Electrical inspection .................................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.8.2. Electrical - Double check wiring connections ............................................................................................................. 3-16
3.9. SETUP - MEDIA XCHANGE POINT™ (MXP) .............................................................................................................................................. 3-16
4. CONFIGURING A COMPUTER FOR THE MXP .......................................................................................................................... 4-1
5. SETUP – USING THE COMMISSION WIZARD ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1. STARTING THE COMMISSION WIZARD ...........................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2. COMMISSIONING WIZARD ................................................................................................................................................................................5-2
6. SETUP – SHIP’S GYRO COMPASS ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1. SETTING THE GYRO TYPE....................................................................................................................................................................................6-1
7. SETUP – TRACKING RECEIVER – VSAT ....................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1. DETERMINING THE IF TRACKING FREQUENCY (MHZ) ............................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2. SAT SKEW............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-1
8. SETUP – HOME FLAG OFFSET (IMA SOFTWARE 1.04 OR LESSER) ........................................................................... 8-1
8.1. YOU FOUND A LARGE AZ TRIM VALUE: ........................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1. You Observe “Home” Pointing is LEFT of the Bow-line (minus HFO): .............................................................. 8-2
8.1.2. You Observe “Home” Pointing is RIGHT of the Bow-line (positive HFO) : ..................................................... 8-2
8.1.3. Entering a large value as Home Flag Offset .................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.1. Entering a small value as AZ TRIM ...................................................................................................................................... 8-4
9. SETUP – AZIMUTH TRIM (IMA VER 1.05 OR GREATER) ................................................................................................. 9-1
10. SETUP – BLOCKAGE & RF RADIATION HAZARD ZONES .............................................................................................. 10-1
10.1. RADIATION HAZARD AND BLOCKAGE MAPPING ....................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2. PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS:.................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
11. CONFIGURING THE SATELLITE MODEM INTERFACE. .................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1. SATELLITE MODEM INTERFACE...................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1. Reflector setting ........................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2. Modem Type setting .................................................................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.1.3. Modem I/O setting...................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.4. Modem I/O – Custom Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 11-3
11.2. QUICK REFERENCE: COMMON MODEM LOCK & MUTE SETTINGS ....................................................................................................... 11-5
12. SETUP – TARGETING ............................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1. AUTO TRIM .....................................................................................................................................................................................................12-1
12.2. MANUALLY OPTIMIZING TARGETING .......................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
13. SETUP – SATELLITE CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1. SEARCHING PATTERNS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.1. Default “Spiral” (Box) Search Pattern ............................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2. Inclined Orbit Search Pattern .............................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.3. Sky Search Pattern ...................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2. TX POL SELECT ...................................................................................................................................................................................................13-2
vi Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Table of Contents Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

13.3. BAND SELECT ......................................................................................................................................................................................................13-2

13.4. X-POL / CO-POL SELECT ................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.5. SELECTING/CONFIGURING YOUR SATELLITE CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................. 13-2
14. QUICK START OPERATION ............................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1. IF SATELLITE SIGNAL IS FOUND AND NETWORK LOCK IS ACHIEVED: ................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2. IF NO SIGNAL IS FOUND: .................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.3. IF SATELLITE SIGNAL IS FOUND BUT NETWORK LOCK IS NOT ACHIEVED: ........................................................................................... 14-3
14.4. TO TARGET A DIFFERENT SATELLITE ............................................................................................................................................................. 14-5
15. OPTIMIZING CROSS-POL ISOLATION ...................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1. OPTIMIZING CROSS-POL ISOLATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
16. CODAN MINI-BUC ETHERNET M&C INSTALL & OPERATION .................................................................................. 16-1
16.1. CABLE INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.2. SETTING UP THE IP ADDRESS AND SUBNET MASK IN THE COMPUTER. ................................................................................................. 16-1
16.3. COMMUNICATING WITH THE CODAN MINI-BUC USING CODAN GUI ............................................................................................. 16-2
16.4. ISSUING SET, OUTPUT AND VIEW COMMANDS VIA TELNET ................................................................................................................. 16-3
17. CODAN LBUC SERIAL M&C INSTALL & OPERATION....................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1. CABLE INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.2. COMMUNICATING WITH THE CODAN LBUC ............................................................................................................................................. 17-1
18. COMTECH BUC SERIAL M&C INSTALL & OPERATION .................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1. CABLE INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.2. COMMUNICATING WITH THE COMTECH BUC .......................................................................................................................................... 18-1
19. DEALER MENUS ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1. FUNCTIONAL DIFFERENCES AMONG THE THREE LOG IN CATEGORIES................................................................................................... 19-1
19.2. SYSTEM STATUS ................................................................................................................................................................................................19-2
19.3. SATELLITE SIGNAL AUTOMATIC SEARCH .................................................................................................................................................... 19-4
19.4. COMMUNICATION INTERFACES..................................................................................................................................................................... 19-5
19.5. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................................................................ 19-10
19.6. REFLECTOR CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 19-14
19.7. SATELLITE CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 19-18
19.8. HARDWARE PROFILE ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-21
19.9. GRAPHS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-25
19.10. CLI COMMANDS............................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-29
19.11. POSITION ANTENNA ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-30
19.12. TEST ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-37
19.13. ACTIVITY .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-41
19.14. DATA EXPORT .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-45
19.15. ADMIN............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-50
19.15.1. Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-51
19.15.2. Upgrading your IMA Firmware ......................................................................................................................................... 19-53
19.15.3. SSL...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-56
19.16. CHANGE PASSWORD ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-57
19.17. FAQ ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-58
19.18. HELP ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-59
20. FUNCTIONAL TESTING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1
20.1. ANTENNA START UP SYSTEMS CHECK: ....................................................................................................................................................... 20-1
20.2. GPS AUTO-UPDATE CHECK............................................................................................................................................................................. 20-2
20.3. ANTENNA MOTOR DRIVE ................................................................................................................................................................................ 20-3
vii Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Table of Contents

20.4. HEADING FOLLOWING ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-3

20.5. BLOCKAGE SIMULATION TEST........................................................................................................................................................................ 20-4
20.6. TEST BROADBAND OPERATION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 20-5
20.7. TEST VOICE OVER IP (VOIP) OPERATION ................................................................................................................................................. 20-5
21. STOWING THE ANTENNA .................................................................................................................................................................. 21-1
21.1. INSTALLING THE STOW RESTRAINTS ............................................................................................................................................................ 21-1
21.1.1. Installing the AZ Shipping/Stow Restraint ................................................................................................................... 21-1
21.1.2. Installing the EL Shipping/Stow Restraint ..................................................................................................................... 21-2
21.1.3. Installing the CL Shipping/Stow Restraint .................................................................................................................... 21-4
21.2. REMOVING THE SHIPPING/STOW RESTRAINTS PRIOR TO POWER-UP ............................................................................................... 21-4
21.2.1. Removing the AZ Shipping/Stow Restraint .................................................................................................................. 21-4
21.2.2. Removing the EL Shipping/Stow Restraint .................................................................................................................... 21-5
21.2.3. Removing the CL Shipping/Stow Restraint ................................................................................................................... 21-7
22. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE - OPERATOR CHECKS AND INSPECTIONS ....................................................... 22-1
22.1. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................................................... 22-1
22.1.1. Radome Inspections .................................................................................................................................................................. 22-1
22.1.2. Cable Inspections ........................................................................................................................................................................ 22-1
22.1.3. Wire-Rope Isolator Inspections .......................................................................................................................................... 22-2
22.1.4. Azimuth Drive Component Inspections......................................................................................................................... 22-2
22.1.5. Home Switch Sensor Inspection ........................................................................................................................................ 22-3
22.1.6. Vertical Isolation Inspections .............................................................................................................................................. 22-3
22.1.7. Cross-Level Drive Component Inspections .................................................................................................................. 22-4
22.1.8. Elevation Drive Component Inspections....................................................................................................................... 22-5
22.1.9. Motor Junction Enclosure Inspections ........................................................................................................................... 22-5
22.1.10. ICU Inspections............................................................................................................................................................................ 22-5
22.1.11. BUC Inspections ........................................................................................................................................................................... 22-6
22.1.12. Counter-Weight Inspections ................................................................................................................................................ 22-6
22.1.13. Dish Perimeter Inspections ................................................................................................................................................... 22-6
23. THEORY OF OPERATION ..................................................................................................................................................................... 23-1
23.1. THE THREE AXES OF THE ANTENNA .............................................................................................................................................................. 23-1
23.2. LOOP COMPONENTS ..........................................................................................................................................................................................23-1
23.2.1. ICU Stabilization Sensors........................................................................................................................................................ 23-2
23.2.2. Servo Amp/Motor Controller ................................................................................................................................................ 23-3
23.2.3. Brush-Less DC (BLDC) Motors .............................................................................................................................................. 23-4
23.2.4. Home Switch ................................................................................................................................................................................... 23-4
23.3. ANTENNA INITIALIZATION ............................................................................................................................................................................. 23-5
23.4. INERTIA ................................................................................................................................................................................................................23-5
23.5. AZIMUTH SERVO CONTROL LOOP ................................................................................................................................................................. 23-7
23.6. LEVEL/ELEVATION SERVO CONTROL LOOP ............................................................................................................................................... 23-10
23.7. CROSS-LEVEL LOOP ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 23-13
23.8. RF FLOW: CROSS-POL ONLY WITH QUAD BAND LNB ....................................................................................................................... 23-14
23.9. RF FLOW: CROSS-POL/CO-POL SWITCHING AND QUAD BAND LNBS............................................................................................. 23-16
24. DIAGNOSTICS, ERROR CODE & FAULT ISOLATION ........................................................................................................ 24-1
24.1. POWER ON SELF TEST (POST) ...................................................................................................................................................................... 24-1
24.1.1. Real Time Clock ............................................................................................................................................................................. 24-1
24.1.2. NAND Test ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-1
24.1.3. EEPROM............................................................................................................................................................................................. 24-1

viii Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Table of Contents Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24.1.4. I2C 0 .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-1

24.1.5. Processor Serial Port.................................................................................................................................................................. 24-1
24.1.6. External Serial Port ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24-1
24.1.7. ADC Chip – Power Supplies – Temp Sensor ................................................................................................................ 24-1
24.1.8. Ethernet PHY Chip ....................................................................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.1.9. CAN Controller .............................................................................................................................................................................. 24-2
24.1.10. RF Serial Interface....................................................................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.1.11. LNB Voltage ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.2. IN SERVICE TEST (IST) .................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.2.1. Motor Driver Board ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.2.2. Polarization Angle Potentiometer Range ...................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.2.3. Receiver ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 24-2
24.3. OUT OF SERVICE TEST (OOST) .................................................................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.3.1. Motor Driver Board ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24-3
24.3.2. Motors (AZ, EL, and CL): do they turn.............................................................................................................................. 24-3
24.3.3. Motors (PolAng)............................................................................................................................................................................ 24-3
24.3.4. Motion Platform ........................................................................................................................................................................... 24-3
24.3.5. Motor Brakes .................................................................................................................................................................................. 24-3
24.4. IMA SYSTEM LED FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24-3
24.5. ERROR CODE COLOR-STATE OVERVIEW: ..................................................................................................................................................... 24-4
24.5.1. Error LED (by states) .................................................................................................................................................................. 24-4
24.5.2. Initializing LED .............................................................................................................................................................................. 24-5
24.5.3. Power LED ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 24-6
24.5.4. Target LED ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-6
24.5.5. Search LED...................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-6
24.5.6. Tracking LED ................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-7
24.6. LOOKING UP THE ACTUAL ERRORS ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-7
24.7. ERROR TABLE.......................................................................................................................................................................................................24-7
24.8. ICU LED FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-15
24.9. CHECK/TEST - AZ MOTOR / ENCODER ................................................................................................................................................... 24-15
24.9.1. Theory of Operation: ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-15
24.9.2. Verify Initialization:.................................................................................................................................................................. 24-16
24.9.3. MDE Status LEDs:...................................................................................................................................................................... 24-16
24.9.4. Test the Motor: ........................................................................................................................................................................... 24-16
24.9.5. Verify Encoder Feedback: .................................................................................................................................................... 24-16
24.10. CHECK/TEST - EL / CL MOTOR ................................................................................................................................................................. 24-17
24.10.1. Theory of Operation: ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-17
24.10.2. Verify Initialization:.................................................................................................................................................................. 24-17
24.10.3. MDE Status LEDs:...................................................................................................................................................................... 24-17
24.10.4. Test the Motor: ........................................................................................................................................................................... 24-17
24.10.5. Verify Motor Brake Release................................................................................................................................................. 24-18
24.11. CHECK/TEST - PEDESTAL ERROR TYPES. ................................................................................................................................................. 24-18
24.11.1. Servo Limit (CL, LV and AZ) ................................................................................................................................................. 24-18
24.11.2. Stability Limit ............................................................................................................................................................................... 24-18
24.11.3. AZ Reference Error .................................................................................................................................................................. 24-19
24.12. CHECK/TEST - HOME FLAG SENSOR – .................................................................................................................................................... 24-19
24.12.1. Theory of Operation: ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-19
24.12.2. Troubleshooting: ....................................................................................................................................................................... 24-19
ix Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Table of Contents

24.13. CHECK/TEST - MDE - ................................................................................................................................................................................. 24-19

24.13.1. Theory of Operation: ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-19
24.13.2. Verify Initialization:.................................................................................................................................................................. 24-19
24.13.3. MDE Status LEDs:...................................................................................................................................................................... 24-20
24.14. CHECK/TEST - POL MOTOR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 24-20
24.14.1. Theory of Operation: ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-20
24.14.2. Verify the Range of Motion of the Feed Assembly (4012) ............................................................................... 24-21
24.14.3. Measure Polarity Motor Voltage: .................................................................................................................................... 24-23
24.15. CHECK/TEST - POL POT............................................................................................................................................................................... 24-23
24.15.1. Theory of Operation: ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-23
24.15.2. Check the Pol Pot Calibration:........................................................................................................................................... 24-24
24.15.3. Verify the Resistance of the Pol Pot: ............................................................................................................................. 24-25
24.15.4. Calibrate the Pol Pot ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-25
24.16. CHECK/TEST - POL ENCODER..................................................................................................................................................................... 24-26
24.16.1. Theory of Operation: ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-26
24.16.2. Verify Initialization:.................................................................................................................................................................. 24-26
24.16.3. Verify the Range of Motion of the Feed Assembly (4012) ............................................................................... 24-27
25. TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................................................................................................................. 25-1
25.1. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES ................................................................................................................................................................. 25-2
25.1.1. Check for blockage: .................................................................................................................................................................... 25-2
25.1.2. AGC Signal Level Tests .............................................................................................................................................................. 25-2
25.1.3. Tracking Test .................................................................................................................................................................................. 25-2
25.1.4. Heading Testing ............................................................................................................................................................................ 25-3
25.1.5. Underway Testing ........................................................................................................................................................................ 25-3
25.2. ANTENNA INITIALIZATION ............................................................................................................................................................................. 25-3
25.3. TROUBLESHOOTING SHIPS GYRO COMPASS PROBLEMS........................................................................................................................... 25-4
25.3.1. STEP-BY-STEP................................................................................................................................................................................. 25-4
25.3.2. 1:1 SYNCHRO .................................................................................................................................................................................. 25-4
25.3.3. 360:1 Synchro ................................................................................................................................................................................ 25-5
25.4. TROUBLESHOOTING RXIF & TXIF PATH .................................................................................................................................................... 25-5
25.5. TROUBLESHOOTING USING MXP STATUS CHARTS .................................................................................................................................. 25-6
25.5.1. Satellite Reference Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 25-6
25.5.2. Antenna Loop Error Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................... 25-7
25.5.3. Open Loop Rate Sensor Monitoring ................................................................................................................................. 25-8
25.5.4. To Disable/Enable DishScan®.............................................................................................................................................. 25-9
26. MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 26-1
26.1. WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................................................................. 26-1
26.2. TORQUE AND LOCTITE SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................................................... 26-2
26.3. GENERAL MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................................................................................. 26-2
26.3.1. Balancing the Antenna ............................................................................................................................................................. 26-2
26.3.2. Fine Balance and Monitoring Motor Drive Torque .................................................................................................. 26-3
26.4. REPLACING COMPONENTS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 26-4
26.4.1. Replace Wire Rope Isolators ................................................................................................................................................. 26-4
26.4.2. Replacing the Rubber Bumpers ........................................................................................................................................... 26-7
26.4.3. Replacing the Pneumatic Damper ..................................................................................................................................... 26-7
26.4.4. Replacing the Flow Control Valves ................................................................................................................................. 26-10
26.4.5. Replacing the Chain Tensioner Spring ......................................................................................................................... 26-12

x Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Table of Contents Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

26.4.6. Replacing the Azimuth Motor ........................................................................................................................................... 26-12

26.4.7. Replacing the EL Motor: ........................................................................................................................................................ 26-16
26.4.8. Replacing Elevation Drive Belt .......................................................................................................................................... 26-17
26.4.9. Replacing the CL Motor: ....................................................................................................................................................... 26-19
26.4.10. Replacing Cross-Level Drive Belt ..................................................................................................................................... 26-21
26.4.11. Replacing the Motor Driver Enclosure (MDE) ......................................................................................................... 26-22
26.4.12. Replacing the Power Ring Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 26-23
26.4.13. Replacing the 2 channel Rotary Joint ........................................................................................................................... 26-28
26.4.14. Replacing the Integrated Control Unit (ICU):.......................................................................................................... 26-33
26.4.15. Replacing the 48VDC BUC Power Supply ................................................................................................................... 26-34
26.4.16. Replacing the Codan 8 Watt Block Up Converter (BUC) ................................................................................... 26-37
26.4.17. Replacing the Cross-Pol LNB On The Feed ................................................................................................................ 26-40
26.4.18. Replacing the Co-Pol LNB on the Diplexer Waveguide Assembly ............................................................... 26-41
26.4.19. Replacing the GPS Antenna ................................................................................................................................................ 26-42
27. SERIES 12 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................. 27-1
27.1. 3612 ABOVE DECKS EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................................................ 27-1
27.1. 5012 ABOVE DECKS EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................................................ 27-1
27.1. 6012 ABOVE DECKS EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................................................ 27-2
27.2. SERIES 12 GENERAL ABOVE DECKS EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 27-2
27.3. BELOW DECKS EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................................................................................................... 27-10
27.4. REGULATORY COMPLIANCE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 27-14
27.5. CABLES .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 27-14
27.5.1. Antenna L-Band IF Coax Cables (Customer Furnished) .................................................................................... 27-14

xi Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Table of Contents

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

xii Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Ku-Band System Configuration(s) Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

1. Series 12 Ku-Band System Configuration(s)

The Series 12 Ku-Band Stabilized Antenna system is to be used for Transmit/Receive (TX/RX) satellite communications. It is
comprised of two major groups of equipment: the Above Decks Equipment (ADE) and the Below Decks Equipment (BDE). There
will also be interconnecting cables between the ADE & BDE and cables to provide other inputs to the system.
It is initially equipped for Ku-Band operation; however, an optional Ka-Band upgrade kit is available for when the Ka-Band
services are available.

1.1. System Cables

AC power and coaxial cables are discussed in a separate chapter.

1.2. Other Inputs to the System

Multi-conductor cables from Ship’s Gyro Compass, GPS, phone, fax and computer equipment may be connected in the
system.

1.3. Simplified Block Diagram of a Series 12 Ku-Band System

Your Series 12 Ku-Band TXRX system consists of two major groups of equipment: an above-decks group and a below-
decks group. Each group is comprised of, but is not limited to, the items listed below. All equipment comprising the
Above Decks is incorporated inside the radome assembly and is integrated into a single operational entity. For inputs,
this system requires only an unobstructed line-of-sight view to the satellite, Gyro Compass input and AC electrical
power.
A. Above-Decks Equipment (all shown as the ADE) Group
• Stabilized antenna pedestal
• Antenna Reflector
• Feed Assembly with Cross-Pol and Co-Pol LNBs
• 8W Ku-Band Solid State Block Up-Converter (BUC)
• Radome Assembly
B. Below-Decks Equipment Group
• Media Xchange Point™ (MXP)
• Customer Furnished Equipment - Satellite Modem and other below decks equipment required for the desired
communications purposes (including LAN and VOIP equipment).
• Appropriate Coax, Ethernet, and telephone cables

1-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Series 12 Ku-Band System Configuration(s)

1.4. Dual Antenna Configuration

Due to very large blockage conditions, you may need to install a dual antenna configuration to provide uninterrupted
services. Two full antenna systems are installed and the MXP control outputs are connected to an arbitrator switch
panel which then is connected to the below decks equipment. The connection scheme is required for MXP “A” to
control ONLY Antenna “A” AND MXP “B” to control ONLY Antenna “B.”.
You will program the blockage zone(s) for each of the two antennas (refer to Setup – Blockage Zones). The blockage
output from each MXP is fed to the arbitrator. The blockage output is a transistor “short” to ground when the antenna
is within a programmed blockage zone and is an “open” when not blocked.
When one antenna is blocked, its blockage output will command the arbitrator panel to switch services to the modem
from that antenna to the other antenna. The arbitrator panel provides a logic latch to prevent excess switching when
the ship heading is yawing, therefore, causing if the antenna to be repeat blocked – unblocked – blocked.

1-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Ku-Band System Configuration(s) Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

1.5. Dual Antenna Arbitrator

The Dual Antenna Arbitrator panel can pass LNB voltages (and handle 250-400 ma of current) and the RXIF signals on
the RX connections. TXIF, Reference and BUC supply voltage can pass through this arbitrator panel to the antenna, but
it is not recommended that BUC power be supplied through the dual channel rotary joint of the antenna.
The blockage (SW2) output, GPS output and modem lock input from the two MXPs (antenna “A” and antenna “B”) are
wired through the arbitrator panel to the satellite modem. When antenna “A” is blocked, the arbitrator PCB will toggle
the coax switches so that antenna “B” provides signal to the BDE distribution (multi-switch or modem). When antenna
“A” is no longer blocked the arbitrator will do nothing (because it is a latch circuit). When antenna “B” is blocked the
panel will switch so that antenna “A” is again providing signal the BDE distribution.
To provide a seamless switching transition, refer to the arbitrator installation instructions to balance the TX and RX
signal levels between the two antennas.

1.6. Open Antenna-Modem Interface Protocol (OpenAMIP™) Specification:

1.6.1. Overview:
TM
OpenAMIP , an ASCII message based protocol invented and Trademarked by iDirect, is a specification for
the interchange of information between an antenna controller and a satellite modem. This protocol allows
the satellite modem to command the MXP (via TCP port 2002) to seek a particular satellite and allows
exchange of information necessary to permit the modem to initiate and maintain communication via the
TM
antenna and the satellite. In general, OpenAMIP is ONLY intended to permit a modem and the MXP to
perform synchronized automatic beam switching when using an iDirect Network. It is NOT a status logging
TM
system or a diagnostic system. In addition, OpenAMIP is intended for a typical installation whereby a
specific satellite modem and antenna system is properly configured to work together. The protocol does not
make specific provisions for auto-discovery or parameter negotiation. It is still the responsibility of the
installer to ensure that the parameters of both the satellite modem (proper option files) and the MXP/ICU
(setup parameters) are compatible for the intended satellite(s).
1-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Series 12 Ku-Band System Configuration(s)

1.6.2. Interface requirements:

1.6.2.1. Hardware
Sea Tel Media Xchange Point (MXP)
TM
Any Satellite modem manufacturer that is compatible with OpenAMIP
CAT5 Patch cable
1.6.2.2. Software
Sea Tel MXP software version (latest).

1.6.3. Utilized OpenAMIPTM Commands:

1.6.3.1. Antenna Commands:

Command Description Example

S f1 f2 f3 Satellite Longitude, 3 parameters: “S -20.1 1.0 3.5”
Degrees E/W (-value equals West), Latitude Variance (Inclined
Orbit), Sat Skew Offset
P c1 c2 Polarization, 2 parameters: “P L R”
H,V,L,, or R
H f1 f2 Tracking Frequency: 2 Parameters: “H 1100.500 0.256”
Center Frequency and Bandwidth in MHz
B f1 f2 Down Conversion Offset: 2 parameters: “B 10750”
LNB (Receive) Local Oscillator and BUC (TX) L.O.
F Find,
Target satellite using existing S, P,R, and H Parameters
Ai Set keep alive in seconds (0 = off) “A 5”
L b1 b2 Modem Lock and free to transmit. 2 parameters: “L 1 1”
b1 indicates Rx lock and b2 (not utilized) enables/disables Tx
Mute to BUC
Wi GPS Update: “W 300”
Sets GPS Update period in seconds (0 = Off)
I s1 s2 Set modem vendor (s1) and device (s2) 2 parameters: “I iDirect 5100”

1.6.3.2. Modem Commands:

Command Description Example

ai Set keep alive in seconds (0 = off) “a 5”
i s1 s2 Set Antenna Vendor (s1) and device (s2) 2 parameters: “i Sea Tel DAC-2202”
s b1 b2 Antenna Status: 2 parameters: “s 1 1”
b1 is functional status and b2 is Tx allowed
w b1 f1 f2 t1 Set GPS Position: 4 parameters: “w 1 38.222 122.123
b1 is validity flag, f1 is latitude, f2 is longitude, and t1 is 0”
timestamp

1-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Site Survey Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

2. Site Survey
There are three objective of the site survey. The first is to find the best place to mount the antenna and the BDE. The second is
to identify the length and routing of the cables and any other items or materials that are required to install the system. The third
is to identify any other issues that must be resolved before or during the installation.

2.1. Site Selection Aboard The Ship

The radome assembly should be installed at a location aboard ship where:
• The antenna has a clear line-of-sight to view as much of the sky (horizon to zenith at all bearings) as is
practical.
• X-Band (3cm) Navigational Radars:
• The ADE should be mounted more than 0.6 meters/2 feet from 2kW (24 km) radars
• The ADE should be mounted more than 2 meters/8 feet from 10kW (72 km) radars
• The ADE should be mounted more than 4 meters/12 feet from 160kW (250km) radars
• S-Band (10cm) Navigational Radars:
• If the ADE is/has C-Band it should be mounted more than 4 meters/12 feet from the S-band Radar.
• The ADE should not be mounted on the same plane as the ship's radar, so that it is not directly in the radar
beam path.
• The ADE should be mounted more than 2.5 meters/8 feet from any high power MF/HF antennas (<400W).
• The ADE should be mounted more than 4 meters/12 feet from any high power MF/HF antennas (1000W).
• The ADE should also be mounted more than 4 meters/12 feet from any short range (VHF/UHF) antennae.
• The ADE should be mounted more than 2.5 meters/8 feet away from any L-band satellite antenna.
• The ADE should be mounted more than 3 meters/10 feet away from any magnetic compass installations.
• The ADE should be mounted more than 2.5 meters/8 feet away from any GPS receiver antennae.
• Another consideration for any satellite antenna mounting is multi-path signals (reflection of the satellite
signal off of nearby surfaces arriving out of phase with the direct signal from the satellite) to the antenna.
This is particularly a problem for the onboard GPS, and/or the GPS based satellite compass.
• The ADE and the BDE should be positioned as close to one another as possible. This is necessary to reduce
the losses associated with long cable runs.
• This mounting platform must also be robust enough to withstand the forces exerted by full rated wind load
on the radome.
• The mounting location is robust enough that it will not flex or sway in ships motion and be sufficiently well
re-enforced to prevent flex and vibration forces from being exerted on the antenna and radome.
• If the radome is to be mounted on a raised pedestal, it MUST have adequate size, wall thickness and gussets
to prevent flexing or swaying in ships motion. In simple terms it must be robust.
If these conditions cannot be entirely satisfied, the site selection will inevitably be a “best” compromise between the
various considerations.

2.2. Antenna Shadowing (Blockage) and RF Interference

At the transmission frequencies of C and Ku band satellite antenna systems, any substantial structures in the way of
the beam path will cause significant degradation of the signal. Care should be taken to locate the ADE so that it has
direct line-of-sight with the satellite without any structures in the beam path through the full 360 degree ships turn.
Wire rope stays, lifelines, small diameter handrails and other accessories may pass through the beam path in limited
numbers; however, even these relatively insignificant shadows can produce measurable signal loss at these
frequencies.

2-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Site Survey

2.3. Mounting Foundation

2.3.1. Mounting on Deck or Deckhouse

While mounting the ADE on a mast is a common solution to elevate the ADE far enough above the various
obstructions which create signal blockages, sometimes the best mounting position is on a deck or deckhouse
top. These installations are inherently stiffer than a mast installation, if for no other reason than the design of
the deck/deckhouse structure is prescribed by the ship’s classification society. In the deck/deckhouse design
rules, the minimum plating and stiffener guidelines are chosen to preclude high local vibration amplitudes.
Most installations onto a deck or deckhouse structure will require a mounting pedestal to raise the ADE above
the deck for radome hatch access and to allow the full range of elevation (see ADE mounting considerations
above). Some care must be taken to ensure the mounting pedestal is properly aligned with the stiffeners
under the deck plating.

2.3.2. ADE Mounting Considerations

Mounting the radome directly on the deck or platform
prevents access to the hatch in the base of the radome
unless an opening is designed into the mounting surface. If
there is no access to the hatch, the only way to service the
antenna is to remove the radome top. Two people are
required to take the top off of the radome without cracking
or losing control of it, but even with two people a gust of
wind may cause them to lose control and the radome top
may be catastrophically damaged (see repair information in
the radome specifications).
If access to the hatch cannot be provided in the mounting
surface, provide a short ADE support pedestal to mount the
ADE on which is tall enough to allow access into the radome
via the hatch.
Ladder rungs must be provided on all mounting stanchions
greater than 3-4 feet tall to allow footing for personnel
safety when entering the hatch of the radome.
The recommended cable passage in the 50, 60 and 66 inch
radomes is through the bottom center of the radome base,
down through the ADE support pedestal, through the deck
and into the interior of the ship.

2.3.3. Sizing of the support pedestal

The following should be taken into account when choosing the height of a mounting support stand:
1. The height of the pedestal should be kept as short as possible, taking into account recommendations
given in other Sea Tel Guidelines.
2. The minimum height of the pedestal above a flat deck or platform to allow access into the radome
for maintenance should be 0.6 meters (24 inches).
3. The connection of the ADE mounting plate to the stanchion and the connection of the pedestal to
the ship should be properly braced with triangular gussets (see graphic above). Care should be taken
to align the pedestal gussets to the ship’s stiffeners as much as possible. Doublers or other
reinforcing plates should be considered to distribute the forces when under-deck stiffeners are
inadequate.
4. The diameter of the pedestal stanchion shall not be smaller than 100 millimeters (4 inches). Where
the ADE base diameter exceeds 1.5 meters (60 inches), additional stanchions (quantity greater than
3) should be placed rather than a single large stanchion.
5. Shear and bending should be taken into account in sizing the ADE mounting plate and associated
gussets.
6. Shear and bending must be taken into account when sizing the pedestal to ship connection.
7. All welding should be full penetration welds –V-groove welds with additional fillet welds – with
throats equivalent to the thickness of the thinnest base material.

2-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Site Survey Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

8. For an ADE mounted greater than 0.6 meters (24 inches) above the ship’s structure, at least one (1)
foot rung should be added. Additional rungs should be added for every 0.3 meter (12 inches) of
pedestal height above the ship’s structure.
9. For an ADE mounted greater than 3 meters (9 feet) above the ship’s structure, a fully enclosing cage
should be included in way of the access ladder, starting 2.3 meters (7 feet) above the ship’s
structure.

2.4. Mounting Height

The higher up you mount the antenna above the pivot point of the ship the higher the tangential acceleration (g-
force) exerted on the antenna will be (see chart below).
When the g-force exerted on the antenna is low, antenna stabilization and overall performance are not affected.
If the g-force exerted on the antenna is high enough (> 1 G), antenna stabilization and overall performance are
affected.
If the g-force exerted on the antenna is excessive (1-2 Gs), the antenna does not maintain stabilization and may be
physically damaged by the g-force.

2.5. Mast Configurations

Sea Tel recommends mounting the ADE in a location that has both a clear line-of-sight to the target satellites in all
potential azimuth/elevation ranges and sufficient support against vibration excitement. If possible, mounting the ADE
pedestal directly to ship deckhouse structures or other box stiffened structures is preferred. However, in many cases,
this imposes limits on the antenna system’s clear line-of-sight.
Often the solution for providing the full azimuth/elevation range the antenna needs is to mount the ADE on the ship’s
mast. Unfortunately, masts do not consider equipment masses in design and often have harmonic frequencies of their
own.
There are many designs of masts used on ships – masts are nearly as unique in design as the ship is – but the designs
often fall into a few categories. These categories can be addressed in terms of typical responses and problems with
regards to vibration and mounting of ADE. The most common categories of masts are:

2-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Site Survey

2.5.1. Vertical Masts

Vertical masts are a very ancient and common mast design. In essence, it is the mast derived from the sailing
mast and adapted for mounting the ever-increasing array of antennae which ships need to communicate with
the world. This drawing of a vertical mast shows
the preferred mounting of the ADE center-line
above the plane of the radar. Alternatively the ADE
is mounted below the plane of the radar signal
Vertical masts are most commonly found on cargo
ships – they are simple, inelegant and functional.
They are also fairly stiff against torsional reaction
and lateral vibrations, as long as the ADE is
mounted on a stiff pedestal near the vertical
centerline of the mast. If centerline mounting is
impractical or otherwise prohibited, the mast
platform the ADE is mounted on should be checked
for torsional vibration about the centerline of the
mast and the orthogonal centerline of the platform.
If the estimated natural frequency of the mast or platform is less than 35 Hertz, the mast or platform should
be stiffened by the addition of deeper gussets under the platform or behind the mast.

2.5.2. Raked Masts

Raked masts are found on vessels where the style
or appearance of the entire vessel is important.
Again, the inclined mast is a direct descendant from
the masts of sailing ships – as ship owners wanted
their vessels to look more unique and less
utilitarian, they ‘raked’ the masts aft to make the
vessel appear capable of speed. This drawing
shows a raked mast, again with the preferred ADE
mounting above the radar and alternate with the
ADE below the radar.
Raked masts pose special problems in both
evaluating the mast for stiffness and mounting of
antennae. As can be seen in the drawing, all
antennae must be mounted on platforms or other
horizontal structures in order to maintain the
vertical orientation of the antenna centerline. This
implies a secondary member which has a different
natural frequency than the raked mast’s natural frequency. In order to reduce the mass of these platforms,
they tend to be less stiff than the main box structure of the raked mast. Thus, they will have lower natural
frequencies than the raked mast itself. Unfortunately, the vibratory forces will act through the stiff structure
of the raked mast and excite these lighter platforms, to the detriment of the antenna.

2.5.3. Girder Masts

Girder masts are large platforms atop a pair of
columns. Just like girder constructions in buildings,
they are relatively stiff athwart ship – in their
primary axis – but less stiff longitudinally and
torsionally. An example of a girder mast is shown in
this drawing, with the preferred ADE mounting
outboard and above the radar directly on one of the
columns and alternate with the ADE centered on
the girder above the plane of the radar.
The greatest weakness of girder masts is in torsion –
where the girder beam twists about its vertical
centerline axis. As with all mast designs discussed so far, mounting the antenna in line with the vertical

2-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Site Survey Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

support structure will reduce the vibration tendencies. Mounting the antenna directly above the girder
columns provides ample support to the antenna pedestal and locates the antenna weight where it will
influence the natural frequency of the mast the least.

2.5.4. Truss Mast

Truss masts are a variant on the girder mast
concept. Rather than a pair of columns supporting a
girder beam, the construction is a framework of
tubular members supporting a platform on which
the antennae and other equipment are mounted. A
typical truss mast is shown in this photograph.
Like a girder mast, truss masts are especially stiff in
the athwart ship direction. Unlike a girder mast, the
truss can be made to be nearly as stiff in the
longitudinal direction. Truss masts are particularly
difficult to estimate the natural frequency – since a
correct modeling includes both the truss structure
of the supports and the plate/diaphragm structure
of the platform. In general, the following guidelines
apply when determining the adequate support for
mounting an antenna on a truss mast:
1. Antenna ADE pedestal gussets should align
with platform stiffeners which are at least
200 millimeters in depth and 10 millimeters in thickness.
2. When possible, the antenna ADE pedestal column should align with a vertical truss support.
3. For every 100 kilograms of ADE weight over 250 kilograms, the depth of the platform stiffeners
should be increased by 50 millimeters and thickness by 2 millimeters.
Sea Tel does not have a recommended arrangement for a truss mast – the variability of truss mast designs
means that each installation needs to be evaluated separately.

2.6. Safe Access to the ADE

Safe access to the ADE should be provided. Provisions of the ship’s Safety Management System with regard to men
aloft should be reviewed and agreed with all personnel prior to the installation. Installations greater than 3 meters
above the deck (or where the access starts at a deck less than 1 meter in width) without cages around the access
ladder shall be provided with means to latch a safety harness to a fixed horizontal bar or ring.
The access hatch for the ADE shall be oriented aft, or inboard, when practical. In any case, the orientation of the ADE
access hatch shall comply with the SMS guidelines onboard the ship. Nets and other safety rigging under the ADE
during servicing should be rigged to catch falling tools, components or fasteners.

2.7. Below Decks Equipment Location

The MXP is a standard 19” rack mount. The MXP mounts from the front of the rack.
The satellite modem, router, VIOP adapter(s), telephone equipment, fax machine, computers and any other associated
equipment should be properly mounted for shipboard use.
Plans to allow access to the rear of the MXP should be considered.

2.8. Cables
During the site survey, walk the path where the cables will be installed. Pay particular attention to how cables will be
installed; such as what obstacles they will be routed around, difficulties that will be encountered and the overall length
of the cables. The ADE should be installed using good electrical practice. Sea Tel recommends referring to IEC 60092-
352 for specific guidance in choosing cables and installing cables onboard a ship. Within these guidelines, Sea Tel will
provide some very general information regarding the electrical installation.
In general, all cable shall be protected from chaffing and secured to a cableway. Cable runs on open deck or down a
mast shall be in metal conduit suitable for marine use. The conduit shall be blown through with dry air prior to passing
cable to ensure all debris has been cleared out of the conduit and again after passing the cable to ensure no trapped

2-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Site Survey

moisture exists. The ends of the conduit shall be sealed with cable glands (preferred), mastic or low VOC silicon
sealant after the cables have been passed through.
Cables passing through bulkheads or decks shall be routed through approved weather tight glands.

2.8.1. ADE/BDE Coaxial Cables

The first concern with the coaxial cables installed between the ADE & BDE is length. This length is used to
determine the loss of the various possible coax, Heliax or fiber-optic cables that might be used. You should
always provide the lowest loss cables to provide the strongest signal level into the satellite modem.
Signal cable shall be continuous from the connection within the ADE radome, through the structure of the
ship to the BDE. Splices, adapters or dummy connections will degrade the signal level and are discouraged.
Be careful of sharp bends that kink and damage the cable. Use a proper tubing bender for Heliax bends.
Penetrations in watertight bulkheads are very expensive, single cable, welded penetrations that must be
pressure tested.
Always use good quality connectors that are designed to fit properly on the cables you are using. Poor
quality connectors have higher loss, can allow noise into the cable, are easily damaged or fail prematurely.
In as much as is possible, don’t lay the coaxes on power cables. Try to have some separation from Inmarsat &
GPS cables that are also passing L-band frequencies or radar cables that may inject pulse repetition noise –as
error bits - into your cables.

2.8.2. Antenna Power Cable

Be cautious of length of the run, for voltage loss issues, and assure that the gauge of the wires is adequate for
the current that is expected to be drawn (plus margin). Antenna power is recommended (but not required) to
be from a UPS, generally the same one that supplies power to the below decks equipment.
Power cables shall comply with the provisions of IEC 60092-350 and -351 as practical. Power cables may be
routed through the same conduit as the signal cable from the junction box to the base of the ADE. Power
cables shall pass through separate radome penetrations from the signal cable.
The power cable shall be continuous from the UPS (or closest circuit breaker) to the ADE connections within
the radome. The power circuits shall be arranged so that ‘active,’ ‘common’ and ‘neutral’ (ground) legs are all
made or broken simultaneously. All circuit legs shall be carried in the same cable jacket.

2.8.3. Air Conditioner Power Cable

If your system includes a marine air conditioner (available with the 81 inch radome ONLY), run an AC power
cable to it from a breaker, preferably from a different phase of the electrical system than supplies power to
the ADE & BDE. Be EXTREMELY cautious of length of the run for voltage loss and gauge of the wires for the
current that is expected to be drawn.
Power cable shall comply with the provisions of IEC 60092-350 and -351 in so far as practical. Power cables
may be routed through the same conduit as the signal cable from the junction box to the base of the ADE.
Power cables shall pass through separate radome penetrations from the signal cable.
The power cable shall be continuous from the closest circuit breaker to the ADE connections within the
radome. The power circuits shall be arranged so that ‘active,’ ‘common’ and ‘neutral’ (ground) legs are all
made or broken simultaneously. All circuit legs shall be carried in the same cable jacket.

2.8.4. MXP Power Cable/Outlet

The AC power for the MXP and the ADE is not required to be from a UPS (same one that supplies power to
the ADE), but it is recommended.
Power cable shall comply with the provisions of IEC 60092-350 and -351 in so far as practicable.

2.8.5. Gyro Compass Cable

Use good quality shielded cables (twisted pairs, individually foil wrapped, outer foil with braid overall is best).
You only need 2-wire for NMEA signal, 4-wire for Step-By-Step and 5-wire for Synchro … always use shielded
cable. Be cautious of length and gauge of the run for voltage loss issues.

2-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Site Survey Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

2.9. Grounding
All metal parts of the ADE shall be grounded to bare metal that is common to the hull of the ship. This is most
commonly accomplished by attaching a ground wire/cable from the upper base plate ground point to a ground stud on
the mounting pedestal/stanchion/mast near the base of the radome. Preservation of the bare metal contact point
should be done to prevent loss of ground due to rust and/or corrosion.
Grounding by exposing bare metal under all mounting bolts of the under-side of the radome base prior to final
tightening does NOT provide adequate grounding of the ADE.
Grounding should be ensured throughout the entire mounting to the hull. While it is presumed the deckhouse is
permanently bonded and grounded to the hull, in cases where the deckhouse and hull are of different materials a
check of an independent ground bonding strap should be made. Masts should be confirmed to be grounded to the
deckhouse or hull.

2-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Site Survey

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Installation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

3. Installation
Your antenna pedestal comes completely assembled in its radome. This section contains instructions for unpacking, final
assembling and installing of the equipment. It is highly recommended that trained technicians install the system.
Your antenna may have been ordered in any one of a variety of different diameter radomes. The installation instructions for
most common radome sizes for your system are below.

3.1. Unpacking and Inspection

Exercise caution when unpacking the equipment.
1. Unpack the crates. Carefully inspect the radome surface for evidence of shipping damage.
2. Unpack all the boxes.
3. Inspect everything to assure that all materials have been received and are in good condition.
3.2. Assembly Notes and Warnings

NOTE: All nuts and bolts should be assembled using the appropriate Loctite thread-locker
product number for the thread size of the hardware.
Loctite # Description
222 Low strength for small fasteners.
242 Medium strength
638 High strength for motor shafts & sprockets.
2760 Permanent strength for up to 1” diameter fasteners.
290 Wicking, High strength for fasteners which are already
assembled.
WARNING: Assure that all nut and bolt assemblies are tightened according to the
tightening torque values listed below:
SAE Bolt Size Inch Pounds Metric Bolt Size Kg-cm
1/4-20 75 M6 75.3
5/l6-18 132 M8 150
3/8-16 236 M10 270
1/2-13 517 M12 430
WARNING: Hoisting with other than a webbed four-part sling may result in catastrophic
crushing of the radome. Refer to the specifications and drawings for the fully assembled
weight of your model antenna/radome and assure that equipment used to lift/hoist this
system is rated accordingly.

CAUTION: The antenna/radome assembly is very light for its size and is subject to large
swaying motions if hoisted under windy conditions. Always ensure that tag lines, attached
to the radome base frame, are attended while hoisting the antenna assembly to its
assigned location aboard ship.

3-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Installation

3.3. Installing the ADE

The antenna pedestal is shipped completely assembled in its radome. Please refer to the entire Site Survey chapter of
this manual.
Base Hatch Access - Mounting the radome directly on the deck or
platform prevents access to the hatch in the base of the radome unless an
opening is designed into the mounting surface to allow such entry. If there is
no access to the hatch the only way to service the antenna is to remove the
radome top. Two people are required to take the top off of the radome
without cracking or losing control of it, but even with two people a gust of
wind may cause them to lose control and the radome top may be
catastrophically damaged (see repair information in the radome
specifications) or lost.
If access to the hatch cannot be provided in the mounting surface, provide a
short ADE mounting stanchion to mount the ADE on which is tall enough to
allow access into the radome via the hatch.
Ladder rungs must be provided on all mounting stanchions greater than 3-4
feet tall to allow footing for personnel safety when entering the hatch of the
radome.
Cable Passage - The radome base is designed with a bottom center cable
passage and Roxtec® Multidiameter® blocks for cable strain relief. The
recommended cable passage in the 50, 60, 61 and 66 inch radomes is through
the bottom center of the radome base, down through the ADE mounting
stanchion, through the deck and into the interior of the ship.
Bottom center cable passage is recommended, however, a strain relief kit is provided with the system if off-center
cable entry is required. Note: Strain relief installation procedure, provided in the Drawings chapter, MUST
be followed to assure that the cored holes are properly sealed to prevent moisture absorption and de-
lamination of the radome base.

3.3.1. Prepare the 40”, 50”, 60”, 66” or 76” Radome Assembly

1. Remove the side walls of the radome crate.

2. Lift the pallet using a forklift and/or jacks.
3. From the underside of the pallet, remove the
four shipping bolts which attach the ADE to
its’ pallet. Discard this shipping hardware.

4. Remove four equally spaced bolts around the

radome flange. Save these nuts and bolts to
be reinstalled later.
5. Install four lifting eyebolts in the vacant holes
in the flange of the radome.. (Hardware
provided in the radome installation kit). Keep
the original perimeter bolt hardware to be
reinstalled after the ADE has been installed.

3-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Installation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

6. Attach shackles and four part web lifting sling

arrangement to the eyebolts.
7. Attach a suitable length tagline to one of the
eyebolts.
8. After hoisted into place the lifting eyes are to
be removed and replaced with the stainless
hardware that was removed in step 4 (the
eyes are galvanized with bare thread that will
rust if left exposed to the weather).

3.3.2. Installing the 50, 60 or 66” Radome Assembly

The antenna pedestal is shipped completely assembled in its radome.

1. Man the tag line(s).

2. Hoist the antenna assembly off the shipping pallet,
by means of a suitably sized crane or derrick, to allow
access to bottom of radome assembly.
3. Open the hatch by pressing the round release button
in the center of the black latches and gently push the
hatch up into the radome. Place the hatch door (gel
coat surface up) inside the radome on the far side of
the antenna pedestal.
4. Inspect the pedestal assembly and reflector for signs
of shipping damage.
5. Peel the paper off of the mounting pad (provided in
the radome installation kit) to expose the sticky side
of the pad, align it to the mounting holes and press it
in place on the underside of the radome base.

6. Using Loctite 271, install the four mounting bolts

(provided in radome mounting kit) into the radome
base.

3-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Installation

7. Remove the hardware in the cable mounting frame.

8. Lift the cable mounting frame out from the cable

passage channel.
NOTE: If the bottom center cable passage will NOT
be used, it is recommended that the strain reliefs be
installed in place of this cable mounting frame. Other
locations around the radome base are MUCH thicker,
requiring longer strain reliefs than the ones provided
by Sea Tel. Refer to the strain relief installation
procedure provided in the Drawings chapter of this
manual.
9. Man the tag line and have the crane continue lifting
the ADE up and hover above the mounting site on
the ship.
10. Carefully route AC power, ground strap/cable (see
Grounding info below) and IF coax cables through
the cable passage in the bottom center of the
radome base and through the cable channel under
the lower base plate of antenna.
NOTE: Suitable strain relief should be provided below
the mounting surface to prevent the cables from
being kinked where the cables exit the bottom of the
radome.
11. Allow enough service loop to terminate these cables
to the circuit breaker assembly and connector
bracket respectively (see cable termination
information below).
HINT: It may be easier to connect, or tie-wrap, the
coaxes and power cable temporarily.
12. Lower radome assembly into the mounting holes,
positioned with the BOW reference of the radome as
close to parallel with centerline of the ship as
possible (any variation from actual alignment can be
electrically calibrated if needed).
13. Using Loctite 271, install the four fender washers
and hex nuts (provided in the radome installation
kit), from the underside of the mounting surface, to
affix the radome to the mounting surface. Tighten
to torque spec.

3-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Installation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

14. Remove the clamp bar and Roxtec® Multidiameter®

blocks from their cable mounting frame in the cable
passage channel.

15. Remove the rubber bar from the top of the Roxtec®
Multidiameter® blocks.

16. Remove the Roxtec® Multidiameter® blocks from

the cable mounting frame.

17. Pass the coaxes and power cable through the cable
mounting frame.
HINT: Again, It may be easier to connect, or tie-wrap,
the coaxes and power cable temporarily.
18. Re-install the cable mounting frame onto cable
passage channel using the four screws and flat
washers that were removed in step 7 above. .

19. Peel layers out of the upper and lower Roxtec®

Multidiameter® blocks to provide an opening in the
block that is just smaller than the outer diameter of
the cable that will pass through it. When
compressed the block should provide clamping force
on the cable and prevent it from moving in the block.

3-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Installation

20. Two cables may be passed through each of the

Roxtec® Multidiameter® CM-20w40 blocks
provided.
21. If cables larger than 1.65cm/0.65in outer diameter
will be used, larger single-cable Roxtec®
Multidiameter CM-40 10-32 blocks are available to
allow three cables of up to3.25cm/1.28in diameter
to be used. The rubber bar and the three double-
cable Roxtec® Multidiameter blocks will be
replaced by the three larger Roxtec®
Multidiameter blocks.
HINT: It may be helpful to put the clamp bar and
rubber bar in place (held loosely by one screw) to
hold some of the Roxtec® Multidiameter blocks in
place while you complete the others.

22. Re-install the clamp bar using the hardware removed

in step 14 above.
23. Remove the tag lines.
24. Remove the lifting sling.
25. Remove the four lifting eye nuts and re-install the
original perimeter bolt hardware (the eyes are
galvanized with bare thread that will rust if left
exposed to the weather). Save the lifting eye
hardware in case lifting of the ADE is required in the
future.

3.3.3. Install 76” Radome to mounting deck.

The antenna pedestal is shipped completely assembled, restrained for shipping, in its radome.
1. Man the tag line(s).
2. Remove four equally spaced bolts around the radome flange. Save these nuts and bolts to be re-
installed later.
3. Install four lifting eyebolts in the vacant holes in the flange of the radome. (Hardware provided in
the radome installation kit). Keep the original perimeter bolt hardware to be reinstalled after the
ADE has been installed.
4. Attach shackles and four part web lifting sling arrangement to the eyebolts.
5. Attach a suitable length tagline to one of the eyebolts.
6. Hoist the antenna assembly off the shipping pallet, by means of a suitably sized crane or derrick, to
allow access to bottom of radome assembly.
7. Open the hatch by pressing the round release button in the center of the black latches and gently
push the hatch up into the radome. Place the hatch door (gel coat surface up) inside the radome on
the far side of the antenna pedestal.
8. Inspect the pedestal assembly and reflector for signs of shipping damage.
9. Peel the paper off of the mounting pad (provided in the radome installation kit) to expose the sticky
side of the pad, align it to the mounting holes and press it in place on the underside of the radome
base.
10. Using Loctite 271, install the twelve mounting bolts (provided in 123549-2 mounting kit) into the
radome base. ALL twelve mounting holes must be used when securing above decks
equipment to vessel.
3-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Installation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

11. Hoist the antenna assembly up onto the ship and hover above the mounting site on the ship.
12. Route AC power, ground strap/cable (see Grounding info below) and IF coax cables through the
cable passage in center of the bottom of the radome base and through the cable channel under the
lower base plate of antenna. Allow enough service loop to terminate these cables to the circuit
breaker assembly and connector bracket respectively (see cable termination information below).
13. Lower radome assembly into the mounting holes, positioned with the BOW reference of the radome
parallel with centerline of the ship. Any variation from actual alignment can be compensated with
the Home Flag Offset and AZIMUTH TRIM adjustment, so precise alignment is not required.
14. Using Loctite 271, install the twelve fender washers and hex nuts (provided in mounting kit) from
the underside of the mounting surface.
15. Remove the tag lines.
16. Remove the lifting sling.
17. Remove the four lifting eye nuts and reinstall the original perimeter bolt hardware (the eyes are
galvanized with bare thread that will rust if left exposed to the weather). Save the lifting eye
hardware in case lifting of the ADE is required in the future.

3.3.1. Preparing and Installing the Single Piece 81” Radome Assembly
The antenna pedestal is shipped completely assembled in its 81” single piece radome.
1. Remove the shipping hold-down bolts which mount the ADE to its’ pallet.
2. Install four lifting eye bolts, provided in the radome installation kit, in holes around the perimeter of
the baseframe.
3. Attach a four-part lifting sling to the four lifting eyes in the
base of the radome and lift the radome assembly free of
its shipping pallet. Place the radome assembly on
temporary support blocks at least 22 inches high.
4. Loosely assemble the radome base frame's eight legs and
eleven braces as shown in the Radome Base Frame
Assembly drawing using the hardware provided. Insure
that a split washer is used under each nut. When
assembled, apply Loctite and tighten all hardware.
5. Using the four-part lifting sling, and with a tag line
attached to the radome base frame, hoist the antenna
assembly to its assigned location aboard ship by means of
a suitably-sized crane or derrick.
6. The radome assembly should be positioned with the BOW
marker aligned as close as possible to the ship centerline.
Any variation from actual alignment can be compensated with the Home Flag Offset and AZIMUTH
TRIM adjustment, so precise alignment is not required.
7. Bolt or weld the legs of the radome base frame directly to the ship's deck or suitable mounting
surface. If the deck is uneven or not level, weld clips to the deck and attach them to the legs of the
radome base frame. When completed the radome should be as near to level as is practical.
8. Disconnect the lifting sling from the four lifting eyes in the base of the radome.
9. Remove the four lifting eye bolts. Save the lifting eye hardware in case lifting of the ADE is required
in the future.
10. Route AC Power and IF coax cables through the strain reliefs installed in the basepan of the radome.
Allow enough service loop to terminate these cables to the circuit breaker assembly and connector
bracket respectively (see cable termination information below).

3-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Installation

3.4. Grounding the Pedestal

The antenna pedestal must be grounded to the hull of the ship. A grounding point is provided on the upper base plate
to ground the pedestal. A ground wire, of appropriate gauge for it’s length, must be provided to ground the pedestal to
the mounting platform that it will be bolted to (this is usually on or near the mounting surface). This mounting must
also be electrically common with the hull of the vessel.
If a longer ground connection is required to reach a common metal connection to the hull, you must provide that
longer cable/strap that is of sufficient gauge and length to ground the pedestal to the nearest grounding point of the
hull.
Solid strap is the conductor of choice for low impedance RF ground connections because the RF currents tend to
flow along the outer surface and the strap has a large smooth surface area to take full advantage of this effect.
Braid is the conductor of choice where flexibility is required. Sea Tel uses braid to cross axes of the antenna pedestal
and to connect various subassemblies together.
Wire is the easiest to install and connect and is readily available with a weather protective jacket. 4 awg and 6 awg
bare solid copper wire is commonly used as safety grounds and very basic lightning protection grounds. 2 awg
stranded wire is often used for lightning grounding and bonding and it much more flexible.

1. Connect the ground wire (of

adequate gauge for the length) to a
burnished ground point on, or near,
the mounting surface. This
burnished grounding point must be
electrically common with the hull.
Bi-metal coupling plate may be
required to get good electrical
coupling to the hull of the ship.
Protective coating should be
applied to prevent the grounding
point, and ground wire, from rusting
or corroding.
NOTE: Minimum gauge should not be
smaller than 10 AWG, even for a short cable
run.
2. Route the ground cable/strap up
through the radome base with the
coax and power cables.
3. Route the ground strap/cable
through one of the Roxtec®
Multidiameter® blocks with the
other power and coax cables.
4. Connect the grounding strap/cable
to the burnished ground point on
the upper base plate.

3.5. Removing the Shipping/Stow Restraints PRIOR to Power-Up

The order the restraints are removed is not critical.

CAUTION: There are three shipping/stow restraints on this antenna pedestal

that MUST be removed, before energizing the antenna, for normal operation.

3-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Installation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

3.5.1. Removing the AZ Shipping/Stow Restraint

1. The AZ shipping/stow restraint is formed by a

buckle web strap wound around the azimuth
post toe weight and passed through stow clips
in the base of the radome.
2. To un-restrain azimuth rotation of the
antenna simply untie/unbuckle the web strap
and remove it from the azimuth post and
clips.
3. Save the web strap so that the antenna can be
restrained in the future should it be required.
4. Verify that the antenna rotates freely and
easily a full 360 degrees CW & CCW in
azimuth.

3.5.2. Removing the EL Shipping/Stow Restraint

1. The EL shipping/stow restraint is formed by a

stow pin-bolt mounted through a bracket and
is engaged into a hole/slot in the elevation
driven sprocket when the dish is at zenith (90
degrees elevation).
2. In the stowed position, the hardware from left
to right is stow pin-bolt head, washer, bracket,
washer, hex nut, hex nut so that the pin
section of the stow pin-bolt is inserted into
the hole in the elevation driven sprocket.

EL Stow Pin-Bolt head

Bracket

2 Hex Nuts

Pin inserted into Elevation Driven Sprocket

Elevation Driven Sprocket

3-9 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Installation

3. To un-restrain the elevation axis of the

antenna, unthread the two hex nuts. Using a
¾” open end wrench, remove the hex nuts
and washer from the stow pin-bolt.
4. Remove the stow pin-bolt from the bracket.

5. Remove the washer from the stow pin-bolt

and thread one of the two hex nuts onto the
bolt and tighten.
6. Put one of the washers onto the stow pin-bolt
and insert it into the bracket toward the
elevation driven sprocket.
7. Put the other washer, and then the other hex
nut onto the bolt.

3-10 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Installation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

8. Tighten the hex nut to prevent the hardware

from loosening while in the un-stowed
configuration.
9. Verify that the antenna rotates freely through
its full elevation range of motion.

3.5.3. Removing the CL Shipping/Stow Restraint

1. The CL shipping/stow restraint is formed by a

red locking bar with adjustable bumpers at
each end of the bar. This mechanism is
placed under the cross-level beam to lock it in
place.

Cross-Level Beam

CL Shipping/Stow bar

Adjustable CL Locking Bumpers (only one end shown)

2. To un-restrain the cross-level axis of the

antenna use a 7/16“ open end wrench to
loosen the nut on the top side of the locking
bar (either end of the bar).

3. Remove the bottom nut off of that adjustable

bumper.
4. Remove the adjustable bumper from the
locking bar.

3-11 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Installation

5. Extract the locking bar from the underside of

the cross-level beam and retain these parts for
later re-use if it becomes necessary to stow
the antenna.
6. Verify that the antenna rotates (tilts left and
right from level) freely through its full cross-
level range of motion.

3.6. Installing the Below Decks Equipment.

3.6.1. General Cautions & Warnings

CAUTION - Electrical Shock Potentials exist on the Gyro Compass output

lines. Assure that the Gyro Compass output is turned OFF when handling and
connecting wiring to the MXP.
CAUTION - Allow only an authorized dealer to install or service the Sea Tel
System components. Unauthorized installation or service can be dangerous and may
invalidate the warranty.

3.6.2. Cable Terminations in the 81 inch Radome

The TX, RX and AC power cables must were routed through the cable strain relief in a previous step.
1. Route and tie the cables together with the pedestal cables to provide some service loop length
inside the radome.
2. Route AC power cable through the clamp in the end of the breaker box and terminated to the
breaker screw terminals.
3. Tighten the clamp in the end of the breaker box.
4. Connect the TX IF cable from below decks to the “TX” connection on the bracket.
5. Connect the RX IF cable from below decks to the “RX” connection on the bracket.
6. Apply RTV to the strain relief joints and tighten the compression fittings to make them splash proof.

3.6.3. Preparing BDE Location

Prepare the rack (or other location) for the MXP. Prepare the mounting locations for the other BDE
throughout ship.

3-12 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Installation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

3.6.4. System Configuration

Figure 3-1 Series 12 Simplified Block Diagram

3.6.5. Installing the Below Deck Equipment

1. Install the MXP in the front of the standard 19” equipment rack or other suitable location. The MXP
is one rack unit high.
2. Install your satellite modem, router, VOIP adapters, telephone equipment, fax machine, computers
and any other BDE that is part of your installation.

3.7. Connecting the Below Decks Equipment

Connect this equipment as shown in the System Block Diagram. Install the equipment in a standard 19 inch
equipment rack or other suitable location. Optional slide rails are available.

3.7.1. Connecting the BDE AC Power Cables

Connect the AC power cables that supply power to the Below Decks Equipment (MXP, satellite modem,
phone, fax, computer and all other equipment) to an outlet strip fed from a suitably rated breaker or UPS.

3.7.2. Connecting the ADE IF Coaxes

1. Attach the TXIF coax from the antenna to the TX Connector on the Tx port of the satellite modem.
2. Attach the RXIF coax from the antenna to the J2 (RJ) connector of the MXP.

3-13 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Installation

3.7.2.1. Ships AC Mains

Connect the power cord from the rear panel of the MXP to AC voltage power source (UPS power
recommended).
3.7.2.2. J1 Modem RX
Connect this RXIF Output to the satellite modem RX Input using an appropriate coaxial cable.
3.7.2.3. J2 Antenna RX
Connect this RXIF Input from the antenna to this port on the rear panel of the MXP using coaxial
cable provided
3.7.2.4. J3 A/B & J4 A/B - Ethernet 4 Port 10/100 switch
Ethernet connections to computer, satellite modem LAN devices as desired.
3.7.2.5. J5 SFP Fiber Interface
SFP Gigabit Ethernet connection.
3.7.2.6. J6 Mini-USB Computer M&C Connection
Mini-USB Antenna M&C connection, if desired.
3.7.2.7. J7 USB Host
Not connected - -Future development.
3.7.2.8. J8 Console
Antenna M&C Serial connections.
3.7.2.9. J9 A/B Serial
Computer RJ-45 Serial M&C connections. A is mapped to the Radio serial M&C port of the ICU and
B is mapped to the Pass through serial M&C port of the ICU.
3.7.2.10. J10C Modem
RJ-45 Serial M&C connection to Satellite Modem Console Port.
3.7.2.11. J10D OBM
RJ-45 Serial M&C connection to Out of Band Management equipment, if used.
3.7.2.12. J11 Gyro
Terminal Strip for SBS or Synchro Gyro Compass interface connections. Wiring is:

Pin 1 Synchro R1
Pin 2 Synchro R2
Pin 3 Synchro S1 / SBS A
Pin 4 Synchro S2 / SBS B
Pin 5 Synchro S3 / SBS C
Pin 6 SBS COM

3-14 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Installation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

3.7.2.13. J13 NMEA 0183

NMEA 0183 I/O connections. Wiring is:

Pin 1 RX+
Pin 2 RX-
Pin 3 TX-
Pin 4 N/C
Pin 5 GND
Pin6 N/C
Pin 7 GND
Pin 8 TX+
Pin 9 +12 VDC

3.7.2.14. J12 Aux 232

Auxiliary wired RS-232 connection. Wiring is:

Pin 1 - GND Ground

Pin 2 - Aux IN1 Modem Lock Input 1 - See modem setup chapter.
Pin 3 - Aux IN2 Modem Lock Input 2 - See modem setup chapter.
Pin 4 - GND Ground
Pin 5 - SW1 Blockage/Modem Mute Output 1 - See blockage & modem setup
chapters.
Pin 6 - SW2 Blockage/Modem Mute Output 2 - See blockage & modem setup
chapters.
Pin 7 - SW3A Dry Contact set 1 - Dry alarm contacts used to provide
Pin 8 - SW3B (programmable) alarm output to other equipment/systems. Switched
outputs have ability to use 4.7K pull up or Pull Down and can provide
Current sink of 0.5 amps max. Contacts are Normally Open for No
Alarm state and are Closed/Shorted when the programmed alarm
state exists.
Pin 9 - SW4A Dry Contact set 2 - Same as dry alarm contact set 1.
Pin 10 - SW4B

3.7.2.15. J14 Aux 232

Wiring is:

Pin 1 N/C
Pin 2 RX
Pin 3 TX
Pin 4 N/C
Pin 5 GND
Pin6 N/C
Pin 7 GND
Pin 8 N/C
Pin 9 +12 VDC

3-15 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Installation

3.7.2.16. J15 NMEA 2000

NMEA 2000 I/O connection. RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE

3.7.3. Other BDE connections

Connect your other Below Decks Equipment (ie, telephone, fax machine and computer equipment) to
complete your configuration.

3.8. Final Checks

3.8.1. Visual/Electrical inspection

Do a visual inspection of your work to assure that everything is connected properly and all cables/wires are
secured.

3.8.2. Electrical - Double check wiring connections

Double check all your connections to assure that it is safe to energize the equipment.

3.9. Setup - Media Xchange Point™ (MXP)

Now that you have installed the hardware, you will need to setup, calibrate and commission the antenna.
You may also need to load/update the modem option file, which is not part of the scope of this manual, contact the
airtime provider NOC for guidance.

At the very least, you will need to set up the antenna system for:
• Connect & configure a ships computer for accessing the MXP.
• The gyro compass signal being provided by the ship.
• The tracking receiver frequency settings for the satellite to be used (configure satellites).
• Set up / configure all satellites that the system might use as the ship travels.
• Check/Set Home Flag Offset.
• Set up Blockage zone(s) as needed.
• Acquire the desired satellite.
• Optimize targeting (Auto or manual trim).
• Arrange for commissioning & cross-pol isolation testing with the NOC.
• Conduct cross-pol isolation testing with the NOC.
• Conduct other commissioning testing with the NOC (ie P1dB compression point).
• If this is a Dual Antenna installation configuration, you will have to balance the TX levels of the two antennas
while online with the NOC (refer to procedure in the Dual Antenna Arbitrator manual).
• It is strongly recommended that you down, and save, the system INI file (contains all of the system
parameters). Save this file in a convenient location.

3-16 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Configuring a Computer for the MXP Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

4. Configuring a Computer for the MXP

The first thing you need to do is to configure your computer so that it will display the MXP screens. Follow these instructions to
accomplish that.

1. Connect a LAN cable to the back of your

computer. If you are connecting into a LAN,
instead of a single computer, you will need to
provide a connection from your LAN
router/hub/switch to the MXP.

2. Connect the other end of the LAN cable to the

back of the MXP.

3. Power on the MXP.

4-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Configuring a Computer for the MXP

4. From your computer desktop, click the Control

Panel button.

NOTE: The following displayed screen captures are form

Window 7 OS, your screens may differ; refer to your PC
manual for changing network adapter settings.

5. Click on “View network status and tasks”.

6. Click “Change adapter settings”.

4-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Configuring a Computer for the MXP Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

7. Click on “Local Area Connection.”

8. Click on “Properties”.

9. Double-Click on “Internet Protocol Version 4

(IPv4)”.

4-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Configuring a Computer for the MXP

10. Click on “Use the following IP address:

11. In the IP Address boxes, enter “10.1.1.102” (This

is for the IP address of your computer).

NOTE: You could use 101, 102, 103, etc. as long as it is

not the same as the address of the MXP, which is
“10.1.1.100” (default).

12. On the second line, enter Subnet Mask of

“255.255.255.0”.
13. Then click the “OK” button.

4-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Configuring a Computer for the MXP Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

14. Back at the Local Area Connection Properties

screen; click the “OK” button.

15. Click the “Close” button.

16. Close the Control Panel.

4-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Configuring a Computer for the MXP

17. Open your browser, and enter the URL:

“10.1.1.100”.

18. At the log in screen enter the user name (Dealer,

SysAdmin, or User). Contact Sea Tel Service for
the password.

19. After you log in you will see the System Status
screen

4-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Using the Commission Wizard Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

5. Setup – Using the Commission Wizard

5.1. Starting the Commission Wizard

When the system is powered up for the first time (or whenever desired) the Commission Wizard can be run to set the
system up for use on this ship, with this gyrocompass and this modem. To begin, log in as dealer, and select Wizard –
Commission from the left side of the page:

5-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Using the Commission Wizard

5.2. Commissioning Wizard

After selection of the commissioning wizard, you will follow the procedure below to fill in the information. Also refer
to following setup chapters for more information on specific entries in this wizard.

1. On the welcoming page, click on “Start”.

In the Network Configuration section, you will configure

the MXP’s Network information.
2. Enter in the desired IP address, Subnet Mask
and Gateway for the MXP’s four port
unmanaged switch (J3 A/B & j4 A/B).
Note: Although any class IP address may be used, ABS
based installations must set these values to be on the
same subnet mask as the interfaced satellite modem.
3. Click on “Next”.
The MXP Serial Port section allows you to configure the
MXP’s bps settings for serial based communications with
rd
various 3 party devices (i.e. laptop, Out of Band
Management devices, etc).

4. Select the applicable baud rate using the drop

down menu selections list for the port in which
you are defining.
5. Click on “Next”.

The Gyro section allows you to define that type of Gyro

Compass (if any) integrated with the MXP. For more
information, refer to the Setup – Ship’s Gyro Compass
chapter.

5-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Using the Commission Wizard Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

6. Using the Type drop down menu selection,

select the Gyro Compass type.

7. In the Heading Field, enter in the Vessel’s

current heading value (xxx.x Degrees format).
Note: NMEA, No Gyro, and 1:1 Synchro Type selections
do not require heading entry.
8. Click on “Next”.

The Modem section allows you to define the satellite

modem “Type” and “I/O”.

For more information, refer to the Configuring The

Satellite Modem Interface chapter.

5-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Using the Commission Wizard

9. Using the drop down menu selection list, select

the manufacture of the integrated satellite
modem.

10. Using the drop down menu selection list, select

which of the MXP ports interfaced with the
integrated satellite modem.
11. Click on “Next”.

The Blockage Zones section allows you to define

known vessel structural blockages and/or radiation
hazard zones.

For more information, refer to the Setup – Blockage &

RF Radiation Hazard Zones chapter.

5-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Using the Commission Wizard Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

12. In the Zone entry field(s), type in a read only

descriptive name of said blockage.
13. In the REL start entry field(s), type in the
starting relative azimuth position of defined
zone. NOTE: This is the more counter
clockwise positional value, as referenced to the
bow of the vessel.
14. In the REL end entry field(s), type in the
ending relative azimuth position of defined
zone. NOTE: This is the more clockwise
positional value, as referenced to the bow of
the vessel.
15. In the EL entry field(s), type in the Elevation
angle of defined zone. NOTE: This elevation
angle is based on beam center of the radome
and the highest point of the blocking structure.
16. Click on “Next”.
The Satellite Selection section allows you to select or
define the satellite in which the system will use for the
remainder of the commissioning process.
For more information, refer to the Setup – Satellite
Configuration chapter.

17. Click on “Add” to create a new satellite preset.

NOTE: If this system has been previously
commissioned, as may be the case if the wizard is being
used as part of a post-install maintenance procedure
and/or repair, you may use the Satellite Selection drop
down menu to select a pre-existing satellite
18. Using spacecraft information, as provided by
the service provider:
 Type in Satellite Name (you are
defining the preset name)
 Type in the Longitude (orbital)
position and then use the drop down
menu selection to determine
East/West for this preset.
 Type in the L-Band tracking
Frequency for this preset..
 Type in the known satellite Skew for
this preset.
 Using the drop down menu selection,
define the Transmit Polarity for this
preset.
 Using the drop down menu selection,
define the required LNB Band of
operation for this preset.
 Using the mutually exclusive radio
buttons, define whether to use the
Xpol or CoPol LNB for tracking
purposes.
19. Click on “Next”.

5-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Using the Commission Wizard

The wizard will save the newly defined, or selected

preset satellite information to the systems INI file

Upon successfully saving the above information, the

system will automatically begin to the process of
targeting and/or searching for the preset satellite.

NOTE: If the satellite modem is not connected, or is

not setup correctly, the system may not be able to find
and lock on the satellite. In this case, you will have to
exit the wizard and (later) star over.
20. After the system has reported that is has
located and identified the desired satellite
select “Auto” to calibrate the Azimuth and
Elevation angular values.
Note: Systems, with IMA software ver 105 installed, and
with accurate gyro compass input, will calibrate both
Relative and True North Azimuth values simultaneously.

The wizard will save the calibration parameters to the

systems INI file

21. Once completed, the wizard will display the

Elevation and Azimuth Trim values calculated
and saved in the step above.
22. Click on “Auto” to set the auto-threshold value
for the system.

The wizard will calculate the required Threshold Offset

parameter value used for setting the actual AGC
threshold.

Once calculated, the wizard will save the Threshold

Offset parameter to the systems INI file.

5-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Using the Commission Wizard Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

23. Once completed, the wizard will display the

Threshold Offset parameter value calculated
and saved in the step above.
Next is the sub-procedure for performing
commissioning tests with the Network. You need to
contact your service provider to arrange to do these
tests. The technician at the network will guide you
through a process of operating the modem and the MXP
to do pure carrier settings in the modem, adjusting
modem power output up to P1Db and adjusting the
polarity angle of the feed (from the MXP) to optimize
cross-pol isolation.
While communicating with the network and under the
direction of the network technician, perform Cross Pol
Isolation and 1Db compression tests.

24. Re-enter the wizard, return to this step and

Select “Perform Test”
25. Because you have already completed these
tests, Click on “Next”.

This section allows you to download the “commissioned

state” INI file to a location of your choice (i.e. USB
Drive, hard drive, LAN Location, etc.)
26. Click on “Download”.

27. Select to either Open or save the file to a

location of your choice.

28. Click on “Finish”.

This will take you back to the System Configuration

screen. Once there, you may continue to use the
system in normal operation.

5-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Using the Commission Wizard

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

5-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Ship’s Gyro Compass Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

6. Setup – Ship’s Gyro Compass

The Ships Gyro Compass connection provides true heading (heading of the ship relative to true North) input to the system. This
allows the ICU to target the antenna to a “true” Azimuth position to acquire any desired satellite.
After targeting, this input keeps the antenna stabilized in Azimuth (keeps it pointed at the targeted satellite Azimuth).

6.1. Setting the Gyro Type

The GYRO TYPE parameter selects the type of gyro compass interface signal, the appropriate hardware connections,
and the ratio of the expected input signal for ship turning compensation. Default GYRO TYPE parameter for all
systems is Step-By-Step so that the ICU will properly follow for Step-By-Step or NMEA gyro signals.
If the Ships Gyro Compass output is Synchro, or there is NO Gyro Compass, the GYRO TYPE parameter must be set
correctly to properly read and follow the Ships Gyro Compass signal that is being provided. To manually update the
Gyro Type parameter:

1. Go to the Communications Interface screen.

2. Click the Gyro Type drop down menu.
3. Select the correct Gyro type.
4. Click Save, at the bottom left area of the
screen.

6.2. If there is NO Ships Gyro Compass

Without heading input to the system the MXP will NOT be able to easily target, or stay stabilized ON, a “true” azimuth
pointing angle. This will make satellite acquisition much more difficult and the true azimuth value that any given
satellite should be at will not be displayed correctly.
This mode of operation is NOT recommended for ships or any other vessel that turns in the water. A better solution
would be to provide a Satellite Compass (multiple GPS Antenna device) to provide true heading input to the MXP.
These devices are readily available and are much less expensive than a Gyro Compass.
If there is NO Gyro Compass (ie on a large stationary rig which is anchored to the ocean floor) set the GYRO TYPE
parameter to “No Gyro” or to “Fixed”.

6-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Ship’s Gyro Compass

Fixed mode is used when you do not have a gyro compass, but the ship/vessel/rig is stationary at a fixed
heading that you can manually enter for satellite targeting. This allows you to use a standard (small) search
pattern and acquire the satellite relatively quickly.
No gyro mode is used when you do not have a gyro compass, the ship does turn and you will use “Sky
Search” to initially acquire the satellite. The Sky Search drives the antenna to the calculated elevation angle
and then drives azimuth CW 360 degrees, steps elevation up and then drives azimuth CCW 360 degrees and
continues to alternately steps elevation up/down and drives azimuth alternately CW/CCW 360 degrees.
Because of this large search area, acquiring the satellite will take MUCH longer than if you have valid heading
input.

To change: Set the Scan Rate parameter to 5 deg/sec.

Turn on SAT REF Mode. (It must be turned on.)

This combination of settings will cause “No Gyro” Search pattern to be use to find the desired satellite (refer to the
setup – Searching lesson).

6-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Tracking Receiver – VSAT Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

7. Setup – Tracking Receiver – VSAT

If your system is using OpenAMIP these parameters will be set by the modem for the satellite/beam that the modem is using
(this also allows for automatic beam switching to be controlled from the model, remotely controlled from the network).
Follow the instructions below to manually set these parameters. .

7.1. Determining the IF Tracking Frequency (MHz)

The IF Tracking frequency parameter is a value entered into the MXP MHZ Sub-Menu. The value itself may be
provided by your air-time provider and the MHz value will be entered directly in this sub-menu.
Or, the RF downlink frequency of a specific carrier on the desired satellite can be obtained from a satellite website and
calculated by using the formula RF- LO = IF. When you take the Satellite Transponder Downlink RF value and subtract
the LNB’s Local Oscillator (LO) Value, the resultant value will equal the Intermediate Frequency (IF). It is this IF value
that will be entered into the MXP for tracking purposes. The MHz and KHz are entered as a single value.

Example: Assuming an LNB LO value of 11.25GHz: We want to track a satellite downlink carrier at 12268.250 MHz.
12268.250 MHz – 11250.000 MHz = 1018.250 MHz IF

Enter the entire six digits of the “megahertz and

kilohertz” is simply entered as one value. This is done in
the Position Antenna screen.

7.2. SAT SKEW

SKEW is used to optimize the polarization of the feed to the desired satellite signal. It is entered when a known
satellite is skewed.

Use Polang to peak the polarity.

7-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Tracking Receiver – VSAT

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

7-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Home Flag Offset (IMA Software 1.04 or lesser)Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

8. Setup – Home Flag Offset (IMA Software 1.04 or lesser)

If you have IMA software version 1.05 or greater, please refer to the next chapter (Setup – Azimuth Trim.
In IMA software versions 1.04 and earlier Home Flag Offset is used to calibrate the relative azimuth value of the antenna to the
bow line of the ship. This assures that the encoder input increments/decrements from this initialization value so that the
encoder does not have to be precision aligned. When the antenna is pointed in-line with the bow (parallel to the bow) the
“Relative” display value should be 000.0 Relative (360.0 = 000.0). Good calibration is especially important if blockage mapping is
used, because the values entered into the AZ LIMIT parameters are entered in Relative Azimuth. The default Home Flag Offset
value saved in the ICU is 000.
The default mounting of the radome is with its bow reference
in-line with the bow and the base hatch in-line with the stern
(aft reference of the radome). There are valid reasons for
mounting the ADE in a different orientation than the default.
One of these would be that the hatch of radome needs to be
oriented inboard of the ship for safe entry into the dome (ie
ADE is mounted on the Port, or Starboard, edge of the ship and
safe entry is only available from inboard deck or inboard mast
rungs).
Observe initialization of the antenna. When Azimuth drives CW
and then stops at “Home” position, VISUALLY compare the
antennas pointing, while at Home position, to the bow-line of
the ship (parallel to the Bow).
If it appears to be very close to being parallel to the bow, you
will not need to change the HFO and should proceed with
Optimizing Targeting. When “Optimizing Targeting” small
variations (up to +/- 5.0 degrees) in Azimuth can be easily
corrected using the AZ TRIM feature.
If it is NOT close (stops before the bow or continues to drive Figure 8-1 Antenna stops In-line with Bow
past the bow) Sea Tel recommends that HFO be adjusted to
calibrate the relative position of the antenna.
If the antenna is pointing to the LEFT of the bow line: If the antenna stops driving before the bow line, when targeting a
satellite it will fall short of the desired satellite by exactly the same number of degrees that it fell short of the bow line. You
must calibrate HFO using either of the methods below.
If the antenna is pointing to the RIGHT of the bow line: If the antenna continues to drive past the bow line, when targeting a
satellite it will overshoot the desired satellite by exactly the same number of degrees that it went past the bow line. You must
calibrate HFO using either of the methods below.
If you find that a large value of AZ TRIM parameter has been used to calibrate the antenna, This indicates that the Relative
position is incorrect and should be “calibrated” using the correct HFO value instead of an Azimuth Trim offset.
If the radome was purposely rotated, has a large value of AZ TRIM or was inaccurately installed (greater than +/- 5 degrees),
there are two ways of setting Home Flag to compensate for the mounting error. They are Electronic, or Mechanical, Calibration
of Relative Antenna Position (Home Flag Offset).
Above, you VISUALLY compared the antenna pointing, while at “Home” position, to the bow-line of the ship and found that the
antenna pointing was NOT close to being parallel to the bow-line. It stopped before the bow or went past the bow OR you
found AZ TRIM has been set to a large value, therefore, HFO needs to be adjusted.
Ascertain the exact amount of error using the appropriate procedure below, enter the HFO to calibrate the antenna to the ship,
save the value and re-initialize the antenna to begin using the new value.

8.1. You Found a Large AZ TRIM value:

If Targeting has been optimized by entering a large value of AZ TRIM; First, verify that you are able to repeatably
accurately target a desired satellite (within +/- 1.0 degrees). Then you can use the AZ TRIM value as the HFO value (so
you can set AZ TRIM to zero). Set Home Flag to the AZ Trim value that was calculated (and click SAVE) and then set
the AZ Trim value to zero (and click SAVE). Both AZ TRIM and Home Flag are entered as the number of degrees and
tenths of degrees.

8-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical ManualSetup – Home Flag Offset (IMA Software 1.04 or lesser)

8.1.1. You Observe “Home” Pointing is LEFT of the Bow-line (minus HFO):
In this example, I observe that the Home
position is short of the bow line.
I estimate that it is about 45 degrees.
I target my desired satellite and record the
Calculated Azimuth to be 180.5.
I drive UP (I estimated that I will need to go UP
about 45 degrees) and finally find my desired
satellite.
Turn tracking ON to let the ACU peak the signal
up. When peaked, the Azimuth is 227.0
degrees.
I subtract Calculated from Peak (227 – 0180.5
= 46.5) and difference is 46.5 degrees.
Because the antenna initialized to the left of
the bow, I enter the offset as a minus value (-
46.5). If you use AUTO TRIM, it will enter the
correct offset for you.
I can calculate what the correct value for the Figure 8-2 Antenna stopped before the Bow
Home position of the antenna by subtracting
(because “home” was to the left of bow) this difference of 46.5 from the bow line position 360.0. Therefore
“home” should be -46.5 Relative.
I set, and Save, HFO to 46.5 using the Home Flag entry window, located on the System Configuration screen.
After I re-initialize the relative position of the antenna is now calibrated.

8.1.2. You Observe “Home” Pointing is RIGHT of the Bow-line (positive HFO) :
In this example, I observe that the Home
position is past the bow line.
I estimate that it is about 90 degrees.
I target my desired satellite and record the
Calculated Azimuth to be 180.0.
I drive DOWN (I estimated that I will need
to go DOWN about 89 degrees) and finally
find my desired satellite.
Turn tracking ON to let the ACU peak the
signal up. When peaked, the Azimuth is
90.0 degrees.
I subtract Calculated from Peak (180.0 –
90.0 = 90.0) and difference is 90.0 degrees.
Because the antenna initialized to the right
of the bow, I enter the offset as a positive
value (90.0). If you use AUTO TRIM, it will
enter the correct offset for you.
I can calculate what the correct value for Figure 8-3 Antenna stops past the Bow
the Home position of the antenna by
adding (because “home” was to the right of
bow) this difference of 09.0 to the bow line position 000.0. Therefore “home” should be 90.0 Relative.
I set, and Save, HFO to 90.0 using the Home Flag entry window, located on the System Configuration screen
(as shown in the previous section).
After I re-initialize the relative position of the antenna is now calibrated.
If there is a small amount of error remaining, I will use AZ TRIM in the Optimizing Targeting procedure to
correct it (as shown in the previous section).

8-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Home Flag Offset (IMA Software 1.04 or lesser)Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

8.1.3. Entering a large value as Home Flag Offset

If the amount of offset is greater than +/-5 degrees, enter it as Home Flag Offset. If it is within +/-5 degrees,
you should enter it in AZ TRIM.

1. Access the System Configuration

screen

2. Enter new Home Flag value (positive

or negative value)

3. Click SAVE

8-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical ManualSetup – Home Flag Offset (IMA Software 1.04 or lesser)

8.1.1. Entering a small value as AZ TRIM

If the amount of offset is greater than +/-5 degrees, Sea Tel recommends that you enter it as Home Flag
Offset. If it is within +/-5 degrees, you should enter it in AZ TRIM.

1. Access the Reflector Configuration

screen

2. Use Auto Trim, or enter the small

amount of AZ Trim positive or
negative value.

3. Click SAVE

8-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Azimuth Trim (IMA Ver 1.05 or greater) Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

9. Setup – Azimuth Trim (IMA Ver 1.05 or greater)

Beginning in IMA software version 1.05, calibrating the targeting of your antenna is much easier. This is accomplished
improving Sky Search and changing the way that Azimuth Trim works so that the need for Home Flag Offset is eliminated.
Azimuth Trim now corrects the relative position of the antenna in all configurations which have valid/accurate gyrocompass
input.
If the antenna has been purposely mounted with the bow mark of the ADE not in alignment with the bow of the ship, such as
for safe entry into the radome hatch, note and enter the approximate offset into the AZ TRIM parameter before searching for
the satellite for the first time. EXAMPLE: The antenna is being mounted on the port side of the ship where it is unsafe for the
hatch to be oriented directly in line with the stern. The installer rotates the ADE so that the bow mark is facing directly to the
port and bolts that ADE into place. When first powering the system up, he will enter +90 in the AZ TRIM parameter to indicate
that the ADE was rotated CW 90 degrees during the installation. This will make initial satellite acquisition faster (even though
sky search would still find the satellite). This entry is only needed on a new installation that AUTO TRIM has not been run on
yet. If the ADE had been similarly installed on the starboard side -90 degrees would have been entered to indicate that the ADE
was rotated CCW 90 degrees during the installation.

1. Access the Satellite Configuration screen.

2. Select Sky Search as your desired type of search

pattern to use for this initial satellite acquisition on
a newly installed antenna system.

3. Select the satellite that your airtime services will be

provided on in the Satellite Selection dropdown.
4. Refer to the next chapter to enter blockage zones
as desired.
5. After the desired satellite has been acquired, allow
the antenna to track for about 2 minutes BEFORE
clicking Auto Trim.
6. Refer to Setup – Targeting – and follow the
instruction for AUTO TRIM to optimize the
targeting of the antenna.
9-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Azimuth Trim (IMA Ver 1.05 or greater)

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

9-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Blockage & RF Radiation Hazard Zones Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

10. Setup – Blockage & RF Radiation Hazard Zones

The Blockage Zones function inhibits the antenna from transmitting within certain pre-set zones. This is typically some
structure of the ship that prevents satellite signal from getting to the Sea Tel antenna when the ship is at headings that put that
structure in-between the satellite and the satellite antenna,
However, it can also be used as an RF Radiation Hazard zone. If there is an area where people may be near the antenna (within
2 meters), in the antennas transmitted beam for extended periods of time the zone can be set up so that transmit from the
satellite antenna will be disabled whenever the antenna is pointed in that zone.

10.1. Radiation Hazard and Blockage Mapping

The MXP can be programmed with relative azimuth sectors (zones) where blockage exists or where transmit power
would endanger personnel who are frequently in that area. Your MXP software allows you to set four zones.
When you create these ZONES (up to four), several things happen when the antenna is within any one of the zones:
1. Tracking continues as long as the AGC value is greater than the Threshold value. When the AGC value drops
below Threshold, the antenna will wait “Search Delay” parameter amount of time and then re-target the
satellite you targeted last. Timeout and re-target will continue until the satellite is re-acquired and tracking
can resume.
2. The satellite modem transmission will be disabled
until the antenna exits the zone.
The lower and upper azimuth limits are entered into the
REL start, REL stop and EL fields within the MXP for each of
the blockage zones you wish to create (up to four). Each
zone can also be given a name (ie Mast, Deckhouse or
Stack:
REL Start is the Lower Relative AZ limit (this is
the more counter-clockwise of the two points,
even if it is numerically larger). REL Stop is the
Upper Relative AZ limit (the more clockwise of
the two points) for pattern mapping of each.
Enter the elevation value that represents the top
of the blockage between the two azimuth limit
points in the EL field.
Repeat for up to four zones, click SAVE when
completed.
Programming instructions:
Determine the Relative AZ positions where blockage, or
RF Radiation Hazard, exists. This may be done by
monitoring the received signal level and the REL display
readings while the ship turns or by graphing the expected
blockage pattern. Elevation of the antenna in normal use
also must be taken into consideration. A Mast or other
structure may cause blockage at low elevation angles, but
may not cause blockage when the antenna is at higher
elevation angles where it is able to look over the structure.
Up to four zones may be mapped. Only zones which are needed should be mapped.

10-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Blockage & RF Radiation Hazard Zones

EXAMPLE - Overlaid Blockage Zones: A ship has a Sea Tel antenna mounted on the center line of the ship. A
mast mounted on top of a deckhouse (like the picture below) is forward and an engine exhaust stack, also on a
deckhouse, is aft. These two blockage areas have wide azimuth blockage at lower elevations and then a narrower
azimuth area of blockage extends up to a higher value of elevation.
ZONE 1 named “Fwd Deckhouse” begins (REL Start) at 334 degrees Relative and ends (REL Stop) at 026
degrees Relative. Enter REL Start value of 334.0
and REL Stop value of 26.0. In this case the
mast height only causes blockage up to an
elevation of 40 degrees, so we set EL to 40.0. If
the antenna is between these two AZ Limit points
but not in the “mast” zone AND the elevation is
greater than 40 degrees, the antenna will no
longer be blocked.
ZONE 2 named “Mast” begins (REL Start) at 352
degrees Relative and ends (REL Stop) at 008
degrees Relative. Enter REL Start value of 352.0
and REL Stop value of 8.0. In this case the mast
height only causes blockage up to an elevation of
70 degrees, so we set EL to 70.0. If the antenna is between these two AZ Limit points but the elevation is
greater than 70 degrees, the antenna will no longer be blocked.
ZONE 3 named “Aft Deckhouse” begins (REL Start) at 155 degrees Relative and ends (REL Stop) at 205
degrees Relative. Enter REL Start value of 155.0 and REL Stop value of 205.0. In this case the aft
deckhouse height only causes blockage up to an elevation of 30 degrees, so we set EL to 30.0. If the antenna
is between these two AZ Limit points but the elevation is greater than 30 degrees, the antenna will no longer
be blocked.
ZONE 4 named “Stack” begins (REL Start) at 173 degrees Relative and ends (REL Stop) at 187 degrees
Relative. Enter REL Start value of 173.0 and REL Stop value of 187.0. In this case the stack height only
causes blockage up to an elevation of 55 degrees, so we set EL to 55.0. If the antenna is between these two
AZ Limit points but the elevation is greater than 40 degrees, the antenna will no longer be blocked.

10.2. Programming Instructions:

1. To set up the blockage zones go to the

System Configuration screen.

10-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Blockage & RF Radiation Hazard Zones Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

2. Enter a readily identifiable name for the

zone (ie Mast, Deck House or Stack).
3. Moving to the right, enter the relative of
the starting point of this blockage zone
(the more counter-clockwise bearing).
4. Then enter the relative bearing of the stop
point of this blockage zone (the more
clockwise of the two bearings).

5. Likewise, for Elevation, you need only to

enter the elevation angle, below which you
want the transmitter inhibited (blocked).

6. Repeat steps 2-5 to describe up to 4

blockage zones.

10-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Blockage & RF Radiation Hazard Zones

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

10-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Configuring The Satellite Modem Interface. Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

11. Configuring The Satellite Modem Interface.

The configuration setup of an integrated satellite modem to the MXP is accomplished via the Communication Interface Page
(Configuration>Interfaces link on the navigational panel on the left hand side of the screen). In order to access this page, the
user must be logged in as either “Dealer” or “SysAdmin”. The current software load, IMA Ver 105 at the time of this release)
contains 6 commonly used satellite Modems (iDirect, Comtech, Gilat, Hughes, STM, and Viasat) as selectable presets and is
typically a prompted selection when using the new Commissioning Wizard. However, the MXP allows configuration of a
“Custom” modem type. The primary focus of this procedure is to define all of the parameter options made available to allow
the commissioning technician to properly integrate any compatible L-Band Satellite modem.

11.1. Satellite Modem Interface

1. If not already, log into the system using

the “Dealer” or “SysAdmin” credentials.

2. On the left hand side of the screen, under

Configuration, select the “Interfaces”
link.

3. On the right side of the screen,

approximately half way down is the
“Modem Lock Mute” section. This section
is where the user, via drop down menu
selection and/or mutually exclusive radio
buttons, defines:
• Reflector
• Modem Type
• Modem I/O
• Lock Input
• Block Output

11-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Configuring The Satellite Modem Interface.

11.1.1. Reflector setting

Use: In a dual reflector based antenna system, the
“Reflector” selection defines which reflector the modem
configuration applies to.
Selection Type: Mutually Exclusive Radio Buttons
Options: Primary or Secondary
Notes: In the current Series 12 antennas this setting
should always be set to PRIMARY. Failure to do so may result
in abnormal system operation.

11.1.2. Modem Type setting

Use: This selection defines which manufacturer of
satellite modem is to be interfaced with the system.
Selection Type: Drop down menu selection
Options: iDirect, ComTech, Gilat, Hughes, STM, Viasat,
or Custom.
Notes: The selection of modem type (along with the
modem I/O) allows the IMA software to configure the
appropriate RX Network Lock, and TX Mute/Block output
Lock interfaces per the modem manufacturers’
specifications.
Once you select one of the manufacturers and I/O from
the dropdown list the other settings that are appropriate for that modem will be set for you (and greyed out).
If your modem manufacturer is not listed, you will need to select “Custom” and manually configure the
modem I/O properties. Refer to the custom settings information below.

11.1.3. Modem I/O setting

Use: This selection defines which type (and location) of
communication interface between the MXP and the
satellite modem.
Selection Type: Drop down menu selection
Options: OpenAMIP, ROAM, TS1, TS2, or CLI.
Notes: The Modem I/O selections of iDirect’s
OpenAMIP or ComTech’s ROAM, both forms of ABS
(Automatic Beam Switching), communicate via TCP/IP
traffic between the MXP’s J9 or J10 Ethernet port and
the applicable modems Ethernet port. It should also be
said that, to use these I/O types, there is a requirement that the integrated satellite modem and NOC
(hardware and software) are properly configured and capable to support said feature.
Modem RJ45 is used for standard console port type connections where GPS forwarding is required (i.e.
iDirect Console Port) in addition to Positive Satellite ID (RX Network Lock) and TX Mute/Blockage zone
functionality
TS1 and TS2 are hard wired interfaces used only for positive satellite ID (RX Lock) and TX mute functionality.
In some installations, CLI (Command Line Interface) may be desired. CLI is used when a third party ABS
device (separate from satellite modem itself) is interfaced to provide antenna control, positive satellite ID (Rx
Lock), and TX mute functionality via TCP/IP traffic between the MXP’s J9 or J10 Ethernet port, or Serial Traffic
(Console), and the applicable devices Ethernet port.

Figure 5 Available MXP Rear Panel Modem IO Ports

11-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Configuring The Satellite Modem Interface. Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

11.1.4. Modem I/O – Custom Settings

Use: The individual Modem I/O selections allow the user to manually define the expected driver (output) and
detector (input) circuit(s) as well as positive satellite ID
functionality between the MXP and the satellite modem.
Selection Type: Mutually Exclusive Radio Buttons
Options: Lock Input: On or Off, Polarity, 12V Pull up.
Block Output: Polarity and 12V Pull up
Notes: The lock input and Block output radio button
selections may only be modified if the Modem Type
“Custom” Modem Type has been selected.
If any of the other Modem Types are selected, the Lock
Input and Block Output radio buttons are predefined for
you by software and therefore become read only. This is
evidenced to the user by disabling the selections, see image to right for an example of this.
11.1.4.1. Modem I/O – Lock ON/OFF
Use: The Modem I/O Lock Input “Lock” selection defines whether or not the MXP will use positive
satellite ID functionality.
When OFF, the system will simply use the tracking receiver settings and the subsequent AGC from
the receiver to track an acquired satellite. This may be the desired satellite or it may be an adjacent
satellite that was acquired during a search for the desired satellite.
When ON, the system must get AGC and ALSO receive a network lock logic signal from the modem
to continue tracking the acquired satellite. This prevents tracking the wrong satellite and verifies
that the antenna is in fact on the desired satellite (to get network lock from the modem the antenna
must be on the correct polarity of the correct satellite). If during a search an adjacent satellite is
found, good AGC from the tracking receiver will cause the system to initially track/peak this satellite
but be waiting for a network lock signal from the satellite. If the lock signal is not received within
30-40 seconds, that system will return to the search track line and resume searching for the satellite
which provides AGC & Lock. Lock Input settings below MUST be set correctly for this functionality
to work properly.
Selection Type: Mutually Exclusive Radio Buttons
Options: Lock ON or OFF.
Notes: Modem Type “Custom” must have been selected to allow changes to these settings. Setting
Modem Lock to “ON” will enable the positive satellite ID feature whereas setting modem Lock to
“OFF” disables the feature. With the exception of the some calibration procedures (ie during Cross-
Pol isolation and 1dB compression tests) it highly recommended to leave this setting to ON. By
doing so, you eliminate tracking on adjacent satellites for any extended amount of time (typically
30-40 seconds)
11.1.4.2. Modem I/O – Lock Input – Polarity
Use: The Modem I/O Lock Input Polarity selection defines whether the hard lined wire input
provides a logic level high or logic level low as indication of Positive Satellite ID (RX Network Lock
indication).
Selection Type: Mutually Exclusive Radio Button
Options: Polarity Low or Hi.
Notes: Modem Type “Custom” must have been selected to allow changes to this setting.
You must refer to your satellite modems manufacturers written specifications for its nominal receive
lock indication output. Example if you have a satellite modem that provides a nominal 5VDC output
when in a NON-Locked condition (off satellite) and 0Vdc when in a locked condition (on satellite),
you would set Polarity to “Low”.
If your modem provides a continuity based output, short to ground is Low, and Open is High. If your
modems output is continuity based logic the Voltage must be set to 12V and the 12V pull up must
be set to “ON” (See Modem I/O Voltage & 12V Pull up sections below). Failure to do so may result in
a false Rx Lock trigger when the applicable modem interface cable is removed for any reason.

11-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Configuring The Satellite Modem Interface.

11.1.4.3. Modem I/O – Lock Input - Voltage

Use: The Modem I/O Lock Input Voltage selection defines the nominal voltage range for the hard
lined wire input for indication of Positive Satellite ID (RX Network Lock indication).
Selection Type: Mutually Exclusive Radio Buttons
Options: Voltage 3V, 5V or 12V.
Notes: Modem Type “Custom” must have been selected to allow changes to this setting.
You must refer to your satellite modems manufacturers written specifications for the receive lock
indication voltage range that it provides as an output. The receive logic level itself is interpreted by
the MXP based on the above mentioned Polarity selection (the actual Low versus Hi polarity trigger
is 50% of selected voltage range). Example: You have a satellite modem that provides a 12VDC
output range and Polarity has been set to Low. When the detected voltage is between 0 to 6Vdc,
the MXP would interpret this as a Positive Satellite ID. Voltage between 6.1 and 12Vdc would be
interpreted as a failed Positive Satellite ID (because it is High).
If your modem provides a continuity based output (short to ground is Low, and Open is high), you
must set this selection to 12V.
11.1.4.4. Modem I/O – Lock Input - 12V Pull Up
Use: The Modem I/O Lock Input 12V Pull Up selection defines whether or not to use a built-in
12VDC Pull up resistor for the hard lined wire input for indication of Positive Satellite ID (RX Network
Lock indication). The MXP requires a voltage input for this satellite ID functionality.
If your modem outputs continuity based logic, the pull up circuit (ON) converts the continuity to
voltage. For all voltage based modem outputs, it MUST be set to OFF to prevent false Positive Sat
ID indications (voltage high & higher, but never low).
Selection Type: Mutually Exclusive Radio Buttons
Options: 12V Pull Up Off or On.
Notes: Modem Type “Custom” must have been selected to allow changes to this setting.
If your modem provides a continuity based output (short to ground is Low, and Open is high) this
selection must be set to “ON”. For all voltage based modem outputs, it MUST be set to OFF.
11.1.4.5. Modem I/O – Block Output – Polarity
Use: The Modem I/O - Block Output selection defines whether or not the MXP will provide a logic
level Low or logic level Hi output when a condition exists that requires muting the IF transmission of
the system. This is known as TX Mute functionality and is a signal from the MXP to the Satellite
Modem (which in turn removes drive to the Block Up Converter mounted on the antenna assembly).
The signal flow for this feature is from the MXP to the Satellite Modem.
Selection Type: Mutually Exclusive Radio Buttons
Options: Polarity Low or Hi.
Notes: Modem Type “Custom” must have been selected to allow changes to this setting.
You must refer to your satellite modems manufacturers written specifications for the input required
to mute the modems output to the BUC. Ascertain whether the input signal must be Hi or Low logic
to mute and whether it is continuity based logic or voltage based.
Example: If your satellite modem requires a Hi logic input (continuity or voltage) to cease
transmissions you must select Hi.
There are numerous compliance laws (FCC and other worldwide entities) that mandate the ability
and/or need to immediately mute transmit on a VSAT system when at least one of numerous
predefined conditions are met. In most cases, these are conditions that ultimately determine that
the system is not accurately pointed to the desired satellite. However there are some conditions
where this may not be true, as is the case of the antenna being pointed at a pre-defined “Radiation
Hazard Zone”, which discussed in detail within another chapter of this manual, is programmed in as a
Blockage Zone, thus the name Block Output.

11-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Configuring The Satellite Modem Interface. Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

There may be an area on board the vessel in which crew and/or guests may be in the direct path of
the terminals transmission to the satellite and might possibly be harmed by long term exposure to
the microwave signal. This sector would be described as a blockage zone so that the transmissions
from the antenna would cease when pointed in that area. Similarly a mast or other structure on the
ship, directly in the beam path of the transmission, which would prevent transmitted signal from
reaching the satellite and cause reflections which may degrade the signal or even be harmful to the
antenna. These obstructions would also be described as a blockage zones. This similar in concept to
“sector blanking” a radar array.
11.1.4.6. Modem I/O – Block Output – 12V Pull Up
Use: The Modem I/O Block Output 12V Pull Up selection defines whether or not use a built-in
12VDC Pull up resistor for the hard lined wire input for Blockage output (TX Mute).
If your modem requires a continuity based input (Short to ground is Low, and Open is High) this
selection must be set to OFF. For all voltage based modem inputs, it MUST be set to ON.
Selection Type: Mutually Exclusive Radio Buttons
Options: 12V Pull Up OFF or ON.
Notes: Modem Type “Custom” must have been selected to allow changes to this setting.
Example: Your modem requires a high, voltage based, input to mute the modem. You would set
Polarity to Hi and 12V Pull Up to ON.
If your modem required a low, continuity based, input to mute the modem. You would set Polarity
to Low and 12V Pull Up to OFF.

11.2. Quick Reference: Common Modem Lock & Mute Settings

Modem Compatibl Lock Lock Lock Lock Block Block

Type e ABS Input - Input – Input – Input - Output - Output -
Mode Lock Polarity Voltage 12V Pull Polarity 12V Pull
Up Up
iDirect OpenAMIP* On Low 12 Off Hi On
ComTech ROAM* On Low 12 On Low On
Gilat N/A On Low 12 Off Low Off
Hughes N/A On Hi 12 Off Hi On
STM N/A On Low 3 Off Low Off
Viasat N/A On Low 12 Off Low Off
Custom CLI* On As Required As Required As Required As Required As Required
*NOTE: When interfacing ABS (via Ethernet connection) Lock input and Block Output selections have no operational impact.

11-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Configuring The Satellite Modem Interface.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

11-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Targeting Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

12. Setup – Targeting

Optimize the targeting of the antenna to track on or near a desired satellite (within +/-1 degree.

12.1. AUTO TRIM

The Auto Trim function will automatically calculate and set the required Azimuth and Elevation trim offset parameters
required to properly calibrate the antennas display to the mechanical angle of the antenna itself, while peaked ON
satellite.
After locating the satellite, with Tracking ON, wait at least 2 minutes before performing the AUTO TRIM, this will
allow sufficient time for the antenna to peak up on the satellite signal and for the targeting loops to completely
stabilize. It is equally important that you verify that the system is tracking the CORRECT satellite (verify a RX lock
indication on the satellite modem).

NOTE: The AUTO TRIM feature is NOT allowed unless all of these conditions are met:
• The antenna must be actively tracking a satellite (AGC above threshold) AND
• The antenna must have positive SAT ID (RX lock input from the Satellite Modem) AND
• The elevation angle of the antenna must be LESS than 83 degrees AND
• The antenna must NOT be set for Inclined Orbit Search AND
• The system must NOT be set for “No Gyro” mode.

1. To activate the Auto Trim function go to

the Reflector Configuration screen.

2. Click on the Auto Trim button.

This does not save these parameters to NVRAM, in

order to save to memory, click the Save button.

12-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Targeting

3. Click SAVE

12.2. Manually Optimizing Targeting

1. First, assure that all of your Ship & Satellite

settings in the MXP are correct.
2. Access the Satellite Search screen
3. Target the desired satellite by selecting it
from the drop down list. You will see a
message “Acquiring Satellite Signal…Please
Wait” displayed.
4. Watch the Azimuth and Elevation values
displayed in the center area of the banner
and prepare to click the Track OFF button.
When targeting the antenna will initially drive to an
elevation position that is 8 degrees above (or below
if the elevation is greater than 83 degrees) the
actual calculated position that the satellite should
be at. After azimuth and polarization also finish
driving, the elevation will drive to the actual
elevation of the satellite
5. As soon as the elevation drives (up or
down) 8 degrees click the Track OFF
button and record the Azimuth and
Elevation positions (these are the
Calculated positions)..
6. Click Track ON button and allow the
antenna to search, acquire and track the
desired satellite.
As this happens you will see “Satellite Signal Found”
and “Modem Lock: LOCKED” messages displayed.
Select the Position Antenna screen., turn Tracking
OFF and click Save.
7. After the antenna has been tracking for
several minutes, record the Azimuth and
Elevation positions of the antenna (these
are the Peak positions).
8. Subtract the Peak Positions from the
Calculated Positions to determine the
amount of Trim which is required.

12-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Targeting Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

9. Access the Reflector Configuration page.

10. Enter the Elevation Trim in the EL field.

11. Enter the Azimuth Trim in the AZ field.

12. Click Save.

13. Re-target the satellite several times to
verify that targeting is now driving the
antenna to a position that is within +/- 1.0
degrees of where the satellite signal is
located.

EXAMPLE: The antenna initially targets to an

Elevation position of 38.0 degrees and an Azimuth
position of 180.2. Shortly after that the Elevation
drives to 30.0 degrees and Azimuth stays at 180.2
(Calculated), you find that Peak Elevation while ON
your desired satellite is 31.5 degrees and Peak
Azimuth is 178.0. You would enter an EL TRIM
value of –1.5 degrees and an AZ TRIM of +2.2
degrees. After these trims values have been set,
your peak “ON” satellite Azimuth and Elevation
displays would be very near 180.2 and 30.0
respectively.

12-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Targeting

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

12-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Satellite Configuration Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

13. Setup – Satellite Configuration

The values that these parameters are set to depends on the hardware configuration required for each satellite. Configure each
of the satellites that airtime services will be provided on so that any one of them can be selected, remotely or by the user
onboard. The satellite selection will in turn control the hardware on the antenna pedestal to select the correct TX & RX
hardware and the correct tracking settings.
Sea Tel provides quad-band LNBs as standard on the Ku-Band feed assemblies.

13.1. Searching Patterns

The MXP will initiate an automated search pattern after AGC falls below the current Threshold setting (indicates that
satellite signal has been lost). The SEARCH DELAY parameter sets the amount of delay, in seconds that the MXP will
wait after AGC has fallen below the threshold value before it starts a search. Below are the choices of patterns that
each satellite can be set to.

13.1.1. Default “Spiral” (Box) Search Pattern

The factory default search pattern in the MXP is a “Spiral” pattern.
When a search begins;
The antenna will then search up in azimuth one Search
Increment, search up one Search Increment in elevation,
search down two Search Increments in azimuth, search
down two Search Increments in elevation, etc until Search
Limit is reached. When the end of the search pattern is
reached, the MXP will retarget the antenna to the calculated
Azimuth and Elevation position of the desired satellite (start
point).
If the desired signal is found (AND network lock is achieved
in the satellite modem) at this position, or anywhere within
the search pattern, the MXP will terminate search and go
into Tracking mode. If the desired signal is not found the MXP will wait SEARCH DELAY seconds and then
begin the search pattern again. This cycle will repeat until the desired satellite signal is found or the operator
intervenes.

13.1.2. Inclined Orbit Search Pattern

Some older satellites, in order to save fuel to keep them exactly positioned over the Equator, are in an
inclined geosynchronous orbit. The satellite remains
geosynchronous but is no longer geostationary. From a fixed
observation point on Earth, it would appear to trace out a
figure-eight with lobes oriented north-southward once every
twenty-four hours. The north-south excursions of the
satellite may be too far off the center point for a default box
search pattern to find that satellite at all times during the 24
hour period.
When a search begins;
Initially the antenna will go to a calculated position that is
half of SWEEP INCR degrees above, and perpendicular to, the
satellite arc (along the same angle as polarization for the
desired satellite). This position is the “Start” of the search
pattern in the graphic above. Then the antenna will drive
down along the polarization angle SWEEP INCR degrees, step one Search Increment to the right (parallel to
the satellite arc), search up along the polarization angle SWEEP INCR degrees, step two Search Increments to
the left, search down, etc expanding out in the search pattern until Search Limit is reached. When the end of
the search pattern is reached, the MXP will retarget the antenna to the calculated Azimuth and Elevation
point.

13-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Satellite Configuration

If the desired signal is found (AND network lock is achieved in the satellite modem) at this position, or
anywhere within the search pattern, the MXP will terminate search and go into Tracking mode. If the desired
signal is not found the MXP will wait SEARCH DELAY, then target the antenna to start point shown in the
graphic above and begin the search pattern again. This cycle will repeat until the desired satellite signal is
found or the operator intervenes.

13.1.3. Sky Search Pattern

A Sky Search pattern does a hemispheric pattern. It behavior is different if you have a gyro compass input or
not::
No Gyro - If you do not have gyro compass set the gyro type to “no gyro”. When in this mode, Sky Search
drives the antenna to the calculated elevation angle and then drives azimuth CW 450 degrees, steps elevation
up and then drives azimuth CCW 450 degrees and continues to alternately steps elevation up/down and
drives azimuth alternately CW/CCW 450 degrees. Because of this large search area, acquiring the satellite will
take longer than if you have valid heading input. If the end of the search pattern is reached, the MXP will
retarget the antenna back to the start point shown in the graphic below.
With Gyro - If you have gyro compass set the gyro type to the appropriate selection. When in this mode,
Sky Search drives the antenna to the calculated elevation angle and then drives azimuth CW 360 degrees,
steps elevation up and then drives azimuth CCW 360 degrees and continues to alternately steps elevation
up/down and drives azimuth alternately CW/CCW 360 degrees. Because of this large search area, acquiring
the satellite will take less time because you have valid heading input. If the end of the search pattern is
reached, the MXP will retarget the antenna back to the start point shown in the graphic below.

If the desired signal is found (AND network lock is achieved in the satellite modem) at any position within the
search pattern, the MXP will terminate search and go into Tracking mode.
If the desired signal is not found within the search pattern the MXP will wait SEARCH DELAY seconds and
then begin the search pattern again. This cycle will repeat until the desired satellite signal is found or the
operator intervenes.

13.2. TX Pol select

Is used to select the transmit polarity of the C-Band Linear/Circular selectable feed, or the Ku-Band linear feed,
whichever is currently installed.

13.3. Band select

Controls the band selection of the selected LNB (X-Pol or Co-Pol ) on the Ku-Band linear feed ONLY. This setting works
in conjunction with the X-Pol / Co-Pol selection setting.

13.4. X-Pol / Co-Pol select

Selects the desired (X-Pol or Co-Pol) on the Ku-Band linear feed ONLY. This setting works in conjunction with the band
selection setting.

13.5. Selecting/Configuring Your Satellite Configuration

Choose a predefined satellite configuration or create a new one using the steps below.

13-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Setup – Satellite Configuration Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

1. Access the Satellite Configuration screen.

2. Select the satellite that your airtime
services will be provided on (or add a new
one).

3. Select the desired type of search pattern

to use for this satellite.

4. Select desired TX Polarity from the drop

down menu.

5. Select desired Band from its drop down

menu.

13-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Setup – Satellite Configuration

6. Assure that reflector is set to “Primary”.

7. Select Cross-Pol LNB (XPol) or Co-Pol LNB
(CoPol) as is appropriate for this satellite.

8. Click the Save button.

13-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Quick Start Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

14. Quick Start Operation

If your system has been set up correctly, and if the ship has not moved since the system was used last, the system should
automatically acquire the satellite from a cold (power-up) start. Once the satellite has been acquired, the modem then should
achieve lock and you should be able to use the system.

14.1. If satellite signal is found AND network lock is achieved:

1. Tracking will take over (front panel

Tracking LED will be ON) and automatically
peak the antenna position for highest
receive signal level from the satellite.

2. When the ICU has signal above threshold

AND modem has network lock the
antenna will continue to track the satellite.
3. Satellite Name (if entered), Tracking
indicator, Modem Lock indicator and
signal level (number value and bar graph)
will be displayed in the header of the MXP
GUI pages.
Upon completion of the above, the system will
continue to operate automatically, indefinitely until:
• AC power to the system is interrupted
OR
• The satellite signal is blocked OR
• The ship sails into an area of
insufficient satellite signal
strength/level.

14.2. If no signal is found:

If the system does NOT automatically find the satellite from a cold start, follow the steps below:

1. The Tracking LED will flash for a short

period of time (Search Delay) followed by
the Search LED coming ON.
2. The ICU will automatically move the
antenna in the selected Search pattern
until looking for a signal value that is
greater than the threshold value (red bar in
the bar graph below).

14-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Quick Start Operation

3. Not finding a signal greater than

Threshold, the bar graph will stay red and
the antenna will reach the end of the
prescribed search pattern.
4. The antenna will retarget and the cycle will
repeat (Search Delay timeout, conduct
search pattern followed by retarget).

5. Check Latitude, Longitude and Heading.

These should be correct, but may be
updated if necessary.
6. Access the System Status screen.

7. Find the Latitude, Longitude and Heading

displayed values. If they are correct skip
to step 12.

8. If the Latitude & Longitude values are not

correct, access the Communication
Interfaces screen and enter the ships
Latitude & Longitude position in the fields
provided.
9. Click Save.

14-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Quick Start Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

10. If the Heading value is correct, enter the

correct value in the lower right field of the
Communication Interfaces screen.
11. Click Save.
12. Check for blockage (this is the MOST
common cause of not being able to
acquire the desired satellite).
13. Verify that the correct satellite is selected.
14. Check cable connections to assure that a
cable has not been disconnected.

14.3. If satellite signal is found but network lock is NOT achieved:

1. The Tracking LED will flash for a short

period of time (Search Delay) followed by
the Search LED coming ON.
2. The ICU will automatically move the
antenna in the selected Search pattern
until it receives a signal value that is
greater than the threshold value (red bar in
the bar graph). If signal above Threshold is
found, Tracking will take over (Tracking
LED ON) and automatically peak the
antenna position for highest receive signal
level from the satellite which has been
acquired. The system will wait for the
modem to achieve lock. If the modem
does not get lock, the antenna will resume
its search pattern.
3. If the system does not acquire the correct
satellite within the prescribed search
pattern, the antenna will retarget and the
cycle will repeat (Search Delay timeout,
conduct search pattern followed by
retarget).
4. Check Latitude, Longitude and Heading.
These should be correct, but may be
updated if necessary.
5. Access the System Status screen.

14-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Quick Start Operation

6. Find the Latitude, Longitude and Heading

displayed values. If they are correct skip
to step 11.

7. If the Latitude & Longitude values are not

correct, access the Communication
Interfaces screen and enter the ships
Latitude & Longitude position in the fields
provided.
8. Click Save.

9. If the Heading value is correct, enter the

correct value in the lower right field of the
Communication Interfaces screen.
10. Click Save.
11. Check for blockage (this is the MOST
common cause of not being able to
acquire the desired satellite).
12. Verify that the correct satellite is selected.
13. Check for polarization drive failure.
14. Check for improper polarization
alignment/position.
15. Check cable connections to assure that a
cable has not been disconnected.
16. Check the modem for failure.

14-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Quick Start Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

14.4. To Target a different satellite

1. To target a different satellite go to the

Satellite Search Auto screen and select
the desired satellite from the drop
down list.

2. When you make that selection you will

see the temporary message:

Acquiring Satellite Signal…Please Wait

3. Shortly after that you will see the

temporary message:

Satellite Signal Found.

Modem Lock: LOCKED

14-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Quick Start Operation

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

14-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Optimizing Cross-Pol Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

15. Optimizing Cross-Pol Isolation

Now that all of the other setup items have been checked and changed as necessary, it is time to contact the NOC to arrange for
cross-pol isolation testing and whatever other commissioning the NOC asks for. Read this procedure thoroughly before you are
asked to begin. Assure that you are on the correct satellite and have RX network lock. (the NOC may have you adjust TX
Frequency and/or modem TX level prior to beginning cross-pol isolation). At the appointed time follow the steps below for the
cross-pol isolation testing.

15.1. Optimizing Cross-Pol Isolation

1. Access the Tools - Position Antenna

screen.
NOTE: You will use Skew to optimize polarization
because it drives the feed immediately (Linear
Offset is slower, longer term drive).
2. Record the value in the Skew field in the
upper section of the screen. If this
satellite has a known Skew, it will be
entered in the satellite configuration
displayed here. If this satellite is not
skewed this field will be 0.0.
3. While talking to the technician at the NOC
make adjustments to the Skew value to
adjust polarity of the feed under his/her
direction (minus values are accepted –
type a minus sign before the number
value). It is best to adjust in one degree
increments to get close to best isolation
and then half degree steps and then
tenths as needed. Click “Submit” after
each numeric change is typed in.
4. Record the DIFFERENCE in Skew value
which was required to achieve optimum
cross-pol isolation.
5. Set Skew back to the value recorded in
step 2.
6. Access the Reflector Configuration
screen.
7. Change the “Linear Offset” value by the
amount of difference recorded in step 4.
Examples:
Skew was 0.0, you increased it to 2.5 to optimize
TX polarization. You set Skew back to zero and go
to the Reflector Configuration screen where you
find Linear Offset to be 0.0, so you increase Linear
Offset to 2.5 degrees and click Save.
Skew was 3.0, you decrease it to 1.0 to optimize TX
polarization. You set Skew back to 3.0 and go to
the Reflector Configuration screen where you find
Linear Offset to be 0.0, so you set Linear Offset to
minus 2 (-2.0) degrees and click Save.

15-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Optimizing Cross-Pol Isolation

8. Double check with the NOC to assure that

cross-pol is still optimized.
9. Conduct any other testing as directed by
the NOC (ie P1dB compression).

15-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Codan Mini-BUC Ethernet M&C Install & Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

16. Codan Mini-BUC Ethernet M&C Install & Operation

Below are general instructions only. Please refer to your Codan Manual for more detailed instructions, updated information and
a complete list of commands.

16.1. Cable Installation

1. Connect one end of an Ethernet

cable to the Ethernet connector on
the CFE computer (or to a CFE router
or CFE LAN Hub which the computer
can access).
2. Connect the other end of the
Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
on the rear panel of the MXP.

16.2. Setting up the IP address and subnet mask in the computer.

The options that you see depend upon the version of Microsoft Windows® that you have installed (Windows® XP is
described below). The steps to set the computers IP address may be different in your version of Windows®.
If you are using a network computer, consult your IT department/representative for proper IP address & subnet mask
settings, of the computer, the MXP and the BUC, that will be compatible with your existing LAN.
To set up an IP address and subnet mask in a single, dedicated, Windows XP computer:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings—Control Panel—Network Connections:
3. Double-click on the network that you want to use from the list of available networks under LAN or High-
Speed Internet.
4. In the Local Area Connection Status window, click on Properties.
5. Scroll through the listed components used by this connection, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click
on Properties.
6. Select Use the following IP address, then enter an IP address that is within the same subnet
(192.168.xxx) as the Mini-BUC. For example, to communicate with the default settings of the Mini-BUC,
type 192.168.0.14
CAUTION: Do not use the same IP address as the Mini-BUC (192.168.0.12) for the IP address of the
computer. The last set of digits in the IP address must be different, for example, 192.168.0.13 and
192.168.0.14.
7. Enter an appropriate subnet mask. For example, type 255.255.255.0
8. Click on OK or Close in each window to save the settings and close each window.

16-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Codan Mini-BUC Ethernet M&C Install & Operation

16.3. Communicating with the Codan Mini-BUC using Codan GUI

1. Install the Codan GUI M&C Software

program on the desired computer.
2. Open the Codan GUI M&C Software
program.
3. Login using:
Username: netuser
Password: codan
4. Click Submit

5. Select the Auxiliary Settings Page

6. In the Network Interface section,
set Mini-BUC IP address and Subnet
Mask as is appropriate. Defaults are:
Mini BUC Default IP Address:
192.168.0.12
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
7. View/Change other settings as
needed.
8. Select BUC Status Page to view
status.

9. Main Settings Page

10. View/change settings as needed.

11. To return to Codan default settings,

click Default.

12. Select the Faults Page to view/clear

fault(s).

13. Clear faults by clicking Clear.

14. Reboot the Mini-BUC by clicking

Reboot.
15. Close the Codan GUI program when
finished.

16-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Codan Mini-BUC Ethernet M&C Install & Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

16.4. Issuing Set, Output and View Commands via Telnet

To start a Telnet session on the LAN interface:
1. From the Start menu, select Run.
2. Type telnet <IP address of the Mini-BUC> 6000 in the Open field, then click on OK. For example, type
telnet 192.168.0.12 6000
3. At the Login: prompt type netuser codan, then press Enter.
4. Type hlp then press Enter, or refer to the Codan Manual for a complete list of commands.
A list of help categories is displayed. You can use these commands to drill down for further help for the Set,
Output and View commands for the Mini-BUC. For example, type hsc, then press Enter to see the help for
the Set commands.
5. If you want to exit the Telnet session, type quit, then press Enter.

16-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Codan Mini-BUC Ethernet M&C Install & Operation

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

16-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Codan LBUC Serial M&C Install & Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

17. Codan LBUC Serial M&C Install & Operation

Below are general instructions only. Please refer to your Codan Manual for more detailed instructions, updated information and
a complete list of commands.

17.1. Cable Installation

1. Connect the DB-9 connector of the

138691-1 serial cable, to the Com
Port of your computer.
2. Connect the RJ-45 connector to J9
A (only) serial connector on the rear
panel of the MXP.

17.2. Communicating with the Codan LBUC

This procedure is based on ProgTerm, but HyperTerminal or similar program may be used.

1. Open ProgTerm on the computer.

2. Click the “CommPort” tab.
3. Select “Properties”.

17-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Codan LBUC Serial M&C Install & Operation

4. Select Serial
5. Select COM1
6. Set Baud to 9600
7. Set Data Bits to 8
8. Set Parity to None
9. Set Stop Bit to 1
10. Set Echo OFF
11. Set Flow Control to None
12. Click OK

13. Type VSS (hit return) to get status.

14. Type any other M&C commands as
desired (refer to the Codan
commands in their manual or type
“HELP” for list of all commands
available.

17-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Comtech BUC Serial M&C Install & Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

18. Comtech BUC Serial M&C Install & Operation

Below are general instructions only. Please refer to your Comtech Manual for more detailed instructions, updated information
and a complete list of commands.

18.1. Cable Installation

1. Connect the DB-9 connector of the

138691-1 serial cable, to the Com
Port of your computer.
2. Connect the RJ-45 connector to J9
A serial connector on the rear panel
of the MXP.

18.2. Communicating with the Comtech BUC

This procedure is based on ProgTerm, but HyperTerminal or similar program may be used.

1. Open ProgTerm on the computer.

2. Click the “CommPort” tab.
3. Select “Properties”.

18-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Comtech BUC Serial M&C Install & Operation

4. Select Serial
5. Select COM1
6. Set Baud to 9600
7. Set Data Bits to 8
8. Set Parity to None
9. Set Stop Bit to 1
10. Set Echo OFF
11. Set Flow Control to None
12. Click OK

13. Type VSS (hit return) to get status.

14. Type any other M&C commands as
desired (refer to the Comtech
commands in their manual or type
“HELP” for list of all commands
available.

18-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19. Dealer Menus

The 12 Series is pre-configured at the factory. Other than the parameters which have been covered previously in this manual,
these remaining parameters will not normally need to be changed. However, the following is a complete listing of all of the
menu screens and the parameter setting available on each of those screens.

19.1. Functional Differences among the three log in categories

The operation menus are offered in three log in categories: Dealer, SysAdmin, and User. The Dealer has the most
features, and the User has the fewest. This is because the Dealer will need to interact with the system on a more
technical level than an operator will. Also, if less technical operators would have the same access as a Dealer they
could make incorrect control entries, and that could cause serious functional problems.

Dealer SysAdmin User

Satellite Search Satellite Search Satellite Search

Auto Auto Auto

Configuration Configuration Configuration

Interfaces Interfaces Interfaces
System System
Reflector Reflector
Satellite Satellite Satellite
Profile

Status Status Status

Graphs Graphs Graphs
System System System

Tools Tools
CLI Command CLI Command
Position Antenna Position Antenna
Test Test

Logs Logs Logs

Activity Activity Activity
Data Export Data Export Data Export

Others Others Others

Admin
Change Password Change Password Change Password
FAQ FAQ FAQ
Help Help Help

NOTE: Dealer password overrides all other passwords.

19-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

19.2. System Status

There are no entries that you can make on this screen. It is read only, and is periodically refreshed. The System Status
screen would also be displayed if you had clicked on the word “System”, under the “Status” menu group. There are five
groups of parameters on this screen

The System group on this display provides

indicators for

Modem Rx Lock
Tx Mute
Error

This display can also be viewed in the header of

every menu screen.

19-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

The Front Panel LED group on this display

provides the same six indicators that are on the
front panel of the MXP

Error
Initializing
Power
Target
Search
Tracking
These represent the six LEDs seen on the front
panel of the MXP.

19-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

19.3. Satellite Signal Automatic Search

The ship’s position (Latitude & Longitude) and Heading are displayed in the header of every menus screen. The
Latitude & Longitude are also displayed on this screen where you view the satellite which is currently selected, or select
the satellite you want to target.
Here you can select a satellite by clicking on the drop down menu and choosing the desired satellite from this
saved/configured satellites in the drop down list.
Once a satellite is selected, targeting and inclined searching is performed automatically.
Clicking on the drop down box will allow you to see the selections.
This is the method of satellite selection that will most commonly be utilized by the users, under the “User” Log-in.

19-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.4. Communication Interfaces

All of the parameters on this screen are

configurable, except MAC Address.

Throughout all of the menu screens, if the

parameter is not in an entry box you can not
edit it (ie MAC Address).

If the parameter is in an entry box it can be

edited (ie DNS IP Address).

19-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

The Network section includes the display of

• MAC Address
• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Gateway
• DNS IP Address

The Port information section includes the

display of the address of
• UDP Port Number
• Web Port Number
• Secure Web Port Number
The TCP section provides for the settings of
• Port Number
• Mode of Communication
• The ability to lock each one.

When you click on the drop down arrow of any

of these you will see three choices:
• Legacy
• CLI
• OpenAMIP
Legacy applies to the protocol of the DAC series
ACUs.
CLI applies to the IMA format, which applies to
this new MXP software.
OpenAMIP is an iDirect protocol.

When you click on this drop down menu you will

have the following speed choices (bits-per-
second):
• 4800
• 9600
• 19200
• 38400
• 57600
• 115200

19-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

When you click on this drop down, you will have

the following choices:
• OFF
• GGA
• GLL
• HDD
• HDG
• HDM
• HDT
• RMC
• VTG
External Modem Input Polarity, Low Lock or High
lock, corresponds to whether the modem is
going to provide a logic High or a logic Low to
indicate a receive lock condition.
This makes the system compatible with any
modem manufacturer.
• Blockage output polarity must be
selected correctly (for your modem) to
Mute your satellite modem when the
antenna is within a blockage zone and
to UN-Mute your satellite modem
when the antenna is not blocked.

The first item here is Reflector: Primary or

Secondary.

This should always be set to Primary.

When you click on this drop down, you will have

the following choices:
• Modem RJ45
• TMS 1
• TMS 2
• Open AMIP

19-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

You can turn the Modem Lock function On or

Off by selecting On or Off.

Modem Lock functionality is required for FCC

compliance.

Also for FCC compliance:

You must select the input polarity of the Lock
output from your specific modem AND you
must select the output polarity of the Block
signal which is used to Mute (TX Mute) your
specific modem.

Toward the bottom left area of the display is the

Gyro section.

The drop down menu for Gyro type provides the

following choices:
• 360:1 Sync with S/D Converter
• 90:1 Sync with S/D Converter
• 36:1 Sync with S/D Converter
• 1:1 Sync with S/D Converter
• Fixed
• NMEA
• No Gyro
• SBS Step by Step

19-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

The Console section allows you to select

whether the flow control is to be RTS or CTS.

There is a drop down menu for the USB Port,

and it has three parameter selections:
• Legacy (Legacy format)
• CLI (newer format)
• OFF

This USB Port selection is for the mini USB port

J6 on the rear panel of the MXP.

The Ship Position may be entered directly into

these two entry boxes, located in the lower right
section of the Communication Interfaces screen,
however, it is automatically populated from the
on-board GPS located on the antenna pedestal.

19-9 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

19.5. System Configuration

The top area of the System Configuration screen

is utilized to set up the blockage zones.

19-10 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Why set up blockage zones?

Safety – prevent potentially harmful RF

radiation when the antenna is pointed where
people congregate.
Signal Losses – annotate locations of
obstructions (mast, stack, deckhouse and other
structures) which block the signal from the
satellite, preventing it from getting to the
antenna pedestal/reflector.

Creating an Azimuth blockage zone is as easy as

entering the relative bearings of the start and
stop points for that blockage.

Likewise, for Elevation, you need only to enter

the elevation angle, below which you want the
transmitter inhibited (blocked).

Each blockage zone can have its own

name/description.

After the antenna has initialized and is at the

Home Flag, but the antenna is not physically
inline with the bow of the ship, you would enter
the amount of offset here to calibrate the
relative position of the antenna.
If the gyro compass input to the system is good,
leave Satellite Reference Mode OFF. If there is
no gyro compass input to the system, the gyro
compass is not accurate or is giving
many/frequent errors, you must turn Satellite
Reference Mode ON. puts it into Sat Reference
Mode..

19-11 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

If you want Auto Sat Load at power up, the

Power Up “On” button must be selected
(Recommended).
If you want the system to automatically retarget
the satellite when a Search pattern reaches its
Limit without having acquired the desired
satellite, the Search Failure “On” button must be
selected (Recommended).

The Profile Number is selected by a drop down

menu on the Hardware Configuration screen.
There is currently only one profile.

The System Serial Number is established just

before shipping and cannot be changed.

The operator enters the Ship Name and Antenna

Name.

Vlim Ratio and Antenna Model are displayed on

the Hardware Configuration screen.
Slow Scan changes the way that the system
drives a motor. There are certain instances
where we want to drive the antenna extremely
slow: .2, .3 degrees per second. An example of
when you may want to do that is for side lobe
testing..
Slow Scan Vlimit is Slow Scan Velocity Limit.
Step resolution defines how far the antenna
drives in a single step pass in a search pattern.
For the expanding box pattern it drives up in AZ,
up in EL, down in AZ, down in EL..
WARNING: These parameters should never be
changed from their default values in normal
operation.
The number of reflectors is a feature of the
software, but it only applies to other antenna
models, which have more than one reflector.
The 9711 QOR has two reflectors.
Here, the drive motor rotation can be reversed if
that is needed in order to drive any antenna
model movement in the correct direction.
WARNING: These parameters should never be
changed from their default values in normal
operation.

19-12 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Motor Gains are the proportional gain values for

the motors. These are set to the correct values
for the antenna model by the profile number.
WARNING: These parameters should never be
changed from their default values in normal
operation.

Motor Reference Limit is a torque trip level that

would trigger an error condition if that torque
level is exceeded.
WARNING: These parameters should never be
changed from their default values in normal
operation.

19-13 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

19.6. Reflector Configuration

Primary and Secondary are for future antenna

systems. The 12 Series has a single reflector, so
only the “Primary” should be selected.

19-14 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Fields used to calibrate the targeting (trim) the

antenna.

Dish Scan can be turned On or Off. It should

always be ON for normal operation and is
typically only turned OFF when balancing the
antenna and when optimizing cross-pol
isolation.

Auto Search can be enabled or disabled.

Search Increment defines how far the antenna
drives in a single step pass in a search pattern.
Search Limit specifies how big the search pattern
is going to be., so in this example, it will drive a
total of six degrees, in AZ and EL.
If it is able to drive a full six degrees without
going above the threshold it will reach “Search
Fail”.
Search Delay indicates how many seconds the
system will wait, with AGC below Threshold,
before it initiates a search pattern.
Scan Rate determines how fast the antenna will
drive in AZ, in a “No Gyro” mode of operation.
Incline Limit refers to Inclined Orbit tracking.
Notice that in this case it is set for 16° (+/- 8°).

19-15 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

AZ & EL tracking decisions are made every

second. Tracking Sensitivity determines how
many of the tracking decisions are actually sent
to the motors to reposition the antenna.
A 100% entry would represent one tracking
decision per second, so 50% represents one
tracking decision every two seconds.
It is recommended that the sensitivity not be
changed from the default values.

When the Calculate button is pressed the new

AGC threshold is set to the average signal level
input plus the AUTO THRES offset value.

For example:
If the Noise Floor off-satellite is 1000 counts of
AGC, and if Auto Threshold is set to 100, the
Threshold will be set to approximately 1100
after the antenna has finished targeting or
Searching.

Local Oscillator setting of the LNB(s) – defaults

are set to the LO values of the LNB(s) we
supplied with the antenna.

19-16 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

DishScan drive values - leave at factory

defaults.

The Polang Drive: Auto/Manual and the Linear

and Circular mechanical offsets come from the
Reflector Configuration screen.
In Auto the feed drives automatically, based on
the geo location of the satellite you are
targeting.
In Manual it doesn’t drive until you change the
value.

19-17 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

19.7. Satellite Configuration

If your screen is blank, that is, it does not have

the Add Satellite information section displayed,
just click on the Add Satellite button, and it will
display the “add satellite” parameters.

19-18 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

From here you would enter the satellite

parameters, and click the “Save” button.

As a result, this satellite name will appear on the

“Satellite Search Auto” and the “Satellite Search
Manual” pages.

When you enter the longitude of the satellite

you will also need to click the drop down arrow
to select East or West (E/W).

To select the desired Search Pattern, click on the

Search Pattern drop down arrow.

The choices are:

• Spiral (default pattern)
• Inclined (Inclined satellites ONLY)
• Sky Search (select if there is no gyro
compass input – No Gyro Mode)

Click on the Tx Polarity drop down arrow to view

the choices.
The choices are:

• Horizontal
• Vertical
• Left Hand Circular Polarity
• Right Hand Circular Polarity
The circular polarization selections are for future
applications only.

19-19 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

The frequency band choices are:

Band 1,2,3,4 (see LNB specifications).

Select which reflector will be used for this

satellite (12 Series is Primary ONLY).
Select which LNB (Cross Pol or Co-Pol) will be
used for this satellite.

Clicking the Save button will save the settings

for this satellite in the Favorite Satellite list, but it
does not make the satellite “Active”.
The satellite saved as a favorite can be edited or
deleted if necessary.

19-20 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.8. Hardware Profile

There are no entries that you can make on this screen, except for the Profile Selection drop down. It is read only, and
is periodically refreshed.

If your screen is blank, that is, it does not have

the Hardware Profile displayed, click on the
Profile Selection.
The Profile Number is selected by a drop down
menu.
After you select the desired profile you need to
click the “Use Profile” button, located at the
lower left area of the screen.
Currently there is only one selection, but there is
a designed-in capability for additional antenna
configuration profiles to be created in the future.

19-21 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

The selection of the Profile Number determines

what parameters you will see on the Hardware
Configuration screen.

Those parameters, in turn, are set by the

Advanced Settings section of the System
Configuration and Reflector Configuration
screens.

The Drive Orientation are set by entries on the

System Configuration screen - these should
never be changed from the factory defaults.

Vlim Ratio and Antenna Model are set by entries

on the System Configuration screen - these
should never be changed from the factory
defaults.

The Motor Gains are set by entries on the

System Configuration screen - these should
never be changed from the factory defaults.

19-22 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Step Resolution and Slow Scan VLimit are set by

entries on the System Configuration screen -
these should never be changed from the factory
defaults.

The Reference Limit are set by entries on the

System Configuration screen, as does Number of
Reflectors - these should never be changed
from the factory defaults.

Vlim Ratio and Antenna Model are set by

operator on the System Configuration screen -
these should never be changed from the factory
defaults.

The LNB LO (Local Oscillator) values are set by

operator entries on the System Configuration
screen.

19-23 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

The DishScan Drive Level is set by the Reflector

Configuration screen.

The Polang Drive: Auto/Manual and the Linear

and Circular mechanical offsets are set by the
Reflector Configuration screen.

The three other parameters, Polang Type, Linear

Scale, and Circular Scale are set by the INI file.

19-24 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.9. Graphs

If your screen is blank, that is, it does not have

graphs displayed, click on the drop down menu
at the upper right area of the screen, and select
one of the graphs available.

All graphs are driven by live data.

19-25 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

You have the choice of displaying live or historic

data.

Live allows viewing & recording live information.

Historical allow the historical data to be viewed.

There are four zoom levels.

Live allows viewing and recording live

information.
Historical allow the historical data to be viewed.

In a zoom level, live data is drawn from left to

right, within a specified time interval.

19-26 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

To read out a value of an event:

Count the number of divisions

Multiply the number of divisions by the unit on

that axis.

Add the number labeled as the base on that axis.

If the antenna position makes a large change the

plot may go off screen (in it’s graph).

19-27 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

If the plot goes to one of the max ends of the

graph:

Change the zoom level to change the amount of

data being displayed.

Reselect a graph from the graph mode list.

For Dealer and SysAdmin an input field for CLI

(Command Line Interface) commands is
provided to change AZ, EL, CL, etc.

19-28 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.10. CLI Commands

The CLI screen accepts single line commands.

Reference document 135163 on the dealer

support site.

19-29 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

19.11. Position Antenna

This is the screen that you would use to

manually locate a satellite.

These settings and commands only apply to the

selected satellite.

You will enter the working satellite parameters:

Longitudinal position of the desired/selected
satellite.
Frequency in MHz (ie 1234.567 MHz).
Skew of the satellite in degrees and tenths of
degrees.

19-30 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

The choices for Search Pattern are:

• Inclined (used for inclined satellites
ONLY).
• Sky Search (used when no gyro
compass mode is selected).
• Spiral (default)

The choices for Tx Polarity are

• Horizontal Polarity
• Vertical Polarity
• Left Hand Circular Polarity
• Right Hand Circular Polarity
Circular polarity choices are for future use.

Select the LNB frequency band (refer to LNB

specifications).

As mentioned before, the 12 Series is single

reflector system, so there will be no “Secondary”
selection for it.
The LNB is set to either cross pol or co-pol.

In Auto Threshold the system adds the “noise

floor” off-satellite AGC level to this Auto
Threshold value, and calculates the Threshold.
The threshold is recalculated whenever the
antenna goes into Search, or is commanded to
target a satellite. This is what is represented by
the red line on the Signal Level graph.
In Manual the Threshold level stays fixed,
regardless of the state of the antenna.
If you are in the “fringe” area of a footprint, you
may not have sufficient carrier-to-noise ratio, so
you might need to set the Threshold extremely
low, just to be able to track the desired satellite.
19-31 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

After you make the selections, click the Submit

button to submit it to RAM.
Then click the “Save” button.
Note: The Submit button submits it to working
memory and “Save” submits it to the equivalent
of NVRAM.
So, if you cycle Power, these parameters will be
lost if not saved.

Contact your network service provider for the

correct settings for all of the satellites that this
system might be used on.
Configure all of the satellites and save them as
“favorites”.

The Left, Right, Up, and Down arrows give you

the ability to move the antenna in incremental
steps.
(Each key press is 0.3 degrees.)

The displayed AZ and EL represent the actual

angle of the reflector.

19-32 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

AZ, EL, and CL entry fields give you the ability to

submit that target command. CL should always
be left at 0.0 except when testing CL drive
capability.

These values may not match.

The left values are displays.

The right boxes are entry fields only, which do

not change unless the operator enters new
values into them.

The values displayed on the left are constantly

updated to accurately reflect the actual antenna
Azimuth and Elevation.
AZ, EL and CL Target are the last command that
the operator entered.

Turning Tracking OFF inhibits an Auto Search

pattern from beginning, or continuing.

19-33 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

You can turn a Search pattern on or off.

And the search pattern is determined by the
Search Pattern drop down selection.

If you have “ON” selected the antenna will go

into Auto Search.
If the antenna completes a Search Delay
timeout, and AGC is still below threshold, it will
go into a Search.
If the antenna is in the middle of a Search
Pattern, and you want to stop it, select Off.

Slow Scan changes drive to a motor.

There are certain instances where we may want
to drive the antenna extremely slowly (ie 0.2 or
0.3 degrees per second).
Slow Scan mode smooth’s out the drive so we
can really see effects of any stickiness in the
bearings or physical restrictions.

An example of when you need to drive the

antenna slowly, or at a very specific speed, is
when you are doing a side lobe test.

You would drive the antenna off in Azimuth,

then drive up at a very steady slow rate to
display the low side lobes, then main beam, then
continue to drive it off through high side lobes.

19-34 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Tx Mute inhibits transmitting.

If you are in Manual Pol you will be able to enter

the value of where you want to drive the polarity
of the feed to.
The values you see in the target boxes are “last
submitted”.
In this example it is in Auto mode, so the entries
are grayed out and manual control is disabled.

This is similar to the AZ, EL, and CL Target, in

that you enter the desired position on the right
entry boxes, and the readout shows the actual
position on the left.

In summary, the operational sequence is:

Go to the upper part of the Position Antenna

screen, and establish known values.

19-35 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

Go to the Satellite Configuration page, and click

the “Add Satellite” button.

Enter a Satellite name. (This makes it available in

the drop down list.)
Add the appropriate parameter values for the
desired satellite.
Click the “Save” button (to create that preset).

From this point on, the User will simply go to the

Satellite “Auto” screen, and select the desired
satellite from the drop down list.

19-36 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.12. Test

Notice that there are four buttons at the upper

left part of this screen.
AZ Test
OOST & IST
Quadrant Test
Balance Mode

The Four Quadrant Test has two test modes,

Manual and Auto.

19-37 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

In the Manual Test each arrow button drives a

0.5 degree change in AZ or EL.
Antenna position and AGC level changes are
displayed on the graphs in real time.

Graph data can be exported.

Click on the AZ Test button to select the

Azimuth Test screen.

The AZ Test screen shows graphs for the CL, LV,

and Azimuth movements.

19-38 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

The AZ Test will cause the antenna to drive in

Azimuth, at a very low rate of speed, while
plotting out the motor current draw.
If there was a mechanical restriction, or sticky
bearing, this current drawn by the motor would
go up high as it is encountering that physical
resistance, and then come back down when past
the restriction. (The vertical scale is 0.195
amp/div.)

From this screen you can turn the Slow Scan

feature off and on.

You can also change the Slow Scan Vertical Limit

setting. This is the maximum speed that the
antenna will be driven.

Click the “Submit” button for the setting to take

effect.

19-39 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

Click on the “OOST & IST” button to go to those

tests.
OST and IST stand for: Out Of Service Test and
In Service Test.

You start one of the tests by clicking on the

button for that test.
You will see a message telling you that this test
will take you off a satellite.

While the test is in progress you will see a

progress bar.
When the test is completed there will be a “View
Results” button on this display for you to click in
order to see the results of the test.

IST is an In Service Test, which will run internal

tests, without causing you to loose the satellite.
So it can check things like tuning of the tracking
receiver, communications with the ICU,
processor activity and proper synchronization.

Balance Mode is used to turn all drive OFF so

that the antenna can be balanced.

19-40 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.13. Activity

All of the information is color coded according

to the four categories of:
Error (Red)
Warning (Yellow)
Information (Green)
Test (White)

The information can be sorted by any of the

four categories, just by clicking on the category
title.
The default sort category is “Type”.

19-41 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

You can also sort by date range.

You can export data by right-clicking on the

“Export” icon.

Click “Save Target As” to choose where you

want the data to be saved.

Choose the name and location to download it

to.

Then click “Save”.

19-42 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

When the download is complete click the “Open”

button.

Choose the program to view it in (notepad is

very good for this) and click the “OK.” Button.

At the Open File prompt click the “Open” button.

You can see that it lists the date, time, category,

and details.

You could print out, save, or send this file to

someone (ie attached to an email).

19-43 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

You can select ranges of data for the past seven

days.

If you want to see data from more than one

week ago refer to the next section on “Data
Export”.

19-44 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.14. Data Export

The Data Export screen allows you to specify a

longer or shorter period of time.
The red coded file names consist of one-hour
collections of data.
Click on the “From” box.

Notice that the format of the file name is a date and

time code.
2012: Year
02: Month
03: Day
1710: Time (5:10 PM)

To see the contents of the file you right click on it.

19-45 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

Click on “Save Target As”.

Choose the name and location to save the file to.

Then click “Save”.

When you see the “Download Complete” dialog box

click the “Open” button.

Choose the program to view it in (notepad is very

good for this) and click OK.

19-46 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

When you see the “Open File” dialog box click the
“Open” button.

You can see that it lists the date, time, category, and
details. You can print, save, or send this file (ie
attached to an email).

You can pick a point in time by specifying the From

and To dates, and open the record of activity.

Click on the “Export” icon.

19-47 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

Click “Save Target As”.

Choose the name and location to download it to.

When you see the “Download Complete” dialog box

click the “Open” button.

Choose the program to view it in and click OK.

19-48 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

When you see the “Open File” dialog box click the
“Open” button.

You can see that it lists the date, time, category, and
details.

You can choose to download graphic data also.

Click on the “Graphic Data” button.

On this screen you can click on the date range and

also the type of graphic record you want to
download.
This operates in the same was as you have already
seen in the three previous examples.

19-49 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

19.15. Admin

Although the first screen in the Admin group is

the Firmware Upgrade screen, there are actually
four different Admin functions to choose from.
• Config
• Firmware
• SSL
• Reboot

19-50 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.15.1. Configuration

From the Firmware Upgrade screen. click on the

“Config” button.

This takes you to the Maintain Configuration

Files screen.

To download the Configuration files to your

computer click on the INI File “Download”
button.

At the “File Download” dialog box, click on the

“Open” button.

19-51 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

You can upload INI and Profile database files by

clicking on the “File type” icon.

You will be able to download an INI File or a

Profile database. It is STRONGLY recommended
that you download a copy of the INI file after a
new installation (or major changes), setup and
commissioning has been completed. This is a
good electronic record of all of the parameters
of the system when everything was set and
operating normally.

You can upload INI and Profile database files by

clicking on the “File type” icon.
If the file type selected does not match the file
being uploaded you will get a message.

When the upload is done you will see a message

asking you to wait during verification.

19-52 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Once an INI file is properly uploaded, profiles

from the file immediately become selectable on
the Hardware Configuration screen, in the
Profile Selection drop down list.

19.15.2. Upgrading your IMA Firmware

You can check for the latest upgrade by clicking

on the “Check” button.

You will then see one or more software files,

available for downloading.

You will be prompted to save this file in your

computer.

19-53 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

Next, browse to the location that you just saved

the firmware file in.

Find that file, Click on it and then Click the

“Open” button.

Now that file name shows in the Firmware

Upgrade Browse window.

Click the “Upload” button.

19-54 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

While that file is uploading you will see a

message, asking you to wait, and the Upload
button is grayed out.

When the uploading is complete you can see

that the Upload button is no longer grayed out.

The next thing you will see is a message

informing you that there will be an automatic
reboot.

You will see a progress bar, showing that the

reboot is progressing..

When the rebooting is completed you will see a

message inviting you to click “here” to log in
again.

19-55 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

Clicking “here” takes you to the log in screen.

Log in if you need to re-enter the GUI.

19.15.3. SSL

At the Maintain Configuration Files screen –

selecting SSL will take you to the SSL screen.

At the SSL screen you will browse for the

certificate, then click the “Upload” button.
The SSL certificate and key files do not take
effect until the system is restarted.
HTTPS is accessible via default SSL certificate, or
if the proper SSL certificate is successfully
uploaded.

You will see the message telling you that the SSL
file upload is complete and that you need to
reboot the system for it to take effect.

19-56 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.16. Change Password

The user is able to change their own password.

SysAdmin level can override the User password.
Dealer level can override the SysAdmin and
User passwords.

19-57 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

19.17. FAQ

The FAQ page will provide you with answers to

commonly asked questions.

You get to it by clicking on the FAQ button,

found at the lower left area of every screen.

19-58 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Dealer Menus Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

19.18. Help

The Help page provides valuable information

related to configuration, operating tips, etc.

You get to it by clicking on the Help button,

found at the lower left area of every screen.

19-59 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Dealer Menus

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

19-60 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Functional Testing Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

20. Functional Testing

If not already, turn ON the power switch on the front panel of the MXP and the Above Decks Unit.

20.1. Antenna Start Up Systems Check:

1. Turn antenna pedestal/RF

equipment power ON

2. Turn MXP power ON.

3. Allow approximately 2 minutes to ** Initialization sequence is complete when the Initializing LED has completely
elapse for the systems initialization extinguished. **
sequence to complete.
4. Observe the Error LED state.
• If Error LED is not illuminated,
no system errors have been
detected and system is ready
for operation.
• If Error LED is illuminated, one
or more system error(s) are
present, continue on to step 5.
5. Using a web browser, login to MXP.

6. From the System Status page, left

mouse click on the Error.

20-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Functional Testing

7. Observe reported error(s) and

troubleshoot as required. Refer to
the Troubleshooting chapter of this
manual for additional guidance.

20.2. GPS Auto-update check

1. Using the navigational links on the

left hand side of screen, select
Configuration>Interfaces page link.

2. In the Ship Position entry fields,

change to any other Lat and Lon
positions
3. Click Save to commit.
4. Using the navigational links on the
left hand side of screen, select
Status>System page link.

5. IF automatic updating is working

properly, the Ship’s Latitude and
Longitude read only fields will
display the correct GEO Location
values.

20-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Functional Testing Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

20.3. Antenna Motor Drive

1. Using the navigational links on the

left hand side of screen, select the
Tools>Position Antenna page link.

2. Type in new positional values in the

AZ Target and EL Target entry
fields.
3. Click on Save.

4. In the page header, verify that

Azimuth and Elevation positions
display values entered in step 2
above.

20.4. Heading Following

1. From within any page, observe the

displayed Heading value.

2. Verify the observed heading value NOTE: It may be helpful, if the MXP is not located near the
within the page header is Gyro Compass, to have another person call out heading
consistently and exactly as the values to you.
Ship’s Gyro Compass is reporting.

3. If the Heading Value does properly

update, no further actions are
required.
4. Continue on to normal system
operation.
5. If the Heading Value does not
properly update, and there is an
illuminated ERROR led:
• View the system Error to
help determine fault type
and troubleshoot as
required.

20-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Functional Testing

6. If the Heading Value does not

properly update, and there is not
an illuminated ERROR led:
7. Using the navigational links on the
left hand side of screen, select the
Configuration>Interfaces page link.
8. Observe the selected Gyro Type.
9. If No Gyro or Fixed type is selected. Figure 7 SBS or Synchro Compass MXP Pin Out
Enter in the known heading value
and no other further action item is
required.
10. If No Gyro or Fixed type is not
selected.
• Confirm and/or select the
correct type.
• Verify proper wiring pin-
outs from Gyro Compass
to MXP inputs. Figure 6 NMEA-0183 MXP Pin Out

20.5. Blockage Simulation Test

The Blockage output function is used to modify the behavior of tracking and searching when there is a known
blockage zone. The MXP provides a contact closure to ground on the SW2 terminal of the J12 screw down terminal
block when:
• The antenna is pointed within any one of the predefined blockage/radiation hazard zones,
• The system is searching or targeting a satellite
• The antenna’s pointing angle is mis-pointed by 0.5 degrees or more
• The user manually sets the systems Tx mute condition to On.
The contact closure created by SW2 is a transistor switch with a current sinking capability of 0.5 Amp. Example
uses of this logic output control signal are as follows:
• When used as simple “BLOCKED” logic output for a single Sea Tel antenna, this output could be used to light
a remote LED and/or sound a buzzer to alert someone that the antenna is within a blockage zone and satellite
signal is lost.
• In a “Dual Antenna” installation, this logic output(s) is used to control Dual Antenna Arbitrator panel to switch
the source inputs to the satellite modem from Antenna “A” to Antenna “B”, and vice versa.
• When used as simple “RF Radiation Hazard” logic output for a single Sea Tel VSAT antenna, this output
could be used to suppress RF transmissions while the antenna is pointed where people would be harmed by
the transmitted microwave RF power output. The SW2 output would be interfaced to the satellite modem to
disable the TX output IF signal whenever the antenna is within the Radiation Hazard zone(s).
• When used for “FCC TX Mute” logic output for a single Sea Tel TX/RX antenna, this output could be used to
suppress RF transmissions whenever the antenna is mis-pointed 0.5 degrees or more, is blocked, searching, or
targeting. The SW2 output would be interfaced to the satellite modem to disable/mute the TX output IF
signal from the satellite modem. All Tx Mute conditions will self clear when the antenna error state is no
longer present.
To test the blockage function:
1. Using the navigational links on the
left hand side of screen, select
Tools>Position Antenna page link.

20-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Functional Testing Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

2. Under Advanced Operations, select

the Tx Mute On button to issue a
transmit mute condition command
to satellite modem.

3. Using an Ohm Meter, measure

continuity from J12 Pin 1 GND
(negative probe) to Pin 6
SW2(Positive probe).

Using the chart to the right verify the proper Modem Type Tx Mute ON Tx Mute OFF
Open/Short readings from Volt meter based iDirect Open Short
on Modem Type selection.
ComTech Short Open
Gilat Short Open
Hughes Short Open
STM Short Open
Viasat Short Open

20.6. Test Broadband Operation

Open your internet browser and access several internet sites, email or other functions as you normally would.
Operation should be the same as any equivalent service ashore (based on your subscription rate).

20.7. Test Voice Over IP (VOIP) Operation

If Voice Over IP (VOIP) equipment has been provided and services are available from your Internet Service Provider
(ISP) you should verify that this equipment and service are functioning properly.
Pick up the Telephone handset which is to be used for VOIP telephone calls. Check for voice mail messages and/or
place a telephone call (maybe to have them call you back). It is also important to receive a VOIP telephone call by
having someone call you or calling yourself from some other telephone system (shore telephone, cellular or Inmarsat).

20-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Functional Testing

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

20-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Stowing the Antenna Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

21. Stowing the Antenna

This antenna must be properly stowed if the ship will be underway while AC power to the Above Decks Equipment (ADE) is de-
energized. Failure to do so may void your warranty.

CAUTION: There are three stow restraints that MUST be installed on this
antenna pedestal if the ship will be underway while the Above Decks
Equipment is de-energized.

It is strongly recommended that AC Power to the ADE and BDE be supplied from an adequately rated Un-interruptible Power
Supply (UPS) to protect the antenna against short power outages while underway.

21.1. Installing the Stow Restraints

The order the restraints are installed is not critical.

21.1.1. Installing the AZ Shipping/Stow Restraint

1. The AZ shipping/stow restraint is formed by a

pin bolt that is lowered into a channel in a
stowage block on the upper plate of the
pedestal (as shown).
2. Remove the pin bolt from the “STOW” hole
(this only stows the pin bolt, not the antenna).
3. Rotate the antenna to center the LOCK hole
directly over the stow block channel.

Pin bolt (this is the UN-Stowed position of the

antenna)

Stow Block Channel

4. To restrain azimuth rotation of the antenna,

install the pin bolt in the “Lock” hole and
assure that the pin drops into the channel in
the stow block below.
5. Verify that the stow pin is engaged in the
channel of the stow block and that the
antenna does NOT rotate in azimuth.

21-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Stowing the Antenna

21.1.2. Installing the EL Shipping/Stow Restraint

1. The EL shipping/stow restraint is formed by a

stow pin-bolt mounted through a bracket and
is engaged into a hole/slot in the elevation
driven sprocket when the dish is at zenith (90
degrees elevation).
2. In the un-stowed position the hardware from
left to right is the stow pin-bolt head, hex nut,
washer, bracket, washer, hex nut. So the pin
section of the stow pin-bolt is NOT inserted
into the hole in the elevation driven sprocket.

EL Stow Pin-Bolt head

Hex Nut & Washer

Bracket

Washer & Hex Nut

Elevation Driven Sprocket

3. To restrain the elevation axis of the antenna,

unthread the hex nut nearest the elevation
driven sprocket. Using a ¾” open end wrench,
remove the hex nut and washer from the stow
pin-bolt.
4. Remove the stow pin-bolt from the bracket.

21-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Stowing the Antenna Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

5. Remove the washer from the stow pin-bolt

and unthread the hex nut from the bolt.
6. Put one of the washers onto the stow pin-bolt
and insert it into the bracket toward the
elevation driven sprocket.
7. Put the other washer, and then thread the two
hex nuts onto the bolt.

8. Tighten the hex nuts to prevent the hardware

from loosening while in the stowed
configuration.
9. Verify that the antenna does not rotate in
elevation.

21-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Stowing the Antenna

21.1.3. Installing the CL Shipping/Stow Restraint

1. The CL shipping/stow restraint is formed by a

red locking bar with adjustable bumpers at
each end of the bar. This mechanism is
placed under the cross-level beam to lock it in
place (at level).
2. If not already removed, remove an adjustable
bumper by removing the bottom nut from
one end of the locking bar.
3. If not already loosened, loosen the top nut up
toward the rubber bumper.
4. Insert vacant end of the locking bar through
the opening under the cross-level beam.
5. Insert the adjustable bumper into the vacant
hole on the end of the locking bar.

6. To restrain the cross-level axis of the antenna

use a 7/16“ open end wrench to tighten the
nut on the top side of the locking bar until the
rubber bumper is forced up against the
bottom of the cross-level beam.
7. Verify that the antenna does NOT rotate (tilt
left & right from level).
8. Re-install and tighten the bottom nut on the
underside of the locking bar.

21.2. Removing the Shipping/Stow Restraints PRIOR to Power-Up

The order the restraints are removed is not critical.

CAUTION: There are three shipping/stow restraints on this antenna pedestal

that MUST be removed, before energizing the antenna, for normal operation.

21.2.1. Removing the AZ Shipping/Stow Restraint

1. The AZ shipping/stow restraint is formed by a

pin bolt that is lowered into a channel in a
stowage block on the upper plate of the
pedestal (as shown).

21-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Stowing the Antenna Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

2. To un-stow the antenna, remove the pin bolt

from the LOCK position.

3. Install the pin bolt into the STOW hole and

tighten. This assures that it does not get lost
and will be ready for re-use if the antenna
needs to be stowed again at a later date.
4. Verify that the antenna is able to rotate freely
in azimuth.

21.2.2. Removing the EL Shipping/Stow Restraint

1. The EL shipping/stow restraint is formed by a

stow pin-bolt mounted through a bracket and
is engaged into a hole/slot in the elevation
driven sprocket when the dish is at zenith (90
degrees elevation).
2. In the stowed position, the hardware from left
to right is stow pin-bolt head, washer, bracket,
washer, hex nut, hex nut so that the pin
section of the stow pin-bolt is inserted into
the hole in the elevation driven sprocket.

EL Stow Pin-Bolt head

Bracket

2 Hex Nuts

Pin inserted into Elevation Driven Sprocket

Elevation Driven Sprocket

21-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Stowing the Antenna

3. To un-restrain the elevation axis of the

antenna, unthread the two hex nuts. Using a
¾” open end wrench, remove the hex nuts
and washer from the stow pin-bolt.
4. Remove the stow pin-bolt from the bracket.

5. Remove the washer from the stow pin-bolt

and thread one of the two hex nuts onto the
bolt and tighten.
6. Put one of the washers onto the stow pin-bolt
and insert it into the bracket toward the
elevation driven sprocket.
7. Put the other washer, and then the other hex
nut onto the bolt.

21-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Stowing the Antenna Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

8. Tighten the hex nut to prevent the hardware

from loosening while in the un-stowed
configuration.
9. Verify that the antenna rotates freely through
its full elevation range of motion.

21.2.3. Removing the CL Shipping/Stow Restraint

1. The CL shipping/stow restraint is formed by a

red locking bar with adjustable bumpers at
each end of the bar. This mechanism is
placed under the cross-level beam to lock it in
place.

Cross-Level Beam

CL Shipping/Stow bar

Adjustable CL Locking Bumpers (only one end shown)

2. To un-restrain the cross-level axis of the

antenna use a 7/16“ open end wrench to
loosen the nut on the top side of the locking
bar (either end of the bar).

3. Remove the bottom nut off of that adjustable

bumper.
4. Remove the adjustable bumper from the
locking bar.

21-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Stowing the Antenna

5. Extract the locking bar from the underside of

the cross-level beam and retain these parts for
later re-use if it becomes necessary to stow
the antenna.
6. Verify that the antenna rotates (tilts left and
right from level) freely through its full cross-
level range of motion.

21-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Preventive Maintenance - Operator Checks and Inspections Series 12 Dealer Technical
Manual

22. Preventive Maintenance - Operator Checks and Inspections

22.1. Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, replacement parts, and recommended lubricants as prescribed in
this manual are necessary to keep your antenna in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by warranty.

22.1.1. Radome Inspections

Conduct a good, thorough, visual inspection of the radome. If any damage is found, notify your dealer
immediately.
1. Inspect the outside surface of the radome (top and base) looking for scrapes, cracks, mars or residue
indicating that the gel coat surface has been impacted, or in any other way, damaged. Damage to
the sealant coat or core structure of the radome MUST be properly repaired and re-sealed
immediately. Any cracks, scratches or other damage to the surface seal of the radome must be
repaired and re-sealed by a competent “A” layered laminate (or cored deck) repair professional. If
diesel exhaust, or any other residue, is coating the outside of the radome it should be cleaned with
mild soapy water to minimize signal loss due caused by these residues.
2. Inspect the inside surface of the radome (top and base) looking for cracks, mars or white fiberglass
powder residue due to chafing in the material indicating that it has been impacted or scraped by the
dish or any other signs of wear or damage.
3. Inspect the flange mating of the radome top and base to insure that the flange is properly sealed to
prevent wind, saltwater spray and rain from being able to enter the radome.
4. If condensation or standing water is found inside the radome, isolate and seal the leak and then dry
out the radome. Debris clogging the small weep holes in the recessed areas of the radome base may
need to be cleaned out to allow standing water to “weep” out. DO NOT DRILL ADDITIONAL HOLES
IN THE RADOME BASE.
5. If hardware is found in the recessed areas of the radome base try to ascertain from where it may
have fallen. Notify your dealer immediately.

22.1.2. Cable Inspections

Conduct a good, thorough, visual inspection of the conductors, cables and harnesses:
1. Inspect the AC power conductors inside the breaker box, from the breaker box to the power ring
and from the power ring to the AC power terminal strip.
CAUTION: Assure that ships AC power being supplied to that antenna is
turned OFF prior to touching any AC Power wiring. Hazardous voltages exist
on these wires.

a. Inspect ground wire for damage and proper termination.

b. Assure that the conductors are flexible and that the insulation is not chaffed, brittle or
burned. If any damage is found, repair or replace the damaged conductors. If damage is due to
chaffing, pinching or crushing then reroute the new conductors as necessary to prevent future
damage.
c. If the damage is at the power ring, replace the power ring (refer to the “replacing the power
ring” procedure in the Maintenance section of this chapter),
2. Inspect the coaxes at the bracket on the radome base, through the pedestal base and at the dual
channel rotary joint. Inspect both coaxes to assure that they are flexible and that the insulation is
not brittle, chaffed or pinched. If any damage is found, repair or replace the damaged coaxes. If
damage is due to chaffing, pinching or crushing then reroute the new conductors as necessary to
prevent future damage. Assure that all the connectors are properly tightened.
3. Inspect all harnesses and connections. The harnesses should not be frayed and all the connectors
22-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Preventive Maintenance - Operator Checks and
Inspections

should be properly fastened and retainer screws tightened.

22.1.3. Wire-Rope Isolator Inspections

Conduct a good, thorough, visual inspection of the wire-rope isolators.
1. Wire-rope isolators should not be frayed, completely compressed, or otherwise damaged. The metal
bars on the top and bottom of the wire-rope isolators should not be bent or bowed in any way. If
there is any evidence of rust, broken strand(s) of wire or bent bars in any one of the wire-rope
isolators, notify your dealer immediately to obtain replacements and replace all four wire-rope
isolators immediately (refer to the “replacing the wire-rope isolators” procedure in the Maintenance
section of this chapter).

22.1.4. Azimuth Drive Component Inspections

1. Inspect the azimuth motor/encoder, sprockets, drive chain, chain tensioner and spring. If any of
these show signs of rust or corrosion, apply a light coat of “3-in-1” oil using a lit-free cloth on the
effected metal surfaces.
CAUTION: Be EXTREMELY careful rotating the pedestal around while your
fingers are in this area to prevent pinching or crushing your fingers in the
pedestal assembly.

2. Assure that none of the motor mounting hardware is coming loose. Tighten any loose hardware
found.
3. Check the motor cable for damage and that the retaining screws are tightened to keep the
connector properly terminated.

22-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Preventive Maintenance - Operator Checks and Inspections Series 12 Dealer Technical
Manual

4. Visually verify that the sprockets are properly aligned so that the chain travels smoothly through the
motor sprocket, the chain tensioner sprocket and the driven sprocket.
5. Verify that the ends of the chain tensioner spring are properly hooked into the brackets and that the
spring is not stretched. Rotate the chain tensioner away from chain to verify positive spring tension
against chain.
6. If the spring or spring ends do not look
stretched skip this step. If the spring or
spring ends do look stretched; Use a
screw driver or hook to disconnect one
end of the spring and measure its
length from inside of hook on one end
to the inside of the hook on the other
end. Replace the spring if it is
stretched or damaged in any way.

22.1.5. Home Switch Sensor Inspection

1. Inspect the home switch sensor

proximity to the metal home plate.
When aligned with the plate, the end of
the sensor should not be greater than
0.125 inch (0.318cm) from the metal
plate (refer to home flag sensor
alignment procedure . Assure that the
home flag target ring clamp is tight so
that it does not rotate around the pedestal spindle.

22.1.6. Vertical Isolation Inspections

1. Inspect vertical isolation linear bearing assembly. Look for metal shavings, plastic dust residue or
loose ball bearings on the frame and base plate below the assembly. If any damage is found, notify
your dealer immediately.
2. Inspect vertical isolation linear bearing blocks. Look for metal shavings, plastic dust residue or loose
ball bearings on the frame and base plate below the assembly. If any signs of wear or failure are
noted, contact your dealer immediately for repair.
3. The vertical isolation
spring should not be
completely
compressed or
otherwise damaged.
Verify that the gap
between the upper
pair of rubber
bumpers and the top
of the striker plate
and the gap between
the lower pair of
rubber bumpers and
bottom of the striker
plate is
approximately the
same. If the striker
plate is very near the
upper or lower pair of
rubber bumpers,
contact your dealer
immediately for
repair.
22-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Preventive Maintenance - Operator Checks and
Inspections

4. Inspect the pneumatic damper to assure that the mounting hardware at each end is not coming
loose. Check for corrosion, rubber particles and vertical scratches in the upper shaft. Inspect the
flow control valves for damage or debris in
the openings. Bounce the pedestal by
applying pressure down on the cross-level
beam and quickly releasing. A whistling
sound will be heard as air expels out from
and is sucked in through, the flow control
valves. The damper should dampen
multiple bounce oscillations of the
equipment (like shocks on a car). If the
equipment does make multiple oscillations
after you bounce and release it the damper
or flow control valves have failed. If you
cannot press the equipment down at all, the
damper or flow control valves have failed.
In either of these cases, contact your dealer
immediately for repair.

22.1.7. Cross-Level Drive Component Inspections

1. Inspect the cross-level motor and belt. Assure that there is no loose motor mounting hardware.
Check the motor cable for damage and that the retaining screws are tightened to keep the
connector properly terminated.

CAUTION: Be EXTREMELY careful rotating the pedestal around while your

fingers are in this area to prevent pinching or crushing your fingers in the
pedestal assembly.

22-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Preventive Maintenance - Operator Checks and Inspections Series 12 Dealer Technical
Manual

2. Inspect the alignment of the belt through the motor drive sprocket and the driven sprocket. Mis-
alignment will cause the belt to wear along its edges (refer to pictures above).
3. Inspect the belt teeth for damage. Look for teeth that have de-laminated, or been completely torn
off, of the belt (refer to pictures above).

22.1.8. Elevation Drive Component Inspections

1. Inspect the elevation motor and belt. Assure that there is no loose motor mounting hardware.
Check the motor cable for damage and that the retaining screws are tightened to keep the
connector properly terminated.

CAUTION: Be EXTREMELY careful rotating the pedestal around while your

fingers are in this area to prevent pinching or crushing your fingers in the
pedestal assembly.

2. Inspect the alignment of the belt through the motor drive sprocket and the driven sprocket. Mis-
alignment will cause the belt to wear along its edges (refer to pictures above).
3. Inspect the belt teeth for damage. Look for teeth that have de-laminated, or been completely torn
off, of the belt (refer to pictures above).

22.1.9. Motor Junction Enclosure Inspections

Inspect the Motor Junction Box to assure that all mounting hardware is secure and all the connections are
tight.

22.1.10. ICU Inspections

Inspect the ICU to assure that all mounting hardware is secure and all the connections are tight.

22-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Preventive Maintenance - Operator Checks and
Inspections

22.1.11. BUC Inspections

Inspect the BUC to assure that all mounting hardware is secure and all the connections are tight.

22.1.12. Counter-Weight Inspections

Inspect all balancing counter-weights to assure that all mounting hardware is secure.

22.1.13. Dish Perimeter Inspections

Inspect the perimeter of the dish for any damage that would indicate that the dish may have impacted the
inside surface of the radome top.

22-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Theory of Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

23. Theory of Operation

Stabilization “de-couples the ships’ motion” from the portion of the antenna that is being stabilized. The “stabilized” portion of
the antenna is primarily comprised of the equipment frame and reflector assembly (including the feed). This “stabilized” portion
of the antenna is referred to as the “mass” in the discussions of the stabilization loops below. In normal operation this
stabilized portion of the antenna remains still in free space while the ship pivots and rotates below it.

23.1. The Three Axes of the Antenna

The “right hand rule” of the three axes
of the antenna is represented here.
Orient your right hand in line with the
long axis of the antenna, your thumb
pointing in line with the arrowhead the
axis. Extend your right thumb and
allow your fingers to curl naturally.
With your hand in this orientation
rotating the device in the direction of
your curled fingers is defined as CW
rotation, or Up, in that axis.
When viewed from behind the antenna
pedestal The X axis is cross-level, the Y
axis is elevation and the Z axis is
azimuth.
Cross-level (X) axis starts from behind
the antenna pedestal, extends through
the center of the cross-level beam,
through the center of the dish and feed
assembly toward the sky. Cross-level
movement of the antenna is CW/Tilt to
the right, or CCW/Tilt to the left of the
cross-level beam off level, relative to
the horizon. The cross-level beam
must stay level in normal operation to
prevent the dish and feed from
rotating, therefore, preventing
degradation of the linear polarization
of the antenna.
Elevation (Y) axis starts from the left
side of the antenna pedestal, extends
directly through the center of the
elevation bearings and out to the right
side of the antenna pedestal. Elevation
rotation is from 0 degrees (horizon)
CW/Up in elevation to 90 degrees
(zenith).
Azimuth (Z) axis starts above the pedestal, extends down through the center of the pedestal, through the ship, toward
the center of the earth. Azimuth movement of the antenna is CW/Up in azimuth, or CCW/Down in azimuth rotation of
the antenna pedestal while remaining parallel to the horizon.

23.2. Loop Components

The following items are used in the stabilization loops of the antenna. Each is described to provide an understanding
of what purpose it serves, how it functions and its nominal performance. This information will help make it possible for
you to isolate problems in the stabilization loops when troubleshooting.

23-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Theory of Operation

23.2.1. ICU Stabilization Sensors

Integrated Power Supply – Provides power to all of the sensors and motor assemblies.
Three (3) rate sensors – are used to sense antenna motion in Azimuth (Z), Elevation (Y) and Cross-Level (X)
axes. The Azimuth and Cross-Level rate sensors progressively switch functions as the elevation is increased
from 0 degrees to 90 degrees:
The center rate sensor provides the Elevation Rate Output to its loop at all Elevation angles.
At 0 degrees Elevation:
The bottom sensor provides 100% of the Azimuth Rate Output to its loop.
The top-right sensor provides 100% of the Cross-Level Rate Output to its loop.
At 45 degrees Elevation:
Azimuth Rate Output is comprised of 50% from the bottom-right sensor and 50% from the top
sensor.
Cross-Level Rate Output is comprised of 50% from the top sensor and 50% from the bottom-right
sensor.
At 90 degrees Elevation:
The top sensor provides 100% of the Azimuth Rate Output to its loop.
The right sensor provides 100% of the Cross-Level Rate Output to its loop.
This coordinate conversion of the AZ and CL Rate Outputs is accomplished in the ICU prior to integration into
their respective servo loops.

0 degree Elevation 45 degrees Elevation 90 degrees Elevation

Each rate sensor output provides the primary input to its associated closed servo stabilization loop in the ICU.
When inertia is not able to prevent some motion from being induced into the stabilized mass of the antenna
(and therefore the rate sensors), the rate sensors’ DC voltage output will increase or decrease. The DC voltage
output from each of the rate sensors will vary by an amount which is directly proportional to the direction
and rate of motion induced on it. This change in output then drives the appropriate servo motor to rotate
the mass of the antenna in the opposite direction as the sensed motion, thereby stopping the rotation of
the rate sensor in 3-dimensional free space and maintain pointing of the antenna to within +/- 0.15 degrees
RMS, 0.3 degrees MAX.

Figure 8 Rate Sensor graph showing a 3 deg/sec CW sensed rotation in the Azimuth axis

23-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Theory of Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Use MXP Status - Graphs page DISP W (Rate) graph chart selection for diagnostic purposes, such as to
monitor and/or record the voltage output of the rate sensors located in the ICU. This chart selection displays
the sensed motion of the three rate sensors via three traces: CL (Cross Level), LV (Elevation) and AZ
(Azimuth). While viewing the display, each of the three traces plot sensor output at a fixed
1°/Second/Vertical division with the displayed red references line representing no sensed motion. A trace line
plotting above the red line represents positive (or CW) sensed motion and likewise a trace line plotting below
the red line represents negative (or CCW) sensed motion. The amount of divisions that a trace plots above or
below the red line is directly proportional to the rate of speed in which an axis is being rotated.
Two (2) solid state tilt sensors - One is used to provide absolute Cross-Level (left-right) tilt of the
equipment and the other is used to provide absolute elevation feedback. For diagnostic purposes, select the
MXP Status - Graphs page Disp V (ref) graph to monitor and/or record the delta difference between the
antenna’s actual position vs. its targeted (or intended) position.
Trace 1 (CL) displays the antenna’s absolute Cross-Level position error. The red reference line represents
absolute level relative to the horizon. An antenna that is tilted to the right (CW in CL) will plot above the
reference line at 1˚ /vertical div. Likewise an antenna that is tilted to the left (CCW in CL) will plot below the
reference line at 1˚ /vertical div.
Trace 2 (EL) displays the antenna’s elevation position error. The red reference line represents the targeted
elevation pointing angle of the antenna. An antenna that is tilted up (CW in EL) from its targeted position will
plot above the reference line at 1˚ /vertical div. Likewise an antenna that is tilted down (CCW in EL) below its
targeted position will plot below the reference line at 1˚ /vertical div.
Trace 3 displays the logic change when Home Flag actuates.

The graphic above depicts the following actions imposed onto the antenna:
Cross-level axis was first tilted 5 degrees to the right (CW) and was allowed time to recover.
Cross-level axis was then tilted 5 degrees to the left (CCW) and again was allowed time to recover.
Elevation axis was first tilted 5 degrees up (CCW) and was allowed time to recover.
Elevation axis was then tilted 5 degrees down (CW) and again was allowed time to recover.

23.2.2. Servo Amp/Motor Controller

A Servo Amp/Motor Controller PCB commutates and controls the torque output of the three (3) Brush-Less
DC (BLDC) Motors (AZ, EL and CL). The motor drive output from the ICU provides the input to the Motor
Controller. The controller provides drive connections to the windings of each of the motors and receives
feedback from the Hall sensors within each of the motors. Input from ICU is 2.50 VDC (nominal) when no
motor drive is required. As voltage increases the motor shaft will be driven one direction. Decreasing voltage
below 2.50 VDC will drive the motor shaft the opposite direction.
This PCB assembly is located in the MDE.

23-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Theory of Operation

23.2.3. Brush-Less DC (BLDC) Motors

There are three size-23 drive motors mounted on the antenna pedestal. These BLDC drive motors are used
for axis drive of azimuth, elevation and cross-level stabilizing, targeting, pointing and tracking purposes. The
BLDC motor does not have brushes, therefore, must be commutated by a servo amp/motor controller. Hull
sensors in the motor provide feedback to the controller so it can commutate and control the torque output
of the motor. When no drive is applied to the motor it offers very little rotational friction, allowing inertia to
provide 98 percent of stabilization in each of the 3 axes.
Azimuth motor - Used for azimuth stabilizing, satellite targeting and signal tracking decisions requiring drive
in azimuth. During stabilization, the azimuth motor drives only in response to motion of the stabilized mass
of the antenna in 3-dimensional free space (as sensed by the azimuth rate sensor located in the ICU). The
ICU receives AZ drive commands and ships heading input from the MXP. A high reliability digital output
encoder, integrated into the top of the azimuth motor, is used to provide relative position of the antenna into
the azimuth loop.
Elevation motor - Used for elevation stabilizing, satellite targeting and signal tracking decisions that require
drive in elevation. During stabilization the elevation motor drives only in response to motion of the stabilized
mass of the antenna in 3-dimensional free space (as sensed by the elevation rate and tilt sensor(s), which are
both located in the ICU). An integrated brake mechanism in the elevation motor assembly is used to aid in
keeping the antenna from moving in the elevation axis when AC power is lost to the antenna.
Cross-Level motor - Used for cross-level stabilization. During stabilization the cross-level motor drives only
in response to motion of the stabilized mass of the antenna in 3-dimensional free space (as sensed by the
cross-level rate and tilt sensor(s), which are both located in the ICU). An integrated brake mechanism in the
elevation motor assembly aids in keeping the antenna from moving in the cross level axis when AC power is
lost to the antenna.
Use MXP status graphs DISP TC (Drive) graph chart selection, for diagnostic purposes, to monitor (and/or
record) motor torque. This chart selection displays the amount of current draw from each of the three axis
drive motors via three traces, CL (Cross Level), LV (Elevation), and AZ (Azimuth). While viewing the display,
each of the three traces plot motor drive at a fixed 0.195Amp /Vertical division with the displayed red
references line representing no current draw (and thus no motor drive/ torque). A trace line plotting below
the red line represents positive (or CW) motor drive/torque and likewise a trace line plotting above the red
line represents negative (or CCW) motor drive/torque. The amount of divisions that a trace plots above or
below the red line is directly proportional to the amount of current in which that correlating axis motor is
currently drawing.

Figure 9DISP TC (Drive) graph selection showing nominal motor torque.

23.2.4. Home Switch

The home switch is a proximity sensor used to sense a metal tab which mounted under the power ring
assembly. During initialization, azimuth drives the antenna CW until the home switch actuates, which
“presets” the relative position counter to the value stored in the Home Flag Offset parameter. In normal
operation the home switch presets the relative position counter once per CW revolution of the antenna (it is
disregarded when the antenna is rotating CCW).
The Home Flag Offset is a value saved in NVRam (Non-Volatile RAM) in the ICU. This value is the relative
position of the antenna when the home switch is engaged. Presetting the counter to this value assures that
when the antenna is pointed in-line with the bow of the ship the counter will read 000.0 (360.0 = 000.0).
For diagnostic purposes, this proximity sensor has a built in LED into its body. This LED will illuminate
whenever the switch assembly is engaged (when the sensor is within detection distance of a ferrous material).

23-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Theory of Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

23.3. Antenna Initialization

Turn the pedestal power supply ON. The brakes on the elevation and cross-level motors will release. A brake release
power supply control circuit supplies 24 VDC to the brakes initially (5-10 seconds) and then reduces the voltage to
12VDC. The ICU will initialize the stabilized portion of the mass to be level with the horizon and at a prescribed
azimuth and elevation angles in the specific sequence of steps listed below.
Initialization is completed in the following phases, each phase must complete properly for the antenna to operate
properly (post-initialization). Observe the initialization of the antenna pedestal.
Step 1: Elevation and Cross-Level axles activate (EL and CL activate simultaneously) - Input from the
elevation and Cross-Level sensor is used to drive the elevation of the equipment frame to 45.0 degrees in
elevation and drive cross-level of the equipment frame to bring it to level (this results in the tilt of the cross-
level beam being level).
Step 2: Azimuth axis activates - Antenna drives CW in azimuth until the “Home Flag” signal is produced. This
signal is produced by a proximity sensor in close proximity to a metal tab. After a short period of time (a
total of approximately 1-2 minutes after power is initially applied to the antenna), the ICU will report its
model setting and software version number to the MXP.
This completes the phases of initialization. At this time, the antenna elevation should 45.0 degrees and relative
azimuth should be at home flag (proximity sensor at the trailing edge of the metal tab in the azimuth assembly).
If any of these steps fail, reconfigure the ICU as described in the Maintenance section of this manual. If initialization
still fails, this indicates a drive or sensor problem, refer to the Troubleshooting section.

23.4. Inertia
Inertia does 98 percent of stabilization of the antenna (keeping the antenna still in free space). Antenna imbalance,
bearing drag, mechanical binding or drag, cable restrictions or spring action, and wind blowing on the dish are all
factors that will limit how much stabilization can be done exclusively by inertia. These “disturbing forces” therefore,
limit the systems’ overall ability to stabilize the mass of the antenna.

23-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Integrated Control Unit Motor Driver
DishScan
Enclosure
Drive
n7xxx
Velocity
Error
Motor
(DISP IVC) Digital Motor Drive
Torque
KP Voltage

Encoder
Built-in
∑ (Disp TC) To Servo Motor Brushless
(Adjustable Drive
Integrator Analog Amplifier Lines DC Motor
System Gain)
n3xxx (* -1) Converter
Hall

Motor Torque – Chain Drive

Sensor
Azimuth Lines
Heading
+/- Rate Sensor Bias Correction

Position/Target
From MXP
From MXP
AZ Reference Error

Heading Counter Heading

in ICU (ADMC)

Relative Position
(ADMC) Relative
Counter
Azimuth Bearing
(Hdg + Rel in ADMC)
∑
Integrator
Home Flag
Stabilized
Home Flag (Az Trace on DispV) Mechanical connection

Az Reference Error
(* -1) Offset
n6xxx
Home Flag
(Positive Edge
Triggered) Antenna
Mass
X Rate Sensor
(Cross-Level Mechanical connection
@ Zero EL)
Analog Azimuth Rate X
To (DISP W)
Digital Z
Converter
Z Rate Sensor
(Azimuth @
Zero EL)

Series 12 Azimuth Stabilization Loop

Theory of Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

23.5. Azimuth Servo Control Loop

This loop stabilizes the azimuth angle of the antenna, keeps track of the relative position of the antenna (relative to the
ships’ bow), accepts input from the ships’ Gyro Compass (through the MXP) to report azimuth (relative to True North)
and allows for azimuth (and satellite) pointing, targeting and tracking. Refer to the Azimuth Control Loop drawing.
In this axis, the stabilized portion of the antenna pedestal is comprised of the power ring and rotary joint, the antenna
pedestal, the cross-level beam, equipment frame and antenna assembly (dish, feed and feed tube). When properly
stabilized, this portion of the antenna (referred to as the “Mass”) will remain still in free space while the ship pivots
below it.
When powered up, the elative counter will initially energize with a value of 0 (zero); regardless of where the antenna is
actually pointed. During initialization, when the azimuth axis goes active, the ICU will drive the antenna slowly CW. As
the antenna drives up, the encoder increments the relative counter until the home switch actuates. This presets the
relative counter to the Home Flag Offset parameter value (default of 000). The relative position is now calibrated to
the bow of the ship. The ICU will report to the MXP that initialization is completed, the model setting and software
version and the polarity, the elevation and the relative positions of the antenna. The MXP will send the current
heading to the ICU which will report the heading value received and the calculated azimuth (heading plus relative).
The MXP can be setup to automatically target the last satellite that was targeted. If this is not the currently desired
satellite, the operator needs to manually change the SAT value to the desired satellite longitude and press ENTER to
target that satellite. The MXP will calculate the azimuth, elevation and polarity angles from the ship’s current latitude
and longitude to the desired satellite longitude and send these values to the ICU. The ICU will drive the appropriate
motors until the antenna is at the calculated angles. Post initialization the ICU will actively stabilize the antenna.
If everything is operating normally:
• Inertia should do 98% of keeping the mass from moving in free space. In the azimuth loop, the antenna will
stay pointed at the satellite while the ship turns underneath the mass.
• This loop senses and negates any motion of the “mass” in free space as it happens, limiting mis-pointing to
less than 0.2 degrees. Movement of the mass will occur only when inertia is not able to negate all of the
disturbing forces; therefore, the mass of the antenna will start to follow in the direction of the ships motion.
• When inertia is not able to prevent some motion from being inducted into the stabilized mass of the antenna
(and therefore the rate sensors) the azimuth rate output DC voltage will increase or decrease depending on
the direction of the rotation. The azimuth rate DC voltage output will vary by an amount which is directly
proportional to the direction and rate of motion induced on the sensors. This analog voltage change is
immediately converted to digital velocity error in the ICU. The velocity error becomes motor torque which is
inverted (plus 10 becomes -10) and converted to an analog DC motor drive voltage. The motor drive voltage
input to the servo amplifier then drives the motor to move the mass in the opposite direction as the
disturbing force that was sensed by the rate sensor(s).
• Simply put, rate output voltage going up causes motor drive voltage to immediately go down equal and
opposite to the rate voltage, rate output voltage going down causes motor drive voltage to immediately go
up equal and opposite to the rate voltage as soon as the mass stops being rotated its’ voltage will
immediately return to 2.50 VDC (nominal).
• If the mass does rotate slightly CW while the ship is turning the azimuth rate output voltage will go up above
2.50 VDC, causing positive velocity error and positive motor torque, transposed to a negative input to the D-
A which will make the motor drive voltage go down below 2.50 VDC exactly the same amount that the rate
voltage went up. This voltage below 2.50 VDC will drive the mass CCW at exactly the same speed that the
azimuth rate is sensing. This response to the rate output causing motor drive is immediate (real time), there is
no lag or delay time in the servo loops.
• If the mass does rotate slightly CCW while the ship is turning the azimuth rate output voltage will go down
below 2.50 VDC, causing negative velocity error and negative motor torque, positive input to the D-A which
will make the motor drive voltage go up above 2.50 VDC exactly the same amount that the rate voltage went
down. This voltage above 2.50 VDC will drive the mass CW at exactly the same speed that the azimuth rate
is sensing. This response to the rate output causing motor drive is immediate (real time), there is no lag or
delay time in the servo loops.
• Motor drive voltage of 2.51 VDC drives the mass VERY slowly clockwise, 2.50 volts does NOT drive the motor
at all and less than 2.49 volts drives the mass VERY slowly counter clockwise. The larger the voltage offset
from 2.50 VDC, the faster the antenna will drive (up to about 20 degrees per second).
• Maximum possible rate/motor drive voltages are up to 4.7VDC or down to 0.3VDC.
Scenarios of operation:

23-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Theory of Operation

Targeting: The ship is tied to the pier with a heading of 000.0 (bow is due north) at latitude 38N and longitude
122W. The antenna initializes to relative position of 000.0 and the MXP sends heading 000.0 to the ICU. The ICU
reports that it received heading 000.0, relative is 000.0 and the azimuth bearing is therefore 000.0. We target satellite
122W. This satellite would be at 180 true azimuth, exactly due south of the ship. The MXP sends the 180.0 target
value up to the ICU which is inverted (to become -180.0). This target azimuth is added to the azimuth bearing value
(mathematically heading + relative = azimuth bearing) to become an AZ Reference Error of -180.0 degrees (-180.0 +
000.0 = -180). The AZ Reference Error is integrated, becomes a minus Velocity Error (integration makes the velocity
value ramp up from a small value to a larger value over a short time constant rather than immediately being a large
value), which becomes minus motor torque (small at first), inverted to become a small plus digital count into the Digital
to Analog (D-A) Converter. This converted plus digital count becomes a motor drive voltage slightly greater than 2.50
volts and the Servo Amplifier starts driving the mass slowly clockwise and the encoder increments the relative counter.
As the relative position goes up (let’s say 2.0 degrees) so does the azimuth bearing (also 2.0 degrees now). These are
reported to the MXP and the AZ Reference Error is now only -178.0 (-180 + 2.0 = -178.0). The AZ Reference Error has
integrated for longer now causing larger negative velocity error an motor torque values, larger plus value into the D-A,
higher motor drive voltage which makes the Servo Amplifier drive the mass faster, incrementing the relative counter
faster, increasing the azimuth bearing and reducing the remaining targeted AZ Reference Error (let’s say the azimuth
bearing is now 30.0 degrees and the AZ Reference Error is reduced to 150.0 degrees). The loop will quickly ramps up in
drive speed, runs at high speed to reduce the AZ Reference Error until that error is small enough to start reducing the
velocity error (azimuth bearing now 160.0 and the AZ Reference Error is only 20.0 degrees). As the velocity error
becomes smaller the D-A output voltage will drop back down toward 2.50 VDC slowing drive to the mass. The smaller
the AZ Reference Error becomes (8.0 degrees, then 4.0 degrees, then 2.0 degrees, then 0.2 degrees) the slower the
antenna drives, until there is no error, no velocity and no motor drive (the antenna when the at azimuth bearing is at
180.0.
Ship tied to pier: – The ship is not moving, therefore, the mass is not moving in free space, rate sensor output is
nominal (2.50 VDC), the loop is stable with no drive (2.50 VDC) applied to the controller, motor does not turn. Ships
heading is not changing, relative position not changing (encoder not incrementing or decrementing the counter), AZ
bearing has not changed and no targeting/tracking changes have occurred to cause an AZ reference error. In this
scenario the loop is quiet.
Ship turns CW: – inertia negates ALL motion of the mass: The base turns CW with the ship (but the mass does
not move in free space, azimuth motor shaft rotates freely because there is no drive being applied, the encoder
decrements the relative counter (equal and opposite to the heading change), the ships heading increments, AZ bearing
stays at same value (HDG + REL) and no AZ reference error is generated. Because the mass has not moved in free
space, the azimuth rate output is nominal, no velocity error is generated and no motor drive is required.
Ship turns CW – slight motion of the mass: Slight CW rotation of the mass (relative did not go down as much as
heading went up) is sensed by the rate sensors, azimuth rate output goes slightly above 2.50VDC, resulting in the
motor drive voltage going slightly below 2.50 VDC driving the mass slightly CCW (to drive relative down so that no
azimuth bearing error will affect the loop). The base is turning with the ship, driving the encoder to decrement the
relative counter (assisted by a little bit of drive), the ships heading increments, AZ bearing stays at same value and no
AZ reference error is generated. Drive will be applied only when the mass is rotated in free space and amount of drive
applied is only the amount required to counter the rotation (stop the rate sensor from being rotated in free space). If a
mis-pointing error is created due to acceleration of the turn, a AZ reference error will be developed to increase the
velocity error to increase the motor drive to negate the reference error.
Tracking: The loop is quiet but tracking determines that stronger satellite signal is to the right and issues an AZ UP
increment to the ICU. This desired AZ position is now higher than the present AZ bearing, this causes minus AZ
reference error, causing a light increase in motor drive, steps the antenna up in azimuth increasing the azimuth bearing
until no AZ reference error remains.

23-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Integrated Control Unit Motor Driver
Enclosure
DishScan
Drive
n7xxx
Velocity
Error
Motor
(DISP IVC) Digital Motor Drive
Torque
KP (Disp TC) To Voltage

Brake
∑ Servo Motor Brushless
(Adjustable Drive
Integrator Analog Amplifier Lines DC Motor
System Gain)
n2xxx (* -1) Converter
Hall
Sensor

Motor Torque – Belt Drive

Lines
+/- Rate Sensor Bias Correction

Elevation
+24 VDC for 6 seconds,
Position/Target +24 VDC Brake Controller PCB
EL Reference Error

+12 VDC thereafter

From MXP

DISP W
(RATE)

∑
Integrator
(* -1)

Elevation
Stabilized
Position (ADMC)

EL Reference Error
Antenna
Elevation EL
Counter Sensor Mass

Mechanical connection
Analog Elevation Rate
To (DISP W) Y Rate Sensor
Digital (Elevation)
Converter

Series 12 Elevation Stabilization Loop

Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Theory of Operation

23.6. Level/Elevation Servo Control Loop

This loop stabilizes the elevation angle of the antenna, keeps track of the elevation position of the antenna (relative to
the horizon) and allows for elevation (and satellite) pointing, targeting and tracking. Refer to the Elevation Control
Loop drawing.
In this axis the stabilized portion of the antenna pedestal is comprised of the equipment frame and antenna assembly
(dish, feed and feedtube). When properly stabilized this portion of the antenna (referred to as the “Mass”) remains still
in free space while the ship rolls or pitches below it.
When powered up the absolute elevation angle (relative to gravity) is provided to the elevation counter by the
elevation sensor regardless of where the antenna is actually pointed. During initialization, when the elevation axis goes
active the ICU drives the antenna slowly up/down to 45 degrees. The ICU reports to the MXP that initialization is
completed, model setting and software version and the current elevation positions of the antenna.
The MXP can be setup to automatically target the last satellite that was targeted. If this is not the currently desired
satellite the operator needs to manually change the SAT value to the desired satellite longitude and press ENTER to
target that satellite. The MXP will calculate the azimuth, elevation and polarity angles from the ships current latitude
and longitude to the desired satellite longitude and send these values to the ICU. The ICU will drive the appropriate
motors until the antenna is at the calculated angles. Post initialization the antenna will be actively stabilized by the
ICU.
If everything is operating normally:
• Inertia should do 98% of keeping the mass from moving in free space. In the elevation loop the antenna will
stay pointed at the satellite while the ship rolls or pitches underneath the mass.
• This loop senses/negates any motion of the “mass” in free space, real-time, as it happens, limiting mis-
pointing to less than 0.2 degrees. Movement of the mass will occur only when inertia is not able to negate all
of the disturbing forces or the mechanical stops are contacted, therefore, the mass of the antenna will start
to follow the direction of the ships motion.
• When inertia is not able to prevent some motion from being inducted into the stabilized mass of the antenna
the Elevation sensor (absolute elevation) and the elevation rate (rate of rotation of the mass) outputs will
increase or decrease depending on the direction of the rotation. Their combined output becomes the
velocity error, becomes motor torque, inverted and converted to an analog DC motor drive voltage to oppose
any undesired movement of the mass off of the desired elevation angle.
• Simply put, rate output voltage increasing causes the motor drive voltage to immediately decrease equal and
opposite to the rate voltage, rate output voltage going down causes motor drive voltage to immediately go
up equal and opposite to the rate voltage. As soon as the mass stops being rotated its’ voltage will
immediately return to 2.50 VDC (nominal).
• The absolute elevation sensor aids stabilization of the elevation of the antenna, but it also provides bias
correction if the rate sensor is drifting (output is not 2.50 VDC when the rate senor is NOT being rotated on
its’ sensed axis).
• If the mass does rotate slightly CW while the ship is turning the elevation rate output voltage will go up above
2.50 VDC, causing positive velocity error and positive motor torque, negative input to the D-A which will
make the motor drive voltage go down below 2.50 VDC exactly the same amount that the rate voltage went
up. This voltage below 2.50 VDC will drive the mass CCW at exactly the same speed that the elevation rate is
sensing. This response to the rate output causing motor drive is immediate (real time), there is no lag or delay
time in the servo loops.
• If the mass does rotate slightly CCW while the ship is rolling or pitching the elevation rate output voltage will
go down below 2.50 VDC, causing negative velocity error and negative motor torque, positive input to the D-
A which will make the motor drive voltage go up above 2.50 VDC exactly the same amount that the rate
voltage went down. This voltage above 2.50 VDC will drive the mass CW at exactly the same speed that the
elevation rate is sensing. This response to the rate output causing motor drive is immediate (real time), there
is no lag or delay time in the servo loops.
• Motor drive voltage of 2.51 VDC drives the mass VERY slowly clockwise, 2.50 volts does NOT drive the motor
at all and less than 2.49 volts drives the mass VERY slowly counter clockwise. The larger the voltage offset
from 2.50 VDC, the faster the antenna will drive (up to about 20 degrees per second).
• Maximum possible rate/motor drive voltages are up to 4.7VDC or down to 0.3VDC.
Scenarios of operation;
Targeting: The ship is tied to the pier with a heading of 000.0 (bow is due north) at latitude 38N and longitude
122W. The antenna initializes to elevation of 45 degree and reports this elevation position to the MXP. We target
23-10 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Theory of Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

satellite 122W (this satellite would be at 46.0 degrees elevation). The MXP sends the 46.0 target value up to the ICU
which is inverted (to become -46.0). This target elevation is added to the elevation counter value (-46.0 + 45.0 = -1.0)
to become an EL Reference Error of -1.0 degrees. The EL Reference Error is integrated, becomes a minus Velocity Error
(integration makes the velocity value ramp up), which becomes minus Motor Torque, inverted to become a small plus
digital count into the D-A Converter. This converted plus digital count becomes a motor drive voltage slightly greater
than 2.50 volts and the Servo Amplifier starts driving the mass slowly clockwise (up) and the elevation sensor
increments the elevation counter. As the elevation position goes up the EL reference error is reduced. This cycle
continues until no EL reference error remains when the antenna is at 46.0 degree elevation. The minimum elevation
that can be targeted is 00.0 and the maximum is 90.0.
Ship tied to pier: The ship is not moving, therefore, the mass is not moving in free space, rate sensor output is
nominal (2.50 VDC), the loop is stable with no drive (2.50 VDC) applied to the controller, motor does not turn. The
elevation position is not changing, and no targeting/tracking changes have occurred to cause an EL reference error. In
this scenario the loop is quiet.
Ship turns CW: – inertia negates ALL motion of the mass: The base turns CW with the ship (but the mass does
not move in free space, elevation motor shaft rotates freely because there is no drive being applied, elevation position
stays at same value and no EL reference error is generated. Because the mass has not moved in free space, the
elevation output is nominal, no velocity error is generated and no motor drive is required.
Ship turns CW: – slight motion of the mass: Slight CW rotation of the mass is sensed by the elevation rate
sensor and its output goes slightly above 2.50VDC, resulting in the motor drive voltage going slightly below 2.50 VDC
driving the mass slightly CCW to drive elevation down so that no EL Reference error is generated. Drive will be applied
only when the mass is rotated in free space and amount of drive applied is only the amount required to counter the
rotation (stop the rate sensor from being rotated in free space). If a mis-pointing error is created due to acceleration
of the turn, an EL reference error will be developed to increase the velocity error to increase the motor drive to negate
the reference error.
Tracking: The loop is quiet but tracking determines that stronger satellite signal is UP and issues an EL UP increment
to the ICU. This desired EL position is now higher than the present EL counter value, causing minus EL reference error,
causing a light increase in motor drive, steps the antenna up in elevation until no EL reference error remains.
Bias Correction: Rate sensor drift (plus): Rate sensor output is slightly above 2.50 VDC even though it is not being
rotated, causing minus motor drive, which rotates the mass slightly CCW. The elevation sensor output does down
causing a minus EL reference error. When the minus EL Reference error is large enough to cancel the plus output from
the rate sensor drive will cease to be applied. This is rate sensor bias correction.

23-11 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Integrated Control Unit Motor Driver
DishScan
Enclosure
Drive
n7xxx
Velocity
Error
Motor
(DISP IVC) Digital Motor Drive
Torque
KP (Disp TC) To Voltage

Brake
∑ Servo Motor Brushless
(Adjustable Drive
Integrator Analog Amplifier Lines DC Motor
System Gain)
n1xxx (* -1) Converter
Hall
Sensor

Motor Torque – Belt Drive

Lines
+/- Rate Sensor Bias Correction

+24 VDC for 6 seconds,

+24 VDC Brake Controller PCB
CL Reference Error

+12 VDC thereafter

∑
Integrator
Cross-Level
Position (ADMC)
Stabilized
CL Reference Error
Antenna
Cross-Level CL
Counter Sensor Mass
Z Rate Sensor
(Azimuth @ Mechanical connection
Zero EL)
Analog Cross-Level Rate Z
To (DISP W)
Digital X
Converter
X Rate Sensor
(Cross-Level
@ Zero EL)

Series 12 Cross-Level Stabilization Loop

Theory of Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

23.7. Cross-Level Loop

This loop stabilizes the cross-level (left-right tile of the mass) angle of the antenna, keeps track of the cross-level
position of the antenna (relative to the horizon) and stabilizes linear polarization. Refer to the Cross-Level Control
Loop drawing above.
In this axis the stabilized portion of the antenna pedestal is comprised of the cross-level beam, equipment frame and
antenna assembly (dish, feed and feed tube). When properly stabilized the “mass” stays level (left-right) in free space
while the ship rolls or pitches below it.
When powered up, the absolute cross-level angle (relative to gravity) is provided to the cross-level counter by the
cross-level sensor. During initialization, when the cross-level axis goes active, the ICU drives the antenna slowly left-
right to bring the cross-level beam to level. Cross-Level is not reported, but is obtainable via remote command of MXP
status graphs diagnostic software.
In normal operation:
• Inertia should do 98% of keeping the mass from moving in free space. In the cross-level loop, the cross-level
beam will stay level so that the dish will not rotate to the left or to the right; therefore, maintaining the
polarization angle of the feed in free space while the ship rolls or pitches underneath the mass.
• This loop senses and negates any motion of the “mass” in free space, real-time, as it happens, limiting mis-
pointing to less than 0.2 degrees. Movement of the mass occurs only when inertia is not able to negate all of
the disturbing forces or the mechanical stops are contacted, therefore, the mass of the antenna will start to
follow the direction of the ships motion.
• When inertia is not able to prevent some motion from being induced into the stabilized mass of the antenna
the cross-level sensor (absolute cross-level) and the cross-level rate (rate of rotation of the mass) outputs will
increase or decrease depending on the direction of the rotation. Their combined output becomes the
velocity error, becomes Motor Torque, inverted and converted to an analog DC motor drive voltage to
oppose any undesired movement of the mass off of level.
• Simply put, rate output voltage going up causes motor drive voltage to immediately go down equal and
opposite to the rate voltage, rate output voltage going down causes motor drive voltage to immediately go
up equal and opposite to the rate voltage as soon as the mass stops being rotated its’ voltage will
immediately return to 2.50 VDC (nominal).
• The absolute cross-level sensor aids stabilization of the cross-level of the antenna, but it also provides bias
correction if the rate sensor is drifting (output is not 2.50 VDC when the rate senor is NOT being rotated on
its’ sensed axis).
• If the mass does rotate slightly CW while the ship is rolling or pitching the cross-level rate output voltage will
go up above 2.50 VDC, causing positive velocity error and positive motor torque, negative input to the D-A
which will make the motor drive voltage go down below 2.50 VDC exactly the same amount that the rate
voltage went up. This voltage below 2.50 VDC will drive the mass CCW at exactly the same speed that the
elevation rate is sensing. This response to the rate output causing motor drive is immediate (real time), there
is no lag or delay time in the servo loops.
• If the mass does rotate slightly CCW while the ship is rolling or pitching the cross-level rate output voltage
will go down below 2.50 VDC, causing negative velocity error and negative motor torque, positive input to
the D-A which will make the motor drive voltage go up above 2.50 VDC exactly the same amount that the
rate voltage went down. This voltage above 2.50 VDC will drive the mass CW at exactly the same speed that
the elevation rate is sensing. This response to the rate output causing motor drive is immediate (real time),
there is no lag or delay time in the servo loops.
• Motor drive voltage of 2.51 VDC drives the mass VERY slowly clockwise, 2.50 volts does NOT drive the motor
at all and less than 2.49 volts drives the mass VERY slowly counter clockwise. The larger the voltage offset
from 2.50 VDC, the faster the antenna will drive (up to about 20 degrees per second).
• Maximum possible rate/motor drive voltages are up to 4.7VDC or down to 0.3VDC.

23-13 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Theory of Operation

Scenarios of operation;
Ship tied to pier: The ship is not moving, therefore, the mass is not moving in free space, rate sensor output is
nominal (2.50 VDC), the loop is stable with no drive (2.50 VDC) applied to the controller, motor does not turn. The
cross-level beam remains level and there is no CL reference error. In this scenario the loop is quiet.
Ship turns CW: – inertia negates ALL motion of the mass: The cross-level beam remains level, cross-level
motor shaft rotates freely because there is no drive being applied so no CL reference error is generated. Because the
mass has not moved in free space, the cross-level output is nominal, no velocity error is generated and no motor drive
is required.
Ship turns CW: – slight motion of the mass: Slight CW rotation of the mass is sensed by the cross-level rate
sensor and its output goes slightly above 2.50VDC, resulting in the motor drive voltage going slightly below 2.50 VDC
driving the mass slightly CCW to drive cross-level down so that no CL Reference error is generated. Drive will be
applied only when the mass is rotated in free space and amount of drive applied is only the amount required to
counter the rotation (stop the rate sensor from being rotated in free space). If a mis-pointing error is created due to
acceleration of the turn, a CL reference error will be developed to increase the velocity error to increase the motor
drive to negate the reference error.
Bias Correction: Rate sensor drift (plus): Rate sensor output is slightly above 2.50 VDC even though it is not being
rotated, causing minus motor drive, which rotates the mass slightly CCW. The cross-level sensor output does down
causing a minus CL reference error. When the minus CL Reference error is large enough to cancel the plus output from
the rate sensor drive will cease to be applied. This is rate sensor bias correction.

23.8. RF Flow: Cross-Pol ONLY with Quad Band LNB

Power - AC Power is provided from an adequately sized breaker (properly rated UPS power is recommended) wired
into the breaker switch mounted inside the radome. This AC power is fed to the PCU and BUC Power Supply via the
AC Power Ring. The pedestals that have a Codan 8 or 16w BUC installed will be provided with a +48VDC BUC Power
Supply. Comtech BUCs are AC powered from the power ring.
Pedestal M&C – The MXP communicates with the ICU over the coaxial connection through the Dual Channel Rotary.
Radio M&C – Radio M&C connection can be in two forms, serial & Ethernet. If the BUC requires serial M&C a serial
connection from the computer Comm port to J9B on the rear panel of the MXP is required. If the BUC requires
Ethernet M&C an Ethernet connection from the computer Ethernet port to J3A on the rear panel of the MXP is
required.
The Radio M&C signals are combined with the Pedestal M&C and communicated to the ICU over the coaxial
connection through the Dual Channel Rotary. The Radio M&C signals are then passed from the ICU to the BUC.
Cross-Pol/Co-Pol Selection - The xx12 systems all have a Cross-Pol feed assembly installed on them. In Cross-Pol
ONLY systems the additional Co-Pol option parts are not installed. In these systems, only the Cross-Pol setting in the
MXP should be selected so that the coax switch is always connected to the cross-pol LNB.
LNB Control - The ICU supplies the appropriate voltage and tone to the selected (Cross-Pol or Co-Pol) LNB to cause it
to operate in the selected frequency band (as remotely controlled by the band selection settings of the MXP). There
are two controls applicable to band selection of the LNB's installed on this system: operational voltage (13 or 18 VDC)
and operational tone (22 kHz tone or No Tone). Voltage and tone, used to select the frequency band of the LNB, are
supplied to the LNB through the Co-Pol/Cross-Pol switch to the appropriate LNB. The desired DC voltage and tone are
supplied by the ICU based on the band selection settings in the MXP.
Receive IF - The ICU outputs the Cross-Pol LNB output, of the selected frequency band, and passes it out together
with the Pedestal M&C, and Radio M&C if used, on the “Rotary Joint” SMA connector through the receive channel of
the rotary joint to below decks on the receive IF coax cable.

23-14 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Theory of Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Transmit IF - The Transmit IF and 10 MHz reference signal is generated from the below decks satellite modem after
a positive Rx lock has been established. These signals are then routed through the transmit path of a dual channel
rotary joint via coax to the BUC. The BUC then up converts and amplifies the IF signal and routes the resultant RF to
the TX port of the feed (OMT) via waveguide and waveguide rotary joint.

23-15 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Theory of Operation

23.9. RF Flow: Cross-Pol/Co-Pol switching and Quad Band LNBs

Power - AC Power is provided from an adequately sized breaker (properly rated UPS power is recommended) wired
into the breaker switch mounted inside the radome. This AC power is fed to the PCU and BUC Power Supply via the
AC Power Ring. The pedestals that have a Codan 8 or 16w BUC installed will be provided with a +48VDC BUC Power
Supply. Comtech BUCs are AC powered from the power ring.
Pedestal M&C – The MXP communicates with the ICU over the coaxial connection through the Dual Channel Rotary.
Radio M&C – Radio M&C connection can be in two forms, serial & Ethernet. If the BUC requires serial M&C a serial
connection from the computer Comm port to J9B on the rear panel of the MXP is required. If the BUC requires
Ethernet M&C an Ethernet connection from the computer Ethernet port to J3A on the rear panel of the MXP is
required.

23-16 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Theory of Operation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

The Radio M&C signals are combined with the Pedestal M&C and communicated to the ICU over the coaxial
connection through the Dual Channel Rotary. The Radio M&C signals are then passed from the ICU to the BUC.
Cross-Pol/Co-Pol Selection - The xx12 systems all have a Cross-Pol feed assembly installed on them. If fitted with
the Co-Pol option, a waveguide diplexer is installed in the TX waveguide to provide a receive RF output to a Co-Pol
LNB. The Cross-Pol LNB output and the Co-Pol LNB output are connected to the Cross-Pol/Co-Pol select switch built
into the ICU. Selection is controlled by the appropriate setting in the MPX, which commands the ICU to electrically
control the coax switch (which then routes the band selection control to the selected LNB).
LNB Control - The ICU supplies the appropriate voltage and tone to the selected (Cross-Pol or Co-Pol) LNB to cause it
to operate in the selected frequency band (as remotely controlled by the band selection settings of the MXP). There
are two controls applicable to band selection of the LNB's installed on this system: operational voltage (13 or 18 VDC)
and operational tone (22 kHz tone or No Tone). Voltage and tone, used to select the frequency band of the LNB, are
supplied to the LNB through the Co-Pol/Cross-Pol switch to the appropriate LNB. The desired DC voltage and tone are
supplied by the ICU based on the band selection settings in the MXP.
Receive IF - The ICU outputs the selected Co-Pol or Cross-Pol LNB output, of the selected frequency band, and
passes it out together with the Pedestal M&C, and Radio M&C if used, on the “Rotary Joint” SMA connector through
the receive channel of the rotary joint to below decks on the receive IF coax cable.
Transmit IF - The Transmit IF and 10 MHz reference signal is generated from the below decks satellite modem after
a positive Rx lock has been established. These signals are then routed through the transmit path of a dual channel
rotary joint via coax to the BUC. The BUC then up converts and amplifies the IF signal and routes the resultant RF to
the TX port of the feed (OMT) via waveguide and waveguide rotary joint.

23-17 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Theory of Operation

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

23-18 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24. Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

The IMA system includes some built-in diagnostic to help you isolate faults and

24.1. Power On Self Test (POST)

The post runs at start up (on both the MXP and the ICU) before the operating system transfers control to the user
created tasks. The goal of the POST is to test as much of the hardware as possible and verify that it is functional. The
POST assumes that nothing but a power cord is plugged into the system. The tests therefore do not attempt to test
hardware that is off the board. Likewise external hardware should not cause a POST test to fail.
The POST attempts to verify that the hardware components on the board exist. After this is verified, the software is
allowed to run.
The POST lets the user know there was a problem in three different ways:
First, the front panel “error” LED will indicate when the post has failed.
Second, the results of the test will be printed out the serial port.
Finally, the results will be logged into the system log. The system log file will be written to at least once each time the
POST is run. The entry will indicate that the post was run and at what time. On the MXP, a second entry will be the
status of the SFP device and it will indicate if a device is connected and what type of device it is. All other system log
entries from the post will be indications of failure.
The MXP board (below decks) and the ICU board(above decks) each have some components that are unique to them.
If the post test is specific to only one of the boards, it will be in the test description. Operating System Tests are:

24.1.1. Real Time Clock

Perform two tests. First test looks for a pattern in a known location of the RTC. This indicates that the battery
and device are OK. If this fails, a second test writes then reads the pattern. This proves the device functions.

24.1.2. NAND Test

Verify that the NAND initialization was successful. Part of the initialization checks the device ID. If that
matches, then we can read from a properly configured NAND device.

24.1.3. EEPROM
Read the mac address, check for the Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI). This will be consistent across all
hardware.

24.1.4. I2C 0
Verify that at least one of the devices on the I2C channel 0 works. This includes: EEPROM and Real Time
Clock.

24.1.5. Processor Serial Port

Put the serial port into loopback mode and verify that we can send a message to ourselves. Return the port to
normal operation. MXP tests ports 0, 1, and 2. ICU only tests port 1.

24.1.6. External Serial Port

Put the serial ports into loopback mode and verify that we can send a message to ourselves. Return the port
to normal operation. ICU does not test Port D.

24.1.7. ADC Chip – Power Supplies – Temp Sensor

Read the voltage value of every power supply. Use the results to determine if there is a problem with the
power supplies, the Zener Diode, or the ADC. Both boards have a temperature sensor; verify that the output
is within operating range.

24-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

24.1.8. Ethernet PHY Chip

Put the PHY into loopback. Send then receive a test frame.

24.1.9. CAN Controller

The initialization routine checks several configuration registers to verify that the initialization was performed.
Post Checks that the can controller successfully initialized. Only performed on the MXP. SFP Device Read
GPIO to determine if device is connected. Read device to determine what is connected. Log results
regardless of success or failure, indicating the type of device when read successfully. If device appears
connected but fails to report its vendor and part number, then indicate a problem. Only performed on the
MXP.

24.1.10. RF Serial Interface

Put the RF serial interface into loopback mode. Send and receive data. Restore the device to normal
operation. Only performed on the ICU.

24.1.11. LNB Voltage

Measure the various voltage levels possible for the LNB voltage supply. Verify that all levels can be generated.

24.2. In Service Test (IST)

The “In Service Test” is a suite of diagnostics that the system can run without interrupting service of the unit. Most
importantly, this test can be run while the system is on target and tracking a satellite. The test can be initiated by the
user from the web interface. The user will be able to press a button to begin the test. The test can also be started
from the command line.
The goal of the in service test is to test system peripherals that can be tested without disturbing a working system.
If the test is started from the website, the website will communicate the status of the tests. If the test is started form
a terminal, the status of the test will be printed to the user while the test is running on that terminal. Entries to the
system log will be made by the individual tests themselves. A summary entry will be made to the system log after the
test completes. The Diagnostic Tests are:

24.2.1. Motor Driver Board

Is the motor driver board present? Can it be communicated with? Is it within the current limits? Test will
leverage the motor driver Visual Basic program to provide useful information. If the system is in dish scan,
can look for current on motor, cyclic in nature.

24.2.2. Polarization Angle Potentiometer Range

Read the pot, and check that it is in range: between 5 and 95 percent of 5 volts.

24.2.3. Receiver
Check if AGC < 100, which indicates a problem. Check the AGC range? Change tracking to off, sweep the
spectrum. Look for multiple peaks. Is there a peak where you are tracking? Is it close to what you have set?
Then set back.

24.3. Out Of Service Test (OOST)

The out of service test is a series of diagnostics that help evaluate the functionality of the antenna. Performing these
tests will cause the antenna to lose satellite if the antenna is tracking or to be unable to
acquire satellite until the test completes. The test can be initiated by the user from the web interface. The user will be
able to press a button to begin the test. The test can also be started from the command line.
The out of service test puts the antenna through its paces. It assumes that the antenna is properly connected to the
other pieces of hardware so that, if everything is working properly, the antenna can track a satellite. This test will move
the antenna, communicate between the MXP and ICU, and communicate with the modem/transmission hardware.
The diagnostics actually performed by the test will be determined by the configuration of the system.
If the test is started from the website the website will communicate the status of the tests. If the test is started from a
terminal, the status of the test will be printed to the user while the test is running on that terminal. Entries to the

24-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

system log will be made by the individual tests themselves. A summary entry will be made to the system log after the
test completes. The Diagnostic Tests are:

24.3.1. Motor Driver Board

Test drives motors at +/- 2.5 amps and monitors current. If fails, test engages brakes and again attempts to
take the motor to 2.5 amps. This indicates a broken belt. For AZ, monitor encoder and check amps vs.
encoder. Look for broken chain.

24.3.2. Motors (AZ, EL, and CL): do they turn

Test for motion that is detectable by the motion sensors.

24.3.3. Motors (PolAng)

Run from stop to stop. Drive to verify the motor works.

24.3.4. Motion Platform

Check 3 rate sensors are within 100mv of 2.5 volts. Move the antenna and verify that the sensor indicates
movement.

24.3.5. Motor Brakes

Move antenna and then engage brakes. Check that sensors stops. This will be a challenge. Will have to
characterize the motion of the ship before performing test.

24.4. IMA System LED Functions

MXP Front Panel

IMA GUI System Status Page

The IMA LEDs provide status of the system and can be viewed from the front panel of the MXP/GMXP, or from the
IMA Graphic User Interface. During normal operation they indicate events in the system, such as:
Error When OFF this LED indicates that no errors have occurred. When ON in various colors & states this LED
indicates that one or more errors have occurred, or are occurring. There are cases where other LEDs can also
indicate specific errors, see the information below.
Initializing When ON Solid Green this LED indicates that the ADE is initiating. When the ADE completes
initialization, this LED should go OFF. For other indications, see the information below.
PowerWhen ON Solid Green this LED indicates that the MXP/GMXP AC Power is ON. For other indications, see
the information below.
Target When ON Solid Green this LED indicates that the antenna is targeting. For other indications, see the
information below.
Search When ON Solid Green this LED indicates that the antenna is conducting a search pattern. For other
indications, see the information below.
Tracking When ON Solid Green this LED indicates that the antenna is tracking a satellite signal that is above
threshold. Flashing Green indicates that signal is below threshold, will continue for “search delay” amount of time
and then begin a new search pattern if the signal is not re-acquired. For other indications, see the information
below.

24-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

24.5. Error Code Color-State Overview:

This overview of error codes groups error codes together to give you a quick reference of error colors caused by a
given LED-Color-State as seen on the front panel or in the GUI. To ascertain the specific error code, refer to the next
section of this chapter. For a complete list of error codes, refer to the Error Table below.

24.5.1. Error LED (by states)

This is an overview of all the cases that can cause each of the color/state(s) listed. The graphics below (4
ovals) represent multiple time segments, such as ON-ON-ON-ON (solid ON) or ON-OFF-ON-OFF (Flashing).

Color Trigger Condition(s) Color Trigger Condition(s)

State State
RED 1001 - Stability Limit Error RED 1051 - 1:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly
Solid 1002 - AZ Reference Error - Encoder Solid Connected
1003 - AGC Below Noise Threshold 1052 - 36:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly
Connected
1004 - Software Upload warning
1053 - 90:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly
1005 - Comm Error with Motor Driver Connected
1006 - Motor Driver Fault Detected 1054 - 360:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not
1007 - DishScan Disabled Properly Connected
1008 - AZ Reference Error - Home Flag 1056- Motor failed to reach Target
1009 - Tilt Sensor Error 1057 - Motion Platform Failed
1010 - Rate Sensor Error Initialization
1011 - Over Speed Error 1058 - No Home Flag Detected During
1012 - POST Failure Pol Initialization (4012GX ONLY)
1013 - OS Errors 1059 - Multiple Home Flags Detected
During Pol Initialization (4012GX ONLY)
1014 - Flash Failure
1061 - Pol Home Flag Measured Too
1015 - MXP-ICU Link Error Wide (4012GX ONLY)
1021 - NMEA HDD Heading Not Received 1062 - Pol Home Flag Found In Wrong
for 10 Seconds Location (4012GX ONLY
1022 - NMEA HDG Heading Not Received 1063 - CM current out of range (GX60 &
for 10 Seconds 4012GX Ka ONLY
1023 - NMEA HDM Heading Not 1064 - CM Voltage out of range (GX60
Received for 10 Seconds & 4012GX Ka ONLY)
1024 - NMEA HDT Heading Not Received 1065 - BUC current out of range (GX60
for 10 Seconds & 4012GX Ka ONLY
1046 - Step by Step Gyro Not Connected 1066 - BUC Voltage out of range (GX60
Correctly & 4012GX Ka ONLY)
1047 - Step by Step Gyro Requires Initial 1067 - Profile changed (not saved)
Heading
1071 - Pol Motor Failed
1048 - 36:1 Synchro Gyro Requires Initial
Heading 1072 - Pol Has Been Driven Outside Of
Hardware Limit
1049 - 90:1 Synchro Gyro Requires Initial
Heading 1073 - Pol Failed To Initialize With
Encoder
1050 - 360:1 Synchro Gyro Requires
Initial Heading

24-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

RED 1016 – AZ Servo Limit AMBER 1028 – Temp In Radome Above/Below

Flashing 1017 – LV (EL) Servo Limit Solid Operating Specs
1018 – CL Servo Limit 1038 – System Serial Number Mismatch
1019 – No GPS String 1039 – System Serial Number Invalid
1020 – No Profile Set in MXP/ICU 1041 – NMEA HDD Received with Bad
Checksum
1025 – GPS String Invalid
1042 – NMEA HDG Received with Bad
1026 – Antenna Not Balanced - NOT Checksum
IMPLIMENTED YET
1043 – NMEA HDM Received with Bad
1036 – Parameter Sync Error Checksum
1037 – Time Sync Error 1044 – NMEA HDT Received with Bad
1040 – INI Integrity Error Checksum
1055 - Polang skew entry results in target 1045 – Step by Step Gyro took Invalid
out of range Step Size
1060 – Detected Pol Home Flag Sensor
Anomaly (4012GX ONLY)
1068 – No Pol Home Flag Detected,
Using End Stop Home
1069 – Pol Home Flag In Wrong
Location, Using End Stop Home
1070 - Pol Home Flag Failed, Using End
Stop Home
AMBER 1032 – Latest Parameters Not Saved
Flashing 1035 – MXP-ICU Sync Timeout

24.5.2. Initializing LED

This is an overview of all the cases that can cause each of the state(s) listed.

Color Trigger Condition(s) Color Trigger Condition(s)

State State
GREEN ADE Initializing AMBER 1033 – Software Update In Progress
Solid Flashing
MXP-ICU Sync at startup
OOST On
IST On

24-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

24.5.3. Power LED

This is an overview of all the cases that can cause each of the state(s) listed.

Color Trigger Condition(s) Color Trigger Condition(s)

State State
GREEN The MXP is powering up. GREEN The MXP is powered up.
Flashing Solid

RED The boot-loader is running.

Flashing

24.5.4. Target LED

This is an overview of all the cases that can cause each of the state(s) listed.

Color Trigger Condition(s) Color Trigger Condition(s)

State State
GREEN Antenna is Targeting RED 1027 – Satellite Out of Range
Solid Solid

24.5.5. Search LED

This is an overview of all the cases that can cause each of the state(s) listed.

Color Trigger Condition(s) Color Trigger Condition(s)

State State
GREEN Antenna is Searching
Solid

24-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24.5.6. Tracking LED

This is an overview of all the cases that can cause each of the state(s) listed.

Color Trigger Condition(s) Color Trigger Condition(s)

State State
GREEN Antenna is Tracking a satellite signal GREEN AGC is below threshold, search delay
Solid above threshold. Flashing timer running.

AMBER 1030 – Antenna Within a Programmed AMBER 1029 – Antenna about to enter a
Solid Block Zone Flashing Programmed Block Zone
1031 – AGC Below Threshold 1034 – Block Zone Test/Simulation

24.6. Looking Up The Actual Errors

To ascertain the specific errors that have occurred in the system, log into the IMA GUI and select Logs – Activity (refer
to the Activity section of the manual). For a complete list of error codes, refer to the Error Table below.

24.7. Error Table

The following table defines each of the error code, some information about what causes it and some general guidance
of what to test or troubleshoot. This is a complete list of errors which can be reported by the IMA software 1.05:
These errors are displayed by color/sate, as previously described, on the LEDs on the front panel and the GUI. A list of
errors can also be generated from the View Activity Log, when selecting the time frame desired and selecting the
Errors radio button.

Front Latched /
Panel Unlatche
LED d
Error
Description Type Type
Code
State
Color

24-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

1001 Stability Limit – The antenna is mispointed by 0.5 degrees, or more, in azimuth, Error Error Unlatched
elevation or cross-level from its targeted position. This error will clear itself as Solid
soon as the antenna is within 0.2 degrees of its correct pointing. If this error is
observed rarely, clear it and monitor for more frequent occurrences. If this Red
error occurs frequently, or remains latched, you should:
• Check antenna balance.
• Turn tracking off, check antenna position displays for excessive
(runaway) drive. If runaway drive is noted, troubleshoot drive
components in that axis.
• Turn antenna input AC power OFF.
• Visually check for mechanical obstructions inside the radome which
are interfering with or preventing drive.
• Rotate the antenna to check free rotation on the bearings, verify that
there is no binding.
• Inspect belts/chain for damage.
• Inspect cable connections to the Motors, the MDE and the ICU.
• Turn antenna input AC power ON and observe initialization.
• Test antenna drive, if any drive problem is noted, troubleshoot drive
components in that axis.
1002 AZ Reference Error - Encoder Read error. This could indicate that the antenna Error Error Latched
is restricted, not driving or that the encoder, Motor, MDE, ICU or cable failure. Solid
Check motor/encoder connection to the MDE Red
Test motor shaft physical rotation
Check proper motor drive.
1003 AGC Below Noise Threshold - Loss of RF input to the tracking receiver (as if Error Error Unlatched
the coax was disconnected from the rear panel). This is the tracking receivers Solid
own internal noise.
Red
Band Select incorrect (Co/Cross Coax Switch select incorrect - co-pol selected
with no co-pol LNB) - LNB failed – RX path cable disconnected/failed. ICU fail
- coax switch, internal connection. Coax disconnected from DAC rear panel or
tracking receiver failure.
1004 Software Update Did not Load Properly - Reload software Warning Error Latched
Solid
Red
1005 Comm Error w/ Motor Driver - Check cable connection ICU-MDE. Check LED Error Error Latched
status on the MDE. MDE, cable ICU may be failed. Solid
Red
1006 Motor Driver Fault Detected - Check cable connection ICU-MDE. Check LEDs Error Error Latched
on the MDE. Motor failures are indicated by LEDs: Check Belt - Motor cable Solid
connection – Motor – MDE
Red
1007 DishScan Disabled – Turn DishScan ON Error Error Unlatched
Solid
Red

24-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

1008 AZ Reference Error - Home Flag Read error. Rotate antenna by hand until Error Error Latched
home flag is in front of sensor and verify that the sensors LED turns on. Solid
If LED does not turn on, measure dimension between tab and end of sensor (it Red
should be 0.060 inch / 0.152 cm), adjust if necessary and retest. If LED still
does not turn on, replace sensor.
If LED does turn on, turn antenna power OFF and check HFO Sensor
connection to MDE and connection from MDE-ICU. Turn antenna power ON,
observe initialization azimuth drive to home and note that the LED comes ON.
If LED turns on in initialization but the antenna does not stop at home position
(until target), replace MDE, MDE – ICU cable or ICU.
1009 Tilt Sensor Error - Replace the ICU Error Error Unlatched
Solid
Red
1010 Rate Sensor Error - Replace the ICU Error Error Unlatched
Solid
Red
1011 Over Speed Error - One axis (AZ, EL, CL or REL) has been driven too fast Cycle Error Error Latched
power to the ADE and observe antenna to determine which axis is causing the Solid
error. Check LEDs on the MDE. Motor failures are indicated by LEDs: Check
appropriate Motor cable connection to the MDE. Troubleshoot Motor, MDE, Red
cable MDE – ICU and ICU.
1012 POST Failure - These tests are reported to activity log, check log for Debug Error Latched
information about POST tests. Solid
Red
1013 OS Errors - Ignore Warning Error Unlatched
Solid
Red
1014 Flash Failure - Determine if it is a failure in the MXP or the ICU and replace Error Error Latched
affected unit. Solid
Red
1015 MXP/ICU Link Error RX link connection failure. Trouble shoot ADE-BDE cable Warning Error Unlatched
connections, connectors-on Rotary Joint, the Rotary Joint, or EoC modules in Solid
the ICU and the MXP.
Red
1016 AZ Servo Limit - Motor is having to drive at maximum speed. If this error is Error Error Latched
observed rarely, clear it and monitor for more frequent occurrences. If this Flashing
error occurs frequently, or remains latched, you should:
Red
• Check antenna balance.
• Turn tracking off, check antenna position displays for excessive
(runaway) drive. If runaway drive is noted, troubleshoot drive
components in that axis.
• Turn antenna input AC power OFF. Visually check for mechanical
obstructions inside the radome which are interfering with or
preventing drive. Rotate the antenna to check free rotation on the
bearings, verify that there is no binding.
• Turn antenna input AC power ON and observe initialization.
• Test antenna drive, if any drive problem is noted, troubleshoot drive
components in that axis.

24-9 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

1017 LV Servo Limit - Motor is having to drive at maximum speed. If this error is Error Error Latched
observed rarely, clear it and monitor for more frequent occurrences. If this Flashing
error occurs frequently, or remains latched, you should:
Red
• Check antenna balance.
• Turn tracking off, check antenna position displays for excessive
(runaway) drive. If runaway drive is noted, troubleshoot drive
components in that axis.
• Turn antenna input AC power OFF. Visually check for mechanical
obstructions inside the radome which are interfering with or
preventing drive. Rotate the antenna to check free rotation on the
bearings, verify that there is no binding.
• Turn antenna input AC power ON and observe initialization.
• Test antenna drive, if any drive problem is noted, troubleshoot drive
components in that axis.
1018 CL Servo Limit - Motor is having to drive at maximum speed. If this error is Error Error Latched
observed rarely, clear it and monitor for more frequent occurrences. If this Flashing
error occurs frequently, or remains latched, you should:
Red
• Check antenna balance.
• Turn tracking off, check antenna position displays for excessive
(runaway) drive. If runaway drive is noted, troubleshoot drive
components in that axis.
• Turn antenna input AC power OFF. Visually check for mechanical
obstructions inside the radome which are interfering with or
preventing drive. Rotate the antenna to check free rotation on the
bearings, verify that there is no binding.
• Turn antenna input AC power ON and observe initialization.
• Test antenna drive, if any drive problem is noted, troubleshoot drive
components in that axis.
1019 No GPS String - Assure current IMA software is loaded in the system, check Error Error Unlatched
the GPS cable connection into the ICU. Replace the GPS, or ICU as necessary. Flashing
Red
1020 No Profile Set in the MXP/ICU - Set profile and save INI files Error Error Latched
Flashing
Red
1021 NMEA HDD Heading Not Received for 10 Seconds - Check gyro compass Error Error Latched
input selection – check gyro compass input cable connection – check gyro Solid
compass distribution output switch/fuse – recommend gyro
compass/distribution box repair. Red
1022 NMEA HDG Heading Not Received for 10 Seconds - Check gyro compass Error Error Latched
input selection – check gyro compass input cable connection – check gyro Solid
compass distribution output switch/fuse – recommend gyro
compass/distribution box repair. Red
1023 NMEA HDM Heading Not Received for 10 Seconds - Check gyro compass Error Error Latched
input selection – check gyro compass input cable connection – check gyro Solid
compass distribution output switch/fuse – recommend gyro
compass/distribution box repair. Red
1024 NMEA HDT Heading Not Received for 10 Seconds - Check gyro compass Error Error Latched
input selection – check gyro compass input cable connection – check gyro Solid
compass distribution output switch/fuse – recommend gyro
compass/distribution box repair. Red

24-10 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

1025 GPS String Invalid - Check GPS input selection: Warning Error Unlatched
If internal check connection from GPS into ICU else, replace GPS. Flashing
If external verify GPS sentence type and connections. If failed, switch to Amber
internal GPS.
1026 Antenna Not Balanced - NOT IMPLIMENTED YET Warning Error Unlatched
Flashing
Red
1027 Satellite Out of Range - Verify GPS LAT/LON is accurate for vessel location. Info Target Unlatched
Verify the satellite longitude which is being targeted. Target a satellite which is Solid
within +/- 79 degrees of the ships longitude.
Red
1028 Temp In Radome Above/Below Operating Specs - Temperature inside the Warning Error Unlatched
radome is +73 degrees C (163.4 degrees F) or greater, indicating that the Solid
equipment must cool down (air conditioning, cooling the air inside the radome
Amber
will be needed to continue operating in this environment). OR Temperature is
-25 degrees C (-13 degrees F) or lower, indicating that the equipment must
warm up (heater, warming the air inside the radome will be needed to continue
operating in this environment).
1029 Antenna about to enter a Programmed Block Zone - Near blockage zone – Notice Tracking Unlatched
steer the ship the opposite direction to avoid entering the blockage zone, or Flashing
the antenna will be blocked (services will be lost when the antenna is blocked
or will be switched to secondary antenna). Amber
1030 Antenna Within a Programmed Block Zone - Antenna is be blocked (services Notice Tracking Unlatched
will be lost when the antenna is blocked) until the ship changes course and the Solid
antenna exits the blockage zone.
Amber
1031 AGC Below Threshold - Antenna is not ON or near a satellite (target antenna) Info Tracking Unlatched
Check Blockage – Band Select incorrect - Co/Cross Coax Switch select Solid
incorrect - LNB failed – RX path cable disconnected/failed – ICU fail (coax
switch or tracking receiver) failed Amber
1032 Latest Parameters Not Saved - Save parameters if you want to keep them as Notice Error Unlatched
they are. Don’t save if you want to restore previous parameters. Flashing
Amber
1033 Software Update In Progress - Wait until software update is completed. Info Initializing Unlatched
Flashing
Amber
1034 Block Zone Test/Simulation - Un-block by turning Test/Simulation OFF Info Tracking Unlatched
Flashing
Amber
1035 MXP-ICU Sync Timeout - Perform a cold start on both ADE and BDE units. Info Error Unlatched
Flashing
Amber
1036 Parameter Sync Error - Synchronize the MXP & ICU parameters and save the Warning Error Latched
INI files. Flashing
Red
1037 Time Sync Error UTC from GPS for real time clock input – This can be caused Warning Error Latched
by GPS or real time clock battery on the main board of the MXP or the ICU Flashing
(these batteries should last 10 years). Check GPS input selection:
Red
If internal, check connection from GPS into ICU else, replace GPS.
If external, verify GPS UTC sentence type and connections. If failed, switch to
internal GPS.

24-11 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

1038 System Serial Number Mismatch- Contact Service for S/N recovery procedure Error Error Unlatched
Solid
Amber
1039 System Serial Number Invalid Contact Service for S/N recovery procedure Error Error Unlatched
Solid
Amber
1040 INI Integrity Error INI file corrupt, check settings save INI & reboot Warning Error Latched
Flashing
Red
1041 NMEA HDD Received with Bad Checksum - Check gyro compass input Notice Error Latched
selection – check gyro compass input cable connection – recommend gyro Solid
compass/distribution box repair.
Amber
1042 NMEA HDG Received with Bad Checksum - Check gyro compass input Notice Error Latched
selection – check gyro compass input cable connection – recommend gyro Solid
compass/distribution box repair.
Amber
1043 NMEA HDM Received with Bad Checksum - Check gyro compass input Notice Error Latched
selection – check gyro compass input cable connection – recommend gyro Solid
compass/distribution box repair.
Amber
1044 NMEA HDT Received with Bad Checksum - Check gyro compass input Notice Error Latched
selection – check gyro compass input cable connection – recommend gyro Solid
compass/distribution box repair.
Amber
1045 Step by Step Gyro took Invalid Step Size - Check gyro compass input cable Warning Error Latched
connection – recommend gyro compass/distribution box repair. Solid
Amber
1046 Step by Step Gyro Not Connected Correctly - Check gyro compass input Error Error Latched
cable connection – recommend gyro compass/distribution box repair. Solid
Red
1047 Step by Step Gyro Requires Initial Heading - Enter current gyro compass Notice Error Unlatched
heading value Solid
Red
1048 36:1 Synchro Gyro Requires Initial Heading - Enter current gyro compass Notice Error Unlatched
heading value Solid
Red
1049 90:1 Synchro Gyro Requires Initial Heading - Enter current gyro compass Notice Error Unlatched
heading value Solid
Red
1050 360:1 Synchro Gyro Requires Initial Heading - Enter current gyro compass Notice Error Unlatched
heading value Solid
Red
1051 1:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly Connected - Check gyro compass input Error Error Latched
cable connection – recommend gyro compass/distribution box repair. Solid
Red
1052 36:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly Connected - Check gyro compass input Error Error Latched
cable connection – recommend gyro compass/distribution box repair. Solid
Red

24-12 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

1053 90:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly Connected - Check gyro compass input Error Error Latched
cable connection – recommend gyro compass/distribution box repair. Solid
Red
1054 360:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly Connected - Check gyro compass input Error Error Latched
cable connection – recommend gyro compass/distribution box repair. Solid
Red
1055 Polang skew entry results in target out of range - Verify Vessel LAT/LON Error Error Latched
(from GPS). Verify the satellite longitude which is being targeted. Target a Flashing
satellite which is within +/- 79 degrees of the ships longitude.
Red
1056 Motor failed to reach Target - Check Antenna balance and MDE LED status. Error Error Latched
Visually inspect for antenna restrictions, binding, belt wear, motor connections Solid
and MDE-ICU connections.
Red
1057 Motion Platform Failed Initialization, Retrying wait replace ICU Retries Error Error Unlatched
multiple times, if error is still latched, replace ICU Solid
Red
1058 No Home Flag Detected During Pol Initialization (4012GX ONLY) – No slot Error Error Latched
found. Contact Service department for troubleshooting assistance. Solid
Red
1059 Multiple Home Flags Detected During Pol Initialization (4012GX ONLY) – Error Error Latched
More than one slot found. Contact Service department for troubleshooting Solid
assistance.
Red
1060 Detected Pol Home Flag Sensor Anomaly (4012GX ONLY) – Slot too narrow. Warning Error Latched
Contact Service department for troubleshooting assistance. Contact Service Solid
department for troubleshooting assistance.
Amber
1061 Pol Home Flag Measured Too Wide (4012GX ONLY) – Slot too wide. Contact Error Error Unlatched
Service department for troubleshooting assistance. Solid
Red
1062 Pol Home Flag Found In Wrong Location (4012GX ONLY) – Slot found, but not Error Error Unlatched
correct when compared to where home slot was last found. Contact Service Solid
department for troubleshooting assistance.
Red
1063 CM current out of range (GX60 & 4012GX Ka ONLY) - iDirect Core Module Error Error Latched
current is too high/too low Solid
Red
1064 CM Voltage out of range (GX60 & 4012GX Ka ONLY) - iDirect Core Module Error Error Latched
voltage is too high/too low Solid
Red
1065 BUC current out of range (GX60 & 4012GX Ka ONLY) - The BUC current is Error Error Latched
too high/too low Solid
Red
1066 BUC Voltage out of range (GX60 & 4012GX Ka ONLY) - The BUC voltage is Error Error Latched
too high/too low Solid
Red
1067 Profile changed. Please save and reboot Error Error Latched
Solid
Red

24-13 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

1068 No Pol Home Flag Detected, Using End Stop Home (Feeds with encoder built Warning Error Latched
into pol motor) - No Pol home flag found. Contact Service department for Solid
troubleshooting assistance.
Amber
1069 Pol Home Flag In Wrong Location, Using End Stop Home (Feeds with encoder Warning Error Latched
built into pol motor) - Pol home found, but not correct when compared to Solid
where home was last found or relative to end stop. Contact Service
department for troubleshooting assistance. Amber
1070 Pol Home Flag Failed, Using End Stop Home (Feeds with encoder built into pol Warning Error Latched
motor) - No Pol home flag found or no end stop found. Contact Service Solid
department for troubleshooting assistance.
Amber
1071 Pol Motor Failed - Test and replace pol motor, harness or ICU to isolate pol Error Error Latched
motor drive related failure. Solid
Red
1072 Pol Has Been Driven Outside Of Hardware Limit - Based on the voltage being Error Error Latched
read from the pot. There are electrical stops to prevent the pot from being Solid
driven into its mechanical stops, these are the hardware limits. If the voltage is
above, or below, the electrical stops this error will be generated and the pot Red
drive will be prohibited. Check the pot to assure that the locking nut is not
loose (allowing the pot to rotate), wires are not broken or unplugged. This
error could also be caused by failed pot, harness or ICU.
1073 Pol Failed To Initialize With Encoder - Error Error Latched
If feed has a pot - Based on the voltage being read from the pot during Solid
initialization. This error could be generated with 1072, or for the same Red
reasons.
If the feed has an encoder - No Home Flag Detected During Pol Initialization
and would be in conjunction with other pol encoder error codes.

* Front Panel LEDs have the following priority, from highest to lowest: Solid Red, Flashing Red, Solid Amber, Flashing
Amber, Solid Green, Flashing Green.
** An unlatched error can automatically clear itself, if the system corrects the condition which caused the error. A
latched error can only be cleared explicitly by the user.

24-14 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24.8. ICU LED Functions

ICU Front Panel

EOC LED ICU LED

Color Trigger Condition(s) Color Trigger Condition(s)
State State
Turns red for approximately one second During boot up it keeps blinking Green
when the EOC module is reset. while the firmware image is being loaded.

It stays off while there is no connection to

the peer EOC module.
It turns red if the firmware image cannot
It turns Green when a connection is be loaded.
established.
While firmware is running it goes through
Depending on the Master/Slave Off, Green, Red, Amber, Off, … sequence.
negotiation result, one side of the EOC
connection (can be either one) blinks
when there is EOC traffic.

24.9. Check/Test - AZ Motor / Encoder

24.9.1. Theory of Operation:

The azimuth motor is used for azimuth stabilization, satellite targeting and signal tracking decisions requiring
drive in azimuth. During stabilization, the azimuth motor drives only in response to motion of the stabilized
mass of the antenna in 3-dimensional free space, as sensed by the azimuth rate sensor located on the motion
platform PCB. The ICU/GICU also receives input from the vessels gyro compass which is used to keep the
antennas displayed azimuth position to be a value that is relative to true north.
The BLDC motor does not have brushes, therefore, it must be driven by a servo amp/motor controller. Hall
sensors in the motor provide feedback to the controller so it can drive and control the torque output of the
motor. When no drive is applied to the motor it offers very little rotational friction, allowing inertia to provide
98 percent of stabilization.
A high output digital encoder is integrated into the top of the azimuth motor to provide the relative position
into the ICU/GICUs azimuth control loop. During initialization the relative position is calibrated when the
sensor is aligned with the home flag. The ICU/GICU receives heading input from the ships gyro compass and
reports the relative and true azimuth positions for display in the MXP/GMXP.
24-15 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

24.9.2. Verify Initialization:

Power cycle the pedestal and verify:
• 24VDC is supplied to the motors brakes to release them, then 12VDC holds them open.
• Elevation axis drives to 45 degrees based on the ICU’s horizon reference.
• Cross level axis drives to level based on the ICU’s horizon reference.
• Azimuth axis will drive clockwise until the home flag is sensed.
If any of these steps fail, verify that the profile setting is configured correctly and saved. A drive issue or error
LED will require further troubleshooting.

24.9.3. MDE Status LEDs:

24.9.3.1. MDE Motor Status (top 3 LEDs are CL, EL and AZ).
Green Motor is good.
Solid Red Motor or harness short circuit (winding-winding, winding-ground, or
winding to supply). Replace the appropriate motor. If that does not clear
the LED status, replace the MDE.
Solid Orange Hall sensor error (hall sensor or harness wire). Replace the motor. If that
does not clear the LED status, replace the MDE.
24.9.3.2. MDE Status LED (4th LED).
Green Motor Driver is good.
Solid Red Motor Driver fault detection. Operational software will never leave the
status LED solid red. Replace MDE.
Solid Orange Software update to the MDE in process.
Blinking Red Communication error with PCU. Check to assure that the harness
connections are seated properly. Check harness (pin-pin, wire-wire and
wire-ground) for good continuity. Replace MDE. Replace the main PCB.

24.9.4. Test the Motor:

Check continuity between ground (the motor connector back shell) and the 3 driver outputs on pins 1, 2 and
3 of the harness.
Now check continuity between pins 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 and the ground (the motor connector back shell).
Also check between the individual pins 1, 2 and 3 and the rest of the pins (i.e. test pin 1 to pin 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
and so on, not between pins 1 and 2, 1 and 3 or 2 and 3).
If there is any continuity measured on the steps mentioned above, the motor is defective (which would be
highlighted by the diagnostic LEDs on the MDE). The antennas operation should be verified with a
replacement motor. If normal operation doesn’t return, the MDE and possibly the ICU will require further
troubleshooting.

24.9.5. Verify Encoder Feedback:

During initialization the sensor and home flag will come into alignment (typically when the antenna is facing
the bow of the vessel) at which point the LED on the sensor will illuminate and the relative position will be
calibrated. Changes in relative should be equal to the amount of drive of the pedestal. Drive the azimuth axis
of the antenna in 90 degree increments and verify that the pedestal actually rotates 90 degrees, and that the
relative and azimuth position values on the displayed change the correct direction numerical amount.

24-16 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24.10. Check/Test - EL / CL Motor

24.10.1. Theory of Operation:

The elevation and cross level motors are used for antenna positioning and stabilization. During stabilization
the motors drive in response to motion of the mass of the antenna in 3-dimensional free space (as sensed by
the rate and MEM sensors, which are both located on the motion platform PCB inside the PCU). Elevation
targeting and signal tracking decisions also require drive in elevation. An integrated brake mechanism in the
elevation and cross level motors is used to restrict the axis from moving when AC power is lost to the
pedestal.
The BLDC motor is driven by a servo amp/motor controller. Hall sensors in the motor provide feedback to the
controller so it can drive and control the torque output of the motor. When no drive is applied to the motor it
offers very little rotational friction, allowing inertia to provide 98 percent of stabilization.

24.10.2. Verify Initialization:

Power cycle the pedestal and verify:
• 24VDC is supplied to the motors brakes to release them, then 12VDC holds them open.
• Elevation axis drives to 45 degrees based on the ICU’s horizon reference.
• Cross level axis drives to level based on the ICU’s horizon reference.
• Azimuth axis will drive clockwise until the home flag is sensed.
If any of these steps fail, verify that the profile setting is configured correctly and saved. A drive issue or error
LED will require further troubleshooting.

24.10.3. MDE Status LEDs:

24.10.3.1. MDE Motor Status (top 3 LEDs are CL, EL and AZ).
Green Motor is good.
Solid Red Motor or harness short circuit (winding-winding, winding-ground, or
winding to supply). Replace the appropriate motor. If that does not clear
the LED status, replace the MDE.
Solid Orange Hall sensor error (hall sensor or harness wire). Replace the motor. If that
does not clear the LED status, replace the MDE.
24.10.3.2. MDE Status LED (4th LED).
Green Motor Driver is good.
Solid Red Motor Driver fault detection. Operational software will never leave the
status LED solid red. Replace MDE.
Solid Orange Software update to the MDE in process.
Blinking Red Communication error with PCU. Check to assure that the harness
connections are seated properly. Check harness (pin-pin, wire-wire and
wire-ground) for good continuity. Replace MDE. Replace the main PCB.

24.10.4. Test the Motor:

Check continuity between ground (the motor connector back shell) and the 3 driver outputs on pins 1, 2 and
3 of the harness.
Now check continuity between pins 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 and the ground (the motor connector back shell).
Also check between the individual pins 1, 2 and 3 and the rest of the pins (i.e. test pin 1 to pin 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
and so on, not between pins 1 and 2, 1 and 3 or 2 and 3).
If there is any continuity measured on the steps mentioned above, the motor is defective (which would be
highlighted by the diagnostic LEDs on the MDE). The antennas operation should be verified with a
24-17 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

replacement motor. If normal operation doesn’t return, the MDE and possibly the ICU will require further
troubleshooting.

24.10.5. Verify Motor Brake Release

During the initialization process the MDE will output 24VDC to release the brakes from the motors so the
antenna can operate. If the brake seizes, it will restrict the movement of that axis of the system and cause
appropriate error(s) to be displayed. Push the azimuth axis by hand and if the axis feels stiff/resistant then it
is possible the brake has not released or is seized. Power down the antenna disconnect the azimuth motor
cable from the MDE and measure across pins 14 (-) and 15 (+) of the azimuth motor connector on the MDE.
24VDC should be present at the start of the initialization process which will then drop to 12VDC after 6
seconds. If the voltage is present, then it’s likely the brake is defective and isn’t releasing. If the voltage isn’t
present, then the MDE is defective (however there is always the possibility that the system may not output
the voltage under load).

24.11. Check/Test - Pedestal Error Types.

The 3 types of pedestal error are:.

24.11.1. Servo Limit (CL, LV and AZ)

A servo limit error means the ICU motherboard is issuing the command to the motor driver enclosure to drive
the relevant axis harder than it should under normal operation (the servo limit has been reached). This could
be while the antenna is trying to maintain its pointing angle, or while the antenna is driving the axis to a
target position.
If this error is not frequent or constant, clear the error and monitor the system. Increasing frequency of this
error indicates that the condition causing the error is worsening. and should be attended to. If you note that
the error is happening more frequently (or is now constant):
• Visually inspect the pedestal for improper balance, physical restrictions or binding.
• Assure that no cables in the base of the radome are preventing free movement of the pedestal.
• Visually inspect the perimeter of the dish to assure that it is not (or has not been) rubbing against
the inside of the radome top.
• Check chain/belt for binding/wear.
• Verify that the brakes are opening all the way, and are staying open during normal operation.
• Test the harness & motor for faults.

24.11.2. Stability Limit

A stability limit error means the antenna has mispointed from its desired position by more than half a degree.
When a stability limit error is flagged on a VSAT antenna the MXP/GMXP will send the TX Mute command to
inhibit the transmit function of the satellite modem (It’s common to see the servo limit and stability limit
errors together).
If this error is not frequent or constant, clear the error and monitor the system. Increasing frequency of this
error indicates that the condition causing the error is worsening. and should be attended to. If you note that
the error is happening more frequently (or is now constant):
• Visually inspect the pedestal for improper balance, physical restrictions or binding.
• Assure that no cables in the base of the radome are preventing free movement of the pedestal.
• Visually inspect the perimeter of the dish to assure that it is not (or has not been) rubbing against
the inside of the radome top.
• Check chain/belt for binding/wear.
• Verify that the brakes are opening all the way, and are staying open during normal operation.
• Test the harness & motor for faults.

24-18 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24.11.3. AZ Reference Error

An azimuth reference error means there is a corrupt reading in the antennas encore or that home flag.
Trouble shoot each according to the error code received.

24.12. Check/Test - Home Flag Sensor –

24.12.1. Theory of Operation:

A proximity sensor is installed on the azimuth post of the antenna. During the initialization process the
system will drive clockwise in azimuth until the sensor comes into alignment with the metal home flag tab.
When aligned, an LED on the sensor will illuminate and the relative position value will be calibrated to be zero
when the antenna is in-line with the bow (parallel to the bow).
When the antenna was installed, if the radome had to be installed so that the hatch was not facing the aft of
the vessel then some amount of home flag offset or AZ Trim is required for the system to accurately target a
desired satellite. Recalibration may be required, refer to home flag & AZ Trim setup procedures.

24.12.2. Troubleshooting:
If the system displays an azimuth reference home flag error, it could be caused by the proximity sensor not
seeing the home flag, tab. When the sensor and the tab are aligned, an LED on the sensor will illuminate. If it
does not::
• Verify that the end of the home flag sensor is clean of any corrosion/contamination.
• Verify that the end of the home flag sensor is 0.060 inch (0.152 cm) from the metal tab (if the
sensor is too far away from the metal tab it may not be sensing it properly).
• Assure that the sensor is not coming into physical contact with the metal tab or any other object
during rotation of the pedestal.
• If all of the above are good, replace the sensor.
Note: Take care not to catch your fingers in the azimuth drive assembly when inspecting the home flag.

24.13. Check/Test - MDE -

24.13.1. Theory of Operation:

Feedback from the motion platform PCB is fed into the PCU or ICU main PCB where the vessels motion is
calculated. A command is then sent to the motor driver enclosure to drive the relevant axis accordingly to
maintain stabilization. This also applies to targeting, pointing and tracking where commands are sent to the
MDE to drive each axis as required.
The MDE PCB issues 24VDC to the elevation and cross level motors to release the brakes on initialization and
outputs a constant 12VDC to hold them open during operation. The MDE uses feedback from the hall sensors
inside the BLDC motors so it can commutate and control the torque output of the elevation, cross-level and
azimuth motors. When no drive is applied to the motor it offers very little rotational friction, allowing inertia
to provide 98 percent of stabilization in each axis.

24.13.2. Verify Initialization:

Power cycle the pedestal and verify:
• 24VDC is supplied to the motors brakes to release them, then 12VDC holds them open.
• Elevation axis drives to 45 degrees based on the ICU’s horizon reference.
• Cross level axis drives to level based on the ICU’s horizon reference.
• Azimuth axis will drive clockwise until the home flag is sensed.
If any of these steps fail, verify that the profile setting is configured correctly and saved. A drive issue or error
LED will require further troubleshooting.

24-19 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

24.13.3. MDE Status LEDs:

24.13.3.1. MDE Motor Status (top 3 LEDs are CL, EL and AZ).
Green Motor is good.
Solid Red Motor or harness short circuit (winding-winding, winding-ground, or
winding to supply). Replace the appropriate motor. If that does not clear
the LED status, replace the MDE.
Solid Orange Hall sensor error (hall sensor or harness wire). Replace the motor. If that
does not clear the LED status, replace the MDE.
24.13.3.2. MDE Status LED (4th LED).
Green Motor Driver is good.
Solid Red Motor Driver fault detection. Operational software will never leave the
status LED solid red. Replace MDE.
Solid Orange Software update to the MDE in process.
Blinking Red Communication error with PCU. Check to assure that the harness
connections are seated properly. Check harness (pin-pin, wire-wire and
wire-ground) for good continuity. Replace MDE. Replace the main PCB.

24.14. Check/Test - Pol Motor

24.14.1. Theory of Operation:

To ensure the LNB is correctly aligned to the linear polarized receive signal the antennas feed assembly can
be driven through a 270 degree range of motion by a 24VDC motor. Based on the vessels GPS position and
the look angle to the desired satellite the system will calculate the numerical value for the position of the pol
assembly. The ICU will then send the voltage to drive the pol motor until the pol pot/encoder outputs the
correct value, at which point the feed will be aligned to the incoming satellite signal (provided the
pot/encoder has been calibrated correctly). As the vessel sails and the GPS position changes the polarization
will be incrementally adjusted to maintain good cross pol isolation (alignment to the satellites linear signal).
One indication that there is a fault with the feed alignment of the system is that the target light will be
permanently illuminated on the MXP. The procedure for targeting is for the ICU/GICU to:
• Calculate the azimuth, elevation and polarization pointing angles of the satellite
• Drive elevation initially to 8 degrees above the actual elevation to the satellite (or below if the
elevation angle is above 83 degrees).
• Drive azimuth to the actual azimuth pointing angle to the satellite.
• Drive polarization to the actual polarity angle of the satellite. Polarity must be driven slowly and is
almost always last to reach its target
• Sample OFF satellite AGC.
• Drive elevation to the actual elevation pointing angle of the satellite.
• Sample ON satellite AGC.
• Calculate and set Auto-Threshold.
If the system is unable to drive the pol motor or the pol pot/encoder has failed, the correct feedback signal is
not obtained, the system can’t complete the targeting process and the antenna will stay in this position.
There are a variety of discrete pol errors which depend on the design of the feed assembly. These are related
to pol home flag, motor drive and pot or encoder feedback, Ascertain the exact error(s) and troubleshoot
accordingly.

24-20 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24.14.2. Verify the Range of Motion of the Feed Assembly (4012)

To verify if the 4012 antennas polarity function is calibrated correctly refer to section 3 of this document.
Once verified that the pot is calibrated the next step will be to verify that the system has the full range of
motion (135 degrees of physical rotation), verifying that the pol pot is outputting the correct resistance
through its range and also that the pol motor is driving the assembly correctly.
1. To verify the range of motion on the feed assembly enter into the “Reflector” screen under the
configuration options and set the polang drive mode to manual and click the save button.

This will now give you the ability to manually drive the pol as opposed to the feed automatically
aligning itself based on the vessels GPS location and the look angle to the desired satellite.
2. Now enter into the “Position Antenna” screen from the tools menu and enter the value “-90.0” into
the linear window of the polang target option and press the enter key on the keyboard.

The feed horn should rotate 45.0 degrees clockwise (when viewed from the front of the reflector) so
that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned vertically, from left to right
(as shown above).
3. Now enter into the value “00.0” into the linear window of the polang target option and press the
enter key on the keyboard.

The feed horn should rotate 45.0 degrees counter-clockwise (when viewed from the front of the
reflector) so that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned diagonally in a
north/east position (as shown above).
4. Now enter into the value “90.0” into the linear window of the polang target option and press the
enter key on the keyboard.

24-21 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

The feed horn should rotate 45.0 degrees clockwise (when viewed from the front of the reflector) so
that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned horizontally, from top to
bottom (as shown above).
5. Now enter into the value “180.0” into the linear window of the polang target option and press the
enter key on the keyboard.

The feed horn should rotate 45.0 degrees counter-clockwise (when viewed from the front of the
reflector) so that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned vertically, from
left to right (as shown above).
Now enter into the value “00.0” into the linear window of the polang target option and press the
enter key on the keyboard. The feed horn should rotate 90.0 degrees clockwise (when viewed from
the front of the reflector) so that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned
diagonally, in a north/west position (as shown above).
6. If the system completes all of the above tests than the polang assembly is operating correctly, set
the antenna back into automatic polang mode by entering into the “Reflector” screen under the
configuration options and set the polang drive mode to “Automatic” and click the save button.

The antenna will now automatically calculate the correct reception position for the feed based on
the vessels GPS location and the look angle to the desired satellite.
Should the feed assembly drive, but not target the correct position this is an indication that the pol
pot is not calculating the feedback correctly and its resistance should be verified as per the verify
resistance of the pot section of this document.
No drive at all indicates a failure with the 24DC polang motor as per the measure motor voltage
section of this document.

24-22 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24.14.3. Measure Polarity Motor Voltage:

Leaving the polang setting in manual mode apply drive to the feed assembly and measure the voltage to the
motor on the IDC connector, 24VDC should be present. If voltage is present but the motor isn’t driving the
motor is defective and needs replacing. If no voltage is present verify the connections of the reflector
harness by measuring pin to pin as per the below diagram.

If the harness connections are good, then the ICU main PCB isn’t outputting the voltage to drive the motor
and needs replacing. As long as the pol range is within the pot limits the ICU will issue the voltage to drive
the motor based on the antenna targeting, a change in the vessels GPS position or operator inputs. The
motor will then drive the feed until the correct output from the pot has been received, at which point the
feed will be in the correct reception position (providing the system is functioning and calibrated correctly).
Therefore there is also the possibility for a pol drive fault to be caused by the ICU motherboard PCB.

24.15. Check/Test - Pol Pot

24.15.1. Theory of Operation:

A polang potentiometer is used to provide a feedback reference for the position of the feed assembly for
linear polarization. The pot acts as a potential divider giving an output voltage which varies from 0VDC to
5VDC throughout the feed assembly’s 270 degree range of motion. The 4012 antenna has a phase card
installed in the feed horn which will reflect the signal meaning for each 0.5 degree of physical rotation of the
feed the change in signal will be 1.0 degree meaning that the feed assembly of the 4012 antenna only has to
physically drive 135 degrees to view the full 270 degrees of rotation.
The ICU converts the voltage output from the pot into the numerical value to align the feed in the required
position based on the vessels GPS location and the look angle to the required satellite. A failure with the pot
will cause it to output an incorrect voltage will result in the feed assembly not being aligned correctly causing
bad cross pol isolation.
One indication that there is a fault with the feed alignment of the system is that the target light will be
permanently illuminated on the MXP and that the antenna won’t target correctly. It will sit 8 degrees above
(or 8 degrees below at high elevation look angles) the satellites elevation look angle. As part of the antennas
targeting procedure the system will target 8 degrees above (or 8 degrees below at high elevation look angles)
the satellite, calculate the auto threshold setting based on the noise floor level and then align the feed for the
correct reception position based on the vessels GPS location and the lookup table. If the system is unable to
drive the pol motor to obtain the correct feedback, or if the pot has failed and won’t give the correct
feedback, the antenna can’t complete the target process and the antenna will stay in this position. Setting the
pol setting to manual will make the antenna target by removing the automatic function from the targeting
process; however the miss alignment of the feed will cause bad cross pol isolation.

24-23 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

24.15.2. Check the Pol Pot Calibration:

To verify if the 4012 antennas polarity function is calibrated and operating correctly drive the pol to verify
that the feed is aligned correctly (the pol pot is correctly calibrated) and also that the pot is outputting the
correct resistances throughout its range. This will also verify if the pol motor is driving correctly.
Log into the MXP and from the configuration menu select the “Reflector” page from the configuration section
and set the polang drive option is set to “Manual”. For verification purposes make a note of the linear offset
value and set it to zero. Now press the save button.

Now select the “Position Antenna” screen and set the linear polang target position to “00.0” and press the
enter button on your keyboard.

The feed will now be driven to the zero position as shown below. Verify that the feedhorn mounting screws
are at the 3, 6, 9 and 12 o’clock positions and that the phase card mounting point (highlighted by the red
circle) is aligned 45 degrees clockwise from vertical, as indicated by the red line.
Any error in alignment is an indication that the pol pot is not correctly calibrated. However a small amount of
error could be calibrated out by using the linear offset setting (to electronically adjust the pol postion).
If it’s deemed there is a large amount of error then calibrating the pol pot will be required, if no drive was
issued the function of the 24VDC polang motor should be verified.
*Note: If testing verifies the pot is functioning correctly ensure to reset the linear offset value before
returning the system to normal operation (if applicable).

24-24 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24.15.3. Verify the Resistance of the Pol Pot:

The polang potentiometer (pol pot) consists of an internal slider as well as a clockwise and counter-clockwise
contact. To verify the resistance of the pot a multi meter can be used to measure between the slider and one
of the wipers whilst rotating the shaft through its range and verifying the 0 – 5 ohms is outputted correctly.
Remove the pot from the RF cage as per the replacement procedure of this document and measure the
resistance.

Looking down onto the shaft of the pot rotate it

clockwise until it reaches its end stop.
Now measure the resistance between the slider and
the CCW contact (grey cable, pin 2 on the IDC
connector and the red cable pin 3 on the IDC
connector).
The feedback should be approximately 5k ohms.

Now slowly rotate the shaft of the pot counter

clockwise, the reading should count down
sequentially. After one and a half turns the pot will be
in the center of its range giving a resistance of
approximately 2.5k ohms.

Continue to rotate the pot until the counter clockwise

end stop (it will now have turned through all 3
rotations of its range), the resistance should be
approximately 0 ohms.

Leaving the pot at its counter clockwise end stop measure between the clockwise contact and the slider (grey
cable, pin 2 on the IDC connector and the brown cable pin 1 on the IDC connector) the resistance should be
reversed from the previous rotation, reading 5k ohms. Rotating the shaft of the pot clockwise should reduce
the resistance through its range to 0 ohms. Any error with the pot not giving the correct resistance is an
indication the pot is defective and needs replacing.

24.15.4. Calibrate the Pol Pot

Refer to the replacement and calibration procedures in the maintenance chapter of this manual.

24-25 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

24.16. Check/Test - Pol Encoder

24.16.1. Theory of Operation:

A polang encoder is used to provide a reference for the position of the feed assembly for linear polarization
alignment. The 4012 antenna has a phase card installed in the feed horn which will reflect the signal meaning
for each 0.5 degree of physical rotation of the feed the change in signal will be 1.0 degree meaning that the
feed assembly of the 4012 antenna only has to physically drive 135 degrees to view the full 270 degrees of
rotation.
The polarity range of the system is -90 to 180 degrees, during the initialization process the feed assembly will
be driven until the sensor picks up the home flag at which point the encoder will be calibrated and the feed
will be at the polarity position of zero. From then on the encoder will count the increments/decrements of pol
drive.
Pol drive is issued from the ICU to drive the feed assembly to the required target position based on the
vessels GPS location and the desired satellite. As the feed assembly is driven the encoder counts the steps as
they increment/decrement and provides the feedback to the ICU. Once the ICU is receiving the correct
output from the encoder pol drive will stop as the feed will be in the correct position for alignment with the
linear satellite signal. A failure with the encoder will cause it to output a position which will result in the feed
assembly not being aligned correctly, causing bad cross pol isolation.

24.16.2. Verify Initialization:

Power cycle the pedestal and verify:
• 24VDC is supplied to the motors brakes to release them, then 12VDC holds them open.
• Elevation axis drives to 45 degrees based on the ICU’s horizon reference.
• Cross level axis drives to level based on the ICU’s horizon reference.
• Azimuth axis will drive clockwise until the home flag is sensed.
If any of these steps fail, verify that the profile setting is configured correctly and saved. A drive issue or error
LED will require further troubleshooting.
During initialization the feed will be driven to the zero position as shown below. Verify that the feedhorn
mounting screws are at the 3, 6, 9 and 12 o’clock positions and that the phase card mounting point
(highlighted by the red circle) is aligned 45 degrees clockwise from vertical, as indicated by the red line.
Any error with the alignment is an indication that there is either a problem with the encoder or an issue with
the senor not seeing the home flag correctly, in the incorrect place or a potential motor drive problem.

24-26 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24.16.3. Verify the Range of Motion of the Feed Assembly (4012)

To verify if the 4012 antennas polarity function is calibrated correctly refer to section 3 of this document.
Once verified that the pot is calibrated the next step will be to verify that the system has the full range of
motion (135 degrees of physical rotation), verifying that the pol pot is outputting the correct resistance
through its range and also that the pol motor is driving the assembly correctly.
1. To verify the range of motion on the feed assembly enter into the “Reflector” screen under the
configuration options and set the polang drive mode to manual and click the save button.

This will now give you the ability to manually drive the pol as opposed to the feed automatically
aligning itself based on the vessels GPS location and the look angle to the desired satellite.
2. Now enter into the “Position Antenna” screen from the tools menu and enter the value “-90.0” into
the linear window of the polang target option and press the enter key on the keyboard.

The feed horn should rotate 45.0 degrees clockwise (when viewed from the front of the reflector) so
that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned vertically, from left to right
(as shown above).
3. Now enter into the value “00.0” into the linear window of the polang target option and press the
enter key on the keyboard.

The feed horn should rotate 45.0 degrees counter-clockwise (when viewed from the front of the
reflector) so that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned diagonally in a
north/east position (as shown above).
4. Now enter into the value “90.0” into the linear window of the polang target option and press the
enter key on the keyboard.

24-27 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Diagnostics, Error Code & Fault Isolation

The feed horn should rotate 45.0 degrees clockwise (when viewed from the front of the reflector) so
that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned horizontally, from top to
bottom (as shown above).
5. Now enter into the value “180.0” into the linear window of the polang target option and press the
enter key on the keyboard.

The feed horn should rotate 45.0 degrees counter-clockwise (when viewed from the front of the
reflector) so that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned vertically, from
left to right (as shown above).
Now enter into the value “00.0” into the linear window of the polang target option and press the
enter key on the keyboard. The feed horn should rotate 90.0 degrees clockwise (when viewed from
the front of the reflector) so that the alignment marks of the phase card in the feed horn are aligned
diagonally, in a north/west position (as shown above).
6. If the system completes all of the above tests than the polang assembly is operating correctly, set
the antenna back into automatic polang mode by entering into the “Reflector” screen under the
configuration options and set the polang drive mode to “Automatic” and click the save button.

The antenna will now automatically calculate the correct reception position for the feed based on
the vessels GPS location and the look angle to the desired satellite.
Should the feed assembly drive, but not target the correct position this is an indication that the pol
pot is not calculating the feedback correctly and its resistance should be verified as per the verify
resistance of the pot section of this document.
No drive at all indicates a failure with the 24DC polang motor as per the measure motor voltage
section of this document.

24-28 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Troubleshooting Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

25. Troubleshooting
This troubleshooting section is intended to help isolate faults in the antenna and MXP ONLY. Please refer to the manuals
provided with the satellite modem and BUC for troubleshooting those items.
Refer to the Operation manual for routine operation.
When you need to isolate a problem, start with the Troubleshooting Procedures below. Many problems are actually found to be
an incorrect operator setting or parameter, rather than a component failure. Follow the procedures text, which then may point
you out to specific paragraph, module or another section of this manual.
If you have identified a specific failure, you may prefer to go directly to the appropriate Troubleshooting paragraph or
maintenance module(s) to begin.

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
The tools and equipment necessary to perform these tests are:
• Service Manual with Troubleshooting Guide
• Multimeter
• Basic Technicians hand & power tools
• Spare Parts Kit(s)
• Bubble level (small)
• 9-Pin Loop-Back connector

CAUTIONS:
Equipment damage: Do NOT “hot plug” connections to the MXP or the antenna pedestal while power is ON as this can
cause significant damage.

WARNING: Electrical Hazard – Dangerous AC Voltages exist in the Breaker Box and the Antenna
Pedestal Power Supply. Observe proper safety precautions when working inside the Antenna
Breaker Box or Power Supply.

WARNING: RF Radiation Hazard - This stabilized antenna system is designed to be used with
transmit/receive equipment manufactured by others. Refer to the documentation supplied by the
manufacturer which will describe potential hazards, including exposure to RF radiation, associated
with the improper use of the transmit/receive equipment. Note that the transmit/receive
equipment will operate independently of the stabilized antenna system.
The ultimate responsibility for safety rests with the facility operator and the individuals
who work on the system.
WARNING: RF Radiation Hazard - Prior to working on the stabilized antenna system, the power
to the transmit/receive equipment must be locked out and tagged. Turning OFF power to the
MXP does NOT turn Transmit power output OFF.
The ultimate responsibility for safety rests with the facility operator and the individuals
who work on the system.
WARNING: RF Radiation Hazard - When the transmit/receive system is in operation, no one
should be allowed anywhere within the radiated beam being emitted from the reflector.
The ultimate responsibility for safety rests with the facility operator and the individuals
who work on the system.

25-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Troubleshooting

25.1. Troubleshooting Procedures

Each test in this troubleshooting section steps through specific operations of the system. If the system does not
operate as explained, then follow the troubleshooting module listed in the text. This section also includes common
problems experienced in the field and solutions for each. The drawings and schematics for all Series 12 model systems
can be found at the end of this manual.
Intermittent problems are of course the hardest to isolate. Refer to Troubleshooting Using MXP status graphs text at
the end of this chapter for graphic recording modules that allow recording of various antenna information over
extended periods of time. These recordings allow you to capture an intermittent event, analyze its cause and identify
the faulty component/function to troubleshoot.

25.1.1. Check for blockage:

Ensure that there are no obstructions between the antenna and the satellite. The satellite signal is line of
sight and any object that is directly in the signal path will attenuate the signal. The satellites are in
geostationary orbit over the equator, therefore they should be south of you if you’re in the northern
hemisphere or north of you if you’re in the southern hemisphere. You can visually sight past the radome
toward the approximate direction of the satellites to see if there may be some object in the satellite signal
path. The satellite signal will penetrate through most thin plastic and fiberglass with a small amount of
attenuation but will not penetrate through metals, buildings or other structures that are in between the
antenna and the desired satellite. If there IS blockage between the antenna and the desired satellite, the
antenna may not be able to acquire that satellite until the boat is moved or turned to a different heading
where no obstructions are in the signal path to the antenna. It may acquire, and track, an adjacent satellite
which is not blocked.
If there does not appear to be any blockage you may need to open the radome to assure that the antenna is
pointing in the right general direction of where the satellites are (north or south of you). If the antenna does
not target to the correct general pointing, it cannot possibly find a signal to track in its search area. Refer to
Functional Testing below to isolate further.

25.1.2. AGC Signal Level Tests

There should be some level of AGC even when
pointed away from any satellites.
If the AGC level does NOT change when you unplug
the coax from the line input to ICU, this indicates
that there is a loss of IF input (failed coax, coax
switch or LNB failure OR a failure of the AGC tuner
itself. Refer to RF flow theory in the Theory of
Operation chapter and the RF Line Loss paragraph
below to isolate the faulty cable or component.
Here you see the AGC Level vs. Antenna Position
plot of a typical system. When the antenna is not
pointed at a satellite you should still have some level
of AGC, representing the level of background noise
from space as amplified by your LNB. As you move
the antenna closer to a satellite signal you will note
that the AGC rapidly rises (directly proportional to
the amount of satellite signal level rise) as indicated
in this plot. AGC levels are different for each model
antenna, each satellite, different tuning frequencies
(on the same satellite), weather conditions and location within the satellite footprint.
20-30 counts of AGC is approximately 1dB of satellite signal.
The best tracking is when the AGC delta is greater than 200 counts of AGC. AGC delta of less than 150
counts indicates weak satellite signal (weak area of the footprint) and may cause loss of services (modem
may have lost RX sync). The ICU can continue to track this weak signal as the ship proceeds farther out of
the footprint or acquire the next satellite as the ship enters into its footprint.

25.1.3. Tracking Test

A simple way to test tracking is to conduct a 4-Quadrant test as described in the Functional Testing chapter
of this manual.
25-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Troubleshooting Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

The most common causes of not being able to track the satellite properly are; tracking receiver settings,
tracking & searching parameters, Gyro Type parameter, inadequate heading following or sensor drift.
Check the settings and parameters to assure that they are correct. Sensor drift will most likely be the ICU.

25.1.4. Heading Testing

Use MXP status graphs ADMC strip chart recorder to record what the antenna and signal are doing, especially
underway to ascertain what is causing the signal to be lost and troubleshoot from there.
The Gyro Type parameter must be set correctly for the type of heading input device (refer to the Setup –
Ships Gyro Compass chapter and to the Troubleshooting Ships Gyro Compass problems paragraphs below.
The heading input must be stable (after power is turned ON, some gyrocompasses will take four hours, or
more, to “settle” and provide a steady heading output). The antenna will not stay pointed ON satellite if the
Heading input is not stable. The more accurate the heading input is the more accurate targeting will be.
Minimum Gyro Compass accuracy is required to +/- 1.0 degree from the boat’s actual heading. .
If you are getting gyro errors refer to Troubleshooting Ships Gyro Compass problems.

25.1.5. Underway Testing

Check Heading to assure that the displayed value agrees with the actual heading of the boat. If you are
connected to a gyrocompass and the display does not follow the gyrocompass reading correctly, refer to
ship’s Gyro Input Fault Isolation section below.
Use MXP status graphs – ADMC strip chart recorder to record what the antenna and signal are doing,
especially underway to ascertain what is causing the signal to be lost and troubleshoot from there.
Monitor the signal level while the system is tracking the satellite and the boat is underway. Excessive signal
level variations that occur in sync with the motion of the boat may indicate that stabilization is not operating
correctly (again ADMC will graphically show which axis is causing the signal variations).

25.2. Antenna Initialization

Turn the pedestal power supply ON. Observe the Initialization of the antenna pedestal.
• The brakes on the elevation and cross-level motors will release. A brake release power supply control circuit
supplies 24 VDC to the brakes initially (5-10 seconds) and then reduces the voltage to 12VDC. Refer to the
Antenna Schematic to measure the voltage output of the MDE to the EL or CL motor. If there is no voltage,
replace MDE. If the voltage is good, replace the motor.
• Elevation axis activates – If Elevation does not drive:
• Verify that the ICU is configured correctly,
• Refer to the Antenna Schematic to test the ICU-MDE harness for continuity and shorts. Repair
opens/shorts found.
• Temporarily plug the spare motor into MDE. If the spare motor drives when power is turned back
on, properly install it in place of the original elevation motor.
• If the spare motor did not drive, replace the MDE and plug the original elevation motor back in.
• If the harness, MDE and motor have been eliminated and this axis still doesn’t drive, replace the ICU.
• Cross-Level axis activates - If Cross-Level does not drive:
• Verify that the ICU is configured correctly,
• Refer to the Antenna Schematic to test the ICU- MDE harness for continuity and shorts. Repair
opens/shorts found.
• Temporarily plug the spare motor into MDE. If the spare motor drives when power is turned back
on, properly install it in place of the original cross-level motor.
• If the spare motor did not drive, replace the MDE and plug the original cross-level motor back in.
• If the harness, MDE and motor have been eliminated and this axis still doesn’t drive, replace the ICU.
• Azimuth axis activates - If Azimuth does not drive:
• Verify that the ICU is configured correctly,
• Refer to the Antenna Schematic to test the ICU- MDE harness for continuity and shorts. Repair
opens/shorts found.
25-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Troubleshooting

• Temporarily plug the spare motor into MDE. If the spare motor drives when power is turned back
on, properly install it in place of the original azimuth motor.
• If the spare motor did not drive, replace the MDE and plug the original azimuth motor back in.
• If the harness, MDE and motor have been eliminated and this axis still does not drive, replace the
ICU.
• Antenna drives CW in azimuth until the “Home Flag” signal is produced (LED on the cable end of the sensor
will light).
• This signal is produced by a proximity sensor in close proximity to a metal tab. Check to ensure that
the end of the sensor is close to, but does not hit, the metal tab.
• Refer to the Antenna Schematic to test the MDE output voltage to the sensor. If the voltage is good
replace the sensor.
• If the voltage was not good, refer to the Antenna Schematic to test the ICU- MDE harness for
continuity and shorts. Repair opens/shorts found.
• If the harness is good replace the MDE and reinitialize the antenna.
• If the harness, MDE and sensor are good but home still does not signal, replace the ICU.

25.3. Troubleshooting Ships Gyro Compass problems

Ships Heading display does not follow ships movement and/or you are getting frequent or constant ERROR CODE
0001. Determine the type of gyro compass that is used on the ship, assure that the GYRO TYPE parameter is set
correctly (refer to the setup section of this manual) and then proceed to the step that lists the troubleshooting for the
correct type of Gyro Compass Signal.

25.3.1. STEP-BY-STEP
1. Verify that the GYRO TYPE parameter is set correctly.
2. Observe the ERROR LED on the FRONT panel. If it is illuminated, this indicates that an error was
detected in the Step-By-Step input. Press RESET on the front panel. If the ERROR LED illuminates
again, the problem is in the four connections to A, B, C and COMMON.
3. Check the connections to the MXP.
4. Measure the voltage between COMMON and A, B, and C. Each reading should either be near zero or
35 to 70 VDC. If all three are zero, check the repeater fuses. If some read negative and some read
positive or if one reads an intermediate values the COMMON terminal is not properly connected.
5. If the Ship - Heading display is different from the actual Gyro heading, access the Heading entry
menu and key in the correct heading value (refer to the operation Ship menu section). Note the
reading. After the ship has turned more than one degree, compare the new gyro heading with the
reading on the display, if it has moved in the opposite direction then reverse connections A and B.
Reset the MXP, put in the correct ship's heading again and verify that the display reading now
follows the Gyro heading.

25.3.2. 1:1 SYNCHRO

Observe the ship's heading display on the MXP. Compare its movement with that of the ship. If it does not
move at all go to step 1. If it moves but in the wrong direction (even if it does not display the correct
heading) go to step 2. If it moves in the correct direction but does not display the correct heading go to step
3. The gyro compass connects to the R1, R2, S1, S2 and S3 terminals.

CAUTION - Electrical Shock Potentials exist on the Gyro

Compass output lines. Assure that the Gyro Compass output is
turned OFF when handling and connecting wiring to the
Terminal Mounting Strip.

1. The Ships Heading display does not change when the ship changes direction. Using a
multimeter read between R1 and R2. It should read 115 VAC. If it does not then a fuse is blown at
the gyro repeater or there is an open between the repeater and the MXP. Read between S1 and S2,
25-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Troubleshooting Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

S2 and S3 and finally S3 and S1. They should all read between 0 and 90 VAC. The voltage level will
change as the ship turns. If one reading is very close to 0 volts wait until the ship has made a major
change in heading and then check voltage again. If the reading is still very low there is a problem in
the line between the gyro repeater and the MXP or a problem in the gyro repeater itself.
2. The display changes in the direction opposite of the movement of the ship. Switch the
secondary leads S1 and S2. Caution: there is 90 VAC between them! Verify that when the ship
changes direction the display shows change in the same direction. If the direction is correct but the
heading is incorrect go to step C.
3. The ship's heading display does not indicate the correct heading. If the display is off by
60, 180 or 300 degrees, this indicates that R1 and R2 are reversed. Reverse R1 and R2 and recheck
the heading display. If the display is off by 120 or 240 degrees, this indicates that S1, S2 and S3 are
in the right order but off by one place. Note their positions and carefully move the connections one
position over (S1 to S2, S2 to S3, and S3 to S1). This action will offset the display by 120 degrees.
Check if the display now reads correctly. If not move all three leads one more time in the same
direction as last time. Verify that the ship's heading is correct.

25.3.3. 360:1 Synchro

Observe the ship's heading display on the MXP. Compare its movement with that of the ship. If it does not
move at all go to step 1. If it moves but in the wrong direction (even if it does not display the correct
heading) go to step 2. If it moves in the correct direction but does not display the correct heading go to step
3. The gyro compass connects to the R1, R2, S1, S2 and S3 terminals.

CAUTION - Electrical Shock Potentials exist on the Gyro

Compass output lines. Assure that the Gyro Compass output is
turned OFF when handling and connecting wiring to the
Terminal Mounting Strip.

1. The Ship’s Heading display does not change when the ship changes direction. Using a multimeter
read between R1 and R2. It should read 115 VAC. If it does not then a fuse is blown at the gyro
repeater or there is an open between the repeater and the MXP. Read between S1 and S2, S2 and
S3 and finally S3 and S1. They should all read between 0 and 90 VAC. The voltage level will change
as the ship turns. If one reading is very close to 0 volts wait until the ship has made a major change
in heading and then check voltage again. If the reading is still very low there is a problem in the line
between the gyro repeater and the MXP or a problem in the gyro repeater itself.
2. The display changes in the direction opposite of the movement of the ship. Switch the secondary
leads S1 and S2. Caution: there is 90 VAC between them! Verify that when the ship changes
direction the display shows change in the same direction. If the direction is correct but the heading
is incorrect go to step C.
If the ship's heading is different than the bridge, select the HDG function in the SHIP display mode
by pressing the SHIP key 4 times. Key in the correct heading using the numeric keys and press
ENTER.

25.4. Troubleshooting RXIF & TXIF Path

Refer to the Theory of Operation – RF Flow. A spectrum analyzer and the line loss diagrams below isolate the faulty
cable or component in the RF path.
The dBm values shown in the diagrams below are the typical losses, at L-Band, of the cables and/or components, that
they are associated with [ie the dual channel rotary joint has a typical loss of 0.2 dBm, the MUX is 1.2 dBm loss and the
coax from the RF Switch (Cross-Pol/Co-Pol Select Switch) has a typical loss of 2.5 dBm].

25-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Troubleshooting

25.5. Troubleshooting using MXP Status Charts

25.5.1. Satellite Reference Mode

The ships gyro compass input to the MXP may be accurate and stable in static conditions and yet may NOT
be accurate or stable enough in some underway dynamic conditions. If there is no gyro compass or if the
input is corrupt, not stable or not consistently accurate the tracking errors will become large enough to cause
the antenna to be mis-pointed off satellite.
Satellite Reference Mode will uncouple the gyro reference from the azimuth rate sensor control loop. When
operating in Satellite Reference Mode changes in ships gyro reading will not directly affect the azimuth
control loop. The ICU will stabilize the antenna based entirely on the azimuth rate sensor loop and the
tracking information from DishScan®. This will keep the azimuth rate sensor position from eventually
drifting away at a rate faster than the tracking loop can correct by using the tracking errors to regulate the
rate sensor bias.
Satellite Reference Mode can be used as a diagnostic mode to determine if tracking errors are caused by
faulty gyro inputs.
I t should normally be OFF as long as you have an accurate, reliable, gyro compass input available.
It MUST be OFF when the elevation angle is greater than 75 degrees. Above 75 degrees Elevation, the
ability of Sat Reference tracking to correct the Az Rate sensor bias begins to degrade, especially on a circular
C system.
Satellite Reference Mode MUST be ON when:
• No Gyro Compass is available.
• The Gyro Compass input is noisy, occasionally inaccurate or occasionally unavailable.
• Frequent or constant MXP Error Code 0001 (Gyro Compass has failed).
• Using an uncompensated Flux Gate Compass.

25-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Troubleshooting Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

25.5.2. Antenna Loop Error Monitoring

The MXP status graphs DISPIVC graph chart provides a means for monitoring the accumulated velocity
errors of the antenna for diagnostic purposes. If this error is excessive, it indicates external forces are acting
on the antenna. These forces may be the result of but not restricted to static imbalance, excessive bearing
friction, cable binding, or wind loading. If these forces cause the antenna to mis-point by more than 0.5°
from the desired position the ICU will flag a “Stab Limit” error.

• To view the position error, select the graph chart.

• This chart displays sensed axis errors via three traces, CL (Cross Level), LV (Elevation), and AZ
(Azimuth), at a fixed 0.05º/ vertical division.
• The normal trace average will plots its display ± 3 divisions from the red reference line. Any trace
line average plotted above this is of concern and troubleshooting required. The example below
shows the forces exerted onto the antenna as a resultant of DishScan® Drive. The example below
shows the results of various forces put upon antenna.

• Cross-Level Axis physically moved CCW (down to the left.) and then CW (up to the right.)

25-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Troubleshooting

Elevation Axis physically moved CW. (reflector slightly pushed up) and then physically moved CCW.
(reflector slightly pushed down.) At the end of chart recording shows

• DishScan® Drive turned Off, notice the lack of accumulated IVC errors.

25.5.3. Open Loop Rate Sensor Monitoring

The MXP status graphs DISPW graph chart provides a means for monitoring the output of the three solid
state rate sensors (located inside the level cage assembly) for diagnostic purposes. The rate sensors are the
primary inputs to the ICU for stabilization.

• To monitor the rate sensors, select the graph chart

• This chart displays sensed output from the 3 rate sensors via three traces, CL (Cross Level), LV
(Elevation), and AZ (Azimuth), at a fixed 1º/Second/vertical division.
• A normal trace display will be ± 1 divisions from the red reference line. The example shown below
shows an antenna that is NOT currently sensing motion in any axis.

• The cross level display should decrease (plots below red line) as the antenna is tilted to the left and
increase (plots above red line) as the antenna tilted to the right.
• The level display should decrease (plots below red line) as the antenna is tilted forward and increase
(plots above red line) as the antenna is tilted back.
• The azimuth display should decrease (plots below red line) as the antenna is rotated CCW and
increase (plots above red line) as the antenna is rotated CW. In the example below, the output of
the azimuth rate sensor is plotted above the reference line, indicating that the antenna was driven
CW in azimuth. Due to the impracticality of driving an axis at a consistent rate, verification of rate

25-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Troubleshooting Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

sensor output is, for the most part restricted to a positive or negative response of the level cage
movement (plotting above or below the red reference line of each axis).

25.5.4. To Disable/Enable DishScan®

Tracking optimizes the pointing of the antenna, in very fine step increments, to maximize the level of the
satellite signal being received. DishScan® is the default mode of tracking.
To toggle the ON/OFF state of DishScan®, select DISHSCAN. This allows you to view, or change, the
DishScan® ON/OFF status.
When DishScan® is turned OFF, the system will NOT be able to properly track any satellite.

25-9 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Troubleshooting

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

25-10 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

26. Maintenance
This section describes the maintenance procedures for this antenna system. Also refer to the Troubleshooting section of this
manual for troubleshooting details.

WARNING: Electrical Hazard – Dangerous AC Voltages exist in the Breaker Box and
the Antenna Pedestal Power Supply. Observe proper safety precautions when working
inside the Antenna Breaker Box or Power Supply.

WARNING: RF Radiation Hazard - This stabilized antenna system is designed to be

used with transmit/receive equipment manufactured by others. Refer to the
documentation supplied by the manufacturer which will describe potential hazards,
including exposure to RF radiation, associated with the improper use of the
transmit/receive equipment. Note that the transmit/receive equipment will operate
independently of the stabilized antenna system.
The ultimate responsibility for safety rests with the facility operator and the
individuals who work on the system.
WARNING: RF Radiation Hazard - Prior to working on the stabilized antenna system,
the power to the transmit/receive equipment must be locked out and tagged.
Turning OFF power to the MXP does NOT turn Transmit power output OFF.
The ultimate responsibility for safety rests with the facility operator and the
individuals who work on the system.
WARNING: RF Radiation Hazard - When the transmit/receive system is in operation, no
one should be allowed anywhere within the radiated beam being emitted from the
reflector.
The ultimate responsibility for safety rests with the facility operator and the
individuals who work on the system.

26.1. Warranty Information

Sea Tel Inc. supports these systems with a TWO year warranty on parts and a ONE year warranty on Labor.
What’s covered by the Limited Warranty?
The Sea Tel Limited Warranty is applicable for parts and labor coverage to the complete antenna system, including all
above-decks equipment (radome, pedestal, antenna, motors, electronics, wiring, etc.) and the Antenna Control Unit
(ACU) or Media Xchange Point (MXP).
What’s NOT Covered by the Limited Warranty?
It does not include Transmit & Receive RF Equipment, Modems, Multiplexers or other distribution equipment, whether
or not supplied by Sea Tel commonly used in Satellite Communications (TXRX) Systems. These equipments are
covered by the applicable warranties of the respective manufacturers.
Original Installation of the system must be accomplished by, or under the supervision of, an authorized Sea Tel dealer
for the Sea Tel Limited Warranty to be valid and in force.
Should technical assistance be required to repair your system, the first contact should be to the agent/dealer you
purchased the equipment from.
Please refer to the complete warranty information included with your system.

26-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

26.2. Torque and Loctite Specifications

WARNING: Assure that all nut and bolt assemblies are tightened according to the
tightening torque values listed below:
SAE Bolt Size Inch Pounds Metric Bolt Size Kg-cm
1/4-20 75 M6 75.3
5/l6-18 132 M8 150
3/8-16 236 M10 270
1/2-13 517 M12 430
NOTE: All nuts and bolts should be assembled using the appropriate Loctite thread-
locker product number for the thread size of the hardware.
Loctite # Description
223 Low strength for small fasteners.
242 Medium strength
638 High strength for Motor Shafts & Sprockets.
2760 Permanent strength for up to 1” diameter fasteners.
290 Wicking, High strength for fasteners which are already
assembled.

26.3. General Maintenance

26.3.1. Balancing the Antenna

The antenna and equipment frame are balanced at the factory however, after disassembly for shipping or
maintenance, balance adjustment may be necessary. The elevation and cross-level motors have a brake
mechanism built into them, therefore, power must be ON to release the brakes and DishScan® and
antenna drive must be OFF to balance the antenna. . Do NOT remove any of the drive belts. Balancing
is accomplished by adding or removing balance trim weights at strategic locations to keep the antenna from
falling forward/backward or side to side. The antenna system is not pendulous so 'balanced' is defined as the
antenna remaining at rest when left in any position.
The “Balance Mode” selection located on the upper part of the “Four Quadrant Test” screen in the Tools
– Test menu page. When enabled, Balance Mode temporarily turns DishScan®, Azimuth, Elevation and
Cross-Level drive OFF. This function is required when trying to balance this antenna system.
Assure that Antenna power is ON and that the antenna has completed initialization.

At the Computer (connected to the MXP):

1. Log into the GUI, select Tools - Test in the side bar menus.
2. Select “Balance Mode” (located on the upper part of the “Four Quadrant Test” screen, just
below the page header) to enable balance mode. The screen will then show ON & OFF buttons.
3. Click ON. The screen will temporarily display “Submitting … Please Wait”. When this message
disappears the antenna is in balance mode. DO NOT EXIT THIS SCREEN.
At the Antenna:
4. At the Antenna: Balance the antenna with the elevation near horizon (referred to as front to back
balance) by adding, or subtracting, small counter-weights.
5. Then balance Cross Level axis (referred to as left-right balance) by moving existing counter-
weights from the left to the right or from the right to the left. Always move weight from
one location on the equipment frame to the same location on the opposite side of the equipment

26-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

frame (ie from the top left of the reflector mounting frame to the top right of the reflector
mounting frame). Do NOT add counter-weight during this step.
6. Last, balance the antenna with the elevation pointed at, or near, zenith (referred to as top to bottom
balance) by moving existing counter-weights from the top to the bottom or from the
bottom to the top. Always move weight from one location on the equipment frame to the same
location on the opposite side of the equipment frame (ie from the top left of the reflector
mounting frame to the bottom left of the reflector mounting frame). Do NOT add counter-weight
during this step.
7. When completed, the antenna will stay at any position it is pointed in for at least 5 minutes (with no
ship motion).
8. Do NOT cycle antenna power to re-Initialize the antenna. Return to the Computer (MXP),
which is still in Balance Mode. Click OFF. The screen will temporarily display “Submitting … Please
Wait”. When this message disappears the antenna is in normal operation mode. When you exit
Balance Mode the antenna will return to normal (DishScan®, Azimuth, Elevation and Cross-Level
drive ON).

26.3.2. Fine Balance and Monitoring Motor Drive Torque

The MXP status graphs DISPTC graph chart provides a means for monitoring torque commands required for
each motor for diagnostic purposes and verifying antenna balance. By observing each trace, the required
drive of the antenna via the motor driver PCB may be established.

• To view the Torque Commands, select the graph chart.

• This chart displays the Torque Command errors for each axis via three traces, CL (Cross Level), LV
(Elevation), and AZ (Azimuth), at a fixed 0.195 amps/vertical division.
• In all axes, tracing centered on the reference line means that that axis is neutral. Tracing above the
reference line means that that axis is driving CCW. Tracing below the reference line means that
that axis is driving CW.
• A normal trace display will be ± 1 divisions from the red reference line while under calm sea
conditions and with DishScan® Drive turned off. See example below

• The Cross Level displayed above the reference line indicates that CL is driving CCW (Left).
Example: The antenna pictured in the screen capture below is imbalanced so that it is “Right Heavy”.
The CL trace is plotting above the red reference line (indicating that drive CCW is required to keep
the Cross-Level beam level (to the horizon).

26-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

• The Level display will plot below the reference line when the antenna requires CW drive (Up in
elevation).
Example: The antenna pictured in the screen capture below is imbalanced so that it is “Front, or
Bottom, Heavy”. The LV trace is plotting above the red line, indicating that CW drive is required to
maintain the current elevation position.

• The Azimuth display plots below the red line when the antenna is driven CW and plots above the red
line as the antenna is driving CCW.

26.4. Replacing Components

26.4.1. Replace Wire Rope Isolators

1. Place a wooden wedge (or balance

weights as shown) between the upper
and lower base plates on both sides of a
wire rope isolator.
**If using balance weights as a wedge,
exercise caution so that you do not
scratch the zinc coating from the base
plates.**

26-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

2. Using a 6mm wrench, loosen remove,

and discard the bottom bolts at each
end of one of the wire rope isolators
near the wedge.
3. Loosen, remove and discard the top
bolts at each end of the wire rope
isolator.

4. Slide the replacement wire rope isolator

into place in between the upper and
lower base plates.

5. Apply Loctite to two of the M6x20 bolts

provided in the kit. Place a lock washer,
and then a flat washer, on each bolt.
6. Align and start the bottom bolt in the
threaded hole of the bottom plate.
7. Apply Loctite to two more of the
M6x25 bolts provided in the kit. Place a
lock washer, and then a flat washer, on
each bolt and place them into the top
bolt holes, move the upper bar of the
wire rope isolator to align the top bolt
with the threaded hole in top bar of the
replacement wire rope isolator.

26-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

8. Tighten the upper and lower bolts to

torque spec.

9. Repeat steps 1 through 9 to replace

each of the other three wire rope
isolators.

Base assembly shown removed from pedestal

for illustration purposes.

26-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

26.4.2. Replacing the Rubber Bumpers

1. Using a 6mm wrench, loosen and

remove all four of the rubber bumper
assemblies from their stand-offs or
blocks.
2. Apply Loctite to the exposed threads of
the four replacement rubber bumper
assemblies.
3. Install and tighten the four replacement
rubber bumper assemblies to torque
spec.

26.4.3. Replacing the Pneumatic Damper

1. Using a ¾” wrench (or crescent wrench),

remove the flow control valves (at the
adapters) installed into the side of the
pneumatic damper.

26-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

2. Remove any existing pipe thread sealant

from brass reducing bushing and reapply
2 or 3 wraps of the pipe thread sealant
tape provided in the kit and install onto
the replacement pneumatic damper.

3. Using a 12mm wrench (or crescent

wrench), remove and discard the top
bolt of the pneumatic damper assembly.

4. Remove and discard the bottom bolt of

the pneumatic damper assembly.
5. Carefully remove the pneumatic
damper.

26-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

6. Remove the extension arm from the old

damper and transfer it to the new
damper.

7. Place a lock washer and Loctite onto an

M12x55 bolt provided in the kit.
8. Install the M12x55 bolt through the
bottom of the replacement pneumatic
damper and into the threaded mounting
block.

26-9 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

9. Place a lock washer and Loctite onto an

M12x40 bolt provided in the kit.
10. Install the M12x40 bolt through the
hole in the top of the replacement
pneumatic damper assembly and into
the threaded mounting hole. NOTE: You
may need to lift, or pull down on, the
upper pedestal to align the hole for the
upper bolt to thread into the bracket on
the upper pedestal.

11. Tighten the upper and lower bolts to

torque spec.

26.4.4. Replacing the Flow Control Valves

1. Using a ¾” wrench (or crescent wrench),

remove the flow control valves and
adapters installed into the side of the
pneumatic dampener.

26-10 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

2. Apply 2 or 3 wraps of the pipe thread

sealant tape provided in the kit onto the
flow control valve adapter (Brass
Reducing Bushing) and install onto the
pneumatic dampener.

3. Using the pipe thread sealant tape

provided in the kit apply 2 or 3 wraps of
tape around the “meter” end of each of
the replacement flow control valves.

4. Install the replacement flow control

valves in the side of the pneumatic
dampener.

Completed Flow Control Valve Assembly.

26-11 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

26.4.5. Replacing the Chain Tensioner Spring

1. Using a screwdriver/ hook release the

spring from the tensioner arm.
2. Un-hook the spring from the bracket
that is attached to the bottom of the
azimuth motor mounting bracket.
3. Hook the replacement spring onto the
bracket on the bottom of the azimuth
motor mounting bracket.
4. Using a screwdriver/ hook attach the
other end of the replacement spring to
the tensioner arm.

26.4.6. Replacing the Azimuth Motor

1. Apply Loctite primer 7649 onto the

replacement motor shaft.

2. Apply Loctite 680 to the internal hub of

sprocket and place onto motor shaft
spaced .455” from the motor case as
shown in the graphic to the right.
3. Apply Loctite 222 onto the set screws
and secure sprocket to motor shaft.

26-12 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

4. Using a small flat blade screwdriver

remove the Azimuth motor cable from
the Motor Drive Enclosure (MDE).

5. Using snips carefully cut the tie wraps

that secure the azimuth motor cable to
the home sensor interface cable and the
MDE.

6. Remove one side of the spring

tensioner.

7. Using a 3mm Allen wrench, remove the

hardware that secures the azimuth
motor to its’ mounting bracket. Retain
hardware for future use.
8. Remove motor and set aside.

26-13 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

Do not perform this step until the

Loctite applied in step 2 has had at least 15
minutes to cure prior to continuing onto step 9.
9. Using the hardware removed in step 6,
install and secure replacement Azimuth
motor to its’ bracket. Do not forget to
apply Loctite to hardware.

10. Wrap one side of the chain to the

azimuth motor sprocket and hold there.

11. Wrap the other side of the chain to the

azimuth drive pulley.

12. By hand rotate the antenna in azimuth

to fully engage chain to the main drive
pulley.

26-14 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

13. Re-connect the tensioner spring with

the tensioner sprocket fully engaged
with chain.
14. With the chain drive fully engaged, drive
the antenna in azimuth while
checking/feeling for any physical
obstructions.

15. Install and secure the motor cable to the

MDE.

26-15 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

26.4.7. Replacing the EL Motor:

1. Loosen the locking nut on the tensioner

bolt. Loosen the tensioner bolt.
2. If the belt is not failed or broken,
decouple it from the elevation motor
drive sprocket.
3. Using a small flat blade screwdriver
remove the EL motor cable from the
Elevation motor interface harness that
routes to the MDE.

4. Using a 9/64” Allen wrench, remove the

four screws that secure the motor to the
bracket.
5. Apply Loctite to the shaft of the
replacement motor, install the sprocket
on the shaft in the same orientation as
the failed motor and tighten the set
screw.
6. Install replacement motor into the
bracket by loosely re-installing the four
motor mounting screws.
7. Couple the belt onto the drive sprocket
of the motor and thread it around the
idler.
8. Tighten the tensioning bolt and check
belt tension by twisting the belt with
your fore finger and thumb.

26-16 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

9. Increase belt tension until the belt can

only be easily twisted just ¼ turn with
your fingers.
10. Tighten the locking nut on the tensioner
bolt.
11. Using a small flat blade screwdriver
install the EL motor cable from the
Elevation motor interface harness that
routes to the MDE. One at a time, apply
Loctite to the four motor mounting
screws and tighten each to secure the
motor.
12. Using a small flat blade screwdriver
install the EL motor cable from the
Elevation motor interface harness that
routes to the MDE.

26.4.8. Replacing Elevation Drive Belt

EL with Idler

26-17 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

1. Loosen the four motor mounting screws.

2. Loosen the locking nut on the tensioner
bolt.
3. If the failed belt was not broken,
decouple it from the elevation motor
drive sprocket.
4. Cut the four cable ties across the top of
the elevation driven sprocket and
remove the defective belt.
5. Open the belt clamp assembly. Retain
the hardware for later re-assembly.
6. Check the new belt. If not already cut,
cut the belt between 2 raised teeth
using scissors or diagonal cutters.
Measure the belt to assure that it is
79.3mm (31.2”), cut off any excess
length.
7. Lay the open ends of the belt, teeth
down into the teeth of the lower half of
the belt clamp.
8. Put the top on the belt clamp assembly.

9. Install the hardware, removed in step 4

above, in the belt clamp assembly.

10. Route the belt around the elevation

driven sprocket, with the belt clamp
assembly about mid way across the top
of the drive sprocket, thread it through
the idler and couple it onto the drive
sprocket of the motor.
11. Install cable ties across the top of the
elevation driven sprocket as were
removed in step 3 above.

26-18 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

12. Tighten the tensioning bolt and check

belt tension by twisting the belt with
your fore finger and thumb.
13. Increase belt tension until the belt can
only be easily twisted just ¼ turn with
your fingers.
14. Tighten the locking nut on the tensioner
bolt.

15. One at a time, apply Loctite to the four

motor mounting screws and tighten
each to secure the motor.

26.4.9. Replacing the CL Motor:

1. Using a small flat blade screwdriver,

loosen the hardware that secures the CL
motor harness to the MDE and
disconnect the D-sub connector.

26-19 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

2. Using a 3mm (5/32”) Allen wrench

remove three of the four screws that
secure the CL motor to its’ bracket.

3. Using a 3mm Allen head wrench and a

5/16” wrench (or crescent wrench)
remove the final screw that secures the
CL motor to its’ bracket.
4. Remove the CL motor and place it out
of the away.

5. Apply Loctite to the shaft of the

replacement motor, install the sprocket
on the shaft in the same orientation as
the failed motor and tighten the set
screw.
6. Install replacement motor into the
bracket by re-installing the four motor
mounting screws. Apply Loctite and
tighten these screws.
7. Loosen the tensioner bolt locking nut
and loosen/unthread tensioner bolt.

8. Thread the belt onto the motor drive

sprocket and around the idler.
9. Tighten the tensioning bolt and check
belt tension by twisting the belt with
your fore finger and thumb.
10. Increase belt tension until the belt can
only be easily twisted just ¼ turn with
your fingers.
11. Tighten the locking nut on the tensioner
bolt.
12. Using a small flat blade screwdriver
install the CL motor cable to the MDE.

26-20 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

26.4.10. Replacing Cross-Level Drive Belt

1. Loosen the tensioner bolt locking nut

and loosen/unthread tensioner bolt.
2. Cut the cable ties across the top of the
cross-level driven sprocket and remove
the defective belt.
3. If the failed belt was not broken,
decouple it from the cross-level motor
drive sprocket.
4. Remove the two Phillips screws to
temporarily disconnect the cables from
the standoffs.
5. Route the replacement belt around the
cross-level driven sprocket and couple it
onto the drive sprocket of the motor.
6. Apply Loctite and re-install the two
Phillips screws removed in step 4.
7. Install two cable ties across the top of
the cross-level driven sprocket as were
removed in step 2 above.
8. Tighten the tensioning bolt and check
belt tension by twisting the belt with
your fore finger and thumb.
9. Increase belt tension until the belt can
only be easily twisted just ¼ turn with
your fingers.
10. Tighten the locking nut on the tensioner
bolt.

26-21 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

26.4.11. Replacing the Motor Driver Enclosure (MDE)

Use the following procedure for replacing the MDE.

Mark the connectors using a felt tip

marker.

Drive - Motor Control Drive from the

PCU/ICU.

Home – Home Flag Sensor

AZ – Azimuth Motor

EL – Elevation Motor

CL – Cross-Level Motor

1. Cut the three ties on the side

of the MDE.

2. Using the 10mm open end

wrench, remove the four ea
10mm nuts (two on top and
two on the bottom of the
MDE) that mount the MDE
to the pedestal. Remove the
deffective MDE.
3. Apply loctite 242 to the four
threaded mounting bolts and
mount the MK 2 MDE using
the four nuts removed in the
previous step.
4. Install two 122782 push-in
cable tie by pressing the
pointed end into the vacant
holes on the side of the MDE
and secure the home and AZ
cables to the MDE.
5. Install a 7” cable tie to
secure the TX & RX coaxes to
the Home and AZ cables.

26-22 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

6. Trim the excess length off of

ALL cable ties installed
during this rerplacement.
7. If all repair work is now
completed, check all
connections (see “Check
PCU/ICU connections”),
apply power and watch the
antenna initialize, balance
the antenna and then test
the system (refer to
“Functional Testing”
chapter).

26.4.12. Replacing the Power Ring Assembly

CAUTION: Turn off or disconnect

the vessels AC Voltage to supply to antenna prior
to performing the below procedure.

1. Using a 5/16” wrench, remove the TX &

RX coaxes from the top side of the
rotary joint.

2. Using a 10mm wrench or socket remove

the two nuts securing the home flag
sensor bracket and power ring alignment
pin. Retain the hardware for future use.
3. Set the sensor assembly aside in a safe
place.

26-23 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

4. Using a small flat blade screwdriver,

remove the AC power wires from the
terminal strip mounted on the azimuth
post.
5. Using diagonal cutters, cut the tie wrap
that secures the AC power wires to the
azimuth post.

6. Using a 4mm Allen wrench, remove the

four screws that secure the power ring
assembly to the adapter plate. Retain
hardware for future use.

7. Cut the cable ties securing the pedestal

harness to the base plate using a pair of
diagonal cutters.

8. Using a 10mm wrench, remove the

ground point from the base plate.

26-24 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

9. With two hands, carefully lift power ring

up off the adapter plate to allow access
to the rotary joint mounting bracket.
10. Using a 3mm Allen wrench, remove the
two screws that mount the rotary joint
assembly. Save the hardware for future
use. NOTE: Take care not to drop the
hardware in the centre of the base
spindle.

11. Disconnect the output AC power cable

from the breaker box.

12. Remove the P-clamps using a #1 Phillips

screwdriver.
13. Cut the cable ties securing the pedestal
harness to the radome base using
diagonal cutters.

14. Remove the cable wrap from the AC

cables following the run from the power
ring to the breaker connector.

26-25 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

15. Undo the end of the breaker connector

to allow access to the connections by
clamping the end of the connector
(where it enters the breaker box) and
twisting the back shell counter
clockwise.
16. Using a 2mm flat blade screwdriver,
disconnect the cables from the
connector, allowing the defective power
ring assembly to be removed.

17. Feed the AC power wires from the

replacement power ring down through
the center of the base spindle, through
the back shell of the connector and
attach them to the pins as shown on the
right.

18. Reinstall the back shell by screwing it on

clockwise and reinstall the screws and
clamp on the end.

19. Apply Loctite 242 to the threads of the

two screws removed in step 10 above.
20. Using a 3mm Allen wrench, reinstall the
rotary joint assembly to the
replacement power ring assembly and
tighten the screws.

21. Apply Loctite 242 to the threads of the

four screws removed in step 6 above.
22. Set the power ring assembly in place as
you gently pull the power wires and
coaxes down through the base spindle.
23. Using a 4mm Allen wrench, reinstall the
power ring assembly to the adapter
plate and tighten the screws. NOTE:
The power ring assembly has two sets of
mounting threads, should one set
become damaged the other can be
used.

26-26 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

24. Set the home flag sensor assembly in

place and assure that the alignment pin
is inserted in the tabs on the power ring.
25. Apply Loctite 2760 to the threads,
reinstall the two nuts removed in step 2
above and tighten.

26. Reconnect the AC power wires to the

termination block.
27. Coil and secure the excess wires using a
cable tie.

28. Reinstall the coax cables to the power

ring using a 5/16” Wrench, ensuring the
TX cable is connected to the center
channel.

29. Apply Loctite 2760 to the bolt removed

in step 6 above.
30. Reconnect the ground cable to the base
plate using a 10mm wrench and tighten
the bolt.

26-27 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

31. Reinstall the spiral wrap to the pedestal

harness.
32. As you install the spiral wrap to the AC
power wires, ground wire and coaxes,
install a cable tie to secure the cable
assembly to the base plate.
33. Continue installing the spiral wrap to the
point where the coaxes split out to
connect to the TX/RX connector
bracket.

34. Continue installing the spiral wrap

around the AC power wires and the
ground wire to the back shell of the
output AC power connector.
35. Connect the out power connector to
the circuit breaker.
36. Coil excess harness and install cable ties.
37. Secure the assembly to the radome base
using the P-clips removed in step 12
above.

38. If all repair work is completed:

• reapply ships power to the ADE.
• Turn power ON at the breaker box.
• Observe antenna initialization.
• Verify that normal system operation is
restored.

26.4.13. Replacing the 2 channel Rotary Joint

Use Sea Tel Rotary Joint Part Number: 116466

CAUTION: Turn off or disconnect

the vessels AC Voltage to supply to antenna prior
to performing the below procedure.

26-28 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

1. Using a 5/16” wrench, remove the TX &

RX coaxes from the top side of the
rotary joint.

2. Using a 10mm wrench or socket remove

the two nuts securing the home flag
sensor bracket and power ring alignment
pin. Retain the hardware for future use.
3. Set the sensor assembly aside in a safe
place.

4. Using a 4mm Allen wrench, remove the

four screws that secure the power ring
assembly to the adapter plate. Retain
hardware for future use.

5. Cut the cable ties securing the pedestal

harness to the base plate using a pair of
diagonal cutters.

26-29 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

6. Removal of the ground point from the

base may also be required to allow the
power ring assembly to be lifted up high
enough to access the rotary joint
mounting screws. If so, use a 10mm
wrench to remove the bolt. Keep this
hardware for later reuse. NOTE: The
spiral wrap and cable ties of the pedestal
harness may also need to be removed to
allow sufficient clearance to access the
base of the power ring.

7. With two hands, carefully lift power ring

up off the adapter plate to allow access
to the rotary joint mounting bracket.
8. Using a 3mm Allen wrench, remove the
two screws that mount the rotary joint
assembly. Save the hardware for future
use. NOTE: Take care not to drop the
hardware in the centre of the base
spindle.

9. Lay the Power Ring assembly on its side.

Be careful not to pull or damage the AC
Power Wires routing into the base
assembly.
10. Disconnect the coax cables from the
defective rotary joint using a 5/16” Allen
Wrench. NOTE: It’s advisable to mark
the TX (center) with a cable tie before
disconnecting.

11. Remove the rotary joint bracket from

the defective rotary joint using a #1
Phillips screwdriver.
12. Apply Loctite 242 to the screw and
reinstall the bracket to the replacement
rotary joint.

26-30 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

13. Install the coax cables to the

replacement rotary joint using a 5/16”
wrench. Ensure the TX cable (with the
cable tie on it) is installed to the center
channel of the rotary joint. If a cable tie
was installed to mark it as the TX cable,
remove the cable tie now.

14. Apply Loctite 242 to the threads of the

two screws removed in step 7 above.
15. Using a 3mm Allen wrench, reinstall the
rotary joint assembly to the power ring
assembly and tighten the screws.

16. Apply Loctite 242 to the threads of the

four screws removed in step 6 above.
17. Set the power ring assembly in place as
you gently pull the power wires and
coaxes back down through the base
spindle.
18. Using a 4mm Allen wrench, reinstall the
power ring assembly to the adapter
plate and tighten the screws. NOTE:
The power ring assembly has two sets of
mounting threads, should one set
become damaged the other can be
used.
19. Set the home flag sensor assembly in
place and assure that the alignment pin
is inserted in the tabs on the power ring.
20. Apply Loctite 2760 to the threads,
reinstall the two nuts removed in step 2
above and tighten.

26-31 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

21. Reinstall the coax cables to the power

ring using a 5/16” Wrench, ensuring the
TX cable is connected to the center
channel.

22. If previously removed, apply Loctite

2760 to the bolt removed in step 5
above.
23. Reconnect the ground cable to the base
plate using a 10mm wrench and tighten
the bolt.

24. If previously removed, re-secure the

pedestal harness to the base plate using
a cable tie.

25. If all repair work is completed:

• reapply ships power to the ADE.
• Turn power ON at the breaker box.
• Observe antenna initialization.
• Verify that normal system operation is
restored.

26-32 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

26.4.14. Replacing the Integrated Control Unit (ICU):

1. At the BDE, log into the MXP and save

the INI file of the system.
2. Assure that ADE power is secured.
3. Disconnect the ICU cable connections.
• J1 LNB-A SMA Connector (Orange)
• J2 LNB-B SMA Connector(Yellow)
• J3 Rotary Joint SMA Connector (Black)
• J4 (A & B) Ethernet RJ-45 Connectors
• J5 USB Mini USB Connector
• J6 Console Service DE-9S Connector
• J7 RF M&C Serial Interface DE-9S
Connector
• J8 GPS Input RJ-11 Connector
• J9 Motor Control Harness DA-15S
Connector
• J10 Feed Harness DB-25S Connector
• J14 Pedestal M&C Serial Interface DE-
9S Connector
• J16 L-Band F Connector, L-Band IF
Output
• J19 RF Power Supply circular
Connector
• J20 AC Power 100-240 VAC, 2A-1A AC
Receptacle Connector
4. Using a 11mm open end wrench,
remove the mounting hardware securing
the ICU to the mounting plate. Retain
hardware for future use.
5. Carefully remove the failed ICU and
place it to the side.

6. Install the replacement ICU to the

mounting plate using the hardware
removed in step 4. Do not forget to
apply Loctite 242 to the bolts and
tighten to torque spec.
7. Reconnect and secure the cables
removed in step 3 (refer to the list of
cables above).
8. Assure that power to the MXP is
secured.

26-33 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

9. Apply power to the ADE and watch the

antenna initialize.
10. Remove all parts, tools and debris from
the radome, close and secure the hatch.
11. Apply power to the BDE and allow the
system to target or manually target the
desired satellite.
12. Log into the MXP and upload the INI file
for the system.
13. Verify normal operations.

26.4.15. Replacing the 48VDC BUC Power Supply

1. Remove the AC power plug from the

48VDC BUC power supply.

2. Using a small flat blade screwdriver,

loosen the retaining screws that secure
the D-Sub connector the power supply
and remove the cable.

26-34 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

3. Using snips cut the tie wraps that secure

the GPS cable to the power supply.

4. Using a 7/16” socket, remove the

hardware that secures the power supply
to the mounting plate. Remove the
failed power supply and set aside.

5. Install replacement power supply.

6. Install the hardware removed in step 4.

Align the bolt through the second hole
in the standoff bracket as shown in the
picture to the right.

26-35 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

7. Apply Loctite to the hardware and

secure using a 7/16” socket.

8. Reconnect and secure the cable

assembly removed in step 2.

9. Verify the fuse block AC voltage select is

correct based on AC supply to the
antenna. If not correct use a small flat
blade screw driver to “pop out” the fuse
block, rotate 180° and reinsert.

10. Reinstall AC power plug.

26-36 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

11. Using tie wraps, secure the GPS cable

(removed in step 3) to the power supply.

12. Rebalance the antenna using the

balancing procedure.

26.4.16. Replacing the Codan 8 Watt Block Up Converter (BUC)

Disconnect the Tx IF Cable (from

Below Decks) at the Radome base prior to
performing this procedure.
1. Disconnect the Tx IF and Radio M&C
cables from the BUC.

26-37 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

2. Disconnect the DC power cable from

the BUC.

3. Using a 3mm Allen Head wrench and

7mm wrench, remove the hardware that
secure the Transmit Pass (Receive
Reject) Filter to the BUC Waveguide
interface. Retain hardware for future
use.

4. Using a 7/16” wrench or socket, remove

the Flat Washer, lock washer, and nuts
that secure the BUC to the mounting
standoffs. Retain hardware for future
use.

26-38 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

5. Carefully remove the BUC from the

mounting standoffs.

6. Install replacement BUC and secure

using the hardware removed in step 4.

7. Using the hardware removed in step 3,

secure the BUC’s Waveguide port to the
Transmit Pass filter. Ensure that the “O”
ring is completely inside the WG flange
groove.

26-39 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

8. Reconnect the TX IF and Radio M&C

cables removed in step 1.

9. Reconnect the DC power cable removed

in step 2.

10. Perform an antenna balance procedure.

26.4.17. Replacing the Cross-Pol LNB On The Feed

Use this procedure to replace the cross-pol LNB on the feed assembly.

1. Orient the antenna reflector towards the

horizon or as required allowing easy
access to the feed assembly.

26-40 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Maintenance Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

2. Remove the coax from the LNB using a

7/16” wrench.
3. Using a 3mm Allen head wrench,
remove the four M4-12 Socket Head
Screws, M4 Lock and M4 Flat washers
that mount the LNB to the feed
assembly.

CAUTION - Do NOT install an o-ring gasket

between the LNB and the receive port of
the feed assembly.
4. Attach the Cross-Pol LNB to the feed
assembly using the four M4-12 Socket
Head Screws, M4 Lock and M4 Flat
washers removed in step 3 above.
NOTE: Your LNB may differ from the graphic
shown to the right.
5. Re-connect the coax cable to the IF
output port of the LNB and tighten using
a 7/16” wrench.

26.4.18. Replacing the Co-Pol LNB on the Diplexer Waveguide Assembly

Use this to replace the co-pol LNB on the diplexer waveguide assembly.

1. Orient the antenna reflector towards the

horizon or as required allowing easy
access to the diplexer waveguide
assembly parts.
2. Remove the coax from the LNB using a
7/16” wrench.
3. Using a 3mm Allen head wrench,
remove the four M4-12 Socket head
screws, M4 Lock and M4 Flat washers
that mount the LNB to the feed
assembly.

26-41 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Maintenance

CAUTION - Do NOT install an o-ring gasket

between the LNB and the diplexer
waveguide assembly.
4. Attach the Co-Pol LNB to the diplexer
waveguide assembly using the four M4-
12 Socket head screws, M4 Lock and M4
Flat washers removed in step 3 above.
NOTE: Your LNB may differ from the graphic
shown to the right.
5. Reconnect the coax cable to the IF
output port of the LNB and tighten using
a 7/16” wrench.

26.4.19. Replacing the GPS Antenna

The GPS antenna is mounted to its bracket with double stick tape and is terminated with an RJ-11 telephone
type connector. Use the following procedure to replace the GPS antenna.

1. Using diagonal cutters, cut the three ties

along the edge of the dish and any ties
that join the GPS cable to the other
harnesses at the ICU.
2. Unplug the GPS cable from the ICU.
3. Remove the defective GPS by cutting
the double stick tape between the GPS
antenna and the bracket.

4. Clean the upper surface of the bracket

thoroughly with a lint free cloth and
acetone solvent.
5. Apply the sticky side of the double stick
tape (124077-5 ) to the bracket.
6. Remove the foam tape from the bottom
of the replacement GPS antenna.
7. Peel the paper off of the tape to expose
the second sticky side and mount the
replacement GPS antenna to the tape
with the cable toward the cable tie
buttons.
8. Insert new 7” ties into the buttons and
secure the GPS cable along the edge of
the dish toward the ICU.
9. Coil the excess GPS cable length and use
a cable tie to bind the coil.
10. Plug the GPS cable into the “GPS” port
on the ICU.

26-42 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Technical Specifications Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

27. Series 12 Technical Specifications

The specifications of your antenna system are below. For Naval Engineering level information on this subject, please
refer to Antenna Installation Guideline – Site Arrangement, document number 130040_A available on the Sea
Tel Dealer Support Site.

27.1. 3612 Above Decks Equipment

System Weight (ADE)

Weight 131.5 kg est / 290 lbs

Antenna Reflector Ku-Band

Type Spun Aluminum
Diameter 0.91 m / 36"
TX Gain 41.5 dBi @ 14.25 GHz
RX Gain 39.3 dBi @ 11.70 GHz
G/T (30° elevation, clear sky) 18.0 dB/k, Clear Sky, 30° EL
FCC Input Power Spectral Density -20.3 dBW / 4 KHz
Limitation
Minimum EIRP (TVRO) NA

27.1. 5012 Above Decks Equipment

System Weight (ADE)

Weight 182.8 kg / 403lbs

Antenna Reflector Ku-Band

Type Spun Aluminum
Diameter 1.24 m / 49"
TX Gain 43 dBi @ 14.25 GHz
RX Gain 41.6 dBi @ 12.50 GHz
G/T (30° elevation, clear sky) 20.0 dB/k (In Radome, typical)
FCC Input Power Spectral Density -14.0 dBW / 4 KHz
Limitation
Minimum EIRP (TVRO) NA

27-1 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Series 12 Technical Specifications

27.1. 6012 Above Decks Equipment

System Weight (ADE)

Weight 182.8 kg / 403lbs

Antenna Reflector Ku-Band

Type Spun Aluminum
Diameter 1.47 m / 58"
TX Gain 45.1 dBi @ 14.25 GHz
RX Gain 44 dBi @ 12.50 GHz
G/T (30° elevation, clear sky) 21.9 dB/k (In Radome, typical)
FCC Input Power Spectral Density -14.0 dBW / 4 KHz
Limitation
Minimum EIRP (TVRO) NA

27.2. Series 12 General Above Decks Equipment

Stabilized Antenna Pedestal

Assembly
Type Three-axis (Level, Cross Level and Azimuth)
Stabilization Torque Mode Servo / Two Axis W/Pol
Stability Accuracy 0.1° RMS, 0.2° peak in presence of specified ship
motions (see below).
Azimuth Motor Size 23 Brushless DC Servo, Double Stacked W/Encoder
Level Motor Size 23 Brushless DC Servo W/Brake
Cross Level Motor Size 23 Brushless DC Servo W/Brake
Inertial Reference 3 Solid State Rate Sensors
Gravity Reference 2 MEMS Tilt Sensors
AZ transducer 256 line optical encoder / home switch
Pedestal Range of Motion:
Elevation Joint Angle -15° to +115°
Cross Level (Inclined 30°) +/- 35°
Azimuth Unlimited
Elevation Pointing 10 to 90 degrees at 25 degrees roll
5 to 95 degrees at 20 degrees roll
0 to 100 degrees at 15 degrees roll
Relative Azimuth Pointing Unlimited
Maximum Ship Motions
Roll +/-25° at 8-12 sec periods
Pitch +/-15° at 6-12 sec periods
Yaw +/-8 degrees at 15-20 sec periods
Turning rate Up to 12 deg/sec and 15 deg/sec/sec
Headway Up to 50 knots
Heave 0.5G
Surge 0.2G

27-2 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Technical Specifications Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Sway 0.2G
Specified Ship Motion (for stability
accuracy tests)
Roll +/- 20° at 8 second period
Pitch 10° Fixed
Relative Azimuth (Heading) 0, 45 and 90° with respect to roll input
Mounting Height Sea Tel recommends you do not exceed tangential
accelerations of 0.5G (See below chart)

KU-band Feed
Type Center Focus Cassegrain feed with TX reject filter and
Cross-Pol OMT
Port to Port Isolation (XPol) > 120 dB
Port to Port Isolation (CoPol) > 90 dB
Cross Pol Isolation > 35 dB typical ( 30dB within 1dB contour)
Polarization Linear w/motorized skew adjustment
Polarization Control 24 volt DC motor with pot feedback
Polarization Range of Motion 270 degrees
Receive Frequency Range 10.70 - 12.75 GHz
Transmit Frequency Range 13.75 - 14.50 GHz

Co-Pol Diplexer
Type: DPX75K-002
Common Port (to feed) WR-75 Flange, 10.70-14.5 GHz
Transmit Output (from SSPB) WR-75 Flange, 13.75-14.5 GHz
Receive Output (to Co-Pol LNB) WR-75 Flange, 10.70-12.75 GHz
Co-Pol LNB Refer to LNB spec

27-3 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Series 12 Technical Specifications

SMW Quad LNB

Band 1
Voltage Required 13VDC
Input RF Frequency 10.95-11.70 GHz
Local Oscillator Frequency 10.00 GHz
Output IF Frequency 950 to 1700 MHz
Band 2
Voltage Required 13VDC + 22 KHz Tone
Input RF Frequency 11.70-12.25 GHz
Local Oscillator Frequency 10.75 GHz
Output IF Frequency 950 to 1500 MHz
Band 3
Voltage Required 18 VDC
Input RF Frequency 12.25-12.75 GHz
Local Oscillator Frequency 11.30 GHz
Output IF Frequency 950 to 1450MHz
Band 4
Voltage Required 18VDC + 22 KHz Tone
Input RF Frequency 10.70-11.70 GHz
Local Oscillator Frequency 9.75 GHz
Output IF Frequency 950 to 1950 MHz

KU-band TX Radio Package

SSPB Codan 8 or 16 Watt Mini 4908-W/E-DC/EX-CE-NI
(Ethernet M&C)
Output Flange WR-75
Input Connector Type N
RF Input Frequency Range 950 to 1700 MHz
RF Output Frequency Range 13.75-14.5 GHz
RF Output VSWR 1.5:1 max
RF Pout@ 1 dB GCP 39.0 dBm (8 Watt BUC)
Reference Frequency Level -10 to +5 dBm
Reference Frequency 10 MHz ext
M&C Options Ethernet, RS-422, USB
Step attenuator 1db Increments
Alarms Lock, Over Temp, Temperature

27-4 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Technical Specifications Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

KU-band TX Radio Package

SSPB Codan 8 or 16W LBUC 6908-W/E-48/EX-CE-NI (Alternate
Options available upon request)
Output Flange WR-75
Input Connector Type N
RF Input Frequency Range 950 to 1700 MHz
RF Output Frequency Range 13.75-14.5 GHz
RF Output VSWR 1.5:1 max
RF Pout@ 1 dB GCP 39.0 dBm (8 Watt BUC)
Reference Frequency Level -10 to +5 dBm
Reference Frequency 10 MHz ext
M&C Options Ethernet, RS-232
Step attenuator 1db Increments
Alarms Lock, Over Temp, Temperature

KU-band TX Radio Package

SSPB Comtech 16, 25 or 60 Watt LPOD PS1 Block Up
Converter
Output Flange WR-75
Input Connector Type N
RF Input Frequency Range 950 to 1750 MHz
RF Output Frequency Range 13.75-14.50 GHz
RF Output VSWR 1.5:1 max
RF Pout@ 1 dB GCP 16W = 43 dBm (20W) PSAT, 42 dBm (16w) P1dB
25W = 45 dBm (32W) PSAT, 44 dBm (25W) P1dB
60W = 48 dBm (60W) PSAT, 47 dBm (50W) P1dB
Reference Frequency Level -5 to +5 dBm
Reference Frequency 10 MHz ext
M&C Options Ethernet, RS-422, USB
Step attenuator 1db Increments
Alarms Lock, Over Temp, Temperature

Power Supply (ADE / PCU / ICU)

A/C Input Voltage 85-264 VAC, 47-63Hz, single phase
Voltage 48VDC [24 VDC, 150W (QTY 2)]
Wattage 300W (total)
Current Capacity 13.0A (total)

Power Supply (Mini-BUC)

A/C Input Voltage 85-264 VAC, 47-63Hz, single phase
Voltage 24VDC
Wattage 150W
Current Capacity 6.5A

27-5 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Series 12 Technical Specifications

Power Supply (LBUC)

A/C Input Voltage 85-264 VAC, 47-63Hz, single phase
Voltage 48VDC
Wattage 300W
Current Capacity 7.0A

Power Supply (Comtech BUC)

A/C Input Voltage 85-264 VAC, 47-63Hz, single phase (see ADE power
below).

GPS (On Board)

Waterproof IPX7
Operating Temperature -30°C to +60°C
Storage Temperature -40°C to +60°C
Humidity Up to 95% non-condensing or a wet bulb temperature of
+35°C
Altitude -304m to 18,000m`
Vibration IEC 68-2-64
Shock 50G Peak, 11ms
Connector RJ11
Input Voltage
Min 4.75VDC
Typ 5.0VDC
Max 5.25VDC
NMEA output messages GGA, GLL
Refresh Rate 1s

27-6 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Technical Specifications Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Integrated Control Unit (ICU)

Connectors
J1 SMA (F) - RXIF Input from LNB 1 (Cross-Pol)
J2 SMA (F) - RXIF Input from LNB 2 (Co-Pol)
J3 SMA (F) - RXIF Output To Rotary Joint
J4 B/A Ethernet - RJ45 Serial M&C - A=Radio M&C, B=Pass
through
J5 Mini USB Antenna M&C
J6 DE-9 (F) - Serial Console - Antenna Serial M&C
J7 DE-9 (F) - Serial Radio M&C
J8 RJ-11 (F) - GPS Antenna Input
J9 DE-15 (F) - Motor Control to MDE
J10 DE-25 (F) - Feed Harness Connection
J14 DE-9 (F) - Serial Pass through M&C
J16 F (F) - TXIF Output to BUC
J19 M16 (F) - Power Supply DC Voltage Output to BUC
J20 Modular AC Power Input Receptacle
Status LEDs Diagnostic Status of the EoC
Diagnostic Status of the ICU
AC Input Power 85-264 VAC, 47-63Hz, single phase, 2A-1A
Coax Switch
LNB-A (J1) SMA (F)
LNB-B (J2) SMA (F)
Rotary Joint (J3) SMA (F)
Controls Configurable from GUI
Integrated SCPC Receiver
Tuning Range 950 to 1950 MHz in 1 KHz increments
Input RF Level -85 to -25dBm typical
Output RF Level Input level +/- 1dB typical
Sensitivity 30mV/dB typical (25 counts/dB typical)
Bandwidth (3dB) 150 KHz
Interfaces
Modem/MXP M&C Interface OpenAMIP & Legacy
Network Interface 4-port managed fast Ethernet switch
User Interface Web Browser/Console Port

27-7 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Series 12 Technical Specifications

Motor Driver Enclosure

Connectors
Drive DA-15P
Home DE-9S
Az DA-15S
EL DA-15S
CL DA-15S
Status LEDs
CL Drive Yes
EL Drive Yes
Az Drive Yes
MDE Status Yes

ADE-BDE Interface Connections

Dual Channel Rotary Joint SMA (F) x 2

Power Requirements
ADE See specific installation manuals

Radome Assembly (50 Inch)

Type Frequency Tuned
Material A sandwich
Size
Diameter 1.3 m / 51.26" (approx.)
Height 1.21 m / 47.5"
Hatch Size
Weight 40 kg / 90 lbs
RF attenuation Less than 0.2 dB @ 10.75-14.5 GHz dry
Wind: Withstand relative average winds up to 56m/sec (125
MPH) from any direction.
Ingress Protection Rating IP 56

Radome Assembly (66 Inch)

Type Frequency Tuned
Material Composite foam/laminate
Size
Diameter 1.71 M (67.2 inch) - 1.8m (71 inch) max flange
diameter
Height 1.77 M (70 inch )
Hatch Size 0.43 x 0.66 M (17 x 26 inch)
Weight Installed Weight MAX 195 kg (430 lbs.) Including
antenna pedestal.
RF attenuation Less than 0.3 dB @ 10.7-12.75 GHz, dry
Wind: Withstand relative average winds up to 201 Kmph (125
mph) from any direction.
Ingress Protection Rating IP 56
27-8 Document. No. 139195 Revision A
Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Technical Specifications Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

Radome Assembly (76 Inch)

Type Frequency Tuned
Material A sandwich
Size
Diameter 1.93 m / 76" (2.01m max flange diameter)
Height 1.61 m / 63.44"
Hatch Size X.XXm x X.XXm / XX" x XX" (min)
Weight 90.7 kg / 200 lbs
RF attenuation Less than 0.2 dB @ 10.75-14.5 GHz dry
Wind: Withstand relative average winds up to 56m/sec (125
MPH) from any direction.
Ingress Protection Rating IP 56

Radome Assembly (81 Inch) w/ base

frame
Type Standard
Material DIVINYCELL H100
Size
Diameter 2.05m / 80.8"
Height 1.9m / 75" W/O base frame
Base Frame Height 0.55m / 21.75 in
Overall Height 2.46m (96.9")
Hatch Size
Radome Weight 158.76 Kgs / 350 lbs
Base Frame weight 140.16 Kgs / 309 Lbs
RF attenuation Typical 0.5 dB
Wind: Withstand relative average winds up to 56m/sec (125
MPH) from any direction.
Ingress Protection Rating IP 56

ADE Environmental Conditions

Temperature Range (Operating) -25º to +55º Celsius (-13º to +131º F)
Humidity 100% Condensing
Wind Speed 56 m/sec (125 mph)
Solar Radiation 1,120 Watts per square meter, 25º Celsius
Spray Resistant to water penetration sprayed from any
direction.
Icing Survive ice loads of 4.5 pounds per square foot.
Degraded RF performance will occur under icing
conditions.
Rain Up to 101.6mm (4 inches) per hour. Degraded RF
performance may occur when the radome surface is wet.
Corrosion Parts are corrosion resistant or are treated to endure
effects of salt air and salt spray. The equipment is
specifically designed and manufactured for marine use.

27-9 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Series 12 Technical Specifications

Mechanical Conditions
Systematic Vibration
Amplitude (single peak) 5.0 millimeters
Acceleration 2.0 G (20m/s2)
Frequency Range 1Hz - 150Hz
Shock (Transient Vibration)
Response Spectrum I - II - III
Peak Accel., m/s2 100 - 300 - 500
Duration, ms 11 - 6 - 3
Number of Cycles 3 each direction
Directional Changes 6
Shock (Bump)
Peak Accel., m/s2 250
Duration, ms 6
Number of Cycles 100 ea. direction
Directional Changes 6
Transit Conditions
Drop (Transit Shock) Complies with ISTA Standard

Chemically Active Substances

Environmental Condition Test Level
Sea Salt 5 percent solution

27.3. Below Decks Equipment

Media Xchange Point (MXP)

Standard 19 Inch Rack mount One Unit High
Physical Dimensions 17 X 17 X 1.75 (Inches)/ 43.18 x 43.18 x 4.45 (cm)
Input Voltage 85-264 VAC, 47-63Hz, single phase, 110 Watts
Weight 6.6lbs/ 3.0 kgs
Front Panel
4 Modem LEDs (On the MXP Board)
2 MXP status LEDs
Rear Panel Connections
AC Input Modular AC Power Input Receptacle
J1 SMA (F) - RXIF Output to Satellite Modem
J2 SMA (F) - RXIF Input from ADE
J3 B/A Ethernet - 2 ports of the 4 Port 10/100 Ethernet Switch
10.1.1.100
J4 B/A Ethernet - 2 ports of the 4 Port 10/100 Ethernet Switch
10.1.1.100
J5 SFP Gigabit Ethernet
J6 Mini USB Antenna M&C

27-10 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Technical Specifications Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

J7 USB Host (Type A) - N/C - Future Development

J8 DE9 (F) - Serial Console - Antenna Serial M&C
J9 A/B RJ45 Serial M&C - A=Radio M&C, B=Pass through
J10 C/D RJ45 Serial M&C - C=Modem, D=OBM
J11 Terminal Strip - Gyro Compass (SBS-Synchro) Interface
Terminals
J12 Terminal Strip - Auxiliary Interface Terminals
J13 DE-9 (M) - NMEA 0183 Interface Port
J14 DE-9 (M) - AUX (RS-232) Interface Port
J15 NMEA 2000 Interface Port - Future Development
Gyro Compass Interface
Connections Plug-in Terminal Strip
Pin 1 Synchro R1
Pin 2 Synchro R2
Pin 3 Synchro S1 / SBS A
Pin 4 Synchro S2 / SBS B
Pin 5 Synchro S3 / SBS C
Pin 6 SBS COM
Synchro Interface
Connectors 5 screw terminal connections (Plug-In)
Input Voltage Level 36-110 VDC, 400 or 60 Hz
Synchro Ratios 1:1, 36:1, 90 or 180:1 and 360:1
Impedance 1M ohm
SBS Interface
Connectors 4 screw terminal connections (Plug-In)
Input Voltage Level 20-90 VDC
Interface Opto-isolated
Polarity Auto switching
Ratio 6 steps per degree
Impedance 10K Ohm
Auxiliary Interface
Connections Plug-in Terminal Strip
Pin 1 - GND Ground
Pin 2 - Aux IN1 Modem Lock Input 1
Pin 3 - Aux IN2 Modem Lock Input 2
Pin 4 - GND Ground
Pin 5 - SW1 Modem Mute Output 1
Pin 6 - SW2 Modem Mute Output 2
Pin 7 - SW3A Dry Contact set 1
Pin 8 - SW3B Dry Contact set 1
Pin 9 - SW4A Dry Contact set 2
Pin 10 - SW4B Dry Contact set 2

27-11 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Technical Specifications Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

External AGC (AUX Inputs)

Connectors 2 screw terminal connections
Input Voltage Level 0-5 VDC
Impedance 30K Ohm
Control (Logic Sense can be reversed) Low Level (<1.25VDC) = Modem Lock :: High
Level (>1.25 VDC) = Modem Unlock
SW1 Blockage / TX Mute Output
Connections 1 screw terminal connection (SW1)
Connections 1 screw terminal connection (SW2)
Control Level Not Blocked or Not mispointed=OPEN circuit
Blocked or mispointed=SHORT to ground
SW2 Blockage / TX Mute Output
Connections 1 screw terminal connection (SW2)
Control Level Not Blocked or Not mispointed=OPEN circuit
Blocked or mispointed=SHORT to ground
Dry Contact Output Sets (SW3 A-B & SW4 A-B )

Switched outputs 4.7K pull up or Pull Down

Current handling Current sink of 0.5 amps max.
No Alarm State Normally Open
Alarm State Contact closure
NMEA 0183 Interface
Connections 5 screw terminal connections (RXA+ /RXA- input,
RXB+/ RXB- input, and TXA+ output)
Rx Sentence Format (GPS) $xxGLL,DDmm,mmmm,N,DDDmm.mmmm,W
(UTC optional) (*CS optional)
Rx Sentence Format (Gyro) Heading $xxHDT,xxx.x
Tx Sentence Format (GPS) $GPGGA,0,DDmm,N,DDDmm,W (configurable)
NMEA string examples:
RX:

$GPGLL,3800.4300,N,12202.6407,W,231110,A*3
2
$GPGGA,231110,3800.4300,N,12202.6407,W,2,08,1.2,40.0,M,-31.3,M,,*4A
TX:
$GPRMC,231325,A,3800.4300,N,12202.6405,W,000.0,184.9,190412,014.1,E*67
$GPVTG,184.9,T,170.8,M,000.0,N,0000.0,K*74

BDE Environmental Conditions

Temperature 0 to 40 degrees C
Humidity Up to 100% @ 40 degrees C, Non-Condensing

27-13 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual Series 12 Technical Specifications

27.4. Regulatory Compliance

Regulatory Compliance
Survival Shock and Vibration IEC-60721, MIL-STD-901D
Operational Shock and Vibration Operational: IEC-60945, Survival: IEC-60721 and
MIL-STD 901D
MIL-STD-167-1
EMI/EMC Compliance Ku-Band ETSI EN 301 843-1 V1.4.1 (2004-06)
ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.4.1 (2002-08)
ETSI EN 300 339 (1998-03)
IEC EN 60945:1997
Satellite Earth Stations and System (SES) ETSI EN 301 428-1 V1.3.1 (2006-02)
ETSI EN 302 340 V1.1.1 (2006-04)
Safety Compliance IEC EN 60950-1:2001 (1st Edition)
Environmental Compliance RoHS
Green Passport
FCC ESV Compliance C-Band NA
FCC ESV Compliance Ku-Band 47 C.F.R. § 25.222
FCC ESV Compliance Ka-Band NA
Options Bluetooth

27.5. Cables

27.5.1. Antenna L-Band IF Coax Cables (Customer Furnished)

Due to the loss across the length of the RF coaxes at L-Band, Sea Tel recommends the following 50 ohm coax
cable types (and their equivalent conductor size) for our standard pedestal installations. Type N male
connectors installed on the cables MUST be 50 Ohm connectors for the center pin to properly mate with the
female adapters we provide on the Base multiplexer panel and on the adapter bracket mounted inside the
radome next to the breaker box.:

Run Coax Typical. Loss @ Shield Center Installed Tensile

Length Type 1750Mhz isolation Conductor Bend Strength
Size Radius
<100 ft LMR-240 10.704 db per >90db 0.056 In. 2.5 In. (63.5 80lb
100 ft(30.48 m) (1.42 mm) mm) (36.3 kg)
up to LMR-400 5.571 db per >90db 0.108 In. 4.0 in. 160lb
150 ft 100 ft(30.48 m) (2.74 mm) (101.6 mm) (72.6 kg)
up to LMR-500 4.496 db per >90db 0.142 In. 5.0 In. 260lb
200 ft 100 ft(30.48 m) (3.61 mm) (127 mm) (118 kg)
Up to LMR-600 3.615 db per >90db 0.176 In. 6.0 In. 350lb
300 ft 100 ft(30.48 m) (4.47 mm) (152.4 mm) (158.9 kg)

27-14 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
Series 12 Technical Specifications Series 12 Dealer Technical Manual

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

27-15 Document. No. 139195 Revision A

Sea Tel – Proprietary. Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose
 11/12/2013 Single Level MFG Bill of Material

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 137409-2 C GENERAL ASS'Y, 3612-91, ETHERNET M&C

2 1 EA 129165-1 E RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 50 IN, TX/RX, WHITE

3 1 EA 132345-2 A2 SSPB, KU, 8W, CODAN MINI, 4908(L)-W/E-DC/EX-CE-NI

4 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N

5 1 EA 134725-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP (NOT SHOWN)

6 1 EA 134563-1 D BELOW DECK KIT, MXP (NOT SHOWN)

7 1 EA 130929-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, FEED (NOT SHOWN)

8 1 EA 137387-1 A CUSTOMER DOC PACKET, SERIES 12 KU-BAND (NOT SHOWN)

9 1 EA 124747-1 C DECAL KIT, SEATEL, 50/60 IN DOMES (NOT SHOWN)

10 1 EA 121711 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, BASIC, MEDIUM SYSTEMS (NOT SHOWN)

SYSTEM, 3612-91, LIN, 8W, QUAD, 50 IN, ETHERNET M&C

PROD FAMILY EFF DATE PART NO REV

XX12 12-Nov-13 Page 1 of 1 137405-631 C
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10065 10-23-12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X3 K.D.H.
A1 N/A 1-10-13 ADD -603 & -631 K.D.H.
B 10357 1-29-13 REMOVE ITEM 11 K.D.H.
B1 N/A 2-6-13 UPDATED SBD AND SCHEMATIC REFERENCE DRAWING PART NUMBERS K.D.H.
1 C 9979 02-25-13 REMOVE ITEM 11, 131564-1 SL

D D

C C

DASH # BAND POL WATT RF MFR LNB # OTHER

-601 KU LIN 8W CODAN QUAD
-603 KU LIN 8W CODAN QUAD NO DOME
-631 KU LIN 8W CODAN QUAD ETHERNET M&C

SYSTEM WEIGHTS 2
DASH GA RADOME BASE FRAME AC KIT SYSTEM TOTAL
-601 200 95 - - 295
B B
REFERENCE DRAWINGS;
138359 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 4009 MK3/XX12-91
138360 ANTENNA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC, 4009 MK3/XX12-91
137389 SCHEMATIC, PEDESTAL, SYSTEM, XX12

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL STANDARD 122298.
2 RECORDED WEIGHTS ARE THE ACTUAL MEASURED
WEIGHTS OF SYSTEM AS ORDERED. FOR SYSTEM
LIFTING AND MOUNTING CUSTOMER SHALL FOLLOW
LOCAL SAFETY CODES

-601 SHOWN DESIGNER/ENGINEER:

LW
DRAWN BY:
K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 8-22-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 SYSTEM, 3612-91
7 X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

4 Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 137405 C
3612-91 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 11/12/2013 Single Level MFG Bill of Material

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 137409-X B (REF) GENERAL ASS'Y, 3612

2 1 EA 137411 A ANTENNA ASS'Y, 3612

4 1 EA 137425-1 C FEED ASS'Y, KU-BAND

5 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N

6 1 EA 132345-X (REF) SSPB, KU, CODAN MINI

20 1 EA 132956-1 F CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX ASS'Y, 6 AMP

21 1 EA 134735-1 G ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU

22 1 EA 131227-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MOTOR DRIVER, 09G2

23 1 EA 121951-3 G MOTOR, SZ 23, BLDC, 2 STK W/ ENCODER, 20 IN, 4.9MM MTG

24 2 EA 125644-1 J1 MOTOR, SIZE 23, BLDC W/ BRAKE, 15 PIN

26 1 EA 131381-1 H GPS ANTENNA, SERIAL, 118 INCH

27 1 EA 129543-24 C KIT, CABLE ASS'Y AND PROXIMITY SENSOR, 24 IN

31 1 EA 129526-84 D HARNESS ASS'Y, PCU TO MOTOR DRIVER, XX09

32 1 EA 129527-36 B HARNESS ASS'Y, MOTOR TO ELEVATION, 36 INCH, XX09

33 1 EA 131493-1 A2 HARNESS ASS'Y, REFLECTOR, G2, XX09/XX10, 72 IN

34 1 EA 137372-84 A CABLE ASS'Y, 24VDC TO CODAN MINI, ICU

40 1 EA 134074-4 C1 POWER RING, 41.6MM, 3 CIRCUITS, 20A, WITH CONNECTOR

41 1 EA 135832-84C B CABLE ASS'Y, AC POWER, SHIELDED, IEC C13 TO PIN TERM., WITH

51 2 EA 114972-4 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 30 IN

52 1 EA 114972-2 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 72 IN

53 1 EA 123758-7 B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 7 FT

55 1 EA 123758-6ORG B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 6 FT, ORG

56 1 EA 123758-6YEL B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 6 FT, YEL

60 2 EA 115492-1 C8 ADAPTER, N(F)-SMA(F), W/FLANGE

61 1 EA 116466 G ROTARY JOINT, 4.5 GHz, DUAL COAX.

70 1 EA 128059 B1 FILTER, TX REJECT, WR-75, 13.75-14.5 GHZ

71 1 EA 126144-1 D1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 180 DEG E-BEND

80 1 EA 114281-4 A3 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 90 DEG. TWIST, 3 IN, M4 WG-G/ M4 WG-G

81 1 EA 125157-1 B DIPLEXER, DPX75K-C02-A, WR-75

82 1 EA 128716-1 A1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, KU BAND, 4006RZA

85 1 EA 128290-1 A1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 180 DEG H-BEND W/BRACE, 2.00L

86 1 EA 115477-1 B1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, ROTARY JOINT, L-STYLE

100 1 EA 134725-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 3612-91

PROD FAMILY EFF DATE PART NO REV

LIT 12-Nov-13 Page 1 of 2 138359-3 C
FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

101 1 EA 134563-1 D BELOW DECK KIT, MXP

103 1 EA 111115-6 C CABLE ASS'Y, F(M)-F(M), 6 FT.

104 1 EA 111079-6 H CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M), 6 FT.

105 2 EA 119479-10 C CABLE ASS'Y, CAT5 JUMPER, 10 FT.

106 1 EA 119478-5 E CABLE ASS'Y, RJ-45 SERIAL, 60 IN.

108 1 EA 133287-2 B CABLE ASS'Y, USB 2.0, 6FT, A/M TO MINI B/M (5PIN)

110 1 EA 120643-25 C CABLE ASS'Y, RS232, 9-WIRE, STRAIGHT, 25 FT.

120 1 EA 116700-6 G CABLE ASS'Y, RG223, N(M)-F(M), 6 FT.

121 2 EA 110567-19 D ADAPTER, N(F)-N(F), STRAIGHT, FLANGE MNT.

126 1 EA 135689-6 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK, 5.08MM PITCH, 6 POS

127 1 EA 135689-10 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK, 5.08MM PITCH, 10 POS

128 1 EA 136897 C CONNECTOR, DE9 (F) - TERM. BLOCK

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 3612-91

PROD FAMILY EFF DATE PART NO REV

LIT 12-Nov-13 Page 2 of 2 138359-3 C
 11/12/2013 Single Level MFG Bill of Material

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 134339 E PEDESTAL ASS'Y, 4012GX

2 1 EA 137412-2 A2 EQUIPMENT FRAME ASS'Y, 3612, ETHERNET M&C

3 1 EA 137411 A ANTENNA ASS'Y, 3612

4 1 EA 137424-2 B WAVEGUIDE ASS'Y, 3612-91, NO FILTER

5 1 EA 131645-1 B INSTALL ASS'Y, GPS, NAVMAN, XX09/XX10, MK2 SYSTEMS

6 1 EA 138869-1 A BRACKET, WAVEGUIDE SUPPORT, 3612

7 2 EA 115998-17 J7 RIGID WAVEGUIDE STRAP, WR-75H

9 1 EA 130444-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, AZ, 4009

11 1 EA 121655-11 L LABELS INSTALLATION, 4012GX

12 12 IN 130043-12 A TAPE, PIPE THREAD SEALANT, 1/2 IN WIDE

15 1 EA 135696-1 C CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX, KIT, 6A

34 1 EA 118294-23 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, M4, BLIND, FULL GASKET

35 1 EA 118294-19 A1 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, 6-32, HALF GASKET

50 4 EA 114593-143 A SCREW, SOCKET HD, 8-32 x 3/8, S.S.

57 4 EA 119952-009 A1 WASHER, INTERNAL TOOTH STAR, #8, S.S.

58 4 EA 114580-009 WASHER, FLAT, #8, S.S.

60 8 EA 114589-136 SCREW, HEX HD M6X16

68 8 EA 114580-250 WASHER, FLAT, M6, S.S.

70 4 EA 114593-162 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 10-32 x 3/8, S.S.

77 4 EA 119952-011 A1 WASHER, STAR, INTERNAL TOOTH, #10, S.S.

78 8 EA 114580-011 WASHER, FLAT, #10, S.S.

79 4 EA 114583-011 A NUT, HEX, 10-32, S.S.

80 2 EA 114593-202 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 1/4-20 x 3/8, S.S.

87 2 EA 119952-029 A1 WASHER, STAR, INTERNAL TOOTH, 1/4 IN, S.S.

88 2 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.

GENERAL ASS'Y, 3612-91, ETHERNET M&C

PROD FAMILY EFF DATE PART NO REV

XX12 12-Nov-13 Page 1 of 1 137409-2 C
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
4X 70 78 77 78 79 REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A N/A 10-23-12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X3 K.D.H.
A1 N/A 1-10-13 ADD -2 K.D.H.
3 2X 7 B 10381 2-11-13 ADD -2-1, ITEM 4 WAS 137424-1; -1 & -2, ITEM 34 WAS 118294-6 K.D.H.
C 10282 3-15-13 ADD ITEMS 6, 7, 10 - 19, 80 - 88 K.D.H.
D 10379 04/09/13 UPDATED CABLE ROUTING PHOTOS (REF. SHEET 2, ZONES C8 & D8. KRB

D D

6 34
2 DETAIL E
2X 80 88 87 SCALE 1 : 4

C 12 4 C
35 4

DETAIL B
SCALE 1 : 4

DETAIL D 8X 68 60
SCALE 1 : 4
9 DETAIL C
SCALE 1 : 4

6
15 NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL STANDARD 122298.
B 2. USE TRIM WEIGHTS AS NECESSARY TO B
1 OPTIMIZE BALANCE.
5 4X 50 58 57 3 SET 20 MM GAP AS SHOWN BETWEEN YOKE BOTTOM
AND PEDESTAL FRAME. TO ACHIEVE THIS GAP
DETAIL A USE SHOWN NUT SET TO MOVE YOKE UP OR DOWN.
SCALE 1 : 4 4 AFTER COMPLETION OF NOTE 2 INSTALL ADAPTERS
AND CHECK VALVES (METER SIDE IN, READ ON VALVES)
PROVIDED WITH PEDESTAL USING ITEM 12 ON EACH
PIECE (ADAPTERS AND CHECK VALVES). WRAP 2-3 TIMES
AROUND EXTERNAL THREADS FOR PROPER SEAL.
MUST NOT USE LOCTITE FOR THESE PARTS.
20±1 MM 5 AFTER ADJUSTING GAP PER NOTE 2 SECURE LOWER
DASH DESCRIPTION JAM NUT WITH LOCTITE 222.
-1 STD
6 NOTE ORIENTATION OF ANTENNA ASS'Y (ITEM 3).
-2 ETHERNET M&C
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
LW K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
171.3 LBS 8-22-12
A
3 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE:
Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 GENERAL ASS'Y, 3612
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

5 Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
SOME COMPONENTS HIDDEN Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 137409 D
FOR CLARITY Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work
3rd ANGLE
PROJECTION FIRST USED: 3612-91 SHEET NUMBER
1 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

C C

B B

A A

SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

B 1:8 137409 D
SHEET NUMBER 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10065 10-23-12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X3 K.D.H.
B 10381 2-11-13 SHIFTED BUC 2" TO THE LEFT K.D.H.

3 1
D D

(4) M4 X 12 SOCKET HEAD SCREWS

& FLAT WASHERS SUPPLIED W/SSPB

2X 2

C C

6X 78 70 2

B B

4X 71

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL STANDARD 122298.
2 USE LOCTITE 242 (BLUE).
3 INSTALL PLATE (ITEM 1) TO EQ FRAME PRIOR
TO INSTALLING BUC.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
LW K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 4.98 LBS 8-21-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 NA
X.XX = .020 MOUNTING ASS'Y, CODAN
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 NA 8W MINI-BUC, 3612
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:3 137413 B
3612-91 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 137420 A PLATE, MOUNTING, 3612

2 1 EA 134735-1 E2 ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU
3 2 EA 108894-6 G1 WEIGHT, TRIM, 3/4 X 1 X 10, 2.1 LBS
50 4 EA 121323-539 SCREW, FLAT HD, SKT DRV, 1/4-20 X 5/8
51 4 EA 114593-208 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 1/4-20 x 7/8, S.S.
52 2 EA 114586-543 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 2, S.S.
58 10 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
59 4 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.

MOUNTING ASS'Y, ICU, 3612

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A
COMMON 2/20/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138309-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10065 10-23-12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1 K.D.H.

1 D
D

2X 3

2X 58 52
2

C C

4X 59 58 58 51 2

B B

4X 50 3 NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL STANDARD 122298.
2 USE LOCTITE 242 (BLUE).
3 INSTALL PLATE (ITEM 1) TO EQ. FRAME PRIOR
TO INSTALLING ICU (ITEM 2).
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
JLH K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 15.8 LBS 9-24-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 MOUTNING ASS'Y,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A ICU, 3612
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:3 138309 A
3612-91 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 131829-1 C RADOME ASS'Y, 50 IN, TUNED, WHITE

4 1 EA 130390-1 B KIT, HARDWARE, GA TO RADOME, STD
5 2 EA 119801-012 B CABLE TIE, NYLON, 4 IN, NATURAL
6 1 EA 111679-7 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, .50 DIA, #8 MTG H
8 1 EA 111679-25 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, 3/4 DIA, #10 MTG
9 1 EA 111679-5 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, .375 DIA, #8 MTG
10 1 OZ 125948-1 A ADHESIVE, HOT MELT, 3M SCOTCH-WELD 37 (NOT SHOWN) ,
14 1 EA 130394-1 D KIT, HARDWARE, RADOME TO MAST, 4-HOL SEE NOTES ,
20 5 EA 124903-1 B3 STRAIN RELIEF ASS'Y (CABLE GLAND) SEE NOTES ,
51 5 EA 114580-230 WASHER, FLAT, M4, S.S.
52 5 EA 125806-7 A ROTALOC HEX NUT, SS-1-B38-M4 X 07-6H
53 4 EA 119745-218 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, M4 x 8
54 1 EA 119745-216 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, M4 X 6, S.S.
56 4 EA 114589-141 SCREW, HEX HD M6X35
57 8 EA 130371-170 A WASHER, NYLON, 6.4 ID, 12 OD
58 8 EA 120089-251 NUT, HEX, M6, S.S.
99 1 EA 131226 A PROCEDURE, RADOME STRAIN RELIEF INSTA BAG WITH ITEM 20 ,
100 9 EA 119801-019 B CABLE TIE, NYLON, 7.5 IN, NATURAL
101 1 EA 131398 C CRATE, OPEN, 50 INCH RADOME, O.D: 58.
102 1 EA 131469-1 A1 SHIPPING KIT, ASS'Y

RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 50 IN, TX/RX

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV B
COMMON 2/20/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
137777-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10065 10-23-12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1 K.D.H.
B 10357 1-29-13 ADD ITEMS 101 & 102 K.D.H.

D D

1
C C

B B
ACCESS
DOOR

4X 56
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL STANDARD 122298.
4X 57
2 BOW MARKER LOCATION DIRECTLY ACROSS FROM ACCESS HATCH.
HARDWARE SHOWN 3 BAG AND ATTACH TO INSIDE OF RADOME.
IS FOR TRANSIT ONLY.
REMOVE AND REPLACE
WITH KIT 130394-1
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H.
4X 57 AT FINAL INSTALLATION. WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 96.9 LBS 7-11-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A 4X 58 X.X = .050
MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
NA
X.XX = .020 RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL,
X.XXX = .005
4X 58 ANGLES: .5
FINISH:
NA
APPROVED DATE:
50 IN, TX/RX
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009
DETAIL A SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV
Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
SCALE 1 : 2 2 Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
B 1:33.3 137777
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B
3612 1 OF 2
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

POSITION GAWITH
CABLE EXIT TOWARDS
CABLE PASS-THRU PLATE
ROUTE CABLES 54
AS SHOWN
D D
(GA)
BASE PLATE 53
DETAIL J
(4 PLACES)
51 2X
DETAIL J
GENERAL ASSEMBLY
(GA) ATTACHMENT

2X 5

20 3 GROUND STRAP
NOT SHOWN
C C
CABLE PASS THRU ASS'Y 14 3

52
52 2X
DETAIL F
RADOME
DOOR/HATCH
(AFT)
SEE DETAIL F 2X 5 DETAIL D
SEE DETAIL E CABLE DRESSING
52 3 PLACES
B B
DETAIL E

SEE DETAIL D

APPLY SUFFICIENT
SEE DETAIL G AMOUNT OF ITEM
10 (AS SHOWN).

A A
9 PLACES: PRIOR TO FINAL ASSEMBLY
52 USE ADHESIVE (ITEM 10) TO ADHERE
BONDING FASTENERS (ITEM 52)
TO RADOME BASE IN APPROX. SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV
LOCATIONS SHOWN. MAKE SURE
DETAIL G THERE IS NO INTERFERENCE WITH GA. B NONE 137777 B
SHEET NUMBER 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

1.0 Purpose. To define the installation procedure for installing strain reliefs in “smooth base”
radomes.
2.0 Scope. This installation procedure applies to fiberglass radomes having Sea Tel’s standard
four-hole mounting pattern, and M12 mounting hardware, in the 80-180 cm (34-66 in)
nominal size range, typically referred to as “smooth” base radomes. It also applies to our
larger 193 cm (76-inch) radome having a twelve-hole mounting pattern. It is to be used where
the preferred center cable exit may not be desired.
3.0 Tools/materials.
1. Electric drill.
2. Small drill bit 1/8” dia. (3-4mm dia.).
3. Hole saw, 1 3/8” dia. (35 mm), with mandrel and ¼” dia. pilot drill.
4. Medium file.
5. Two 1-1/2” (38 mm) adjustable pliers.
6. #2 Phillips screwdriver.
7. Fiberglass resin & catalyst, (marine grade) - at least 2 oz (50 cc).
Such as Tap Plastics Marine Vinyl Ester Resin with MEKP Catalyst.
Note: Use liquid resin, instead of paste type, due to better penetration.
8. Mixing cup – 4 oz (100 cc).
9. Disposable brush.
10. Strain Relief Assembly 124903-1, (one per cable).
4.0 Responsibilities. It is the responsibility of the installer to observe all standard safety
precautions, including eye, slip, and chemical protection when performing this procedure.
4.1 Procedure.
Remove the standard cable pass through assembly 130818-1*
* N/A for 193 cm (76-inch) nominal size radomes. Refer to Fig 1, then use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to remove 4 ea. attachment screws.
Use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to
remove 4 ea.
screws.

Fig. 1 – Cable pass-thru assembly

Document No
Page 1 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.2 Making the holes

PLANNING: Space has been allowed for
up to 5 ea. strain reliefs, but, install only A
as many as needed. (Typically only 2-3 B
for TX/RX systems). Refer to Fig 2 then
plan which hole positions to use. C
For 76-inch radomes lowest holes may
be approx 1.5 inches from inside wall
corner with floor (ref drawing 129416).
Note: The hole center-to-center distance
given is the MINIMUM.
E
Follow good engineering practice and
provide the largest spacing possible
between holes as follows: D
1 Hole pattern - "A".
2 Hole pattern - "B", "C".
3 Hole pattern - "A", "B", "C", ("A", "D", "E" PERMITTED). Fig. 2 – Planning
4 Hole pattern - "B", "C", "D", "E". Measure in place or use
5 Hole pattern - “A”, "B", "C", "D", "E". template drawing 132234

Fig. 3 – (Up to) 5-Hole Pattern

Document No
Page 2 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.3 Measure, mark and drill pilot holes

CAUTION: The hole locations cannot be determined accurately from outside of the radome.
Using full scale drawing 132234, provided in the strain relief kit, measure mark and drill pilot holes from
the inside out, and using only light pressure, use the small drill bit, (~1/8” dia) to make a pilot hole
through each planned location.
4.4 Use the hole saw from the outside with light pressure.
CAUTION: Using the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat.
CAUTION: Heavy pressure on the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat and
splinter the fiberglass.
Working from the outside, use a 1-3/8” hole saw to make the holes for the planned strain reliefs.
4.5 After holes are drilled CAREFULLY use a file to clean the hole edges.
4.6 Test fit the strain reliefs in each location, then, make adjustments as
necessary.
4.7 Sealing the hole edges.
CAUTION: Cut edges can allow water and/or ice ingress and weaken the fiberglass laminate or
structural foam. It is essential to seal all cut edges thoroughly with fiberglass resin to preserve the
radome’s structural strength.
CAUTION: Fiberglass paste or RTV silicone sealant will not wick into and seal the fiberglass strands as
well as fiberglass resin, ONLY use fiberglass resin (such as TAP PLASTICS MARINE VINYL ESTER,
or equivalent) for sealing the cut edges.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to mix a small amount of fiberglass resin and catalyst, then
working quickly, use a disposable brush to apply mixed fiberglass resin to the hole edges, both inside
and out.
Allow the fiberglass resin to set per resin manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Like all chemical reactions, set time will be temperature/humidity dependent.
4.8 Refer to strain relief assembly drawing 124903
Being careful not to damage either the radome or the strain relief threads, use adjustable pliers to install
strain reliefs.

Fig. 4 – Outside view.

Document No
Page 3 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

Fig. 5 – Outside view.

4.9 Rotate General Assembly (G.A.)

Once cables have been installed, rotate General Assembly (G.A.), to ensure cables are routed
properly and do not interfere with azimuth rotation.

Fig. 6 – Inside view.

5.0 Records. N/A.

6.0 Training. N/A

7.0 References.
Strain relief assembly drawing (P/N: 124903)
Template drawing (P/N 132234)

Document No
Page 4 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

8.0 Strain relief positioning for 80-180 cm (34-66 in) smooth based radomes,
(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 5 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

9.0 Strain relief positioning for 193 cm (76-inch) radomes.

(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 6 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138633-4 B BDE CABLE KIT, 4012GX (MXP)

2 1 EA 136872 A1 BRACKET ASS'Y, CONNECTOR, RACK MOUNT
3 1 EA 139410 B BOX, ACCESSORY

BELOW DECK KIT, MXP

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV D
COMMON 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
134563-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138199-1 D2 GENERAL ASS'Y, 5012-33

2 1 EA 136871-1 B RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 66 IN, TX/R
3 1 EA 134442-4 A SSPB, KU, CODAN LBUC, 8W NI, 48VDC, 6
4 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N
5 1 EA 134725-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP (NOT SHOWN) ,
6 1 EA 134563-1 D BELOW DECK KIT, MXP (NOT SHOWN) ,
7 1 EA 130929-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, FEED (NOT SHOWN) ,
8 1 EA 137387-1 A CUSTOMER DOC PACKET, SERIES 12 KU-BAN (NOT SHOWN) ,
9 1 EA 124766-1 B DECAL KIT, 66-81 IN RADOME, SEA TEL (NOT SHOWN) ,
10 1 EA 121711 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, BASIC, MEDIUM SYS (NOT SHOWN) ,

SYSTEM, 5012-33, LIN, 8W, QUAD, 66 IN

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C1
XX12 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138198-601
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138199-1 C GENERAL ASS'Y, 5012-33

2 1 EA 136871-1 B RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 66 IN, TX/R
3 1 EA 134442-11 A SSPB, KU, CODAN LBUC, 16W NI, 48VDC,
4 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N
5 1 EA 134725-1 E ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP (NOT SHOWN) ,
6 1 EA 134563-1 B BELOW DECK KIT, 4012GX (MXP) (NOT SHOWN) ,
7 1 EA 130929-1 A4 BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, FEED (NOT SHOWN) ,
8 1 EA 137387-1 A CUSTOMER DOC PACKET, SERIES 12 KU-BAN (NOT SHOWN) ,
9 1 EA 124766-1 B DECAL KIT, 66-81 IN RADOME, SEA TEL (NOT SHOWN) ,
10 1 EA 121711 A1 BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, BASIC, MEDIUM SYS (NOT SHOWN) ,

SYSTEM, 5012-33, LIN, 16W, QUAD, 66 IN

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV B
XX12 2/7/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138198-606
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 9976 09/07/12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1. K.D.H.
A1 N/A 12/28/12 ADDED DASH 606. K.D.H.
B 10357 01/29/13 REMOVED ITEM 11. K.D.H.
C 9979 02/26/13 REMOVED ITEM 11, 130290-1 FROM DASHES 601 & 601R. SL
C1 N/A 09/18/13 ADDED DASH 607. KRB

D D

2
NON-ZERO QTY BOMS
DASH POL WATT RF MFR LNB OTHER
-601 LIN 8W CODAN QUAD
-601R LIN 8W CODAN QUAD REMAN

C -606 LIN 16W CODAN QUAD C

4 -607 LIN 8W CODAN NONE

SYSTEM WEIGHTS 2
1 DASH GA RADOME BASE FRAME AC KIT SYSTEM TOTAL
-601 - 150 - - -
601R - 150 - - -

REFERENCE DRAWINGS:
B 138204 ANTENNA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC B

138203 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

137389 PEDESTAL SCHEMATIC

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL STANDARD 122298.
2. RECORDED WEIGHTS ARE THE ACTUAL MEASURED
WEIGHTS OF SYSTEM AS ORDERED. FOR SYSTEM
LIFTING AND MOUNTING CUSTOMER SHALL FOLLOW
LOCAL SAFETY CODES
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H. K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 6-22-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 SYSTEM, 5012-33,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A 66 INCH RADOME
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:10 138198 C1
5012-33 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138199-1 D2 GENERAL ASS'Y, 5012-33

2 1 EA 133514-1 A2 ANTENNA INSTALLATION ASS'Y, 5009, ERA
4 1 EA 130527-1 E FEED ASS'Y, 5009, ERA
5 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N
6 1 EA 134442-X (REF ONLY) SSPB, KU, CODAN LBUC, NI,
20 1 EA 132956-1 F CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX ASS'Y, 6 AMP
21 1 EA 134735-1 G ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU
22 1 EA 131227-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MOTOR DRIVER, 09G2
23 1 EA 121951-3 G MOTOR, SZ 23, BLDC, 2 STK W/ ENCODER,
24 2 EA 125644-1 J1 MOTOR, SIZE 23, BLDC W/ BRAKE, 15 PIN
26 1 EA 131381-1 H GPS ANTENNA, SERIAL, 118 INCH
27 1 EA 129543-24 C KIT, CABLE ASS'Y AND PROXIMITY SENSOR
28 1 EA 131355-3 C4 POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, 300W / 48V, CABL
31 1 EA 129526-84 D HARNESS ASS'Y, PCU TO MOTOR DRIVER, X
32 1 EA 129527-36 B HARNESS ASS'Y, MOTOR TO ELEVATION, 36
33 1 EA 131493-1 A2 HARNESS ASS'Y, REFLECTOR, G2, XX09/XX
34 1 EA 129741-84 D HARNESS ASS'Y, 400MHZ MODEM TO CODAN
40 1 EA 129254-3 B2 POWER RING, 20A, 3 CIRCUITS, WITH CON
41 1 EA 138428-36 A POWER CORD, IEC-60320-C14 TO DUAL IE
42 1 EA 135832-84C B CABLE ASS'Y, AC POWER, SHIELDED, IEC
44 1 EA 128536-84 B CABLE ASS'Y, 48VDC TO CODAN SSPB, 84
51 2 EA 114972-4 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 30 IN
52 1 EA 114972-2 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 72 IN
53 1 EA 123758-7 B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 7 FT
55 1 EA 123758-6ORG B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 6 FT
56 1 EA 123758-6YEL B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 6 FT
60 2 EA 115492-1 C8 ADAPTER, N(F)-SMA(F), W/FLANGE
61 1 EA 116466 G ROTARY JOINT, 4.5 GHz, DUAL COAX.

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 5012-33

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C
LIT 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 2 NUMBER
138203-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

70 1 EA 128059 B1 FILTER, TX REJECT, WR-75, 13.75-14.5

71 1 EA 126144-1 D1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 180 DEG E-BEND
80 1 EA 127280-2 A2 WAVEGUIDE FILTER, KU-BAND, RX/REJECT,
81 1 EA 128534-3 B WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, H-BEND W/ FULL FLEX
82 1 EA 110172-23 G1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 90 DEG E-BEND, 3.65
83 1 EA 125157-1 B DIPLEXER, DPX75K-C02-A, WR-75
84 1 EA 128716-1 A1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, KU BAND, 4006RZA
85 1 EA 128290-1 A1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 180 DEG H-BEND W/BR
86 1 EA 115477-6 C WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, ROTARY JOINT, L-STY
100 1 EA 134725-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP
101 1 EA 134563-1 D BELOW DECK KIT, MXP
103 1 EA 111115-6 C CABLE ASS'Y, F(M)-F(M), 6 FT.
104 1 EA 111079-6 H CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M), 6 FT.
105 2 EA 119479-10 C CABLE ASS'Y, CAT5 JUMPER, 10 FT.
106 1 EA 119478-5 E CABLE ASS'Y, RJ-45 SERIAL, 60 IN.
108 1 EA 133287-2 B CABLE ASS'Y, USB 2.0, 6FT, A/M TO MIN
109 1 EA 138691-1 A CABLE ASS'Y, RJ45 TO DB9F, CISCO CONS
110 1 EA 120643-25 C CABLE ASS'Y, RS232, 9-WIRE, STRAIGHT,
120 1 EA 116700-6 G CABLE ASS'Y, RG223, N(M)-F(M), 6 FT.
121 2 EA 110567-19 D ADAPTER, N(F)-N(F), STRAIGHT, FLANGE
126 1 EA 135689-6 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK,
127 1 EA 135689-10 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK,
128 1 EA 136897 C CONNECTOR, DE9 (F) - TERM. BLOCK

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 5012-33

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C
LIT 11/8/2013 SHT 2 OF 2 NUMBER
138203-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 137379-1 C1 PEDESTAL ASS'Y, XX12

2 1 EA 138200-1 C ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT FRAME ASS'Y, 501
3 1 EA 133514-1 A2 ANTENNA INSTALLATION ASS'Y, 5009, ERA
4 1 EA 130360-1 C1 WAVEGUIDE ASS'Y, 5009-33
5 1 EA 135696-1 C CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX, KIT, 6A
9 1 EA 129994-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, AZ, 5009
11 1 EA 121655-11 L LABELS INSTALLATION, 4012GX (NOT SHOWN) ,
12 12 IN 130043-12 A TAPE, PIPE THREAD SEALANT, 1/2 IN WID
15 1 EA 132027-1 C INSTALL ASS'Y, GPS ANTENNA, NAVMAN, X
34 1 EA 118294-5 A3 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, METRI
35 1 EA 118294-19 A1 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, 6-32,
50 2 EA 114593-164 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 10-32 x 1/2, S.S.
57 2 EA 119952-011 A1 WASHER, STAR, INTERNAL TOOTH, #10, S.

GENERAL ASS'Y, 5012-33

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV D2
XX12 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138199-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
3 REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 9976 9-7-12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1 K.D.H.
B 10082 10-19-12 REMOVE ITEM 10; ADD NOTE 5 K.D.H.
C 10112 11-21-12 ITEM 34 WAS 118294-6 K.D.H.
D 10138 3-12-13 REMOVE ITEMS 30, 31, 58 & 59; ITEM 50 WAS QTY 6; ITEM 57 WAS QTY 6; ADD NOTE 6 K.D.H.
D1 10601 4-17-13 UPDATE VIEW OF WAVEGUIDE BRACKET K.D.H.
D2 10106 07-11-13 ITEM 11 WAS 121655-4 SL
D D

15
A

C C
3 12

4
35

1 REFERENCE DRAWINGS:
138204 ANTENNA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
D 138203 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
137389 PEDESTAL SCHEMATIC
2X DETAIL D
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DETAIL B 34
1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL SPEC. 122298.
5
B 2 SET 20 MM GAP AS SHOWN BETWEEN YOKE BOTTOM
AND PEDESTAL FRAME. TO ACHIEVE THIS GAP B
USE SHOWN NUT SET TO MOVE YOKE UP OR DOWN.

9 3 AFTER COMPLETION OF NOTE 2 INSTALL ADAPTERS

AND CHECK VALVES (METER SIDE IN, READ ON VALVES)
PROVIDED WITH PEDESTAL USING ITEM 12 ON EACH
PIECE (ADAPTERS AND CHECK VALVES). WRAP 2-3 TIMES
AROUND EXTERNAL THREADS FOR PROPER SEAL.
MUST NOT USE LOCTITE FOR THESE PARTS.
20±1MM 4 AFTER ADJUSTING GAP PER NOTE 2 SECURE LOWER
4X 6 JAM NUT WITH LOCTITE 222.
5. TRIM BALANCE AS NEEDED.
6 LOCTITE & TORQUE INDICATED HARDWARE.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H. K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:

2 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 242.369 LBS 8-27-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 GENERAL ASS'Y,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A 5012-33
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

4 2X 50 57 Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior

DETAIL C Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 138199 D2
DETAIL A
5012-33 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 123861 B MOUNTING PLATE

2 2 EA 126288-17 B UNISTRUT, 1-5/8 H-CHANNEL, 17 IN, AL
3 1 EA 134735-1 E2 ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU
4 1 EA 131355-3 C3 POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, 300W / 48V, CABL
5 2 EA 131374-1 A WEIGHT, COUNTER, 1-1/2 X 3/4 X 17
10 4 EA 124588-1021 A STANDOFF, HEX, F/F, 1/4-20 X .50 OD X
11 4 EA 131572-5321 A STANDOFF, HEX, M/F, M4 X 14, BRASS W/
14 8 EA 126279-3 A4 NUT, 1 5/8 UNISTRUT, 1/4-20, W/SPRING
50 4 EA 114593-202 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 1/4-20 x 3/8, S.S.
51 4 EA 114586-536 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 5/8, S.S.
52 2 EA 114586-538 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1, S.S.
53 2 EA 114586-541 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1-1/2, S.S.
54 2 EA 114586-542 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1-3/4, S.S.
57 4 EA 114580-027 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, SMALL PATTERN, S.S
58 12 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
59 2 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.
60 4 EA 119973-117 SCREW, SOCKET HD, M4 X 12, S.S.
68 4 EA 114580-230 WASHER, FLAT, M4, S.S.

ICU/PWR SUPPLY MOUNTING ASS'Y, 300W/48V, XX12

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A
COMMON 2/7/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138593-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
4X 51 58 A 10157 11-20-12 NEW DRAWING, NO PRIOR REV K.D.H.

53 58 2X

D 4X 14 5 D

2X 2

4X 14 4X 11

1 4
C C
58 59 2X

10 4X

3
60 68 4X

B 5 B
2 50 57 4X

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. MANUFACTURE PER SEA TEL SPEC 122298.
2 MUST USE LOCTITE 242.
54 58 2X
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H. K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:

52 58 2X UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 29.270 LBS 11-20-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 ICU/PWR SUPPLY
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A MOUNTING ASS'Y, 300W/48V
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 138593 A
5012-33 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 123861 B MOUNTING PLATE

2 2 EA 126288-17 B UNISTRUT, 1-5/8 H-CHANNEL, 17 IN, AL
3 2 EA 124716 B RF INTERFACE, BAR, CODAN, BUC
4 1 EA 131374-1 A WEIGHT, COUNTER, 1-1/2 X 3/4 X 17
10 10 EA 126279-3 A4 NUT, 1 5/8 UNISTRUT, 1/4-20, W/SPRING
11 4 EA 118328-3 D STANDOFF, RND, F/F, 1/4-20 X .5 OD X
12 4 EA 114592-540 STUD, FULLY THREADED, 1/4-20 x 3/4, S
13 4 EA 114592-544 STUD, FULLY THREADED, 1/4-20 x 1-1/4,
50 2 EA 114586-538 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1, S.S.
51 4 EA 114586-541 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1-1/2, S.S.
52 2 EA 114586-542 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1-3/4, S.S.
56 4 EA 114581-029 WASHER, LOCK, 1/4, S.S
57 4 EA 114580-027 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, SMALL PATTERN, S.S
58 10 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
59 6 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.

MOUNTING ASS'Y, CODAN LBUC, 5012-33

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A
COMMON 2/7/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138594-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
4X 10
4X 12 A 10157 11-20-12 NEW DRAWING, NO PRIOR REV K.D.H.

4X 11
D 2X 2 D

4X 13
.38

6X 10
.88

DETAIL A

1
C DETAIL B DETAIL C C
4

2X 52 58

2X 50 58
3.70

2X 3

A C
B B

2X 51 58 58 59

B
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL SPEC. 122298.
2 ASSEMBLE USING LOCTITE 242.
51 58 2X
SSPA SHOWN FOR DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
REFERENCE ONLY K DONOVAN K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 14.269 LBS 11-20-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 MOUNTING ASS'Y,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A CODAN LBUC, 5012-33
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009
2 59 56 57 4X SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV
Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 138594 A
5012-33 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 131939-1 A RADOME ASS'Y, 66 IN, TUNED, WHITE

4 1 EA 130390-1 B KIT, HARDWARE, GA TO RADOME, STD
5 6 EA 119801-012 B CABLE TIE, NYLON, 4 IN, NATURAL (NOT ALL SHOWN) ,
6 1 EA 111679-7 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, .50 DIA, #8 MTG H
8 1 EA 111679-25 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, 3/4 DIA, #10 MTG
9 1 EA 111679-5 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, .375 DIA, #8 MTG
10 1 OZ 125948-1 A ADHESIVE, HOT MELT, 3M SCOTCH-WELD 37 (NOT SHOWN) ,
14 1 EA 130394-1 D KIT, HARDWARE, RADOME TO MAST, 4-HOL
20 5 EA 124903-1 B3 STRAIN RELIEF ASS'Y (CABLE GLAND) SEE NOTES ,
25 6 EA 125806-7 A ROTALOC HEX NUT, SS-1-B38-M4 X 07-6H
50 4 EA 119745-218 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, M4 x 8
58 5 EA 114580-230 WASHER, FLAT, M4, S.S.
60 4 EA 114589-141 SCREW, HEX HD M6X35
67 8 EA 130371-170 A WASHER, NYLON, 6.4 ID, 12 OD
69 8 EA 120089-251 NUT, HEX, M6, S.S.
99 1 EA 131226 A PROCEDURE, RADOME STRAIN RELIEF INSTA BAG WITH ITEM 20 ,
101 1 EA 131400 A CRATE, OPEN, 66 INCH RADOME, O.D: 77X
102 1 EA 131469-1 A1 SHIPPING KIT, ASS'Y

RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 66 IN, TX/RX, WHITE

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV B
COMMON 2/20/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
136871-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 9604 04/23/12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION. WAS REVISION X1. KRB

B 10357 1-29-13 ADD ITEMS 101 & 102; UPDATE TITLE BLOCK K.D.H.

D D

4X 60

4X 67

HARDWARE SHOWN IS FOR TRANSIT ONLY.

C REMOVE & REPLACE WITH KIT 130394-1 AT C
FINAL INSTALLATION.

4X 67

4X 68
DETAIL A 4X 68
A
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. MANUFACTURE PER SEA TEL SPEC. 122298.

B 2 BOW MARKER LOCATION DIRECTLY ACROSS FROM ACCESS HATCH.

B
3 BAG AND ATTACH TO INSIDE OF RADOME.
4 GA INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2 A. APPLY LOCTITE PER SEA TEL SPEC. 121730.
ACCESS B. ENSURE THAT SET SCREWS (4 EACH) ARE BOTTOMED OUT IN
HATCH THEIR HOLES.
C. LOWER GA INTO POSITION ON SET SCREWS WITHOUT DAMAGING
SET SCREW THREADS THEN APPLY LOCTITE TO UPPER PART OF
SET SCREW PER SEA TEL SPEC. 121730.
D. INSTALL FENDER WASHERS (4 EACH).
E. INSTALL NUTS (4 EACH) AND TORQUE PER SEA TEL SPEC. 122305
(S.S. TO S.S.).
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
KRB
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS. 315.667 LBS 04/17/12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A X = 1.50 MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
NA
X.X = 0.50 RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL
X.XX = 0.15 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 NA 66 INCH, TX/RX
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:12 136871 B
XX09 1 OF 2
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2X 5

5X 20 3
D D

14 3

PARTIAL GENERAL ASS'Y

SHOWN FOR REFERENCE
C C
AND CLARITY.

2X 5

50 58 25 2X
4 4

B B

50 58 6 25

3X CABLE DRESSING

10 PLACES: PRIOR TO FINAL ASSEMBLY

USE ADHESIVE (ITEM 10) TO ADHERE
ALL ROTOLOC FASTENERS TO RADOME
A BASE IN APPROX. LOCATIONS SHOWN. A
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO INTERFERENCE
50 58 6 25 WITH GA.
SEE VIEW B FOR CONNECTOR
50 58 8 25 MOUNTING DETAIL. SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

B 1:12 136871 B
SHEET NUMBER 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

1.0 Purpose. To define the installation procedure for installing strain reliefs in “smooth base”
radomes.
2.0 Scope. This installation procedure applies to fiberglass radomes having Sea Tel’s standard
four-hole mounting pattern, and M12 mounting hardware, in the 80-180 cm (34-66 in)
nominal size range, typically referred to as “smooth” base radomes. It also applies to our
larger 193 cm (76-inch) radome having a twelve-hole mounting pattern. It is to be used where
the preferred center cable exit may not be desired.
3.0 Tools/materials.
1. Electric drill.
2. Small drill bit 1/8” dia. (3-4mm dia.).
3. Hole saw, 1 3/8” dia. (35 mm), with mandrel and ¼” dia. pilot drill.
4. Medium file.
5. Two 1-1/2” (38 mm) adjustable pliers.
6. #2 Phillips screwdriver.
7. Fiberglass resin & catalyst, (marine grade) - at least 2 oz (50 cc).
Such as Tap Plastics Marine Vinyl Ester Resin with MEKP Catalyst.
Note: Use liquid resin, instead of paste type, due to better penetration.
8. Mixing cup – 4 oz (100 cc).
9. Disposable brush.
10. Strain Relief Assembly 124903-1, (one per cable).
4.0 Responsibilities. It is the responsibility of the installer to observe all standard safety
precautions, including eye, slip, and chemical protection when performing this procedure.
4.1 Procedure.
Remove the standard cable pass through assembly 130818-1*
* N/A for 193 cm (76-inch) nominal size radomes. Refer to Fig 1, then use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to remove 4 ea. attachment screws.
Use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to
remove 4 ea.
screws.

Fig. 1 – Cable pass-thru assembly

Document No
Page 1 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.2 Making the holes

PLANNING: Space has been allowed for
up to 5 ea. strain reliefs, but, install only A
as many as needed. (Typically only 2-3 B
for TX/RX systems). Refer to Fig 2 then
plan which hole positions to use. C
For 76-inch radomes lowest holes may
be approx 1.5 inches from inside wall
corner with floor (ref drawing 129416).
Note: The hole center-to-center distance
given is the MINIMUM.
E
Follow good engineering practice and
provide the largest spacing possible
between holes as follows: D
1 Hole pattern - "A".
2 Hole pattern - "B", "C".
3 Hole pattern - "A", "B", "C", ("A", "D", "E" PERMITTED). Fig. 2 – Planning
4 Hole pattern - "B", "C", "D", "E". Measure in place or use
5 Hole pattern - “A”, "B", "C", "D", "E". template drawing 132234

Fig. 3 – (Up to) 5-Hole Pattern

Document No
Page 2 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.3 Measure, mark and drill pilot holes

CAUTION: The hole locations cannot be determined accurately from outside of the radome.
Using full scale drawing 132234, provided in the strain relief kit, measure mark and drill pilot holes from
the inside out, and using only light pressure, use the small drill bit, (~1/8” dia) to make a pilot hole
through each planned location.
4.4 Use the hole saw from the outside with light pressure.
CAUTION: Using the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat.
CAUTION: Heavy pressure on the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat and
splinter the fiberglass.
Working from the outside, use a 1-3/8” hole saw to make the holes for the planned strain reliefs.
4.5 After holes are drilled CAREFULLY use a file to clean the hole edges.
4.6 Test fit the strain reliefs in each location, then, make adjustments as
necessary.
4.7 Sealing the hole edges.
CAUTION: Cut edges can allow water and/or ice ingress and weaken the fiberglass laminate or
structural foam. It is essential to seal all cut edges thoroughly with fiberglass resin to preserve the
radome’s structural strength.
CAUTION: Fiberglass paste or RTV silicone sealant will not wick into and seal the fiberglass strands as
well as fiberglass resin, ONLY use fiberglass resin (such as TAP PLASTICS MARINE VINYL ESTER,
or equivalent) for sealing the cut edges.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to mix a small amount of fiberglass resin and catalyst, then
working quickly, use a disposable brush to apply mixed fiberglass resin to the hole edges, both inside
and out.
Allow the fiberglass resin to set per resin manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Like all chemical reactions, set time will be temperature/humidity dependent.
4.8 Refer to strain relief assembly drawing 124903
Being careful not to damage either the radome or the strain relief threads, use adjustable pliers to install
strain reliefs.

Fig. 4 – Outside view.

Document No
Page 3 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

Fig. 5 – Outside view.

4.9 Rotate General Assembly (G.A.)

Once cables have been installed, rotate General Assembly (G.A.), to ensure cables are routed
properly and do not interfere with azimuth rotation.

Fig. 6 – Inside view.

5.0 Records. N/A.

6.0 Training. N/A

7.0 References.
Strain relief assembly drawing (P/N: 124903)
Template drawing (P/N 132234)

Document No
Page 4 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

8.0 Strain relief positioning for 80-180 cm (34-66 in) smooth based radomes,
(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 5 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

9.0 Strain relief positioning for 193 cm (76-inch) radomes.

(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 6 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138633-4 B BDE CABLE KIT, 4012GX (MXP)

2 1 EA 136872 A1 BRACKET ASS'Y, CONNECTOR, RACK MOUNT
3 1 EA 139410 B BOX, ACCESSORY

BELOW DECK KIT, MXP

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV D
COMMON 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
134563-1
 11/11/2013 Single Level MFG Bill of Material

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 137378-2 C2 GENERAL ASS'Y, 5012-91, ETHERNET M&C

2 1 EA 136871-1 B RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 66 IN, TX/RX, WHITE

3 1 EA 132345-2 A2 SSPB, KU, 8W, CODAN MINI, 4908(L)-W/E-DC/EX-CE-NI

4 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N

5 1 EA 134725-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP (NOT SHOWN)

6 1 EA 134563-1 D BELOW DECK KIT, MXP (NOT SHOWN)

7 1 EA 130929-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, FEED (NOT SHOWN)

8 1 EA 137387-1 A CUSTOMER DOC PACKET, SERIES 12 KU-BAND (NOT SHOWN)

9 1 EA 124766-1 B DECAL KIT, 66-81 IN RADOME, SEA TEL (NOT SHOWN)

10 1 EA 121711 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, BASIC, MEDIUM SYSTEMS (NOT SHOWN)

SYSTEM, 5012-91, LIN, 8W, QUAD, 66 IN, ETHERNET M&C

PROD FAMILY EFF DATE PART NO REV

XX12 11-Nov-13 Page 1 of 1 137376-631 D1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 9912 8-17-12 ITEM 4 WAS 127386-2; RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1 K.D.H.
B 10065 10-23-12 ITEM 1 WAS 130290-1; ADD "-91" TO TITLE K.D.H.
B1 N/A 1-10-13 ADD -631 K.D.H.
C 10357 1-29-13 -631, REMOVED ITEM 11 K.D.H.
C1 N/A 2-6-13 UPDATED SBD AND SCHEMATIC REFERENCE DRAWING PART NUMBERS K.D.H.
D 9979 02-25-13 REMOVE ITEM 11, 131564-1 SL
D D1 N/A 09/23/13 ADDED DASH 632. KRB D

NON-ZERO QTY BOMS

DASH POL WATT RF MFR LNB OTHER
C C
4 -601 LIN 8W CODAN QUAD
-631 LIN 8W CODAN QUAD ETHERNET M&C
3
-632 LIN 8W CODAN SINGLE-3 ETHERNET M&C

SYSTEM WEIGHTS 2
1 DASH GA RADOME BASE FRAME AC KIT SYSTEM TOTAL
-601 248 150 - - 398

REFERENCE DRAWINGS:
B B
138360 ANTENNA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC, 4009 MK3/XX12-91
138359 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 4009 MK3/XX12-91
137389 PEDESTAL SCHEMATIC

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL STANDARD 122298.
2 RECORDED WEIGHTS ARE THE ACTUAL MEASURED
WEIGHTS OF SYSTEM AS ORDERED. FOR SYSTEM
LIFTING AND MOUNTING CUSTOMER SHALL FOLLOW
LOCAL SAFETY CODES
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
J ZAJAC K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 6-22-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 SYSTEM, 5012-91,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A 66 INCH RADOME
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:10 137376 D1
5012 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 137378-X C1 (REF) GENERAL ASS'Y, 5012-91

2 1 EA 133514-1 A2 ANTENNA INSTALLATION ASS'Y, 5009, ERA
4 1 EA 130527-1 E FEED ASS'Y, 5009, ERA
5 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N
6 1 EA 132345-X (REF) SSPB, KU, CODAN MINI
20 1 EA 132956-1 F CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX ASS'Y, 6 AMP
21 1 EA 134735-1 G ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU
22 1 EA 131227-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MOTOR DRIVER, 09G2
23 1 EA 121951-3 G MOTOR, SZ 23, BLDC, 2 STK W/ ENCODER,
24 2 EA 125644-1 J1 MOTOR, SIZE 23, BLDC W/ BRAKE, 15 PIN
26 1 EA 131381-1 H GPS ANTENNA, SERIAL, 118 INCH
27 1 EA 129543-24 C KIT, CABLE ASS'Y AND PROXIMITY SENSOR
28 1 EA 131355-3 C4 POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, 300W / 48V, CABL
31 1 EA 129526-84 D HARNESS ASS'Y, PCU TO MOTOR DRIVER, X
32 1 EA 129527-36 B HARNESS ASS'Y, MOTOR TO ELEVATION, 36
33 1 EA 131493-1 A2 HARNESS ASS'Y, REFLECTOR, G2, XX09/XX
34 1 EA 137372-84 A CABLE ASS'Y, 24VDC TO CODAN MINI, ICU
40 1 EA 129254-3 B2 POWER RING, 20A, 3 CIRCUITS, WITH CON
41 1 EA 138428-36 A POWER CORD, IEC-60320-C14 TO DUAL IE
42 1 EA 135832-84C B CABLE ASS'Y, AC POWER, SHIELDED, IEC
44 1 EA 128536-84 B CABLE ASS'Y, 48VDC TO CODAN SSPB, 84
51 2 EA 114972-4 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 30 IN
52 1 EA 114972-2 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 72 IN
53 1 EA 123758-7 B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 7 FT
55 1 EA 123758-6ORG B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 6 FT
56 1 EA 123758-6YEL B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 6 FT
57 1 EA 138396-84 D CABLE ASS'Y, ETHERNET M&C, CODAN MINI
60 2 EA 115492-1 C8 ADAPTER, N(F)-SMA(F), W/FLANGE

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 5012-91

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C
LIT 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 2 NUMBER
138359-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

61 1 EA 116466 G ROTARY JOINT, 4.5 GHz, DUAL COAX.

70 1 EA 128059 B1 FILTER, TX REJECT, WR-75, 13.75-14.5
71 1 EA 126144-1 D1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 180 DEG E-BEND
80 1 EA 135055-1 A WAVEGUIDE, E-H BEND W/FLEX, 5009-91
81 1 EA 125157-1 B DIPLEXER, DPX75K-C02-A, WR-75
82 1 EA 128716-1 A1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, KU BAND, 4006RZA
85 1 EA 128290-1 A1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 180 DEG H-BEND W/BR
86 1 EA 115477-6 C WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, ROTARY JOINT, L-STY
100 1 EA 134725-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP
101 1 EA 134563-1 D BELOW DECK KIT, MXP
103 1 EA 111115-6 C CABLE ASS'Y, F(M)-F(M), 6 FT.
104 1 EA 111079-6 H CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M), 6 FT.
105 2 EA 119479-10 C CABLE ASS'Y, CAT5 JUMPER, 10 FT.
106 1 EA 119478-5 E CABLE ASS'Y, RJ-45 SERIAL, 60 IN.
108 1 EA 133287-2 B CABLE ASS'Y, USB 2.0, 6FT, A/M TO MIN
110 1 EA 120643-25 C CABLE ASS'Y, RS232, 9-WIRE, STRAIGHT,
120 1 EA 116700-6 G CABLE ASS'Y, RG223, N(M)-F(M), 6 FT.
121 2 EA 110567-19 D ADAPTER, N(F)-N(F), STRAIGHT, FLANGE
126 1 EA 135689-6 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK,
127 1 EA 135689-10 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK,
128 1 EA 136897 C CONNECTOR, DE9 (F) - TERM. BLOCK

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 5012-91

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C
LIT 11/8/2013 SHT 2 OF 2 NUMBER
138359-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 137379-1 C1 PEDESTAL ASS'Y, XX12

2 1 EA 137380-1 A1 ELECT EQ FRAME ASS'Y, 5012-91
3 1 EA 133514-1 A2 ANTENNA INSTALLATION ASS'Y, 5009, ERA
4 1 EA 135037-2 E1 WAVEGUIDE ASS'Y, 5012-91, NO FILTER
5 1 EA 135696-1 C CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX, KIT, 6A
9 1 EA 129994-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, AZ, 5009
10 1 EA 137385-1 A1 BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, EL/CL, 5012
11 1 EA 121655-11 L LABELS INSTALLATION, 4012GX (NOT SHOWN) ,
12 12 IN 130043-12 A TAPE, PIPE THREAD SEALANT, 1/2 IN WID
15 1 EA 132027-1 C INSTALL ASS'Y, GPS ANTENNA, NAVMAN, X
34 1 EA 118294-23 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, M4, B
35 1 EA 118294-19 A1 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, 6-32,
50 2 EA 114593-164 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 10-32 x 1/2, S.S.
57 2 EA 119952-011 A1 WASHER, STAR, INTERNAL TOOTH, #10, S.

GENERAL ASS'Y, 5012-91

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C2
XX12 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
137378-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
3 REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 9912 8-16-12 ITEM 10 WAS 135036-1; RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1 K.D.H.
A1 N/A 1-10-13 ADD -2 K.D.H.
B 10381 2-13-13 DASH 1, ITEM 4 WAS 135037-1; ITEM 34 WAS 118294-6; UPDATE VIEWS OF BUC MOUNTING AND WAVEGUIDE RUN K.D.H.
C 10138 3-13-13 REMOVE ITEMS 30, 31, 58 & 59; ITEM 50 WAS QTY 6; ITEM 57 WAS QTY 6; ADD NOTE 5 K.D.H.
C1 10601 4-17-13 UPDATE VIEW OF WAVEGUIDE BRACKET K.D.H.
C2 10106 07-11-13 ITEM 11 WAS 121655-4 SL
D D

15
A

C C
3 12
4 DASH DESCRIPTION
-1 STD
35 -2 ETHERNET M&C

1
D REFERENCE DRAWINGS:
137376 ANTENNA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
137375 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
2X DETAIL D 34 137389 PEDESTAL SCHEMATIC
10
5 DETAIL B NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL SPEC. 122298.
B B
2 SET 20 MM GAP AS SHOWN BETWEEN YOKE BOTTOM
9 AND PEDESTAL FRAME. TO ACHIEVE THIS GAP
USE SHOWN NUT SET TO MOVE YOKE UP OR DOWN.
3 AFTER COMPLETION OF NOTE 2 INSTALL ADAPTERS
AND CHECK VALVES (METER SIDE IN, READ ON VALVES)
PROVIDED WITH PEDESTAL USING ITEM 12 ON EACH
PIECE (ADAPTERS AND CHECK VALVES). WRAP 2-3 TIMES
AROUND EXTERNAL THREADS FOR PROPER SEAL.
20±1MM
4X 5 MUST NOT USE LOCTITE FOR THESE PARTS.
4 AFTER ADJUSTING GAP PER NOTE 2 SECURE LOWER
JAM NUT WITH LOCTITE 222.
5 LOCTITE & TORQUE INDICATED HARDWARE.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
J ZADJAC K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:

2 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 217.428 LBS 6-22-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 GENERAL ASS'Y,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A 5012
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

2X 50 57 SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

4 Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
DETAIL C Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 137378 C2
DETAIL A
5012 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 11/11/2013 Single Level MFG Bill of Material

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 123861 B MOUNTING PLATE

2 2 EA 126288-17 B UNISTRUT, 1-5/8 H-CHANNEL, 17 IN, AL

3 1 EA 134735-1 G ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU

10 4 EA 124588-1021 A STANDOFF, HEX, F/F, 1/4-20 X .50 OD X 0.625, ALUM

14 8 EA 126279-3 A4 NUT, 1 5/8 UNISTRUT, 1/4-20, W/SPRING, STEEL

15 1 EA 108894-7 G1 WEIGHT, TRIM, 1 X 1 X 10, 2.8 LBS

16 1 EA 108894-5 G1 WEIGHT, TRIM, 1/2 X 1 X 10, 1.4 LBS

50 4 EA 114593-202 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 1/4-20 x 3/8, S.S.

51 4 EA 114586-536 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 5/8, S.S.

52 4 EA 114586-538 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1, S.S.

53 2 EA 114586-544 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 2-1/4, S.S.

57 4 EA 114580-027 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, SMALL PATTERN, S.S.

58 12 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.

59 2 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.

ICU MOUNTING ASS'Y, 5012

PROD FAMILY EFF DATE PART NO REV

COMMON 11-Nov-13 Page 1 of 1 137383-1 A
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
4X 14 REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 9912 8-16-12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X2 K.D.H.

D D
2X 2
4X 51 58

4X 14

C
-1 C

53 58 58 59 2X

1 16

15 -2
10 4X
B B

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

52 58 4X 1. MANUFACTURE PER SEA TEL SPEC 122298.
2 MUST USE LOCTITE 242.

2 50 57 4X DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:

KRB K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 18.430 LBS 6-22-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
DASH DESCRIPTION
X.XX = .020 ICU MOUNTING ASS'Y,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
-1 5012 ANGLES: .5 N/A 5012
-2 4412 INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 137383 A
5012 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 123861 B MOUNTING PLATE

2 2 EA 126288-17 B UNISTRUT, 1-5/8 H-CHANNEL, 17 IN, AL
10 2 EA 133510 B MOUNTING BRACKET, CODAN MINI-BUC
21 8 EA 126279-3 A4 NUT, 1 5/8 UNISTRUT, 1/4-20, W/SPRING
50 4 EA 119973-117 SCREW, SOCKET HD, M4 X 12, S.S.
58 4 EA 114580-230 WASHER, FLAT, M4, S.S.
60 6 EA 114586-537 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 3/4, S.S.
61 4 EA 114586-538 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1, S.S.
68 16 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
69 6 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.

MOUNTING ASS'Y, CODAN MINI BUC, 5009-91, MK2

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C
COMMON 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
135039-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 8762 07/27/11 REEASED TO PRODUCTION. WAS REVISION X1. UPDATED NOTES. KRB
B 9912 8-15-12 ITEM 1 ROTATED 180 ; ADD NOTE 2 K.D.H.
C 10381 2-12-13 2X BRACKETS ITEM 10 MOVED ONE HOLE PATTERN TO THE LEFT K.D.H.

D D

2X 10

6X 60 68 68 69 2
4X 21

50 58 4X
A

C C

2X 2

SSPA SHOWN FOR

REFERENCE ONLY

1
B
DETAIL A
B

21 4X
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL SPEC. 122298.
2 USE LOCTITE 242

DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:

KRB
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 7.69 LBS 06/27/11 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 MOUNTING ASS'Y,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A CODAN MINI BUC, 5009-91
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

61 68 4X SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 135039 C
5009 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 131939-1 A RADOME ASS'Y, 66 IN, TUNED, WHITE

4 1 EA 130390-1 B KIT, HARDWARE, GA TO RADOME, STD
5 6 EA 119801-012 B CABLE TIE, NYLON, 4 IN, NATURAL (NOT ALL SHOWN) ,
6 1 EA 111679-7 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, .50 DIA, #8 MTG H
8 1 EA 111679-25 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, 3/4 DIA, #10 MTG
9 1 EA 111679-5 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, .375 DIA, #8 MTG
10 1 OZ 125948-1 A ADHESIVE, HOT MELT, 3M SCOTCH-WELD 37 (NOT SHOWN) ,
14 1 EA 130394-1 D KIT, HARDWARE, RADOME TO MAST, 4-HOL
20 5 EA 124903-1 B3 STRAIN RELIEF ASS'Y (CABLE GLAND) SEE NOTES ,
25 6 EA 125806-7 A ROTALOC HEX NUT, SS-1-B38-M4 X 07-6H
50 4 EA 119745-218 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, M4 x 8
58 5 EA 114580-230 WASHER, FLAT, M4, S.S.
60 4 EA 114589-141 SCREW, HEX HD M6X35
67 8 EA 130371-170 A WASHER, NYLON, 6.4 ID, 12 OD
69 8 EA 120089-251 NUT, HEX, M6, S.S.
99 1 EA 131226 A PROCEDURE, RADOME STRAIN RELIEF INSTA BAG WITH ITEM 20 ,
101 1 EA 131400 A CRATE, OPEN, 66 INCH RADOME, O.D: 77X
102 1 EA 131469-1 A1 SHIPPING KIT, ASS'Y

RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 66 IN, TX/RX, WHITE

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV B
COMMON 2/20/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
136871-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 9604 04/23/12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION. WAS REVISION X1. KRB

B 10357 1-29-13 ADD ITEMS 101 & 102; UPDATE TITLE BLOCK K.D.H.

D D

4X 60

4X 67

HARDWARE SHOWN IS FOR TRANSIT ONLY.

C REMOVE & REPLACE WITH KIT 130394-1 AT C
FINAL INSTALLATION.

4X 67

4X 68
DETAIL A 4X 68
A
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. MANUFACTURE PER SEA TEL SPEC. 122298.

B 2 BOW MARKER LOCATION DIRECTLY ACROSS FROM ACCESS HATCH.

B
3 BAG AND ATTACH TO INSIDE OF RADOME.
4 GA INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2 A. APPLY LOCTITE PER SEA TEL SPEC. 121730.
ACCESS B. ENSURE THAT SET SCREWS (4 EACH) ARE BOTTOMED OUT IN
HATCH THEIR HOLES.
C. LOWER GA INTO POSITION ON SET SCREWS WITHOUT DAMAGING
SET SCREW THREADS THEN APPLY LOCTITE TO UPPER PART OF
SET SCREW PER SEA TEL SPEC. 121730.
D. INSTALL FENDER WASHERS (4 EACH).
E. INSTALL NUTS (4 EACH) AND TORQUE PER SEA TEL SPEC. 122305
(S.S. TO S.S.).
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
KRB
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS. 315.667 LBS 04/17/12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A X = 1.50 MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
NA
X.X = 0.50 RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL
X.XX = 0.15 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 NA 66 INCH, TX/RX
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:12 136871 B
XX09 1 OF 2
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2X 5

5X 20 3
D D

14 3

PARTIAL GENERAL ASS'Y

SHOWN FOR REFERENCE
C C
AND CLARITY.

2X 5

50 58 25 2X
4 4

B B

50 58 6 25

3X CABLE DRESSING

10 PLACES: PRIOR TO FINAL ASSEMBLY

USE ADHESIVE (ITEM 10) TO ADHERE
ALL ROTOLOC FASTENERS TO RADOME
A BASE IN APPROX. LOCATIONS SHOWN. A
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO INTERFERENCE
50 58 6 25 WITH GA.
SEE VIEW B FOR CONNECTOR
50 58 8 25 MOUNTING DETAIL. SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

B 1:12 136871 B
SHEET NUMBER 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

1.0 Purpose. To define the installation procedure for installing strain reliefs in “smooth base”
radomes.
2.0 Scope. This installation procedure applies to fiberglass radomes having Sea Tel’s standard
four-hole mounting pattern, and M12 mounting hardware, in the 80-180 cm (34-66 in)
nominal size range, typically referred to as “smooth” base radomes. It also applies to our
larger 193 cm (76-inch) radome having a twelve-hole mounting pattern. It is to be used where
the preferred center cable exit may not be desired.
3.0 Tools/materials.
1. Electric drill.
2. Small drill bit 1/8” dia. (3-4mm dia.).
3. Hole saw, 1 3/8” dia. (35 mm), with mandrel and ¼” dia. pilot drill.
4. Medium file.
5. Two 1-1/2” (38 mm) adjustable pliers.
6. #2 Phillips screwdriver.
7. Fiberglass resin & catalyst, (marine grade) - at least 2 oz (50 cc).
Such as Tap Plastics Marine Vinyl Ester Resin with MEKP Catalyst.
Note: Use liquid resin, instead of paste type, due to better penetration.
8. Mixing cup – 4 oz (100 cc).
9. Disposable brush.
10. Strain Relief Assembly 124903-1, (one per cable).
4.0 Responsibilities. It is the responsibility of the installer to observe all standard safety
precautions, including eye, slip, and chemical protection when performing this procedure.
4.1 Procedure.
Remove the standard cable pass through assembly 130818-1*
* N/A for 193 cm (76-inch) nominal size radomes. Refer to Fig 1, then use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to remove 4 ea. attachment screws.
Use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to
remove 4 ea.
screws.

Fig. 1 – Cable pass-thru assembly

Document No
Page 1 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.2 Making the holes

PLANNING: Space has been allowed for
up to 5 ea. strain reliefs, but, install only A
as many as needed. (Typically only 2-3 B
for TX/RX systems). Refer to Fig 2 then
plan which hole positions to use. C
For 76-inch radomes lowest holes may
be approx 1.5 inches from inside wall
corner with floor (ref drawing 129416).
Note: The hole center-to-center distance
given is the MINIMUM.
E
Follow good engineering practice and
provide the largest spacing possible
between holes as follows: D
1 Hole pattern - "A".
2 Hole pattern - "B", "C".
3 Hole pattern - "A", "B", "C", ("A", "D", "E" PERMITTED). Fig. 2 – Planning
4 Hole pattern - "B", "C", "D", "E". Measure in place or use
5 Hole pattern - “A”, "B", "C", "D", "E". template drawing 132234

Fig. 3 – (Up to) 5-Hole Pattern

Document No
Page 2 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.3 Measure, mark and drill pilot holes

CAUTION: The hole locations cannot be determined accurately from outside of the radome.
Using full scale drawing 132234, provided in the strain relief kit, measure mark and drill pilot holes from
the inside out, and using only light pressure, use the small drill bit, (~1/8” dia) to make a pilot hole
through each planned location.
4.4 Use the hole saw from the outside with light pressure.
CAUTION: Using the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat.
CAUTION: Heavy pressure on the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat and
splinter the fiberglass.
Working from the outside, use a 1-3/8” hole saw to make the holes for the planned strain reliefs.
4.5 After holes are drilled CAREFULLY use a file to clean the hole edges.
4.6 Test fit the strain reliefs in each location, then, make adjustments as
necessary.
4.7 Sealing the hole edges.
CAUTION: Cut edges can allow water and/or ice ingress and weaken the fiberglass laminate or
structural foam. It is essential to seal all cut edges thoroughly with fiberglass resin to preserve the
radome’s structural strength.
CAUTION: Fiberglass paste or RTV silicone sealant will not wick into and seal the fiberglass strands as
well as fiberglass resin, ONLY use fiberglass resin (such as TAP PLASTICS MARINE VINYL ESTER,
or equivalent) for sealing the cut edges.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to mix a small amount of fiberglass resin and catalyst, then
working quickly, use a disposable brush to apply mixed fiberglass resin to the hole edges, both inside
and out.
Allow the fiberglass resin to set per resin manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Like all chemical reactions, set time will be temperature/humidity dependent.
4.8 Refer to strain relief assembly drawing 124903
Being careful not to damage either the radome or the strain relief threads, use adjustable pliers to install
strain reliefs.

Fig. 4 – Outside view.

Document No
Page 3 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

Fig. 5 – Outside view.

4.9 Rotate General Assembly (G.A.)

Once cables have been installed, rotate General Assembly (G.A.), to ensure cables are routed
properly and do not interfere with azimuth rotation.

Fig. 6 – Inside view.

5.0 Records. N/A.

6.0 Training. N/A

7.0 References.
Strain relief assembly drawing (P/N: 124903)
Template drawing (P/N 132234)

Document No
Page 4 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

8.0 Strain relief positioning for 80-180 cm (34-66 in) smooth based radomes,
(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 5 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

9.0 Strain relief positioning for 193 cm (76-inch) radomes.

(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 6 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138633-4 B BDE CABLE KIT, 4012GX (MXP)

2 1 EA 136872 A1 BRACKET ASS'Y, CONNECTOR, RACK MOUNT
3 1 EA 139410 B BOX, ACCESSORY

BELOW DECK KIT, MXP

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV D
COMMON 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
134563-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138342-1 B2 GENERAL ASS'Y, 6012-33

2 1 EA 133659-1 D RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 76 IN, WHIT
3 1 EA 134442-4 A SSPB, KU, CODAN LBUC, 8W NI, 48VDC, 6
4 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N
5 1 EA 134725-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP (NOT SHOWN) ,
6 1 EA 134563-1 D BELOW DECK KIT, MXP (NOT SHOWN) ,
7 1 EA 130929-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, FEED (NOT SHOWN) ,
8 1 EA 137387-1 A CUSTOMER DOC PACKET, SERIES 12 KU-BAN (NOT SHOWN) ,
9 1 EA 124766-1 B DECAL KIT, 66-81 IN RADOME, SEA TEL (NOT SHOWN) ,
10 1 EA 121711 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, BASIC, MEDIUM SYS (NOT SHOWN) ,

SYSTEM, 6012-33, LIN, 8W, QUAD, 76 IN

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C1
XX12 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138339-601
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138342-1 A GENERAL ASS'Y, 6012-33

2 1 EA 130307-1 A2 RADOME ASS'Y, 81 IN, TUNED, WHITE
3 1 EA 134442-11 A SSPB, KU, CODAN LBUC, 16W NI, 48VDC,
4 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N
5 1 EA 134725-1 E ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP (NOT SHOWN) ,
6 1 EA 134563-1 B BELOW DECK KIT, 4012GX (MXP) (NOT SHOWN) ,
7 1 EA 130929-1 A4 BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, FEED (NOT SHOWN) ,
8 1 EA 137387-1 A CUSTOMER DOC PACKET, SERIES 12 KU-BAN (NOT SHOWN) ,
9 1 EA 124766-1 B DECAL KIT, 66-81 IN RADOME, SEA TEL (NOT SHOWN) ,
10 1 EA 121711 A1 BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, BASIC, MEDIUM SYS (NOT SHOWN) ,
11 1 EA 130290-1 B1 SHIP STOWAGE KIT, XX09 (NOT SHOWN) ,
12 1 EA 130291-1 C RADOME BASE ASS'Y, 80.8 STEEL, W/ AC
13 1 EA 123494-2 C AIR CONDITIONER, R417A, 220VAC, DUAL
14 1 EA 134070-1 A FIELD INSTALLATION KIT, AC BUCK TRANS

SYSTEM, 6012-33, LIN, 16W EXT NI, QUAD, 81 IN, AC, TXFMR
PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A3
XX12 2/20/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138339-610
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10147 11-28-12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1 K.D.H.
A1 N/A 11-30-12 ANTENNA SCHEMATIC REF DOC WAS 138204 K.D.H.
A2 N/A 1-20-13 REMOVE "76 INCH RADOME" FROM TITLE; FILL IN WEIGHT TABLE; SCHEMATIC WAS 138341 K.D.H.
A3 N/A 1-24-13 ADD -610 K.D.H.
B 9979 02-26-13 REMOVE ITEM 11, 130290-1 FROM -601, -606 AND -607. SL
C 10394 3-12-13 DASH 601 & 607, ITEM 2 WAS 130028-1 K.D.H.
D C1 N/A 09/18/13 ADDED DASH 611. KRB D

DASH POL WATT RF MFR LNB OTHER

-601 LIN 8W CODAN QUAD 76 IN DOME
-606 LIN 8W CODAN QUAD 81 IN DOME, AC RDY
4
-607 LIN 16W CODAN QUAD 76 IN DOME
C C
-610 LIN 16W CODAN QUAD 81 IN, AC, TXFMR
-611 LIN 16W CODAN QUAD 81 IN, AC RDY

1 SYSTEM WEIGHTS 2
DASH GA RADOME BASE FRAME AC KIT SYSTEM TOTAL
-601 276 200 N/A -N/A 476
-606 276 N/A N/A
-607 276 200 N/A N/A 476

REFERENCE DRAWINGS:
B 138204 ANTENNA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC B

138203 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

137389 PEDESTAL SCHEMATIC

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL STANDARD 122298.
2 RECORDED WEIGHTS ARE THE ACTUAL MEASURED
WEIGHTS OF SYSTEM AS ORDERED. FOR SYSTEM
LIFTING AND MOUNTING CUSTOMER SHALL FOLLOW
LOCAL SAFETY CODES
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H. K.D.H.
76 INCH DOME SHOWN WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 10-3-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 SYSTEM, 6012-33
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:10 138339 C1
6012-33 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138342-1 B2 GENERAL ASS'Y, 6012-33

2 1 EA 127625-4 A5 ANTENNA INSTALLATION ASS'Y, 6009
4 1 EA 128043-3 J FEED ASS'Y, 6009, KU-BAND
5 2 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N
6 1 EA 134442-X (REF ONLY) SSPB, KU, CODAN LBUC, NI,
20 1 EA 132956-1 F CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX ASS'Y, 6 AMP
21 1 EA 134735-1 G ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU
22 1 EA 131227-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MOTOR DRIVER, 09G2
23 1 EA 121951-3 G MOTOR, SZ 23, BLDC, 2 STK W/ ENCODER,
24 2 EA 125644-1 J1 MOTOR, SIZE 23, BLDC W/ BRAKE, 15 PIN
26 1 EA 131381-1 H GPS ANTENNA, SERIAL, 118 INCH
27 1 EA 129543-24 C KIT, CABLE ASS'Y AND PROXIMITY SENSOR
28 1 EA 131355-3 C4 POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, 300W / 48V, CABL
31 1 EA 129526-84 D HARNESS ASS'Y, PCU TO MOTOR DRIVER, X
32 1 EA 129527-36 B HARNESS ASS'Y, MOTOR TO ELEVATION, 36
33 1 EA 131493-1 A2 HARNESS ASS'Y, REFLECTOR, G2, XX09/XX
34 1 EA 129741-84 D HARNESS ASS'Y, 400MHZ MODEM TO CODAN
40 1 EA 129254-3 B2 POWER RING, 20A, 3 CIRCUITS, WITH CON
41 1 EA 138428-36 A POWER CORD, IEC-60320-C14 TO DUAL IE
42 1 EA 135832-84C B CABLE ASS'Y, AC POWER, SHIELDED, IEC
44 1 EA 128536-84 B CABLE ASS'Y, 48VDC TO CODAN SSPB, 84
51 2 EA 114972-4 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 30 IN
52 1 EA 114972-2 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 72 IN
53 1 EA 123758-7 B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 7 FT
55 1 EA 123758-6ORG B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 6 FT
56 1 EA 123758-6YEL B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 6 FT
60 2 EA 115492-1 C8 ADAPTER, N(F)-SMA(F), W/FLANGE
61 1 EA 116466 G ROTARY JOINT, 4.5 GHz, DUAL COAX.

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 6012-33

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C
LIT 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 2 NUMBER
138203-2
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

70 1 EA 128059 B1 FILTER, TX REJECT, WR-75, 13.75-14.5

71 1 EA 126144-1 D1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 180 DEG E-BEND
80 1 EA 127280-2 A2 WAVEGUIDE FILTER, KU-BAND, RX/REJECT,
81 1 EA 128534-3 B WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, H-BEND W/ FULL FLEX
82 1 EA 110172-24 G1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 90 DEG E-BEND, 3.86
83 1 EA 125157-1 B DIPLEXER, DPX75K-C02-A, WR-75
84 1 EA 128716-1 A1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, KU BAND, 4006RZA
85 1 EA 128290-1 A1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 180 DEG H-BEND W/BR
86 1 EA 115477-6 C WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, ROTARY JOINT, L-STY
100 1 EA 134725-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP
101 1 EA 134563-1 D BELOW DECK KIT, MXP
103 1 EA 111115-6 C CABLE ASS'Y, F(M)-F(M), 6 FT.
104 1 EA 111079-6 H CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M), 6 FT.
105 2 EA 119479-10 C CABLE ASS'Y, CAT5 JUMPER, 10 FT.
106 1 EA 119478-5 E CABLE ASS'Y, RJ-45 SERIAL, 60 IN.
108 1 EA 133287-2 B CABLE ASS'Y, USB 2.0, 6FT, A/M TO MIN
109 1 EA 138691-1 A CABLE ASS'Y, RJ45 TO DB9F, CISCO CONS
110 1 EA 120643-25 C CABLE ASS'Y, RS232, 9-WIRE, STRAIGHT,
120 1 EA 116700-6 G CABLE ASS'Y, RG223, N(M)-F(M), 6 FT.
121 2 EA 110567-19 D ADAPTER, N(F)-N(F), STRAIGHT, FLANGE
126 1 EA 135689-6 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK,
127 1 EA 135689-10 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK,
128 1 EA 136897 C CONNECTOR, DE9 (F) - TERM. BLOCK

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 6012-33

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV C
LIT 11/8/2013 SHT 2 OF 2 NUMBER
138203-2
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138344-1 A1 PEDESTAL ASS'Y, 6012

2 1 EA 138343-1 A1 ELECT. EQ FRAME ASS'Y, 6012-33
3 1 EA 127625-4 A5 ANTENNA INSTALLATION ASS'Y, 6009
4 1 EA 130396-1 A2 WAVEGUIDE ASS'Y, 60XX-33
5 1 EA 135696-1 C CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX, KIT, 6A
9 1 EA 130294-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, AZ, 6009
10 1 EA 138348-1 A BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, 6012-33
11 1 EA 121655-4 J1 LABELS INSTALLATION, XX09 (NOT SHOWN) ,
12 12 IN 130043-12 A TAPE, PIPE THREAD SEALANT, 1/2 IN WID
15 1 EA 131645-1 B INSTALL ASS'Y, GPS, NAVMAN, XX09/XX10
30 2 EA 115998-2 J6 STRAP, RIGID WAVEGUIDE, KU-BAND
31 1 EA 130808-1 A BRACKET, WAVEGUIDE SUPPORT, XX09
34 1 EA 118294-6 A3 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, M4
35 1 EA 118294-19 A1 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, 6-32,
50 6 EA 114593-164 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 10-32 x 1/2, S.S.
57 6 EA 119952-011 A1 WASHER, STAR, INTERNAL TOOTH, #10, S.
58 8 EA 114580-011 WASHER, FLAT, #10, S.S.
59 4 EA 114583-011 A NUT, HEX, 10-32, S.S.

GENERAL ASS'Y, 6012-33

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A
XX12 2/20/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138342-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
3
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10147 11-28-12 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1 K.D.H.
B 10138 3-13-13 REMOVE ITEMS 30, 31, 58 & 59; ITEM 50 WAS QTY 6; ITEM 57 WAS QTY 6; ADD NOTE 5 K.D.H.
B1 10569 06-18-13 ADD SHEET 2 TO SHOW GAGE 132605 AND ADD NOTE 6 SL
B2 10106 07-11-13 ITEM 11 WAS 121655-4 SL

D D

15

C C
3 12 35
4

1 REFERENCE DRAWINGS:
138204 ANTENNA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
10 138203 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
D 137389 PEDESTAL SCHEMATIC

2X DETAIL D 34 NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL SPEC. 122298.
5 DETAIL B 2 SET 20 MM GAP AS SHOWN BETWEEN YOKE BOTTOM
AND PEDESTAL FRAME. TO ACHIEVE THIS GAP
B USE SHOWN NUT SET TO MOVE YOKE UP OR DOWN. B
3 AFTER COMPLETION OF NOTE 2 INSTALL ADAPTERS
9 AND CHECK VALVES (METER SIDE IN, READ ON VALVES)
PROVIDED WITH PEDESTAL USING ITEM 12 ON EACH
PIECE (ADAPTERS AND CHECK VALVES). WRAP 2-3 TIMES
AROUND EXTERNAL THREADS FOR PROPER SEAL.
MUST NOT USE LOCTITE FOR THESE PARTS.
4X 5 4 AFTER ADJUSTING GAP PER NOTE 2 SECURE LOWER
JAM NUT WITH LOCTITE 222.
20±1MM 5 LOCTITE & TORQUE INDICATED HARDWARE.
6 VERIFY CLEARANCE BETWEEN REFLECTOR AND AZ WIGHTS WITH
GAGE 132605, WITH VERTICAL ISOLATION FULLY COMPRESSED.
GAGE MUST BE MOVING FREELY, SEE DETAIL “E”.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H. K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
2 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
264.602 LBS 10-2-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 GENERAL ASS'Y,
2X 50 57 X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A 6012-33
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

4 Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior

DETAIL A Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:9 138342 B2
6012-33 1 OF 2
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

C C

B B

6 DETAIL "E"

A A

SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

B 1:9 138342 B2
SHEET NUMBER 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 123861 B MOUNTING PLATE

2 2 EA 126288-17 B UNISTRUT, 1-5/8 H-CHANNEL, 17 IN, AL
3 2 EA 124716 B RF INTERFACE, BAR, CODAN, BUC
4 4 EA 118328-4 D STANDOFF, RND, F/F, 1/4-20 X .5 OD X
10 4 EA 114592-544 STUD, FULLY THREADED, 1/4-20 x 1-1/4,
11 4 EA 114592-540 STUD, FULLY THREADED, 1/4-20 x 3/4, S
21 8 EA 126279-3 A4 NUT, 1 5/8 UNISTRUT, 1/4-20, W/SPRING
50 4 EA 114586-538 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1, S.S.
51 4 EA 114586-540 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1-1/4, S.S.
56 4 EA 114580-027 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, SMALL PATTERN, S.S
57 4 EA 114581-029 WASHER, LOCK, 1/4, S.S
58 12 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
59 8 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.

MOUNTING ASS'Y, CODAN LBUC, 6009-23/33

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A1
COMMON 11/30/2012 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
130387-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 123861 B MOUNTING PLATE

2 2 EA 126288-17 B UNISTRUT, 1-5/8 H-CHANNEL, 17 IN, AL
3 1 EA 134735-1 E2 ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU
4 1 EA 131355-3 C3 POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, 300W / 48V, CABL
5 1 EA 131374-1 A WEIGHT, COUNTER, 1-1/2 X 3/4 X 17
10 4 EA 124588-1021 A STANDOFF, HEX, F/F, 1/4-20 X .50 OD X
11 4 EA 131572-5321 A STANDOFF, HEX, M/F, M4 X 14, BRASS W/
14 8 EA 126279-3 A4 NUT, 1 5/8 UNISTRUT, 1/4-20, W/SPRING
50 4 EA 114593-202 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 1/4-20 x 3/8, S.S.
51 4 EA 114586-536 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 5/8, S.S.
52 4 EA 114586-538 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1, S.S.
53 2 EA 114586-541 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1-1/2, S.S.
57 4 EA 114580-027 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, SMALL PATTERN, S.S
58 12 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
59 2 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.
60 4 EA 119973-117 SCREW, SOCKET HD, M4 X 12, S.S.
68 4 EA 114580-230 WASHER, FLAT, M4, S.S.

ICU/PSU MOUNTING ASS'Y, 300W/48V, 6012

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A
COMMON 2/20/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138658-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10147 11-28-12 NEW DRAWING, NO PRIOR REV K.D.H.

58 51 4X
4X 14
D D

2X 2

4X 14
4X 11

C
1 4 C

10 4X

53 58 2X

3 60 68 4X
5
B B

2 50 57 4X

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

58 59 2X 1. MANUFACTURE PER SEA TEL SPEC 122298.
2 MUST USE LOCTITE 242.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H. K.D.H.
52 58 4X WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 24.0 LBS 11-28-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 ICU/PWR SUPPLY MTG
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A ASS'Y, 300W/48V, 6012
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 138658 A
6012-33 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 128652-1 A2 RADOME TOP FAB, 76 IN, WHITE

2 1 EA 130395-1 A3 RADOME BASE ASS'Y, 76 IN, WHITE
3 1 EA 130390-2 B KIT, HARDWARE, GA TO RADOME, RAISED
4 1 EA 130394-2 D KIT, HARDWARE, RADOME TO MAST, 12-HOL
5 4 EA 119801-012 B CABLE TIE, NYLON, 4 IN, NATURAL (NOT SHOWN) ,
6 7 EA 119801-019 B CABLE TIE, NYLON, 7.5 IN, NATURAL (NOT SHOWN) ,
7 1 OZ 125948-1 A ADHESIVE, HOT MELT, 3M SCOTCH-WELD 37 (NOT SHOWN) ,
8 2 EA 111679-7 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, .50 DIA, #8 MTG H
9 1 EA 111679-25 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, 3/4 DIA, #10 MTG
10 5 EA 124903-1 B3 STRAIN RELIEF ASS'Y (CABLE GLAND) (NOT SHOWN) ,
53 8 EA 119745-218 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, M4 x 8
54 16 EA 114580-230 WASHER, FLAT, M4, S.S.
56 4 EA 114589-141 SCREW, HEX HD M6X35
57 8 EA 130371-170 A WASHER, NYLON, 6.4 ID, 12 OD
58 8 EA 120089-251 NUT, HEX, M6, S.S.
64 8 EA 125806-7 A ROTALOC HEX NUT, SS-1-B38-M4 X 07-6H
101 1 EA 131412 A CRATE, 76 IN RADOME, OD: 88 X 88 X 87
102 1 EA 131469-1 A1 SHIPPING KIT, ASS'Y

RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 76 IN, TX/RX, WHITE

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV E
COMMON 2/20/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
130028-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 6702 06-04-09 ITEM 2 WAS 125605-1, ITEM 3 WS 118576, ITEM 4 WS 123549-2. CHG HW PER RED LINES. REV WS X5. SL
B 6749 06-29-09 ADD SECTION B-B; ITEM 3 OF -1 & -2 WERE 130390-1 AND -3 & -4 WERE 118576 HT
B1 7075 2-24-10 DASH 1 ONLY, DOOR LATCHES WAS BLACK, CHANGED TO WHITE. K.D.H.
B2 N/A 05/07/10 ADDED DASH 5. KRB
C 7122 7-12-10 ALL DASH, ADD ITEM 10; ADD NOTES 4 & 5; UPDATE TITLE BLOCK. K.D.H.
D 9090 03/06/12 ITEM 10 WAS QTY 3. ITEM 2 WAS 125605 OF CORRESPONDING COLOR. ITEM 4 WAS 123549-2. MISC. HARDWARE CHANGES. KRB
D D

C C

B B

4X 56
PARTS OF THE FULL ASS'Y
4X 57 HARDWARE SHOWN ARE OMITTED FOR CLARITY
IS FOR TRANSIT ONLY. NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
REMOVE AND REPLACE
WITH KIT 130394-2 1. MANUFACTURE PER SEA TEL SPEC. 122298.
AT FINAL INSTALLATION. 2
2 BOW MARKER LOCATION DIRECTLY OPPOSITE
FROM ACCESS DOOR.
4X 57 3. BAG & ATTACH KIT (ITEM 4) AND STRAIN RELIEFS
TO INSIDE OF RADOME.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
4x 58 58 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. Simon L.
X.X = .050 WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
X.XX = .020 03-19-09 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A X.XXX = .005 MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
ANGLES: .5 N/A
DASH COLOR INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009
RADOME ASS'Y, GA
-1 WHITE This drawing and specifications are the property FINISH: APPROVED DATE:

-2 SNOW WHITE
of Cobham PLC. Neither this document, the
information, or the specifications disclosed shall
N/A INSTALL, 76 IN, TX/RX
be reproduced or transferred in whole or in part
DETAIL A -3
-4
US NAVY GREY
MATTERHORN WHITE for any purpose without the specific written SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV
SCALE 2 : 3 -5 BLACK, RAL 9005
authorization of Cobham PLC. This restriction
is applicable regardless of the source from which B 1:16 130028
the document is obtained. Any violation of this policy
D
is a violation of the Trade Secrets Act and subject
6006 1 OF 2
3rd ANGLE
FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER
to prosecution to the fullest extent of the law. PROJECTION

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SEE SECTION B-B PART OF G.A. PART OF

ITEM 3

D D

PART OF
Towards Hatch Door  (BOW) RADOME BASE
(AFT) SECTION B-B (4 PLS)
SCALE 1 : 4
ROTATE: 90 CW

53 2X

C 54 2X C
53 54 8 54 64

54 2X DETAIL C

64 2X

B B

SEE DETAIL D 53 3X

53 54 9 54 64 SEE DETAIL C 54 3X

54 3X

MOUNT INDICATED ITEMS IN 64 3X

A DETAIL D A
APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS AS SHOWN
(PARTIAL GENERAL ASSEMBLY BONDING FASTENER
SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY)
SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

B 1:10 130028 D
SHEET NUMBER 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 130306-1 A4 RADOME TOP FAB, 81 IN, TUNED, WHITE

2 1 EA 120881 A HARDWARE KIT, 80.8 INCH RADOME
3 3 EA 117762-1 B SILICONE ADHESIVE, WHT RTV 122, 10.1

RADOME TOP ASS'Y, 81 IN, TUNED, WHITE

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A3
COMMON 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
130307-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 119707-1 B BASE FRAME ASS'Y, 80.8 INCH, STEEL, 2

2 1 EA 135180-1 A RADOME BASE, 80.8 INCH, WHITE, A/C CU
3 1 EA 123729-2 H A/C INSTALL ASS'Y, EXTERNAL, 81" BASE
4 1 EA 120191-2 C4 RADOME PAN ACCESS ASS'Y, WHITE
5 3 EA 124903-1 B3 STRAIN RELIEF ASS'Y (CABLE GLAND)
6 1 EA 111679-25 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, 3/4 DIA, #10 MTG
7 3 EA 111679-23 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, 5/8 DIA, #10 MTG
8 1 EA 135171-1 A FIBER INTERFACE BOX, ADE, DUPLEX ST
9 3 EA 121226-7014 SPACER, #10 X .38 OD X .13, ALUM, ALO
10 1 EA 130524-1 A BRACKET, AC CONTROLLER
11 1 EA 135170-1 A CABLE EZENTRY KIT, ROXTECH
12 1 EA 122360-1 B1 CONN, CIR, C16 FEMALE , 3+PE, C016 20
13 1 EA 135586-50 A CABLE ASS'Y, AC PWR TO 48VDC PSU
14 1 EA 135467-3 A CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX ASS'Y, 16 AMP W/A
15 2 EA 114973-12 G CABLE ASS'Y, COAX, TYPE N, 12 IN.
16 4 EA 125806-7 A ROTALOC HEX NUT, SS-1-B38-M4 X 07-6H
41 3 EA 119745-216 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, M4 X 6, S.S.
42 1 EA 119745-118 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, M3 X 8, S S
48 4 EA 114580-230 WASHER, FLAT, M4, S.S.
51 2 EA 114588-833 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, 10-32 X 1, S.S.
54 1 EA 114588-831 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, 10-32 x 3/4, S.S
55 12 EA 114580-011 WASHER, FLAT, #10, S.S.
56 6 EA 114583-011 A NUT, HEX, 10-32, S.S.
57 6 EA 114622-546 SCREW, HEX HD, FULL THRD, 1/4-20 x 1-
58 12 EA 114625-107 WASHER, FENDER, 1/4, (1 IN OD), S.S.
59 6 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.
60 4 EA 114586-675 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/2-13 x 1-3/4, S.S.
61 8 EA 114580-033 WASHER, FLAT, 1/2, S.S.

RADOME BASE ASS'Y, 80.8 STEEL. W/AC & FIBER INTERFACE

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV B
COMMON 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 2 NUMBER
135164-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

62 4 EA 114583-033 NUT, HEX, 1/2-13, S.S.

63 3 EA 114588-832 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, 10-32 x 7/8, S.S
64 4 EA 117762-1 B SILICONE ADHESIVE, WHT RTV 122, 10.1 (NOT SHOWN) ,
101 1 EA 131413-2 A CRATE ASS'Y, 81" RADOME, W/AC OR AC R
102 1 EA 131414-2 A CRATE ASS'Y, 81" BASE FRAME, W/AC OR

RADOME BASE ASS'Y, 80.8 STEEL. W/AC & FIBER INTERFACE

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV B
COMMON 11/8/2013 SHT 2 OF 2 NUMBER
135164-1
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

1.0 Purpose. To define the installation procedure for installing strain reliefs in “smooth base”
radomes.
2.0 Scope. This installation procedure applies to fiberglass radomes having Sea Tel’s standard
four-hole mounting pattern, and M12 mounting hardware, in the 80-180 cm (34-66 in)
nominal size range, typically referred to as “smooth” base radomes. It also applies to our
larger 193 cm (76-inch) radome having a twelve-hole mounting pattern. It is to be used where
the preferred center cable exit may not be desired.
3.0 Tools/materials.
1. Electric drill.
2. Small drill bit 1/8” dia. (3-4mm dia.).
3. Hole saw, 1 3/8” dia. (35 mm), with mandrel and ¼” dia. pilot drill.
4. Medium file.
5. Two 1-1/2” (38 mm) adjustable pliers.
6. #2 Phillips screwdriver.
7. Fiberglass resin & catalyst, (marine grade) - at least 2 oz (50 cc).
Such as Tap Plastics Marine Vinyl Ester Resin with MEKP Catalyst.
Note: Use liquid resin, instead of paste type, due to better penetration.
8. Mixing cup – 4 oz (100 cc).
9. Disposable brush.
10. Strain Relief Assembly 124903-1, (one per cable).
4.0 Responsibilities. It is the responsibility of the installer to observe all standard safety
precautions, including eye, slip, and chemical protection when performing this procedure.
4.1 Procedure.
Remove the standard cable pass through assembly 130818-1*
* N/A for 193 cm (76-inch) nominal size radomes. Refer to Fig 1, then use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to remove 4 ea. attachment screws.
Use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to
remove 4 ea.
screws.

Fig. 1 – Cable pass-thru assembly

Document No
Page 1 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.2 Making the holes

PLANNING: Space has been allowed for
up to 5 ea. strain reliefs, but, install only A
as many as needed. (Typically only 2-3 B
for TX/RX systems). Refer to Fig 2 then
plan which hole positions to use. C
For 76-inch radomes lowest holes may
be approx 1.5 inches from inside wall
corner with floor (ref drawing 129416).
Note: The hole center-to-center distance
given is the MINIMUM.
E
Follow good engineering practice and
provide the largest spacing possible
between holes as follows: D
1 Hole pattern - "A".
2 Hole pattern - "B", "C".
3 Hole pattern - "A", "B", "C", ("A", "D", "E" PERMITTED). Fig. 2 – Planning
4 Hole pattern - "B", "C", "D", "E". Measure in place or use
5 Hole pattern - “A”, "B", "C", "D", "E". template drawing 132234

Fig. 3 – (Up to) 5-Hole Pattern

Document No
Page 2 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.3 Measure, mark and drill pilot holes

CAUTION: The hole locations cannot be determined accurately from outside of the radome.
Using full scale drawing 132234, provided in the strain relief kit, measure mark and drill pilot holes from
the inside out, and using only light pressure, use the small drill bit, (~1/8” dia) to make a pilot hole
through each planned location.
4.4 Use the hole saw from the outside with light pressure.
CAUTION: Using the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat.
CAUTION: Heavy pressure on the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat and
splinter the fiberglass.
Working from the outside, use a 1-3/8” hole saw to make the holes for the planned strain reliefs.
4.5 After holes are drilled CAREFULLY use a file to clean the hole edges.
4.6 Test fit the strain reliefs in each location, then, make adjustments as
necessary.
4.7 Sealing the hole edges.
CAUTION: Cut edges can allow water and/or ice ingress and weaken the fiberglass laminate or
structural foam. It is essential to seal all cut edges thoroughly with fiberglass resin to preserve the
radome’s structural strength.
CAUTION: Fiberglass paste or RTV silicone sealant will not wick into and seal the fiberglass strands as
well as fiberglass resin, ONLY use fiberglass resin (such as TAP PLASTICS MARINE VINYL ESTER,
or equivalent) for sealing the cut edges.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to mix a small amount of fiberglass resin and catalyst, then
working quickly, use a disposable brush to apply mixed fiberglass resin to the hole edges, both inside
and out.
Allow the fiberglass resin to set per resin manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Like all chemical reactions, set time will be temperature/humidity dependent.
4.8 Refer to strain relief assembly drawing 124903
Being careful not to damage either the radome or the strain relief threads, use adjustable pliers to install
strain reliefs.

Fig. 4 – Outside view.

Document No
Page 3 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

Fig. 5 – Outside view.

4.9 Rotate General Assembly (G.A.)

Once cables have been installed, rotate General Assembly (G.A.), to ensure cables are routed
properly and do not interfere with azimuth rotation.

Fig. 6 – Inside view.

5.0 Records. N/A.

6.0 Training. N/A

7.0 References.
Strain relief assembly drawing (P/N: 124903)
Template drawing (P/N 132234)

Document No
Page 4 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

8.0 Strain relief positioning for 80-180 cm (34-66 in) smooth based radomes,
(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 5 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

9.0 Strain relief positioning for 193 cm (76-inch) radomes.

(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 6 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138633-4 B BDE CABLE KIT, 4012GX (MXP)

2 1 EA 136872 A1 BRACKET ASS'Y, CONNECTOR, RACK MOUNT
3 1 EA 139410 B BOX, ACCESSORY

BELOW DECK KIT, MXP

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV D
COMMON 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
134563-1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138875-1 B2 GENERAL ASS'Y, 6012-44

2 1 EA 133659-1 D RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 76 IN, WHIT
3 1 EA 131582-1 A5 SSPA, KU-BAND, COMTECH, LPOD, PS1-20K
4 1 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N
5 1 EA 134725-1 H ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP (NOT SHOWN) ,
6 1 EA 134563-1 D BELOW DECK KIT, MXP (NOT SHOWN) ,
7 1 EA 130929-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, FEED (NOT SHOWN) ,
8 1 EA 137387-1 A CUSTOMER DOC PACKET, SERIES 12 KU-BAN (NOT SHOWN) ,
9 1 EA 124766-1 B DECAL KIT, 66-81 IN RADOME, SEA TEL (NOT SHOWN) ,
10 1 EA 121711 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, BASIC, MEDIUM SYS (NOT SHOWN) ,

SYSTEM, 6012-44, LIN, 16W, QUAD, 76 IN

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A1
XX12 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138872-601
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10394 3-1-13 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1 K.D.H.
A1 N/A 6-11-13 ADD -607 K.D.H.

D D

C 3 DASH POL WATT RF MFR LNB OTHER C

-601 LIN 16W COMTECH QUAD

-606 LIN 50W COMTECH QUAD
-607 LIN --- ------- --- NO RF, NO LNB

1 SYSTEM WEIGHTS 2
DASH GA RADOME BASE FRAME AC KIT SYSTEM TOTAL
-601 296 200 - - 496
-606 296 200 - - 496
-607 - 200 - - -

REFERENCE DRAWINGS:
B 138661 ANTENNA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC B

138660 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

137389 PEDESTAL SCHEMATIC

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL STANDARD 122298.
2. RECORDED WEIGHTS ARE THE ACTUAL MEASURED
WEIGHTS OF SYSTEM AS ORDERED. FOR SYSTEM
LIFTING AND MOUNTING CUSTOMER SHALL FOLLOW
LOCAL SAFETY CODES
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H. K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 12-28-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 SYSTEM, 6012-44,
4 X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A 76 INCH RADOME
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:10 138872 A1
6012-44 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138875-1 A GENERAL ASS'Y, 6012-44

2 1 EA 125650-4 F3 ANTENNA ASS'Y, 6009
4 1 EA 128043-3 H2 FEED ASS'Y, 6009, KU-BAND
5 1 EA 136128-2 B LNB, SMW, QUAD LO, KU BAND, TYPE N
6 1 EA 131582-5 A4 SSPA, KU-BAND, COMTECH, LPOD, PS1.5-6
21 1 EA 134735-1 E2 ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU
22 1 EA 131227-1 E ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MOTOR DRIVER, 09G2
23 1 EA 121951-3 F1 MOTOR, SZ 23, BLDC, 2 STK W/ ENCODER,
24 2 EA 125644-1 H2 MOTOR, SIZE 23, BLDC W/ BRAKE, 15 PIN
26 1 EA 131381-1 D GPS ANTENNA, SERIAL
27 1 EA 129543-24 C KIT, CABLE ASS'Y AND PROXIMITY SENSOR
31 1 EA 129526-84 D HARNESS ASS'Y, PCU TO MOTOR DRIVER, X
32 1 EA 129527-36 B HARNESS ASS'Y, MOTOR TO ELEVATION, 36
33 1 EA 131493-1 A2 HARNESS ASS'Y, REFLECTOR, G2, XX09/XX
34 1 EA 138932-96 X1 CABLE ASS'Y, ETHERNET M&C TO COMTECH
40 1 EA 132956-1 E CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX ASS'Y, 6 AMP
41 1 EA 129254-2 A3 POWER RING, 20A, 3 CIRCUITS, XX09
42 1 EA 138279-84 A CABLE ASS'Y, PED AC PWR TO H-BRIDGE S
43 1 EA 136947-1 A TEE-BRIDGE, AC PWR SPLITTER
44 1 EA 138879-48 A CABLE, AC PWR, M16 MALE TO C13 FEMALE
45 1 EA 134751-96 B CABLE ASS'Y, AC PWR TO LPOD, M16 (M)
51 2 EA 114972-4 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 30 IN
52 1 EA 114972-2 N1 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M) - SMA(M), 72 IN
53 1 EA 123758-7 B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 7 FT
55 1 EA 123758-6ORG B2 CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M) 90 DEG, 6 FT (X-POL) ,
60 2 EA 115492-1 C8 ADAPTER, N(F)-SMA(F), W/FLANGE
61 1 EA 116466 F1 ROTARY JOINT, 4.5 GHz, DUAL COAX.
71 1 EA 126144-1 D1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, 180 DEG E-BEND

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 6012-44

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A
LIT 3/15/2013 SHT 1 OF 2 NUMBER
138660-2
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

80 1 EA 128534-10 B WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, H-BEND W/ FULL FLEX

81 1 EA 115551-320 E4 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, EXTENSION, 2 IN, GR
82 1 EA 128716-1 A1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, KU BAND, 4006RZA
83 1 EA 115477-1 B1 WAVEGUIDE, WR-75, ROTARY JOINT, L-STY
100 1 EA 134725-1 E ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, MXP
101 1 EA 134563-1 B1 BELOW DECK KIT, 4012GX (MXP)
103 1 EA 111115-6 C CABLE ASS'Y, F(M)-F(M), 6 FT.
104 1 EA 111079-6 H CABLE ASS'Y, SMA(M)-N(M), 6 FT.
105 2 EA 119479-10 C CABLE ASS'Y, CAT5 JUMPER, 10 FT.
106 1 EA 119478-5 E CABLE ASS'Y, RJ-45 SERIAL, 60 IN.
108 1 EA 133287-2 B CABLE ASS'Y, USB 2.0, 6FT, A/M TO MIN
110 1 EA 120643-25 C CABLE ASS'Y, RS232, 9-WIRE, STRAIGHT,
120 1 EA 116700-6 G CABLE ASS'Y, RG223, N(M)-F(M), 6 FT.
121 2 EA 110567-19 D ADAPTER, N(F)-N(F), STRAIGHT, FLANGE
126 1 EA 135689-6 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK,
127 1 EA 135689-10 B CONN, PHOENIX, PLUGGABLE, TERM BLOCK,
128 1 EA 136897 B CONNECTOR, DE9 (F) - TERM. BLOCK

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 6012-44

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A
LIT 3/15/2013 SHT 2 OF 2 NUMBER
138660-2
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138344-3 C PEDESTAL ASS'Y, HD, SINGLE BRIDGE, 60

2 1 EA 138880-1 A ELECT EQ FRAME ASS'Y, 6012-44
3 1 EA 127625-4 A5 ANTENNA INSTALLATION ASS'Y, 6009
4 1 EA 131388-1 B1 WAVEGUIDE ASS'Y, 6009-44
5 1 EA 135696-1 C CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX, KIT, 6A
9 1 EA 130294-1 B BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, AZ, 6009
10 1 EA 138881-1 A BALANCE WEIGHT KIT, 6012-44
11 1 EA 121655-11 L LABELS INSTALLATION, 4012GX (NOT SHOWN) ,
12 12 IN 130043-12 A TAPE, PIPE THREAD SEALANT, 1/2 IN WID
15 1 EA 131645-1 B INSTALL ASS'Y, GPS, NAVMAN, XX09/XX10
34 1 EA 118294-12 B1 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, BLIND
35 1 EA 118294-19 A1 HARDWARE KIT, WR-75, UG FLANGE, 6-32,
50 2 EA 114593-164 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 10-32 x 1/2, S.S.
57 2 EA 119952-011 A1 WASHER, STAR, INTERNAL TOOTH, #10, S.

GENERAL ASS'Y, 6012-44

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV B2
XX12 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
138875-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
3
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10394 2-28-13 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, WAS X1 K.D.H.
B 10138 3-13-13 REMOVE ITEMS 30, 31, 58 & 59; ITEM 50 WAS QTY 6; ITEM 57 WAS QTY 6; ADD NOTE 5 K.D.H.
B1 10569 06-24-13 ADD PICTURE TO SHOW GAGE 132605 AND ADD NOTE 6 SL
B2 10106 07-11-13 ITEM 11 WAS 121655-4 SL

D D

15

4
DASH DESCRIPTION
C C
3 12 -1 STD
35 -2 50W
REFERENCE DRAWINGS:
138873 ANTENNA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
1 138874 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
10 137389 PEDESTAL SCHEMATIC

NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

2X DETAIL D
34 1. MANUFACTURE PER SEATEL SPEC. 122298.

5 DETAIL B 2 SET 20 MM GAP AS SHOWN BETWEEN YOKE BOTTOM

AND PEDESTAL FRAME. TO ACHIEVE THIS GAP
B USE SHOWN NUT SET TO MOVE YOKE UP OR DOWN. B

-1 SHOWN 9 3 AFTER COMPLETION OF NOTE 2 INSTALL ADAPTERS

AND CHECK VALVES (METER SIDE IN, READ ON VALVES)
PROVIDED WITH PEDESTAL USING ITEM 12 ON EACH
PIECE (ADAPTERS AND CHECK VALVES). WRAP 2-3 TIMES
AROUND EXTERNAL THREADS FOR PROPER SEAL.
MUST NOT USE LOCTITE FOR THESE PARTS.
4 AFTER ADJUSTING GAP PER NOTE 2 SECURE LOWER
JAM NUT WITH LOCTITE 222.
20±1MM 5 LOCTITE & TORQUE INDICATED HARDWARE.

6 VERIFY CLEARANCE BETWEEN REFLECTOR AND AZ WIGHTS WITH

GAGE 132605, WITH VERTICAL ISOLATION FULLY COMPRESSED.
4X 5 GAGE MUST BE MOVING FREELY, SEE DETAIL “E”.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H. K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
2 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
273.789 LBS 12-28-12 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 GENERAL ASS'Y,
X.XXX = .005
2X 50 57 ANGLES: .5
FINISH:
N/A
APPROVED DATE:
6012-44
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

4 DETAIL A Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior

Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:9 138875 B2
6012-44 1 OF 3
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

C C

4X 5

B B

DETAIL "E" 6

A A

-2 SHOWN
SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

B 1:7 138875 B2
SHEET NUMBER 2 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

C C

B B

A A

SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

B 1:9 138875 B2
SHEET NUMBER 3 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 123861 B MOUNTING PLATE

2 2 EA 126288-17 B UNISTRUT, 1-5/8 H-CHANNEL, 17 IN, AL
3 1 EA 134735-1 E2 ENCLOSURE ASS'Y, ICU
4 1 EA 138883-1 A MOUNTING ASS'Y, TEE-BRIDGE PWR SPLITT
5 2 EA 131374-2 A WEIGHT, COUNTER, 1-1/2 X 1-1/2 X 17
14 8 EA 126279-3 A4 NUT, 1 5/8 UNISTRUT, 1/4-20, W/SPRING
50 2 EA 114593-209 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 1/4-20 x 1, S.S.
51 2 EA 114593-214 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 1/4-20 x 2-1/4, S.S
52 4 EA 114586-538 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1, S.S.
54 1 EA 114586-544 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 2-1/4, S.S.
58 14 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
59 5 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.

ICU MOUNTING ASS'Y, XX12 W/TEE BRIDGE

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV A
COMMON 3/15/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
139113-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 10394 2-28-13 NEW DRAWING, NO PRIOR REV K.D.H.

4X 14
D 3 D

2X 5 2X 2
58 59 5X

4X 14

4
C C

54 58

B B

2 51 58 2X
52 58 4X
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. MANUFACTURE PER SEA TEL SPEC 122298.
2 50 58 2X 2 MUST USE LOCTITE 242.
3 PART OF ITEM 4.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
K.D.H. K.D.H.
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 35.891 LBS 2-28-13 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 ICU MOUNTING ASS'Y,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A XX12 W/TEE BRIDGE
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:8 139113 A
6012-44 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 123861 B MOUNTING PLATE

2 2 EA 126288-17 B UNISTRUT, 1-5/8 H-CHANNEL, 17 IN, AL
3 2 EA 131581-1 B MOUNTING INTERFACE BAR, COMTECH LPOD
10 8 EA 126279-3 A4 NUT, 1 5/8 UNISTRUT, 1/4-20, W/SPRING
50 4 EA 114586-537 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 3/4, S.S.
51 4 EA 114586-538 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1, S.S.
52 4 EA 114586-540 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 1-1/4, S.S.
58 12 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
59 4 EA 114583-029 NUT, HEX, 1/4-20, S.S.

MOUNTING ASS'Y, COMTECH BUC, 6009-44

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV B
COMMON 3/15/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
131389-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
10 4X A 7177 04/08/10 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION. WAS REVISION X1. REPOSITIONED RAILS (ITEM 2). MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE CHANGES. KRB

A1 N/A 04/21/10 ADDED NOTE 3 TO DRAWING. KRB

D
2X 2 B 9974 11-06-12 UPDATE DRAWING VIEW TO REFLECT NEW ORIENTATION OF ITEM 3 SL
D

4X 10 3

C C

3 2X

1 4X 51 58

B B

50 58 4X
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. APPLY ADHESIVE PER SEATEL SPEC. 121730.
2. TORQUE THREADED FASTENERS PER
SEATEL SPEC. 122305.
52 58 59 4X 3 ORIENTATION OF LOAD CIRCULATOR ON
FACTORY BUILD OF BUC MAY VARY FROM
DRAWING.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
KRB
WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:

BUC SHOWN FOR

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 11/24/09 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A REFERENCE ONLY MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
X.X = .050 N/A
X.XX = .020 MOUNTING ASS'Y,
X.XXX = .005 FINISH: APPROVED DATE:
ANGLES: .5 N/A COMTECH LPOD BUC
INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009

SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

Sea Tel - Strictly Confidential & Proprietary.
Do Not Copy, Distribute or Disclose Without Prior
Written Approval From Sea Tel. B 1:6 131389 B
6009-44 1 OF 1
3rd ANGLE
Copyright c Sea Tel, Inc 2011 - Unpublished Work PROJECTION FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 128652-1 A2 RADOME TOP FAB, 76 IN, WHITE

2 1 EA 130395-1 A3 RADOME BASE ASS'Y, 76 IN, WHITE
3 1 EA 130390-2 B KIT, HARDWARE, GA TO RADOME, RAISED
4 1 EA 130394-2 D KIT, HARDWARE, RADOME TO MAST, 12-HOL
5 4 EA 119801-012 B CABLE TIE, NYLON, 4 IN, NATURAL (NOT SHOWN) ,
6 7 EA 119801-019 B CABLE TIE, NYLON, 7.5 IN, NATURAL (NOT SHOWN) ,
7 1 OZ 125948-1 A ADHESIVE, HOT MELT, 3M SCOTCH-WELD 37 (NOT SHOWN) ,
8 2 EA 111679-7 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, .50 DIA, #8 MTG H
9 1 EA 111679-25 B CABLE CLAMP, NYLON, 3/4 DIA, #10 MTG
10 5 EA 124903-1 B3 STRAIN RELIEF ASS'Y (CABLE GLAND) (NOT SHOWN) ,
53 8 EA 119745-218 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, M4 x 8
54 16 EA 114580-230 WASHER, FLAT, M4, S.S.
56 4 EA 114589-141 SCREW, HEX HD M6X35
57 8 EA 130371-170 A WASHER, NYLON, 6.4 ID, 12 OD
58 8 EA 120089-251 NUT, HEX, M6, S.S.
64 8 EA 125806-7 A ROTALOC HEX NUT, SS-1-B38-M4 X 07-6H
101 1 EA 131412 A CRATE, 76 IN RADOME, OD: 88 X 88 X 87
102 1 EA 131469-1 A1 SHIPPING KIT, ASS'Y

RADOME ASS'Y, GA INSTALL, 76 IN, TX/RX, WHITE

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV E
COMMON 3/15/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
130028-1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISION HISTORY
REV ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 6702 06-04-09 ITEM 2 WAS 125605-1, ITEM 3 WS 118576, ITEM 4 WS 123549-2. CHG HW PER RED LINES. REV WS X5. SL
B 6749 06-29-09 ADD SECTION B-B; ITEM 3 OF -1 & -2 WERE 130390-1 AND -3 & -4 WERE 118576 HT
B1 7075 2-24-10 DASH 1 ONLY, DOOR LATCHES WAS BLACK, CHANGED TO WHITE. K.D.H.
B2 N/A 05/07/10 ADDED DASH 5. KRB
C 7122 7-12-10 ALL DASH, ADD ITEM 10; ADD NOTES 4 & 5; UPDATE TITLE BLOCK. K.D.H.
D 9090 03/06/12 ITEM 10 WAS QTY 3. ITEM 2 WAS 125605 OF CORRESPONDING COLOR. ITEM 4 WAS 123549-2. MISC. HARDWARE CHANGES. KRB
D E 10251 12/26/12 ADDED PACKAGING (ITEMS 101 & 102). KRB D

C C

B B

4X 56
PARTS OF THE FULL ASS'Y
4X 57 HARDWARE SHOWN ARE OMITTED FOR CLARITY
IS FOR TRANSIT ONLY. NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
REMOVE AND REPLACE
WITH KIT 130394-2 1. MANUFACTURE PER SEA TEL SPEC. 122298.
AT FINAL INSTALLATION. 2
2 BOW MARKER LOCATION DIRECTLY OPPOSITE
FROM ACCESS DOOR.
4X 57 3. BAG & ATTACH KIT (ITEM 4) AND STRAIN RELIEFS
TO INSIDE OF RADOME.
DESIGNER/ENGINEER: DRAWN BY:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
4x 58 58 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. Simon L.
X.X = .050 WEIGHT: DRAWN DATE:
X.XX = .020 03-19-09 Tel. 925-798-7979 Fax. 925-798-7986
A X.XXX = .005 MATERIAL: APPROVED BY: TITLE: A
ANGLES: .5 N/A
DASH COLOR INTERPRET TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009
RADOME ASS'Y, GA
-1 WHITE This drawing and specifications are the property FINISH: APPROVED DATE:

-2 SNOW WHITE
of Cobham PLC. Neither this document, the
information, or the specifications disclosed shall
N/A INSTALL, 76 IN, TX/RX
be reproduced or transferred in whole or in part
DETAIL A -3
-4
US NAVY GREY
MATTERHORN WHITE for any purpose without the specific written SURFACE ROUGHNESS: SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV
SCALE 2 : 3 -5 BLACK, RAL 9005
authorization of Cobham PLC. This restriction
is applicable regardless of the source from which B 1:16 130028
the document is obtained. Any violation of this policy
E
is a violation of the Trade Secrets Act and subject
6006 1 OF 2
3rd ANGLE
FIRST USED: SHEET NUMBER
to prosecution to the fullest extent of the law. PROJECTION

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SEE SECTION B-B PART OF G.A. PART OF

ITEM 3

D D

PART OF
Towards Hatch Door  (BOW) RADOME BASE
(AFT) SECTION B-B (4 PLS)
SCALE 1 : 4
ROTATE: 90 CW

53 2X

C 54 2X C
53 54 8 54 64

54 2X DETAIL C

64 2X

B B

SEE DETAIL D 53 3X

53 54 9 54 64 SEE DETAIL C 54 3X

54 3X

MOUNT INDICATED ITEMS IN 64 3X

A DETAIL D A
APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS AS SHOWN
(PARTIAL GENERAL ASSEMBLY BONDING FASTENER
SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY)
SIZE SCALE: DRAWING NUMBER REV

B 1:10 130028 E
SHEET NUMBER 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

1.0 Purpose. To define the installation procedure for installing strain reliefs in “smooth base”
radomes.
2.0 Scope. This installation procedure applies to fiberglass radomes having Sea Tel’s standard
four-hole mounting pattern, and M12 mounting hardware, in the 80-180 cm (34-66 in)
nominal size range, typically referred to as “smooth” base radomes. It also applies to our
larger 193 cm (76-inch) radome having a twelve-hole mounting pattern. It is to be used where
the preferred center cable exit may not be desired.
3.0 Tools/materials.
1. Electric drill.
2. Small drill bit 1/8” dia. (3-4mm dia.).
3. Hole saw, 1 3/8” dia. (35 mm), with mandrel and ¼” dia. pilot drill.
4. Medium file.
5. Two 1-1/2” (38 mm) adjustable pliers.
6. #2 Phillips screwdriver.
7. Fiberglass resin & catalyst, (marine grade) - at least 2 oz (50 cc).
Such as Tap Plastics Marine Vinyl Ester Resin with MEKP Catalyst.
Note: Use liquid resin, instead of paste type, due to better penetration.
8. Mixing cup – 4 oz (100 cc).
9. Disposable brush.
10. Strain Relief Assembly 124903-1, (one per cable).
4.0 Responsibilities. It is the responsibility of the installer to observe all standard safety
precautions, including eye, slip, and chemical protection when performing this procedure.
4.1 Procedure.
Remove the standard cable pass through assembly 130818-1*
* N/A for 193 cm (76-inch) nominal size radomes. Refer to Fig 1, then use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to remove 4 ea. attachment screws.
Use #2 Phillips
screwdriver to
remove 4 ea.
screws.

Fig. 1 – Cable pass-thru assembly

Document No
Page 1 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.2 Making the holes

PLANNING: Space has been allowed for
up to 5 ea. strain reliefs, but, install only A
as many as needed. (Typically only 2-3 B
for TX/RX systems). Refer to Fig 2 then
plan which hole positions to use. C
For 76-inch radomes lowest holes may
be approx 1.5 inches from inside wall
corner with floor (ref drawing 129416).
Note: The hole center-to-center distance
given is the MINIMUM.
E
Follow good engineering practice and
provide the largest spacing possible
between holes as follows: D
1 Hole pattern - "A".
2 Hole pattern - "B", "C".
3 Hole pattern - "A", "B", "C", ("A", "D", "E" PERMITTED). Fig. 2 – Planning
4 Hole pattern - "B", "C", "D", "E". Measure in place or use
5 Hole pattern - “A”, "B", "C", "D", "E". template drawing 132234

Fig. 3 – (Up to) 5-Hole Pattern

Document No
Page 2 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

4.3 Measure, mark and drill pilot holes

CAUTION: The hole locations cannot be determined accurately from outside of the radome.
Using full scale drawing 132234, provided in the strain relief kit, measure mark and drill pilot holes from
the inside out, and using only light pressure, use the small drill bit, (~1/8” dia) to make a pilot hole
through each planned location.
4.4 Use the hole saw from the outside with light pressure.
CAUTION: Using the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat.
CAUTION: Heavy pressure on the hole saw from the inside is likely to damage the Gel Coat and
splinter the fiberglass.
Working from the outside, use a 1-3/8” hole saw to make the holes for the planned strain reliefs.
4.5 After holes are drilled CAREFULLY use a file to clean the hole edges.
4.6 Test fit the strain reliefs in each location, then, make adjustments as
necessary.
4.7 Sealing the hole edges.
CAUTION: Cut edges can allow water and/or ice ingress and weaken the fiberglass laminate or
structural foam. It is essential to seal all cut edges thoroughly with fiberglass resin to preserve the
radome’s structural strength.
CAUTION: Fiberglass paste or RTV silicone sealant will not wick into and seal the fiberglass strands as
well as fiberglass resin, ONLY use fiberglass resin (such as TAP PLASTICS MARINE VINYL ESTER,
or equivalent) for sealing the cut edges.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to mix a small amount of fiberglass resin and catalyst, then
working quickly, use a disposable brush to apply mixed fiberglass resin to the hole edges, both inside
and out.
Allow the fiberglass resin to set per resin manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Like all chemical reactions, set time will be temperature/humidity dependent.
4.8 Refer to strain relief assembly drawing 124903
Being careful not to damage either the radome or the strain relief threads, use adjustable pliers to install
strain reliefs.

Fig. 4 – Outside view.

Document No
Page 3 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

Fig. 5 – Outside view.

4.9 Rotate General Assembly (G.A.)

Once cables have been installed, rotate General Assembly (G.A.), to ensure cables are routed
properly and do not interfere with azimuth rotation.

Fig. 6 – Inside view.

5.0 Records. N/A.

6.0 Training. N/A

7.0 References.
Strain relief assembly drawing (P/N: 124903)
Template drawing (P/N 132234)

Document No
Page 4 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

8.0 Strain relief positioning for 80-180 cm (34-66 in) smooth based radomes,
(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 5 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 Procedure, Radome Strain Relief Installation

9.0 Strain relief positioning for 193 cm (76-inch) radomes.

(May use Sea Tel drawing 132234 as template.)

Document No
Page 6 of 6
131226 Rev A
Form # 117140-B
 SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL

FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR

1 1 EA 138633-4 B BDE CABLE KIT, 4012GX (MXP)

2 1 EA 136872 A1 BRACKET ASS'Y, CONNECTOR, RACK MOUNT
3 1 EA 139410 B BOX, ACCESSORY

BELOW DECK KIT, MXP

PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING REV D
COMMON 11/8/2013 SHT 1 OF 1 NUMBER
134563-1
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Contents
APPROVAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 
REVISION HISTORY ...................................................................................................................................... 1 
1  COMMAND LINE TREE STRUCTURE ................................................................................................. 5 
2  COMMAND DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................. 41 
3  DETAILED COMMAND DESCRIPTION (SET/SHOW) ....................................................................... 41 
3.1.  INTERFACE ........................................................................................................................................ 41 
3.1.1.  network ................................................................................................................................... 41 
3.1.2.  baudrate ................................................................................................................................. 43 
3.1.3.  nmea_0183 ............................................................................................................................. 43 
3.1.4.  console ................................................................................................................................... 44 
3.1.5.  usb_port ................................................................................................................................. 44 
3.1.6.  gyro ......................................................................................................................................... 44 
3.1.7.  gps .......................................................................................................................................... 44 
3.1.8.  primary_reflector, secondary_reflector .............................................................................. 45 
3.1.9.  serial ....................................................................................................................................... 45 
3.1.10.  alarm ....................................................................................................................................... 46 
3.1.11.  buc .......................................................................................................................................... 46 
3.1.12.  modem .................................................................................................................................... 46 
3.1.13.  usb_port ................................................................................................................................. 46 
3.2.  ANTENNA ........................................................................................................................................... 47 
3.2.1.  name <default | value> .......................................................................................................... 47 
3.2.2.  model <default | value> ......................................................................................................... 47 
3.2.3.  az_target <default | value> ................................................................................................... 47 
3.2.4.  el_target <default | value> .................................................................................................... 47 
3.2.5.  cl_target <default | value> .................................................................................................... 47 
3.2.6.  linear_pol_target <default | value> ...................................................................................... 47 
3.2.7.  circular_pol_target <default | value> ................................................................................... 47 
3.2.8.  tracking <default | value> ..................................................................................................... 47 
3.2.9.  searching <default | value> .................................................................................................. 47 
3.3.  SATELLITE ......................................................................................................................................... 47 
3.3.1.  description <default | value> ................................................................................................ 47 
3.3.2.  lon <default | value> .............................................................................................................. 47 
3.3.3.  freq <default | value> ............................................................................................................ 47 
3.3.4.  skew <default | value> .......................................................................................................... 47 
3.3.5.  band <default | value> ........................................................................................................... 48 
3.3.6.  tx_pol <default | value> ......................................................................................................... 48 
3.3.7.  search_pattern <default | value> ......................................................................................... 48 
3.3.8.  reflector <default | value> ..................................................................................................... 48 
3.3.9.  lnb <default | value> .............................................................................................................. 48 
3.3.10.  Skew_db_flag <default |value> ............................................................................................ 48 
3.3.11.  Skew_database ...................................................................................................................... 48 
3.3.12.  threshold ................................................................................................................................ 48 
3.4.  SHIP .................................................................................................................................................. 48 

Document No
Page 2 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
3.4.1.  name <default | value> .......................................................................................................... 48 
3.4.2.  heading <default | value> ..................................................................................................... 48 
3.4.3.  lat <default | value> ............................................................................................................... 49 
3.4.4.  lon <default | value> .............................................................................................................. 49 
3.4.5.  sog <default | value> ............................................................................................................. 49 
3.4.6.  cog <default | value> ............................................................................................................. 49 
3.5.  SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................. 49 
3.5.1.  primary_reflector, secondary_reflector .............................................................................. 49 
3.5.2.  retarget ................................................................................................................................... 51 
3.5.3.  homeflag_trim <default | value> .......................................................................................... 51 
3.5.4.  satref <default | value> ......................................................................................................... 51 
3.5.5.  blockage_zone ....................................................................................................................... 51 
3.5.6.  profile <default | value> ........................................................................................................ 52 
3.5.7.  serial_number ........................................................................................................................ 52 
3.5.8.  auto_sat_load_search_fail <default | value> ...................................................................... 52 
3.5.9.  auto_sat_load_reset <default | value> ................................................................................ 52 
3.5.10.  step_res <default | value> .................................................................................................... 52 
3.5.11.  balance_mode <default | value> .......................................................................................... 52 
3.5.12.  ref_limit ................................................................................................................................... 52 
3.5.13.  motor_gain ............................................................................................................................. 52 
3.5.14.  drive_orientation ................................................................................................................... 53 
3.5.15.  slow_scan_mode <default | value> ..................................................................................... 53 
3.5.16.  slow_scan_vlim <default | value> ........................................................................................ 53 
3.5.17.  num_reflector <default | value> ........................................................................................... 53 
3.5.18.  receiver <default | value> ..................................................................................................... 53 
3.5.19.  tech_contact .......................................................................................................................... 53 
3.5.20.  date ......................................................................................................................................... 53 
3.5.21.  time ......................................................................................................................................... 54 
3.5.22.  calibrate_motion .................................................................................................................... 54 
3.5.23.  lock ......................................................................................................................................... 54 
3.5.24.  lock_resume_time ................................................................................................................. 54 
3.5.25.  tilt_mode................................................................................................................................. 54 
3.5.26.  slew_limit_mode .................................................................................................................... 54 
3.6.  SATELLITE_FAV .................................................................................................................................. 54 
3.6.1.  new .......................................................................................................................................... 54 
3.6.2.  0 - 499 ..................................................................................................................................... 54 
3.7.  STATUS ............................................................................................................................................. 54 
3.7.2.  satellite ................................................................................................................................... 54 
3.7.3.  antenna ................................................................................................................................... 55 
3.7.4.  system .................................................................................................................................... 56 
3.8.  ERROR .............................................................................................................................................. 56 
3.8.1.  messages ............................................................................................................................... 56 
3.8.2.  clear ........................................................................................................................................ 56 
3.8.3.  all ............................................................................................................................................. 56 
4  SAVE .................................................................................................................................................... 56 

Document No
Page 3 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
4.1.  DEALER_CONFIG ................................................................................................................................ 56 

5  RESTORE ............................................................................................................................................ 56 

5.1.  DEALER_CONFIG ................................................................................................................................ 57 
5.2.  FACTORY ........................................................................................................................................... 57 

6  TEST..................................................................................................................................................... 57 
6.1.  LIST................................................................................................................................................... 57 
6.2.  START ............................................................................................................................................... 57 
7  PRE-CONDITION ................................................................................................................................. 57 
8  POST-CONDITION .............................................................................................................................. 57 
9  LOGIN .................................................................................................................................................. 57 
10  CONTROL CHARACTER .................................................................................................................... 58 
11  PLANNED FEATURES ........................................................................................................................ 58 
12  LEGACY M&C AND MODEM COMMANDS ....................................................................................... 59 
13  PROFILE NUMBER TABLE ................................................................................................................ 62 
14  ERROR TABLE.................................................................................................................................... 63 

Document No
Page 4 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
1 Command Line Tree Structure
interface see page 5

antenna see page 12

satellite see page 16

set ship see page 17

system see page 18

satellite_fav see page 25

error see page 25

all

interface see page 26

antenna see page 33

satellite see page 34

show ship see page 34

save system see page 35

satellite_fav see page 39

>
error see page 39

status see page 40

dealer_config
restore
factory
help

reboot
list
test oost
start
ist

serial reboot

upgrade system usb reboot

all network reboot

version name

number

mxp

icu

ping gateway

dns

quit | exit
<Hostname/IP> <retry> <timeout_ms>

Legend:
Normal
End of command
Information
End of command with “default”
Not supported
[*]
Pre-Condition
[†]
Post-Condition

Document No
Page 5 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  Interface (1 of 9)

ip v4 <value>

netmask v4 <value>

gateway v4 <value>

dns v4 <value>

mac

tcp:0 see page 31
network
tcp:1 see page 31

tcp:2 see page 31

tcp:3 see page 32

udp see page 32

web see page 32
set interface

secure_web see page 32

rf_m&c [4800 .. 115200]

passthrough [4800 .. 115200]

aux232 [4800 .. 115200]

baudrate obm_modem [4800 .. 115200]

mxp
nmea_0183 [4800 .. 115200]

console [4800 .. 115200]

icu console [4800 .. 115200]

Document No
Page 6 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  Interface (2 of 9)
off

gga

gll

hdd

1 hdg

hdm

hdt

rmc

vtg

off

gga

gll

hdd

2 hdg

hdm

hdt

rmc

vtg
message
off

gga

gll

hdd

3 hdg

hdm

hdt

rmc

vtg

off
set interface nmea_0183
gga

gll

hdd

4 hdg

hdm

hdt

rmc

vtg

1 1 ‐ 10

2 1 ‐ 10
interval
3 1 ‐ 10

4 1 ‐ 10

Document No
Page 7 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  Interface (3 of 9)
on
flow_ctrl
off
console
cli
mode
legacy

legacy
usb_port mode
cli

heading <value>

hdd

hdg
heading_id
hdm

hdt

no_gyro

fixed

set interface
gyro 360:1

90:1
type
36:1

1:1

sbs

nmea

nmea_0183

port aux232

console

internal

nmea_0183

gps port aux232

console

auto

Document No
Page 8 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  Interface (4 of 9)

rs232
serial rf_m&c
rs422

[error code 
contents
range]
alarm1
on
enable
off
alarm
[error code 
contents
range]
alarm2
on
enable
off
set interface
gain [0.0‐200.0]

buc high_freq [1400.0‐2000.0]

low_freq [700.0‐1300.0]

password <value>

modem username <value>

ip_v4 <value>

cli
usb_port mode
legacy

Document No
Page 9 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  Interface (5 of 9)

openamip

tms_1

tms_2
modem_io
modem_rj45

cli

roam

comtech

gilat

hughes

modem_type idirect

stm

viasat

custom

on
tms1_blockage_pup
off

3v

tms1_in_level 5v
set interface primary_reflector 12v

on
tms1_xmod_lock_pup
off

on
tms2_blockage_pup
off

3v

tms2_in_level 5v

12v

on
tms2_xmod_lock_pup
off

low_lock
xmod_lock_in_pol
hi_lock

on
xmod_lock[*]
off

low_block
blockage_out
hi_block

Document No
Page 10 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  Interface (6 of 9)

openamip

tms_1

tms_2
modem_io
modem_rj45

cli

roam

comtech

gilat

hughes

modem_type idirect

stm

viasat

custom

on
tms1_blockage_pup
off

3v

tms1_in_level 5v

set interface secondary_reflector 12v

on
tms1_xmod_lock_pup
off

on
tms2_blockage_pup
off

3v

tms2_in_level 5v

12v

on
tms2_xmod_lock_pup
off

low_lock
xmod_lock_in_pol
hi_lock

on
xmod_lock[*]
off

low_block
blockage_out
hi_block

Document No
Page 11 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  Interface (7 of 9)

port <value>

on
enable
off

set interface network tcp:0 on

secure[*]
off

legacy

mode[†] cli

openamip

port <value>

on
enable
off

set interface network tcp:1 on

secure[*]
off

legacy

mode[†] cli

openamip

Document No
Page 12 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  Interface (8 of 9)

port <value>

on
enable
off

set interface network tcp:2 on

secure[*]
off

legacy

mode[†] cli

openamip

port <value>

on
enable
off

set interface network tcp:3 on

secure[*]
off

legacy

mode[†] cli

openamip

Document No
Page 13 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  Interface (9 of 9)

port <value>
set interface network udp
on
enable
off

port <value>
set interface network web
on
enable[*]
off

port <value>

set interface network secure_web

on
enable[*]
off

Document No
Page 14 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification

name <value>

model <value>

az_target [0.0 .. 359.9]

el_target [0.0 .. 90.0]

cl_target [‐30.0 .. 30.0]

set antenna
linear_pol_target[*] [‐92.0 .. 182.0]

circular_pol_target[*] [‐92.0 .. 182.0]

on

tracking

off

on

searching

off

Document No
Page 15 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
description <value>

lon [0.0 ‐ 360.0] [E/W]

freq <value>

skew <value>

2
band
3

lhcp

rhcp
tx_pol
h

spiral
set satellite

search_pattern incline

sky_search

primary_reflector
reflector
secondary_reflector

xpol
lnb
copol

off
auto_mode
on

threshold
auto_offset 0 ‐ 300

value 0 ‐ 3000

on
skew_db_flag
off
skew_database

Document No
Page 16 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification

name <value>

lat [0.0 ‐ 90.0] [N/S]

lon [0.0 ‐ 360.0] [E/W]

set ship
heading <value>

sog <value>

cog <value>

Document No
Page 17 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  System (1 of 7)

auto_trim

auto_thresh

el [0.0 .. 90.0]

trim

az [0.0 .. 359.9]

el <value>

sensitivity

az <value>

linear_offset[*] [‐45.0 ‐ 45.0]

set system primary_reflector

auto

polang drive

manual

circular_offset[*] [‐45.0 ‐ 45.0]

on

auto

off

increment <value>

search
limit <value>

delay <value>

incline_limit <value>

Document No
Page 18 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  System (2 of 7)

on
mode
off

az_drive [0 ‐ 100]

dishscan
el_drive [0 ‐ 100]

cl_drive [0 ‐ 100]

set system primary_reflector

phase [‐90.0 ‐ 90.0]

band [1‐4] <value>

lnb lo
on
enabled[1‐4]
off

Document No
Page 19 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  System (3 of 7)

auto_trim

auto_thresh

el [0.0 .. 90.0]

trim

az [0.0 .. 359.9]

el <value>

sensitivity

az <value>

linear_offset[*] [‐45.0 ‐ 45.0]

set system secondary_reflector

auto

polang drive

manual

circular_offset[*] [‐45.0 ‐ 45.0]

on

auto

off

increment <value>

search
limit <value>

delay <value>

incline_limit <value>

Document No
Page 20 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  System (4 of 7)

on
mode
off

az_drive [0 ‐ 100]

dishscan
el_drive [0 ‐ 100]

cl_drive [0 ‐ 100]

set system secondary_reflector

phase [‐90.0 ‐ 90.0]

band [1‐4] <value>

lnb lo
on
enabled[1‐4]
off

Document No
Page 21 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  System (5 of 7)

retarget
on
satref
off

profile <value>

0.2

step_res 0.1

description <value>
0.05

az_start [0.0 .. 360.0]

set system blockage_zone zone [1..4]

az_end [0.0 .. 360.0]

el [0.0 .. 90.0]

az <value>

ref_limit cl <value>

el <value>
balance_mode

tech_contact

date [MM/DD/YYYY]

time [HH:MM:SS]

Document No
Page 22 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  System (6 of 7)

el [0 .. 500]

motor_gain cl [0 .. 500]

az [0 .. 500]

pos
el
neg

pos
drive_orientation cl
neg

pos
az
neg
off
slow_scan_mode
on
set system
slow_scan_vlim <value>

on
auto_sat_load_search_fail
off

on
auto_sat_load_reset
off

1
num_reflector
2

nbif

dvb
receiver
scpc

70MHz

Document No
Page 23 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Set  System (7 of 7)

on

calibrate_motion

off

line_loss

on

lock

off

lock_resume_time [0..180]
set system

on

tilt_mode

off

on

slew_limit_mode

off

Document No
Page 24 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification

set satellite_fav new

active
set satellite_fav:x
clear

on
messages
off
set error
all
error
[error number]

Document No
Page 25 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  Interface (1 of 7)

ip v4

netmask v4

gateway v4

dns v4

tcp:0 see page 31

tcp:1 see page 31
network
tcp:2 see page 31

tcp:3 see page 32

udp see page 32

web see page 32

show interface secure_web see page 32

mac

rf_m&c
aux232
passthrough
obm_modem
mxp
baudrate
nmea_0183

console

icu console

Document No
Page 26 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  Interface (2 of 7)

2
message
3

4
show interface nmea_0183
1

2
interval
3

flow_ctrl
console
mode

usb_port mode

heading
show interface
gyro heading_id

type

gps port

Document No
Page 27 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  Interface (3 of 7)

serial rf_m&c

contents
alarm1
enable
alarm
contents
alarm2
enable
gain

show interface
buc high_freq

low_freq

password

modem username

ip_v4

usb_port mode

Document No
Page 28 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  Interface (4 of 7)

modem_io

modem_type

tms1_blockage_
pup

tms1_in_level

tms1_xmod_lock
_pup

show interface tms2_blockage_

primary_reflector
pup

tms2_in_level

tms2_xmod_lock
_pup

xmod_lock_in_pol

xmod_lock[*]

blockage_out

Document No
Page 29 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  Interface (5 of 7)

modem_io

modem_type

tms1_blockage_
pup

tms1_in_level

tms1_xmod_lock
_pup

show interface tms2_blockage_

secondary_reflector
pup

tms2_in_level

tms2_xmod_lock
_pup

xmod_lock_in_pol

xmod_lock[*]

blockage_out

Document No
Page 30 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  Interface (6 of 7)

port

enable
show interface network tcp:0
secure

mode

port

enable
show interface network tcp:1
secure

mode

port

enable
show interface network tcp:2
secure

mode

Document No
Page 31 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  Interface (7 of 7)

port

enable
show interface network tcp:3
secure

mode

port
show interface network udp
enable

port
show interface network web
enable

port
show interface network secure_web
enable

Document No
Page 32 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification

name

model

az_target

el_target

show antenna cl_target

linear_pol_target

circular_pol_target

tracking

searching

Document No
Page 33 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
description

lon

freq

skew

band
show satellite
tx_pol

search_pattern

reflector

lnb auto_mode

threshold auto_offset

value

name

lat

lon
show ship
heading

cog

sog

Document No
Page 34 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  System (1 of 4)

el
trim
az

el
sensitivity
az

linear_offset

polang drive

circular_offset

mode

increment

show system primary_reflector search limit

delay

incline_limit

mode

az_drive

dishscan cl_drive

el_drive

phase

band [1‐4]
lnb lo
enabled[1‐4]

Document No
Page 35 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  System (2 of 4)

el
trim
az

el
sensitivity
az

linear_offset

polang drive

circular_offset

mode

increment

limit
show system secondary_reflector search
delay

scan_rate

incline_limit

mode

az_drive

dishscan cl_drive

el_drive

phase

band [1‐4]
lnb lo on
enabled[1‐4]
off

Document No
Page 36 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  System (3 of 4)

profile

serial_no
description

homeflag_trim
az_start

blockage_zone zone [1..4]

az_end

step_res
el

show system satref az

ref_limit cl

balance_mode el

tech_contact

date

time

Document No
Page 37 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Show  System (4 of 4)

el

motor_gain cl

az

el

drive_orientation cl

vlim_ratio az

show system slow_scan_mode

slow_scan_vlim

auto_sat_load_search_fail

auto_sat_load_reset

num_reflector

receiver

Document No
Page 38 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification

show parameter profile

show satellite_fav all

show satellite_fav:x

show error all

Document No
Page 39 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
all lat

ship lon

heading

lon

freq

skew

band

tx_pol

satellite

search_pattern

reflector

lnb

agc

show status threshold

az

el

cl

pol

rel

antenna

agc

initializing

tracking

targeting

searching

modem_lock

system tx_mute

search_delay_cnt

Document No
Page 40 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
2 Command Description
set Change active settings or parameters.
show Display/query active settings or parameters.
quit Close CLI Ethernet connection.
exit Close CLI Ethernet connection.
save Save parameters or settings to the flash (INI file).
help Display a description for proper command usage.
default all Reset the system to default settings.
reboot Reboot the system.
upgrade Upgrade firmware.
version Display unit name, software date and time of build, and version.
test Run automated tests programmed as part of the system.

3 Detailed Command Description (Set/Show)

Set command changes the active settings or parameters. Show command displays the active settings or
parameters.
3.1. interface
Stores all interface related settings of the system.
3.1.1.network
Stores all Ethernet related settings, such as IP address, gateway, and port information.
3.1.1.1 mac
Stores the MAC address of the system. Show only.
3.1.1.2 ip_addr
Stores the IP address of the system.
3.1.1.2.1 v4 <default | value>
This set/show the IPv4 address of the system. New IP will take effect after save and
reboot.
Range: (0-223).(0-255).(0-255).(0-255).
Default: 10.1.1.100
3.1.1.3 netmask
Stores the network mask of the system.
3.1.1.3.1 v4 <default | value>
This set/show the IPv4 network mask of the system. New netmask IP will take effect
after save and reboot.
Range: (0-223).(0-255).(0-255).(0-255).
Default: 255.255.255.0
3.1.1.4 gateway
Stores the gateway address of the system.
3.1.1.4.1 v4 <default | value>
This set/show the IPv4 gateway of the system. New gateway IP will take effect after
save and reboot.
Range: (0-223).(0-255).(0-255).(0-255).
Default: 10.1.1.1
3.1.1.5 dns
Stores the DNS (Domain Name System) server address in the network.
3.1.1.5.1 v4 <default | value>
This set/show the IPv4 DNS server in the network.
Range: (0-223).(0-255).(0-255).(0-255).
Default: 10.1.1.205

Document No
Page 41 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
3.1.1.6 udp
Stores the UDP port information.
3.1.1.6.1 port <default | value>
This set/show the UDP port number.
Range: 0-65535.
Default: 3000
3.1.1.6.2 enable <default | value>
Enable or disable the port.
Value: on, off.
Default: on.
3.1.1.7 web
Stores the Web port information.
3.1.1.7.1 port <default | value>
This set/show the Web port number.
Range: 0-65535.
Default: 80
3.1.1.7.2 enable <default | value>
Enable or disable the port.
Value: on, off.
Default: on.
3.1.1.8 secure_web
Stores the Secure Web port information.
3.1.1.8.1 port <default | value>
This set/show the Web port number.
Range: 0-65535.
Default: 443
3.1.1.8.2 enable <default | value>
Enable or disable the port.
Value: on, off.
Default: on.
3.1.1.9 tcp:0, tcp:1, tcp:2, tcp:3
These groups store the TCP port information.
3.1.1.9.1 port <default | value>
This set/show the port number.
Range: 0-65535.
Default:
tcp:0 = 2000
tcp:1 = 2001
tcp:2 = 2002
tcp:3 = 2003
3.1.1.9.2 enable <default | value>
Enable or disable the port.
Value: on, off.
Default: on.
3.1.1.9.3 mode <default | value>
This set/show the mode of the port.
Value: legacy, openamip, cli.
Default:
tcp:0 = legacy
tcp:1 = legacy
tcp:2 = openamip
tcp:3 = cli

Document No
Page 42 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
3.1.1.9.4 secure <default | value>
This set/show the secure mode of this interface. ON means access to this interface will
require proper credential (login). OFF means no credential required.
Value: on, off.
Default:
tcp:0 = off
tcp:1 = off
tcp:2 = off
tcp:3 = on
3.1.2.baudrate
Stores the baud rate for all serial ports.
3.1.2.1 rf_m&c <default | value>
This set/show the baud rate of rf_m&c serial port.
Range: 4800 – 115200 (bps).
Default: 9600 bps.
3.1.2.2 passthrough <default | value>
This set/show the baud rate of passthrough serial port.
Range: 4800 – 115200 (bps).
Default: 9600 bps.
3.1.2.3 mxp
This set/show the baud rate of MXP’s serial port.
3.1.2.3.1 aux232 <default | value>
This set/show the baud rate of Aux232 serial port.
Range: 4800 – 115200 (bps).
Default: 9600 bps.
3.1.2.3.2 obm_modem <default | value>
This set/show the baud rate of OBM_Modem serial port.
Range: 4800 – 115200 (bps).
Default: 4800 bps.
3.1.2.3.3 nmea_0183 <default | value>
This set/show the baud rate of NMEA 0183 port.
Range: 4800 – 115200 (bps).
Default: 4800 bps.
3.1.2.3.4 console <default | value>
This set/show the baud rate of console port.
Range: 4800 – 115200 (bps).
Default: 115200 bps.
3.1.2.4 icu
This set/show the baud rate of ICU’s serial port.
3.1.2.4.1 console <default | value>
This set/show the baud rate of console serial port.
Range: 4800 – 115200 (bps).
Default: 115200 bps.

3.1.3.nmea_0183
Stores NMEA 0183 settings.
3.1.3.1 message
Stores the GPS message the system sends/streams. Support up to four different settings
(defined by the index).
3.1.3.1.1 1, 2, 3, 4 <default | value>
This set/show the GPS message the system sends/streams for particular index.
Value: OFF, GGA, GLL, HDD, HDG, HDM, HDT, RMC, VTG.

Document No
Page 43 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Default:
1 = GLL
2 = GGA
3 = OFF
4 = OFF
3.1.3.2 interval
Stores the interval of the GPS message the system sends/streams. Support up to four different
settings (defined by the index).
3.1.3.2.1 1, 2, 3, 4 <default | value>
This set/show the interval of the GPS message the system sends/streams for particular
index.
Range: 1 - 10.
Default:
1=5
2=5
3=1
4=1
3.1.4.console
Stores console settings.
3.1.4.1 flow_ctrl <default | value>
This set/show the console’s hardware flow control (RTS/CTS).
Value: on, off.
Default: off.
3.1.4.2 mode <default | value>
This set/show the console’s mode.
Value: cli, legacy.
Default: cli.
3.1.5.usb_port
Stores USB port settings.
3.1.5.1 mode <default | value>
This set/show the USB port’s mode. In CLI mode it requires credential (login).
Value: legacy, cli.
Default: cli.
3.1.6.gyro
Stores gyro setting.
3.1.6.1 heading_id <default | value>
This set/show the NMEA 0183 heading ID the system listens to.
Value: HDD, HDG, HDM, HDT.
Default: HDT.
3.1.6.2 heading <default | value>
This set/show the fixed heading.
Value: 0.0 – 360.0
Default: 0.0
3.1.6.3 type <default | value>
This set/show gyro mode.
Value: no_gyro, fixed, 360:1, 90:1, 36:1, 1:1, sbs, nmea.
Default: fixed.
3.1.6.4 port <default | value>
This sets the input port for NMEA 0183 heading strings.
Values: nmea_0183, aux232, console
Default: nmea_0183
3.1.7.gps
Stores GPS setting.
3.1.7.1 port <default | value>
This set/show the GPS port, the system get the GPS info from.
Value: Internal, NMEA_0183, Aux232, Console, Auto

Document No
Page 44 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Default: Internal.
3.1.8. primary_reflector, secondary_reflector
Stores reflector-specific settings.

3.1.8.1 modem_io <default | value>

This set/show external modem IO type.
Value: modem_rj485, tms_1, tms_2, openamip, cli, roam
Default: modem_rj485.
3.1.8.2 xmod_lock_in_pol <default | value>
This set/show external modem lock input polarity for selected modem IO. Determines the
polarity (high or low) used by the external modem to indicate lock state.
Value: low_lock, hi_lock.
Default: low_lock.
3.1.8.3 blockage_output <default | value>
This set/show external modem lock input polarity for selected modem IO. Determines the
polarity (high or low) used by the external modem to indicate block state.
Value: low_block, hi_block.
Default: low_block.
3.1.8.4 xmod_lock <default | value>
This set/show external modem lock state. Determines whether the system listen to the lock
signal from external modem or not. For Tx/Rx system this option should be on because it is the
modem that identifies the satellite. For Rx only system this option should be off since it either
uses NID to identify the satellite (via DVB) or the signal-above-threshold.
Value: on, off.
Default: on.
3.1.8.5 modem_type
This sets the modem type.
Value: comtech, gilat, hughes, idirect, stm, viasat, custom
Default: idirect
3.1.8.6 tms1_blockage_pup
This enables or disables TMS1 blockage output 12V pull up.
Value: on, off
Default: Off
3.1.8.7 tms1_in_level
This sets TMS1 external modem lock input voltage level.
Value: 3v, 5v, 12v
Default: Off
3.1.8.8 tms1_xmod_lock_pup
This enables or disables TMS1 external modem lock input 12V pull up.
Value: on, off
Default: Off
3.1.8.9 tms2_blockage_pup
This enables or disables TMS2 blockage output 12V pull up.
Value: on, off
Default: Off
3.1.8.10 tms2_in_level
This sets TMS2 external modem lock input voltage level.
Value: 3v, 5v, 12v
Default: Off
3.1.8.11 tms2_xmod_lock_pup
This enables or disables TMS2 external modem lock input 12V pull up.
Value: on, off
Default: Off

3.1.9.serial
3.1.8.12 rf_m&c

Document No
Page 45 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
This sets the serial protocol to be used for the RF M&C port on ICU.
Value: rs422, rs232
Default: rs232

3.1.10. alarm
Stores dry alarm contact information.
3.1.10.1 alarm1
3.1.10.1.1 contents <default | value>
This sets the error codes for the dry alarm1 contact.
Value: System error codes.
Default: [ENTER ERROR CODES]
3.1.10.1.2 enable <default | value>
This enables or disables alarm1.
Value: On, Off
Default: Off
3.1.10.2 alarm2
3.1.10.2.1 contents <default | value>
This sets the error codes for the dry alarm2 contact.
Value: System error codes.
Default: [ENTER ERROR CODES]
3.1.10.1.2 enable <default | value>
This enables or disables alarm2.
Value: On, Off
Default: Off

3.1.11. buc
Stores information related to BUC
3.1.8.13 gain <default | value>
This sets the BUC gain
Value: 0 – 200
Default: 70
3.1.8.14 high_freq
This sets high frequency for the BUC
Range: 1400.0 to 2000.0(Mhz)
Default: 1500
3.1.8.15 low_freq
This sets low frequency for the BUC
Range: 700.0 to 1300.0(Mhz)
Default: 1280

3.1.12. modem
Sets the modem parameter
3.1.8.16 password <default | value>
Sets modem password.
Default: iDirect
3.1.8.17 username <default | value>
Sets the username for the modem.
Default: admin
3.1.8.18 ip_v4 <default | value>
Sets the ip address for the modem.
Default: 192.168.1.5

3.1.13. usb_port
Sets the mode for USB port, so that cli or legacy commands can be executed on this port.
Value: cli, legacy
Default: cli

Document No
Page 46 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification

3.2. antenna
Stores all antenna related settings of the system.
3.2.1.name <default | value>
This set/show antenna name. Support up to 32 characters.
Default: [Enter Description]
3.2.2.model <default | value>
This set/show antenna model. Support up to 32 characters.
Default: [Enter Model]
3.2.3.az_target <default | value>
This set/show Azimuth target, a position on azimuth axis that the antenna will target.
Range: 0.0 – 359.9 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.2.4.el_target <default | value>
This set/show Elevation target, a position on elevation axis that the antenna will target. 0 is the
position when the reflector is facing horizon, parallel to the ground. 90 is the position when the
reflector is perpendicular to the ground (high look).
Range: 0.0 – 90.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.2.5.cl_target <default | value>
This set/show Cross-Level target, a position on cross-level axis that the antenna will target.
Range: -30.0 – 30.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.2.6.linear_pol_target <default | value>
This set/show linear polarity angle target.
Range: -92.0 – 182.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.2.7.circular_pol_target <default | value>
This set/show circular polarity angle target.
Range: -92.0 – 182.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.2.8.tracking <default | value>
This set/show tracking mode state.
Value: on, off.
Default: on.
3.2.9.searching <default | value>
This set/show searching mode state.
Value: on, off.
Default: off.

3.3. satellite
Stores all antenna related settings of the system.
3.3.1.description <default | value>
This set/show satellite description. Support up to 32 characters.
Default: [Enter Description]
3.3.2.lon <default | value>
This set/show satellite longitude.
Range: [0.0 - 360.0] [E/W]
Default: 101.0 W
3.3.3.freq <default | value>
This set/show satellite frequency.
Range: 950.0 – 2150.0 (MHz)
Default: 1234.567
3.3.4.skew <default | value>
This set/show satellite skew.
Range: -90.0 – 90.0 (degree)

Document No
Page 47 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Default: 0.0
3.3.5.band <default | value>
This set/show satellite band.
Range: 1 - 4
Default: 2
3.3.6.tx_pol <default | value>
This set/show satellite transmit polarity. The possible values cover linear and circular polarization.
Value: H, V, L, R.
Default: H.
3.3.7.search_pattern <default | value>
This set/show search pattern that is used to search this satellite.
Value: spiral, inclined, sky_search.
Default: spiral.
3.3.8.reflector <default | value>
This set/show the antenna or reflector that is used for this satellite.
Value: primary_reflector, secondary_reflector.
Default: primary_reflector.
3.3.9.lnb <default | value>
This set/show the LNB that is used for this satellite.
Value: copol, xpol.
Default: xpol.
3.3.10. Skew_db_flag <default |value>
This command allows user to enable or disable polarization skew adjustments feature. By default,
this feature is disabled. Upon enabling this feature, SW will compare incoming satellite longitude
against internal look up table. Upon match and if input skew is 0, SW adjusts skew by table
specified value. SW also checks for satellite longitude against internal look up table when user adds
or configures satellite through web page. If user chooses 0.0 deg as polarization skew, then SW
selects skew from table.
Value: on, off.
Default: off.
3.3.11. Skew_database
This command prints satellite name, longitude and associated skew.
3.3.12. threshold
Stores the threshold settings. The threshold value serves as the main signal threshold to be used
for search and dishscan operation.
3.3.1.1 auto_mode <default | value>
This set/show the threshold mode used for this satellite.
Value: on, off
Default: on.
3.3.1.2 auto_offset <default | value>
This set/show the offset for auto threshold mode. Applicable only when threshold mode is auto.
Value: 0 - 300
Default: 100.
3.3.1.3 manual_value <default | value>
This set/show the manual threshold value. Applicable only when threshold mode is auto.
Value: 0 - 3000
Default: 100.

3.4. ship
Stores ship related settings.
3.4.1.name <default | value>
This set/show the ship name. Support up to 32 characters.
Default: [Enter Ship Name]
3.4.2.heading <default | value>
This set/show the ship heading.
Range: 0.0 – 360.0

Document No
Page 48 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Default: 0.0
3.4.3.lat <default | value>
This set/show the ship latitude.
Range: [0.0 - 90.0] [N/S]
Default: 0.0 N
3.4.4.lon <default | value>
This set/show the ship longitude.
Range: [0.0 - 360.0] [E/W]
Default: 0.0 E
3.4.5.sog <default | value>
This set/show the Speed over ground.
Range: 0.0 – 60.0
Default: 0.0
3.4.6.cog <default | value>
This set/show the Course over ground.
Range: 0.0 – 360.0
Default: 0.0

3.5. system
Stores system related settings, both reflector-specific and common settings.
3.5.1.primary_reflector, secondary_reflector
Stores reflector-specific settings.
3.5.1.1 auto_thresh
This set will start/initiate calculate Auto Theshold operation. This is an action command.
3.5.1.2 auto_trim
This set will start/initiate calculate Auto Trim operation. This is an action command.
3.5.1.3 trim
Stores trim setting property. Trim is used to apply offset to align the antenna.
3.5.1.3.1 el <default | value>
This set/show trim for elevation axis.
Value: -45.0 – 45.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.5.1.3.2 az <default | value>
This set/show trim for azimuth axis.
Value: -180.0 – 180.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.5.1.4 sensitivity
Stores sensitivity settings for elevation and azimuth axes. Sensitivity affects the signal threshold
used in dishscan operation. Higher the sensitivity lower the threshold will be.
3.5.1.4.1 el <default | value>
This set/show sensitivity for elevation axis.
Range: 10 – 100 (%)
Default: 50
3.5.1.4.2 az <default | value>
This set/show sensitivity for elevation axis.
Range: 10 – 100 (%)
Default: 50
3.5.1.5 polang
Stores polarity angle of the antenna feed.
3.5.1.5.1 drive <default | value>
This set/show polang drive type.
Value: auto, manual.
Default: auto
3.5.1.5.2 linear_offset <default | value>
This set/show linear polarity angle offset. Applicable only if the type is linear.

Document No
Page 49 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Range: -45.0 – 45.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.5.1.5.3 circular_offset <default | value>
This set/show circular polarity angle offset. Applicable only if the type is circular.
Range: -45.0 – 45.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.5.1.6 search
Stores search operation settings. Search operation is performed when the antenna is unable to
locate a satellite.
3.5.1.6.1 auto <default | value>
This set/show auto search mode. When auto search mode is on (recommended) the
antenna will do the search automatically.
Value: on, off.
Default: on
3.5.1.6.2 increment <default | value>
This set/show search increment value. The increment value determines how big the
antenna needs to increment relative to the previous search path/line. Smaller the increment
finer the antenna will scan the search area, and it will take longer to reach the search limit.
Range: 0.1 – 10.0 (degree)
Default: 1.0
3.5.1.6.3 limit <default | value>
This set/show search limit. The limit defines how big the search area. It is measured from
the start search position.
Range: 1.0 – 20.0 (degree)
Default: 20.0
3.5.1.6.4 delay <default | value>
This set/show search delay. This delay determines how long the antenna will wait before
initiating the next search when the current search failed. It also determines how long the
antenna waits before initiating search operation when the signal dropped below the
threshold (lost satellite indication).
Range: 0 – 200 (second)
Default: 30
3.5.1.6.5 incline_limit <default | value>
This set/show incline search limit. Applicable when the search pattern is inclined search.
The limit defines how big the search area is. It is measured from the start search position.
Range: 2.0 – 40.0 (degree)
Default: 16.0
3.5.1.7 dishscan
Stores dishscan operation settings. Dishscan enabled the antenna to keep pointing to a
position that give the strongest signal read. During dishscan operation the antenna makes
small, circular movement.
3.5.1.7.1 mode <default | value>
This set/show dishscan mode. Enable or disable dishscan.
Value: on, off.
Default: on.
3.5.1.7.2 az_drive <default | value>
This set/show azimuth axis dishscan multiplier value. 0 means no dishscan for azimuth
axis. Higher the number bigger the dishscan motion.
Range: 0 – 100
Default: 10
3.5.1.7.3 cl_drive <default | value>
This set/show cross-level axis dishscan multiplier value. 0 means no dishscan for cross-
level axis. Higher the number bigger the dishscan motion.
Range: 0 – 100
Default: 10

Document No
Page 50 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
3.5.1.7.4 el_drive <default | value>
This set/show elevation axis dishscan multiplier value. 0 means no dishscan for elevation
axis. Higher the number bigger the dishscan motion.
Range: 0 – 100
Default: 10
3.5.1.7.5 phase <default | value>
This set/show dishscan phase. Dishscan phase is used to control motor output due to
movement lagging due to inertia. Large pedestal needs bigger number.
Value: -45, 0, 45, 90
Default: 0
3.5.1.8 lnb
Stores LNB related setting.
3.5.1.8.1 lo
Stores Local Oscillator related setting.
3.5.1.8.1.1 band:1, band:2, band:3, band:4 <default | value>
This set/show local oscillator frequency of the LNB. The local oscillator frequency
should match the carrier used by the satellite.
Range: 1.0 – 200.0 (GHz)
Default:
band:1 = 10.000
band:2 = 10.700
band:3 = 11.300
band:4 = 9.750
3.5.1.8.1.2 enable:1, enable:2, enable:3, enable:4 <default | value>
This enables/disables the LNB band as being selectable. Example, if enabled:2 is off,
the user cannot select satellite band2.
Value: On, Off
Default: On

3.5.2.retarget
This set will start/initiate retarget operation. This is an action command.
3.5.3.homeflag_trim <default | value>
This set/show home-flag trim value. Determines the adjustment offset for home-flag sensor.
Range: -180.0 – 180.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.5.4.satref <default | value>
This set/show satellite reference mode. When Satellite Reference mode is on, the antenna will
ignore ship heading and it uses satellite signal to track.
Value: on, off.
Default: off.
3.5.5.blockage_zone
Stores all blockage-zone configurations.
3.5.5.1 1, 2, 3, 4
Stores blockage-zone configurations based on index.
3.5.5.1.1 description <default | value>
This set/show blockage-zone description. Support up to 32 characters.
Default: [Enter Description]
3.5.5.1.2 rel_start <default | value>
This set/show blockage-zone relative start. The relative start for this zone.
Range: 0.0 – 360.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.5.5.1.3 rel_end <default | value>
This set/show blockage-zone relative end. The relative end for this zone.
Range: 0.0 – 360.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0

Document No
Page 51 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
3.5.5.1.4 el <default | value>
This set/show blockage-zone elevation. Determines the end of elevation for this zone. The
start of elevation is always at elevation = 0.
Range: 0.0 – 90.0 (degree)
Default: 90.0
3.5.6.profile <default | value>
This set/show hardware profile ID of the system. Please find the hardware profile ID on the sticker
attached to the antenna.
Default: 0.
3.5.7.serial_number
Stores serial number. Show only.
3.5.8.auto_sat_load_search_fail <default | value>
This set/show auto satellite load after search failed. When the mode is on, the antenna will load
and go to the last known good satellite when the search operation failed.
Value: on, off.
Default: on.
3.5.9.auto_sat_load_reset <default | value>
This set/show auto satellite load after hot reset or power up. When the mode is on, the antenna will
load and go to the last known good satellite upon hot reset or power up.
Value: on, off.
Default: on.
3.5.10. step_res <default | value>
This set/show step resolution. Step resolution determines the step size for 1 move during search
operation.
Value: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05 (degree)
Default: 0.1
3.5.11. balance_mode <default | value>
This set/show balance mode. When in balance mode the antenna will not moving and allow the
technician to balance the antenna.
Value: on, off.
Default: off
3.5.12. ref_limit
Stores reference limit mode for all axes. When Reference Limit mode is on, the system will clip the
error to 3. This is mainly used in the land, where the abrupt erratic movement of the vehicle
introduces abrupt error.
3.5.12.1 az <default | value>
This set/show reference limit mode for azimuth axis.
Value: on, off.
Default: off.
3.5.12.2 cl <default | value>
This set/show reference limit mode for cross-level axis.
Value: on, off.
Default: off.
3.5.12.3 el <default | value>
This set/show reference limit mode for elevation axis.
Value: on, off.
Default: off.
3.5.13. motor_gain
Stores motor gain for all axes. The gain determines the motor torque. Antenna system with large
pedestal required higher gain than the one with smaller pedestal.
3.5.13.1 az <default | value>
This set/show azimuth motor gain.
Range: 0 - 500.
Default: 15 (model specific database will override).
3.5.13.2 cl <default | value>
This set/show cross-level motor gain.

Document No
Page 52 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Range: 0 - 500.
Default: 15 (model specific database will override).
3.5.13.3 el <default | value>
This set/show azimuth motor gain.
Range: 0 - 500.
Default: 15 (model specific database will override).
3.5.14. drive_orientation
Stores motor drive orientation all axes. This setting will determine how the motor installed or
mounted on the pedestal (model-specific). E.g. Clockwise move is forward move for Azimuth axis.
If the azimuth motor is installed in reverse position, a positive output to the motor will result in the
pedestal move counter clockwise on azimuth axis. In this case the drive orientation for azimuth
motor will be reverse.
3.5.14.1 az <default | value>
This set/show azimuth motor drive orientation.
Value: fwd, rev.
Default: fwd (model specific database will override).
3.5.14.2 cl <default | value>
This set/show cross-level motor drive orientation.
Value: fwd, rev.
Default: fwd (model specific database will override).
3.5.14.3 el <default | value>
This set/show elevation motor drive orientation.
Value: fwd, rev.
Default: fwd (model specific database will override).
3.5.15. slow_scan_mode <default | value>
This set/show slow scan mode. When the mode is on, the antenna will be in slow scan mode. This
is used for testing and diagnostic only.
Value: on, off.
Default: off.
3.5.16. slow_scan_vlim <default | value>
This set/show slow scan velocity limit. Similar to velocity limit, but this one applies when the
antenna is in slow scan mode.
Range: 0.1 – 9.9.
Default: 2.0.
3.5.17. num_reflector <default | value>
This set/show the number of reflectors the antenna has. When the number of reflector is one, only
the primary sections under system will be available.
Range: 1 – 2.
Default: 1.
3.5.18. receiver <default | value>
This set/show the receiver type.
Range: NBIF, SCPC, DVB, 70MHZ.
Default: SCPC.
3.5.19. tech_contact
This show technical contact information. Show only.
Value: Sea Tel Inc., a Cobham company
4030 Nelson Ave.
Concord, CA 94520
USA
E: [email protected]
T: +1 (925) 798-2399

3.5.20. date
This sets the system date. This will be overwritten by Internal GPS.
Range: Should be in format MM/DD/YYYY
Default: MM/DD/YYYY

Document No
Page 53 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification

3.5.21. time
This sets the system time. This will be overwritten by Internal GPS.
Range: Should be in format HH:MM:SS
3.5.22. calibrate_motion
This puts the antenna into a calibration routine to improve motion sensor readings.
Values: On, Off
Default: Off
3.5.23. lock
This enables ICU Lock functionality. For more details, please contact your local sales rep.

3.5.24. lock_resume_time
This sets the amount of time to disable ICU Lock functionality. For more details, please contact
your local sales rep.
3.5.25. tilt_mode
This decreases the settling time of the reference loops. Only to be used when testing the antenna
on land.
Values: on, off
Default: off
3.5.26. slew_limit_mode
This command limits the maximum velocity the antenna can move to the slow_scan_vlimit. This
applies to all axes (az, el, cl).
Values: on, off
Default: off

3.6. satellite_fav
3.6.1. new
Add a new favorite satellite. This is interactive mode command. First it will display the index of this
new favorite satellite, and then it will prompt to enter each satellite parameters one by one.
3.6.2. 0 - 499
Favorite satellite with index. It’s written with colon as separator. Example: satellite_fav:1
3.6.2.1. clear
This deletes the favorite satellite.
3.6.2.2. active
This sets the favorite satellite to be the active satellite. The antenna will target this satellite.

3.7. Status
3.7.1. ship
Show ship related settings.
3.7.1.1. heading
This show the ship heading.
Range: 0.0 – 360.0
Default: 0.0
3.7.1.2. lat
This show the ship latitude.
Range: 90.0 N – 90.0 S
Default: 0.0 N
3.7.1.3. lon
This show the ship longitude.
Range: [0.0 - 360.0] [E/W]
Default: 0.0 E
3.7.2.satellite
Stores all antenna related settings of the system.
3.7.2.1. lon
This show satellite longitude.

Document No
Page 54 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Range: 180.0 W – 180.0 E
Default: 0.0 E
3.7.2.2. freq
This show satellite frequency.
Range: 950.0 – 2150.0 (MHz)
Default: 1234.567
3.7.2.3. skew
This show satellite skew.
Range: -90.0 – 90.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.7.2.4. band
This show satellite band.
Range: 1 - 4
Default: 1
3.7.2.5. tx_pol
This show satellite transmit polarity.
Value: H, V, L, R.
Default: H.
3.7.2.6. search_pattern
This show search pattern that is used to search this satellite.
Value: spiral, inclined, sky_search.
Default: spiral.
3.7.2.7. reflector
This show the reflector that is used for this satellite.
Value: primary_reflector, secondary_reflector.
Default: primary_reflector.
3.7.2.8. lnb
This show the LNB that is used for this satellite.
Value: copol, xpol.
Default: xpol.
3.7.2.9. agc
This show the AGC value.
3.7.2.10. threshold
This show the actual threshold value being used by the antenna.
3.7.3.antenna
Stores all antenna related settings of the system.
3.7.3.1. az
This show current Azimuth position.
Range: 0.0 – 360.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.7.3.2. el
This show current Elevation position.
Range: 0.0 – 90.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.7.3.3. cl
This show current Cross-Level position.
Range: -30.0 – 30.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.7.3.4. relative
This show current Relative position.
Range: 0.0 – 360.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.7.3.5. linear_pol
This show current linear polarity angle.
Range: -92.0 – 182.0 (degree)

Document No
Page 55 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Default: 0.0
3.7.3.6. circular_pol
This show current circular polarity angle.
Range: -92.0 – 182.0 (degree)
Default: 0.0
3.7.3.7. agc
This show AGC value.
3.7.3.8. initializing
This show initializing mode state.
Value: on, off.
3.7.3.9. tracking
This show tracking mode state.
Value: on, off.
3.7.3.10. targeting
This show targeting mode state.
Value: on, off.
3.7.3.11. searching
This show searching mode state.
Value: on, off.
3.7.4.system
Stores system related settings.
3.7.4.1. modem_lock
This show modem lock status the system got from modem.
Value: on, off.
3.7.4.2. tx_mute
This show the cause of transmit mute. Transmit mute can happen because the antenna is in
the blockage zone, manually muted, or due to stability.
Value: manual, stability, block, and threshold.
3.7.4.3. search_delay_count
This show the search delay count left. It is a countdown.

3.8. Error
Clears/acknowledges or shows error(s).
3.8.1.messages
This set enables/disables the critical error messages on Console port. For “off”, it disables
temporarily (for 5 minutes).
Value: on, off.
3.8.2.clear
This set clears/acknowledges error.
Value: all, [error number].
3.8.3.all
This show displayed all errors

4 Save
Save without any parameter will perform system settings save.

4.1. dealer_config
This will create a dealer_config file. The dealer will later can restore this config.

5 Restore
Restore settings.

Document No
Page 56 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
5.1. dealer_config
This will restore settings from dealer_config file in the system.

5.2. factory
Reset all parameters back to factory default. Exception: profile ID and all settings under interface
(such as: IP configuration, serial baudrate, gyro, modem settings).

6 Test
Run automated tests within the system. Results are presented on the CLI and logged to the system log.

6.1. list
This command will list the commands needed to call all of the available tests that can be performed.

6.2. start
The command used to start a test. Example: List may indicate that “OOST” is a supported test. The
command “>TEST START OOST” is used to start the test. While the test is performed the user will be
presented with the results. The user can cancel the tests with CTL-C.

7 Pre-Condition
Pre-Condition of a setting or parameter has to be satisfied first before any changes can be applied to the
setting or parameter.

List of Pre-Conditions:

Parameter Operation Pre-Condition

Linear Polang Target Modify value Polang type is either “Linear” or “Linear-Circular”
Linear Polang Offset Modify value Polang type is either “Linear” or “Linear-Circular”
Circular Polang Target Modify value Polang type is either “Circular” or “Linear-Circular”
Circular Polang Offset Modify value Polang type is either “Circular” or “Linear-Circular”
TCP[0-3] Secure Mode Turn off /disabled TCP[x] mode is not OpenAMIP
Web Enable Turn off / disabled Secure Web is disabled
Secure Web Enable Turn on / enabled Web is enabled
External Modem Turn off / disabled Modem IO type should not be OpenAMIP

8 Post-Condition
Post-Condition of a setting or parameter will be executed after any changes applied to the setting or
parameter.

List of Post-Conditions:

Parameter Operation Post-Condition

TCP[0-3] Mode Set to OpenAMIP Disable secure mode of TCP[x] port

9 Login
There are three usernames with different level of authorization, and they are case-sensitive: Dealer
(default password: seatel3), SysAdmin (default password: seatel2), and User (default password:
seatel1).

Document No
Page 57 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification

10 Control Character

Character Name Hex Value Impact

Carriage Return 0x0D Command Terminator
Line Feed 0x0A Command Terminator
Space 0x20 Command and Argument Delimiter
Backspace 0x08 Delete one character on the left side of the cursor.
Escape 0x1B Abort Current Command
Up Arrow 0x1B 0x5B 0x41 Previous Command History
Down Arrow 0x1B 0x5B 0x42 Next Command History

11 Planned Features
- Auto Complete using Tab button.
- Machine to Machine IMA CLI Protocol

Document No
Page 58 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
12 Legacy M&C and Modem Commands
In order to ensure full backwards compatibility for existing modems and automated user interfaces,
the following commands from the DAC commands set (PN: 127060) have been implemented.

Commands Name Notes

esc References
H Relative AZ, Ships Heading, Speed over ground
Q Tuner Information
S Status
P Az/El/Cl Position Decimal
p Az/El/Cl Position Hex
u Read Polang, Aux/Ext AGC, Threshold
C Tracking (Step Track / DishScan) ON.
D Tracking (Step Track / DishScan) OFF.
W Write parameters to NV RAM. Use ‘\0087・'.
& Clear current Error Status
V Software Version
% Read Signal Strength
@ Report Lat/Lon Position, 0.1 deg
F↵ Target current Satellite (Find)
 gets raw coarse PCU GPS position
 gets raw fine PCU GPS position
?x↵ IVCs
?y↵ TCs
?@ ↵ Qualified GPS query, 1 min resolution
?V gets PCU Version Number
Aaaaa↵ Azimuth
Baaaa Set ships heading to ‘aaa.a’ degrees
Eaaaa↵ Elevation
Oxxxx Set PCU Digital output ports to ‘xxxx’.
Tnnnn↵ Satellite longitude
baaaa↵ Set ships heading to 'aaa.a' degrees without changing azimuth.
c0028↵ Set ADE Band Aux OFF(Xp) and Reflector B
c0029↵ Set ADE Band Aux ON(Cp) and Reflector B
c0030↵ Set active Reflector to Reflector A
c0031↵ Set active Reflector to Reflector B
c0032↵ Set DVB receiver tone OFF maps to c0048
c0033↵ Set DVB receiver tone ON maps to c0049
c0034↵ Set DVB receiver volt = 13 V maps to c0038
c0035↵ Set DVB receiver volt = 18 V maps to c0039
c0036↵ Set ADE Band Aux Off
c0037↵ Set ADE Band Aux On
c0038↵ Set ADE Band Volt = 13
c0039↵ Set ADE Band Volt = 18
c0040↵ Set ADE Band T, Band V, Band Aux (0,0,0)
c0041↵ Set ADE Band T, Band V, Band Aux (0,1,0)
c0042↵ Set ADE Band T, Band V, Band Aux (0,0,1)
c0043↵ Set ADE Band T, Band V, Band Aux (0,1,1)
c0044↵ Set ADE Band T, Band V, Band Aux (1,0,0)
c0045↵ Set ADE Band T, Band V, Band Aux (1,1,0)

Document No
Page 59 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
c0046↵ Set ADE Band T, Band V, Band Aux (1,0,1)
c0047↵ Set ADE Band T, Band V, Band Aux (1,1,1)
c0048↵ Set ADE Band Tone Off
c0049↵ Set ADE Band Tone On
cnnnn↵ Tuning freq (MHz) or DVB/RF mode Also, c00XX cmds
above
dnnnn↵ Baudrate or KHz
gnnn↵ Set 24v polang position to ‘nnn’.
tnnnn↵ Target NID
wV*** Read DVB Version
Jaaaa Move azimuth to ship relative ‘aaa.a’ degrees
nAnnn Set or Read PCU “N” parameter at index ‘A’ with value ‘nnn’
mbnnn Lat
mcnnn Lat
mdnnn Lat ns
m•nnn TDisp
m}nnn↵, m~nnn↵ Saved (Target) NID
mAnnn↵ A=138 SatSkew
mhnnn↵, minnn↵ Satellite Long
mjnnn↵ Satellite E/W
mQnnn↵ 24v Polang Offset
munnn↵ FEC Tone Volt
mWnnn↵ Polang Tx Type
mEnnn NA
mFnnn agc th
mGnnn El Step Size
mHnnn Az Step Size
mInnn Step Integral
mNnnn System Type
mOnnn Gyro Type
mPnnn Polang Type
mRnnn 24v Polang Scale
mSnnn Az Limit 1
mTnnn Az Limit 1
mUnnn AZ Limit 2
mVnnn AZ Limit 2
mWnnn Polang Tx Type
mYnnnmZnnn AZ Limit3
m[nnnm\nnn AZ Limit4
m]nnnm^nnn AZ Limit5
m_nnnm`nnn AZ Limit6
m~nnn Saved (Target) NID
munnn FEC Tone Volt
mJnnn Search Inc
mKnnn Search Limit
mLnnn Search Delay
mMnnn Scan rate
mAnnnmBnnn El Trim
mgnnnmhnnn Lon
minnn Lon ew
mCnnnmDnnn Az Trim
mhnnnminnn SAT

Document No
Page 60 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
mjnnn Sat ew
monnnmpnnn THRS
mqnnnmrnnn MHZ
msnnnmtnnn KHZ
mvnnn POL SEL
mznnn Modem Lock
m{nnnm|nnn Remote POL
m’nnnmƒnnn AZ Limit7 / Pol5 O/S
m†nnn EL Limit12
m‡nnn EL Limit34
mˆnnn EL Limit56
$mmmm↵ NMEA Latitude - Longitude / Heading input (GLL / HDT / HDM
format).
\nnnn↵ Send Utility command ‘\nnnn’ to ACU. See section 2.2 for
details(below)
\0066↵ Perform Auto Trim and start Auto Threshold calculations.
\0067↵ Complete Auto Threshold calculation
\0080↵ Start ACU FLASH Programming Mode
\0082↵ Reset ACU Parameters to factory defaults
\0087↵ Write ACU Parameters to Non Volatile storage
\0090 Reboot the ACU.
\0091 MXP Bootloader Version
\0092 ICU Bootloader version
^nnnn Send Utility command ‘^nnnn’ to PCU. See PCU command
summary
[V View CommIF version
[0nnnnn Set TCP/IP-0 port number (M&C Port 0, Sea Tel)
[1nnnnn Set TCP/IP-1 port number (M&C Port 1, Sea Tel)
[2nnnnn Set TCP/IP-2 port number (M&C Port 2, OpenAMIP).
[Gnnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Set Gateway address
[Innn.nnn.nnn.nnn Set IP address
[Nnnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Set Net mask
[Qnnn or [Q Set the port security mask
[S Start serial upload mode (for advanced users only)
[Tnnnnn Set HTTP port number (Webserver).
[Unnnnn Set UDP port number (SHD Software Upload)
[W Write Comm IF parameters to flash.
[Z Soft reboot the Comm IF module.
[?x View settings for ‘x’ where ‘x’ is any combination of:
- Null for CommIF settings (legacy default)
- A for Antenna Control Unit settings.
- P for Pedestal Control Unit settings
- M for Motor Control Unit firmware version
- > for Above Decks Modem firmware version
- < for Below Decks Modem firmware version
- R for Receiver firmware version
- C for CommIF settings
- Z for a parameter dump of all settings
[Xssssssss Set the access username to "ssssssss". Must be 4-8 characters
long
[Yssssssss Set the access password to "ssssssss". Must be 4-8 characters
long

Document No
Page 61 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
[Dxnnnnn or [Dx Set the local oscillator on band 'x' to nnnnn

13 Profile Number Table

The following table defines which system corresponds to which Profile numbers inside the profile
number database:

System Name Profile Number Software Version Implemented / Comment

4012-91 1 Initial
5012-91 2 1.00h
3612-91 3 1.00r
Reserved 4 Reserved
6012-33 5 1.01d
Reserved 6 Reserved
Reserved 7 Reserved
Reserved 8 Reserved
Reserved 9 Reserved
Reserved 10 Reserved
Reserved 11 Reserved
4009MK3-33 12 1.01v
4009MK3-91 13 1.01v
5012-44 14 1.01v
6012-44(16W) 15 1.01v
5012-33 16 1.01v
6012-71(25W) 17 1.02a
6012-48 18 1.02b
6012-44(50W) 19 1.02b
6012-71(40W) 20 1.02k
Reserved 21 1.03

Document No
Page 62 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
14 Error Table
The following table defines the total number of errors which may be reported by the IMA software:
Front Panel LED*
Error Code Description Type (Un)Latched**
Type State Color
1001 Stability Limit Error Error Solid Red Unlatched
1002 Az Reference Error (Encoder Read) Error Error Solid Red Latched
1003 AGC Below Noise Threshold Error Error Solid Red Unlatched
1004 Software Update Did not Load Properly Warning Error Solid Red Latched
1005 Comm Error w/ Motor Driver Error Error Solid Red Latched
1006 Motor Driver Fault Detected Error Error Solid Red Latched
1007 DishScan Disabled Error Error Solid Red Unlatched
1008 AZ Reference Error (Home Flag Read) Error Error Solid Red Latched
1009 Tilt Sensor Error Error Error Solid Red Unlatched
1010 Rate Sensor Error Error Error Solid Red Unlatched
1011 Over Speed Error Error Error Solid Red Latched
1012 POST Failure Debug Error Solid Red Latched
1013 OS Errors Warning Error Solid Red Unlatched
1014 Flash Failure Error Error Solid Red Latched
1015 MXP/ICU Link Error Warning Error Solid Red Unlatched
1016 Az Servo Limit Error Error Flashing Red Latched
1017 LV Servo Limit Error Error Flashing Red Latched
1018 CL Servo Limit Error Error Flashing Red Latched
1019 No GPS String Error Error Flashing Red Unlatched
1020 No Profile Set in PCU Error Error Flashing Red Latched
1021 NMEA HDD Heading Not Received for 10 Seconds Error Error Solid Red Latched
1022 NMEA HDG Heading Not Received for 10 Seconds Error Error Solid Red Latched
1023 NMEA HDM Heading Not Received for 10 Seconds Error Error Solid Red Latched
1024 NMEA HDT Heading Not Received for 10 Seconds Error Error Solid Red Latched
1025 GPS String Invalid Warning Error Flashing Yellow Unlatched
1026 Antenna Not Balanced Warning Error Flashing Red Unlatched
1027 Satellite Out of Range Info Target Solid Red Unlatched
1028 Temp In Radome Above/Below Operating Specs Warning Error Solid Yellow Unlatched
1029 Antenna about to enter a Programmed Block Zone Notice Tracking Flashing Yellow Unlatched
1030 Antenna Within a Programmed Block Zone Notice Tracking Solid Yellow Unlatched
1031 AGC Below Threshold Info Tracking Solid Yellow Unlatched
1032 Latest Parameters Not Saved Notice Error Flashing Yellow Unlatched
1033 Software Update In Progress Info Initializing Flashing Yellow Unlatched
1034 Block Zone Test/Simulation Info Tracking Flashing Yellow Unlatched
1035 MXP-ICU Sync Timeout Info Error Flashing Yellow Unlatched
1036 Parameter Sync Error Warning Error Flashing Red Latched
1037 Time Sync Error Warning Error Flashing Red Latched
1038 System Serial Number Mismatch Error Error Solid Yellow Unlatched
1039 System Serial Number Invalid Error Error Solid Yellow Unlatched
1040 INI Integrity Error Warning Error Flashing Red Latched
1041 NMEA HDD Received with Bad Checksum Notice Error Solid Yellow Latched
1042 NMEA HDG Received with Bad Checksum Notice Error Solid Yellow Latched
1043 NMEA HDM Received with Bad Checksum Notice Error Solid Yellow Latched
1044 NMEA HDT Received with Bad Checksum Notice Error Solid Yellow Latched
1045 Step by Step Gyro Took Invalid Step Size Warning Error Solid Yellow Latched
1046 Step by Step Gyro Not Connected Correctly Error Error Solid Red Latched
1047 Step by Step Gyro Requires Initial Heading Notice Error Solid Red Unlatched
1048 36:1 Synchro Gyro Requires Initial Heading Notice Error Solid Red Unlatched
1049 90:1 Synchro Gyro Requires Initial Heading Notice Error Solid Red Unlatched
1050 360:1 Synchro Gyro Requires Initial Heading Notice Error Solid Red Unlatched
Table continued on next page …

* Front Panel LEDs have the following priority, from highest to lowest: Solid Red, Flashing Red, Solid Yellow, Flashing Yellow, Solid Green,
Flashing Green.
** An unlatched error can automatically clear itself, if the system corrects the condition which caused the error. A latched error can only be
cleared explicitly by the user.

Document No
Page 63 of 64
135163 Rev J
 Document, IMA CLI Protocol Specification
Front Panel LED*
Error Code Description Type (Un)Latched**
Type State Color
1051 1:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly Connected Error Error Solid Red Latched
1052 36:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly Connected Error Error Solid Red Latched
1053 90:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly Connected Error Error Solid Red Latched
1054 360:1 Synchro Gyro Is Not Properly Connected Error Error Solid Red Latched
1055 Polang skew entry results in target out of range Error Error Flashing Red Latched
1056 Motor failed to reach Target Error Error Solid Red Latched
1057 Motion Platform Failed Initialization, Retrying Error Error Solid Red Unlatched
1058 No Home Flag Detected During Pol Initialization Error Error Solid Red Latched
1059 Multiple Home Flags Detected During Pol Init Error Error Solid Red Latched
1060 Detected Pol Home Flag Sensor Anomaly Warning Error Solid Yellow Latched
1061 Pol Home Flag Measured Too Wide Error Error Solid Red Unlatched
1062 Pol Home Flag Found In Wrong Location Error Error Solid Red Unlatched
1063 CM current out of range Error Error Solid Red Latched
1064 CM Voltage out of range Error Error Solid Red Latched
1065 BUC current out of range Error Error Solid Red Latched
1066 BUC Voltage out of range Error Error Solid Red Latched
1067 Profile changed. Please save and reboot Error Error Solid Red Latched
1068 No Pol Home Flag Detected, Using End Stop Home Warning Error Solid Yellow Latched
1069 Pol Home Flag In Wrong Location, Using End Stop Home Warning Error Solid Yellow Latched
1070 Pol Home Flag Failed, Using End Stop Home Warning Error Solid Yellow Latched
1071 Pol Motor Failed Error Error Solid Red Latched
1072 Pol Has Been Driven Outside Of Hardware Limit Error Error Solid Red Latched
1073 Pol Failed To Initialize With Encoder Error Error Solid Red Latched

Document No
Page 64 of 64
135163 Rev J